W hether it be for schools or professional orchestras ...Ward Music can supply everything that you need in the way of instruments... (rental or purchase). We have one of the world's greatest selections of sheet music. Ward Music also has a full range of instruments including Band Instruments, Percussion, electronics, Keyboards and String Instruments. WARD W' MUSIC • North Vancouver 1615 Lonsdale Ave. 986-0911 Vancouver 412 West Hastings St. 682-5288 • Ward Connection 520 Seymour St. 683-2345 • Langley #305 - 6339 200th St. 530-8704 • Victoria 911 Fort St. 385-3413 Internet Address: http://www.wardmusic.com C a p i l a n o COLLEGE NORTH VANCOUVER CAMPUS AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICES 2055 Purcell Way North Vancouver BC V7. 604 986 1911 TDD [FOR DEAF] 604 980 9921 FAX 604 984 4985 SECHELT C • 5627 Inlet Avenue PO Box 1609 Sechelt BC V0N3A0 604 885 9310 TOLL-FREE FROM VANCOUVER 604 987 : AX 604 88 SQUAMISH CAMPUS 1150 Carson Place PO Box 1538 Squamish BC V0N3G0 604 892 TOLL-FREE FR0I 604 986 3515 FAX 604 892 9274 www.capcollege.bc.ca ,J fA Table of Contents Frequently Called Numbers 2 Welcome to Capilano College 3 About Capilano College 4 How to Find Us - Directional Maps ..... 5 North Vancouver Campus Map 6 Mission and Values 7 Capilano College Board 8 Education Council 9 Administration 10 GENERAL INFORMATION Academic Schedule 13 Admission and Readmission 14 Registration 17 Fees 21 Financial Aid and Awards ... 23 Graduation/Diplomas and Certificates 25 Policies and Procedures 29 Services 36 Achievement Resource Centre 36 Advising 36 Athletics & Recreation 37 Bookstore 38 Capilano Review 38 Child Care 38 Counselling 38 Co-operative Education 39 Disability Support Services 39 Distance Education 40 Employment Centre for Students 40 First Nations Student Services 41 Food and Beverage Service 41 Health Services and First Aid 41 Library 41 Lost and Found 43 Parking 43 Registrar's Office 43 Security 43 Sexual Harassment Policy Advisor ... 43 Student Newspaper 43 Students' Union 44 Student Store - Cap Comer 44 INTERNATIONAL EDUCATION Information for International Students .. 47 International Programs 49 P R E P A R A T O R Y P R O G R A M S Adult Basic Education/Pre-College Level Courses 53 Achievement Resource Centre 54 Adult Basic Education 55 Adult Special Education/Alternative Career Training 60 English as a Second Language 62 Speech Assisted Reading and Writing (SARAW) 66 ACADEMIC STUDIES/UNIVERSITY T R A N S F E R P R O G R A M S General Information Anthropology Art Graphic Design and Illustration Studio Art Art Institute Textile Arts Instructional Skills in Arts and Crafts Art History Biology Chemistry Chinese Commerce Computing Science Criminology Economics Engineering English Environmental Science French Geography Geology German History Human Kinetics Japanese Jazz Studies Kinesiology Labour Studies Linguistics Mathematics and Statistics Music Transfer, Bachelor of Philosophy Physics Political Studies Psychology Sociology Spanish Thai Theatre Women's Studies C A R E E R / V O C A T I O N A L P R O G R A M S General Information Applied Business Technology Accounting Assistant Accounting Support Administrative Assistant Business Fundamentals Office Assistant ESL Legal Secretarial Medical Office Assistant Applied Information Technology (Infotec) 69 74 76 82 87 88 92 94 96 100 102 103 105 108 109 111 114 118 120 122 124 125 126 128 129 130 143 144 149 150 155 161 164 166 168 170 172 173 174 179 Business Administration 199 Bachelor's Degree (BBA) 201 Co-op Education Diploma 202 Advanced Diploma 203 Business Computing Co-op 204 Diploma Programs 205 Accelerated Business Administration Diploma Programs 206 Professional Accounting 208 Retail Marketing Co-op 208 Evening Certificate Programs 209 Local Government Administration Professional Certificate 210 International Business 211 Network Specialist Certificate 211 Commercial Animation 222 Communications 225 Early Childhood Care and Education 228 Fisheries Science 234 Health and Human Services 236 Resident Care Attendant 236 Personal Care Attendant Working for Persons with Disabilities 238 Home Support Attendant 241 Landscape Horticulture 243 Legal Assistant 245 Media Resources 250 Music Therapy, Bachelor of 254 Outdoor Recreation Management ... 258 Tourism Management 261 P O S T - G R A D U A T E P R O G R A M S Asia Pacific Management Co-operative Environmental Science S U M M E R S C H O O L P R O G R A M S COURSES 267 270 A N D CONTINUING EDUCATION AND C O N T R A C TS E R V I C E S INDEX 273 277 281 Changes to Curricula, Regulations, and Services 183 184 185 185 186 187 187 190 192 Capilano College reserves the right to make such changes in the College calendar as necessary, including the cancellation or adjustment of programs or courses, and changes in fee structure or other regulations or services, without liability for any resulting loss or damage. Although every effort is made to ensure accuracy at the time of printing, the statements in the calendar are not to beregardedas an irrevocable contract between the student and the College. 195 1 Frequently Called Numbers web sue: www.capcoiiege.bc.ca Achievement Resource Centre ( A R C ) 984-4945 Faculty Association 984-4948 Admissions A d u l t Basic Education 984-4913 Financial A i d 983-7537 984-4971 A d u l t Special Education 984-1759 First A i d First Nations Student Services A d v i s i n g Centre 984-4990 Health Programs 984-4960 984-1765 Health Services 984-4964 984-4959 Humanities 984-4957 984-1727 Impark International Student A d v i s o r International Student Counsellor 983-7539 A l u m n i Relations A p p l i e d Business Technology A p p l i e d Information Technology (Infotec) 984-1772 986-1911, ext.2137 329-5171 Art A s i a Pacific Management C o - o p 984-4911 984-4981 Athletics and Recreation Labour Studies Bookstore 984-4977 984-4972 983-7535 984-4954 Landscape Horticulture 984-4960 Business Administration 984-4960 983-7594 CANASEAN 984-1706 L e g a l Assistant Library - Circulation Capilano C o l l e g e Foundation 983-7566 Library - Reference 984-1769 Capilano R e v i e w 984-1712 M e d i a Resources 984-4940 Career Access Centre 984-1784 984-4944 984-4951 Cashiers' Office 984-1786 C h i l d Care Centre 984-4950 Music M u s i c Therapy Outdoor Recreation College Relations 984-4983 Peer Support Centre Commercial Animation 983-7516 President's Office Communications 983-7515 Pure & A p p l i e d Sciences 984-4955 Computer Services 984-4952 984-4913 Continuing Education 984-4901 Registration Resident Care Attendant Contract Services 984-4920 Sechelt Campus Counselling 984-1744 Courier Newspaper 984-1747 Social Sciences Sportsplex Control Centre C o m m u n i t y & Foundation Programs Squamish Campus Toll-free from Vancouver Science & M e d i a Technology 984-1748 Student Employment Centre Student & Instructional Services 984-1749 Student Records Students' U n i o n Duty Dean (evening cell number) 983-7526 970-8977 Early C h i l d h o o d Care & Education 984-4960 Eldercollege 984-4906 English as a Second Language ( E S L ) Environmental Science 987-1535 Toll-free from Vancouver 984-4923 984-4924 Disability Support Services 984-4960 1-604-885-9310 984-4949 Business, H u m a n Services & International Programs 986-1911, ext. 2229 984-4987 Security Sexual Harrassment A d v i s o r - Janet K e e Deans' Offices Arts 986-1911, ext. 2307 984-4960 984-4971 986-191 l . e x t . 2453 Television L a b Theatre Department Tourism Management V i c e President, A c a d e m i c Affairs 984-1763 983-7547 984-4953 984-1737 1-604-892-5322 986-3515 984-4965 984-4973 984-4969 986-1911, ext. 2171 984-1766 V i s u a l and Performing Arts 984-4960 984-1738 984-4911 Protection of Privacy and Access to Information Capilano C o l l e g e gathers and maintains information used for the purposes o f admission, registration, alumni and other fundamental activities related to being a member o f the Capilano C o l l e g e community and attending a public postsecondary institution i n the Province o f British C o l u m b i a . In signing an application for admission, all applicants are advised that both the information they provide and any other information placed into the student record w i l l be protected and used i n compliance with the B . C . Freedom o f Information and Privacy Protection A c t (1992). 1997-98 Capilano C o l l e g e Calendar Published by: College Relations Department Design and Layout: M e d i a Production Services C o v e r Design: Roberta Fedoruk 2 W e l c o m e to Capilano College W e l c o m e to Capilano College. A s a community college, we are committed to student success and the process of lifelong learning. O u r faculty, staff and administration are dedicated to providing a high-quality education w h i c h w i l l enable our students to succeed, whether it be in the workplace or in further education. The College offers a broad range o f programs and courses to meet the needs o f the communities we serve. Whether enrolled in academic, career/vocational, preparatory, post-baccalaureate, associate degree or applied degree programs, or attending continuing education courses, students have the opportunity to learn from highly-qualified instructors in a personal and interactive setting. The College also offers a number o f student support services and facilities, such as the Sportsplex, the B i r c h Theatre and the C h i l d Care Centre, that enhance the learning experience. Through our reputation for excellence and innovation in education, students come to Capilano College from throughout the L o w e r M a i n l a n d , across Canada, and around the w o r l d . W e are proud o f the fact that graduates o f the College have h i g h success rates, both i n undertaking further study and in finding quality employment. Whether you are embarking on a program o f academic study, acquiring new skills for career advancement, returning to complete an education, or taking courses for general interest, we k n o w that Capilano College can meet your needs. Paddi Arthur D r . Greg L e e Capilano College Board C h a i r President A b o u t Capilano College In 1968 Capilano C o l l e g e opened its doors to just over 700 goals. After upgrading or refreshing their skills, students students. Since then, it has grown steadily to become one may seek employment or move into a career program or o f B r i t i s h C o l u m b i a ' s most outstanding colleges, with academic studies. enrolment nearing 6,000 students. The C o l l e g e is a dynamic source o f leadership within the International Education communities its serves. T h e main campus is i n N o r t h Capilano College is an active participant i n the interna- Vancouver, nestled in a natural setting on the slopes o f the tional community and maintains strong links with a North Shore. Regional campuses in Squamish and Sechelt number o f post-secondary institutions i n A s i a Pacific provide important opportunities to students i n the c o m m u - countries. The C o l l e g e ' s multicultural character is nities o f H o w e Sound and the Sunshine Coast. A p p r o x i - enhanced by international students from more than 40 mately 40 per cent o f student enrolment comes from the countries worldwide. rest o f the L o w e r M a i n l a n d , British C o l u m b i a , Canada and around the world. Capilano College has earned a reputation for teaching excellence and innovation. Faculty members are experts i n their fields and bring extensive knowledge to the class- Continuing Education E a c h year, thousands o f students enrol i n non-credit courses, seminars, workshops and lectures for personal and professional development, or just pure enjoyment. room. In support o f a wide range o f educational goals, the College offers a quality learning experience in a variety o f program areas: Contract Services Capilano College specializes i n flexible, customized, Academic Studies/University Transfer short-term training, adapted for the classroom, conference room or computer lab, and offered on-campus or at the Capilano College provides a solid academic foundation that worksite. can lead to many educational and career opportunities. The College's A c a d e m i c Studies courses are transferable to universities i n British C o l u m b i a and elsewhere in Canada. Capilano College offers several options, including: The C o l l e g e ' s commitment to equity o f access is supported by a range o f programs and services. A few examples include: • Associate degrees in Arts or Science • Bachelor degrees, offered i n partnership with the B . C . Program — focuses on literacy upgrading for students Open University: Bachelor o f M u s i c in Jazz Studies, who have physical disabilities and/or limited or no Bachelor o f M u s i c i n M u s i c Therapy, Bachelor o f speech, through the use o f computers with adaptive, voice Administrative Studies, and Bachelor o f T o u r i s m synthesized technology. Management • Post-baccalaureate programs in Environmental Science and A s i a Pacific Management. Speech Assisted Reading and W r i t i n g ( S A R A W ) Childcare Transition Program — assists parents who wish to continue their studies at the post-secondary level, with benefits such as placement to the C o l l e g e ' s recentlyexpanded child care facility; assistance w i t h educational Career/Vocational Programs planning, admission, assessment and registration; Capilano C o l l e g e offers a variety o f employment-oriented mentoring program and support groups; and access to programs leading to certificates, diplomas and degrees. financial aid, counselling and career planning services. They are constantly reviewed to ensure that students are First Nations Student Services — developed i n coopera- taught the latest techniques and skills required in today's tion with First Nations communities in the C o l l e g e ' s workplace. A d v i s o r y committees, composed o f business region, First Nations programs and services seek to and community leaders and employers, advise on the improve the participation and success rates o f students content o f all career and vocational programs. who are making the transition to post-secondary education. Preparatory Courses The C o l l e g e offers a full range o f preparatory courses to assist students i n meeting their educational and career 4 On the road to your future... (CGA You've come a long way. Maybe even farther than you think. If you are looking for a career that offers mobility and the freedom to choose, get started in the right direction. CGA is BC's largest professional accounting organization. Our internationally respected computer integrated training program gives you the flexibility to "earn while you learn" and delivers the skills you need to succeed in Financial Management, Management Accounting or Public Practice. You may already be well on your way to a CGA certification. Applicants who have satisfactorily completed equivalent courses are eligible for exemptions. Get the credit you deserve. For a free evalution or more information call the Certified General Accountants Association of British Columbia at (604) 732-1211 or 1-800-565-1211 ore-mail admissions@cga-bc.org C G A Certified General Accountants Association of British Columbia 1555 West 8th Avenue, Vancouver, British Columbia V6J 1T5 Telephone 604-732-1211 or 1-800-565-1211 Fax 604-732-1252 Visit our Website: http://www.cga-bc.org IS VISITS $15 INTRODUCTORY STUDENT OFFER INCLUDES: HExclusive Women's Only Facilities 0 C o e d Facilities 0Childminding 1t%*7 ° ^ ^ Handling Course LI ^ with this ad. (Regular Price H8J a w y i w t r o 0 B o d y composition test o p e •Introductory Courses • W o m e n ' s Seminars •Birthday Parties •Technique & Fitness Programs The Edge Climbing Centre 0 F i t n e s s evaluation ^Equipment orientation 0lnitial program design [3Initial nutritional consultation 0Program monitoring Experience our unmatched facilities for only $15. Let our friendly qualified staff show you how we can make fitness enjoyable. Call or stop by today to find out more about exercising with us! This package regularly valued at $ 100 Serious (someres^gonsapply) Fitness since 1965 ^—^M M m Q Wm m m clubs Worldwide 2 - 1485 Welch St. North Vancouver #1 In Fitness Worldwide 984-9080 125 - 949 West 3rd Street, North Vancouver 1 Block South of Capilano Mall 986-9177 10 OFF YOUR NEXT BIG STAR JEAN PURCHASE PRESENT THIS COUPON AT ANY MAGNET LOCATION AND RECEIVE $10 OFF THE PURCHASE OF A REGULAR PRICED BIG STAR JEAN. • • • • EXPIRES DEC 31,1997 NOT VALID WITH ANY OTHER COUPON OR PROMOTION GOOD FOR ONE PURCHASE ONLY COUPON MUST BE REDEEMED AT TIME OF PURCHASE PACIFIC CENTRE RICHMOND CENTRE METROTOWN CENTRE GUILDFORD TOWN CTR. H o w To Find Us S O V AU NT CH OUVT EO R 5 North Vancouver C a l l 983-7526 for a wheelchair access map. Campus duthie fo®ok& MAIN STORE • 9 1 9 R O B S O N S T R E E T (684-4496) 4444 W. lOTH AVENUE • ( 2 2 4 - 7 0 1 2 ) LIBRARY SQUARE • 3 4 5 R O B S O N S T R E E T (602-0610) Exams Scheduled? Going on Vacation? Time to visit Travel COTS! C 4255 ARBUTUS STREET ' ( 7 3 8 - 1 8 3 3 ) 2239 W. 4TH AVENUE • (732-5344) D U T H I E S @ YVR • I N T E R N A T I O N A L TERMINAL BUILDING international . Student v identity C a r d s Ddipasses j f *jmpt : f 0r / 8 a ng f 3S '°/"S/j £ S (303-3073) MANHATTAN BOOKS 6 MAGAZINES 1089 ROBSON STREET (681-9074) TECHNICAL & PROFESSIONAL BOOKS 1 7 0 1 W. 3 R D A V E N U E (732-1448) DUTHIES @ THE VANCOUVER FILM SCHOOL 394 Student Work A b r o a d Programme T r a v e l I n s u r a n c e ft W. H A S T I N G S ( 6 8 7 - 2 7 2 5 ) VANCOUVER BOOKSELLERS SINCE 1 9 5 7 MAIL ORDER • 4 4 4 4 W . 1 0 T H A V E N U E , VANCOUVER, TOLL-FREE: BC V6R 2H9 ( 2 2 4 - 7 0 1 2 ) 1-800/663-1174 VIRTUAL BOOKSTORE HTTP://WWW.LITERRSCAPE.COM/ E-MAIL • INF0DESK@LITERASCAPE.COM (ENCORE C O M P U T E R S Visit the Student Travel Experts; 567 Seymour Street -681-9136 (one block up from the seabus, across from A&B) TRAVELCUTS CHELLOW The British Bistro New and U s e d M a c and P C Systems Components Service Upgrades Repairs E n c o r e C o m p u t e r s 119 Lonsdale Avenue, North Vancouver, B.C. V7M 2E7 Tel. 990-0547 Fax. 990-0548 Specials Tuesdays - Half Price Pastas Wednesdays - $5.99 8 oz steak dinner Thursdays - $5.99 Fish and chips *4 LIVE JAZZ (call ahead for details) CHELLOW The British Bistro 999 Marine Drive North Van 9S3-3463 MACEY'SI^I Zippy Print Quality On Time - Done Right •Brochures Canada's Business Printer. % # •Newsletters •Business Stationery ZIPPY PRINT •H,gh Speed Copies •Colour Copies T e , 9 8 8 . 4 1 7 •Multi-part F A X 9 8 8 . 6 5 29 T E A M 4 COLOUR PROCESS •TYPESETTING • DESIGN U m u ; „ h cn. SPORTS ® f l w r ™ ; Forms a i . ... ._ on 1 2 0 W e s t N o r t h . Esplanade V a n c Q u v e r 1 B A S E B A L L N Vancouver's Art Book Store F R E E Browsing Books and Art C o m e and s e e our wide ranging selection of books on: Drawing, Painting, Pottery, Illustration, Design, Topography, Crafts, Photography, Architecture, Interior Design, F a s h i o n , Reference, Languages. Travel M a p s of Everywhere (well...almost). Hundreds of Coffee Table Art Books, S I YOUR SOCCEROF SPECIALISTS T F O R M S 980-1480 PARK & TILFORD & great bargains on our sales table. Oscar's Books and Art 1533 West Broadway, Vancouver 731-0553 hummel hummel ..bPO/J/ECA B A L L -bPOX/BCK (qualified) post-secondary institutions in the Lower Mainland. Simply pick up the Fast Trax strip at your student union office and attach it to your student ID card. You may be charged a small fee by your university or college for the Fast Trax strip. When combined with your One Zone monthly FareCard, the Fast Trax strip allows you to travel all day, any day throughout BC Transit's system (one, two or three zones) for the price of One Zone fare travel Remember to always carry your One Zone monthly FareCard and your student ID card, with attached Fast Trax strip. Information at Your Fingertips • Departure times are listed on the stops at the College bus loop. Fast Trax M a k e s the G r a d e • View BC Transit's internet web site at www.bctransit.com Using Fast Trax on BC Transit's buses, SkyTrain and SeaBus • Free timetables are available at the student union and makes travel to and from Capilano College fast, easy and affordable. Best of all there's no parking to consider. Many campus bound routes are also wheelchair lift-equipped. And each time you use public transit, you are helping to preserve our environment. many other campus locations. • Call Talking Yellow Pages at 299-9000, local 2233 for pre-recorded transit information. • Call BC Transit Customer Information: 521-0400 or West Vancouver 985-7777 Fast Trax - The Smart Choice The Fast Trax strip is available to full-time students attending Vancouver Regional B C T r a n s i t s Transit System Mission and Values A t C a p i l a n o College our mission is to enable student Employees success in current and continuing studies, in a chosen career, i n the pursuit o f knowledge, and in contributing effectively as responsible citizens in a rapidly changing and diverse global community. The College values everyone involved in the teaching and learning process. It regards its employees as its greatest assets in providing T o accomplish its mission, Capilano College strives to excellent programming and services. The College produce a dynamic and secure learning environment recognizes that faculty, staff and administrators serve as committed to excellence i n education and to equity o f active models o f citizenship, scholarship and profession- access. It seeks to offer, either selectively within its o w n alism, and expects that they w i l l work together in a resources, or more broadly i n partnership with others, responsive, equitable, and collegial manner. T h e College high-quality and flexible preparatory, academic, career strives to establish and maintain exemplary teaching, and vocational programs that provide opportunities for a learning, and working conditions. wide range o f students. It does so in the context o f the f o l l o w i n g values: Accountability Students The College is accountable fiscally, educationally, and Student needs are the first concern o f Capilano College. ensure that students receive an education suited to their The C o l l e g e values the diverse backgrounds and cultures needs; to explaining its policies and achievements to the socially. It commits itself to allocating resources fairly to from w h i c h our students come and strives to provide public; and to exercising its influence within the c o m m u - curricula and support services that w i l l sustain all stu- nity i n a thoughtful and ethical way. T o this end it dents' personal growth and cultural enrichment. It establishes policies and procedures that reflect the best believes that students should leave the College with the standards o f financial management, graduate assessment, knowledge, skills and attitudes that w i l l enable them to personnel practice, and environmental stewardship. become independent learners and thinkers; with enhanced skills in literacy, numeracy, and critical thinking, and Innovation with a positive attitude toward learning. The College expects and values the commitment o f students to the The College encourages rigorous, continuing analysis and learning process and to the maintenance o f secure and evaluation o f its o w n effectiveness. It supports those supportive learning conditions. wishing to develop instructional methods and curricula to Community emerging needs o f students and the community. It improve the teaching o f present programs and to meet the supports the use of appropriate partnerships and technoloThe C o l l e g e is an important resource in the educational, economic and cultural life o f all the communities it serves. gies to meet these needs. The College accepts the reality of constant change and the need for planning and flexibility to meet the demands o f change. It recognizes the unique needs o f its Regional Centres, and o f the diverse populations served by its programs. The C o l l e g e offers its expertise and leadership by actively helping all its communities anticipate future problems and opportunities, and actively seeking partnerships to meet those needs which are identified. The C o l l e g e serves as a model for its community by providing equality o f access to its services, its facilities and its employment opportunities. 7 Capilano College Board The Board of the College, established in conformity with the College and Institute A c t , consists o f 16 members, including nine appointed by the Minister o f Education, S k i l l s and Training, four elected from the College community, one ex-officio member drawn from the administrative group at the College, the president of Capilano College, and the president of the College's Education C o u n c i l . These members serve as trustees o f the College. The Board is responsible for governing the College, and in that capacity determines the policy by w h i c h the College operates and reviews the performance of the College and its component parts. Traditionally, the B o a r d meets monthly to fulfill its statutory responsibilities and to conduct its general business. Paddi Arthur, C h a i r Barbara H o w a r d Naomi Yamamoto, Vice-Chair Greg Lee Richard Band Carol McCandless M a r k Battersby Severin M o r i n Ross Bliss Jenn Pearce B o b Camfield S y l v i a Sioufi Laraine H a m i l t o n Ernie Tjensvold D a l Hothi Sam W e l l e r Front Row (L to R) Sylvia Sioufi, Barbara Howard, Carol McCandless, Paddi Arthur, Greg Lee Back Row (L to R) Sam Weller, Ross Bliss, Laraine Hamilton, Richard Band, Naomi Yamamoto, Severin Morin, Jenn Pearce, Mark Battersby, Bob Camfield 8 Education Council Front Row (L to R) Greg Lee, Ben Williams, Colleen Rudy, Education Council president Bob Camfield, Bill Gibson, Shay Bell Back Row (L to R) Joyce Gee, Lars Andstein, Annette Lorek, James Cooke, Gloria Hole, John Parrett, Diane Blaney, Paul Mier, John Waters, Dileep Athaide, Barry Williamson Education C o u n c i l , established in conformity with the College and Institute A c t , is the advisory body to the College Board on major institution-wide issues and educational policy. V o t i n g members on Education C o u n c i l include 10 faculty members (elected by faculty), four students (elected by students), two support staff (elected by support staff), and four education administrators appointed by the College president. One Year Term, Students L . Andstein S. B e l l G . Hole Two Year Terms, Support Staff L . Denley B . W i l l i a m s o n , D i p l . of T e c h . Two Year Terms, Faculty Education Administrators D . J . Athaide, B . S c , (Hons.) ( M c G i l l ) , M . S c . ( U B C ) , B . C . J . C o o k e , B . A . (Hons.) ( U B C ) , M . A . (Toronto) Prof. Teach. Cert. J . V . B i z z o c c h i , B . A . (Michigan), Teaching Cert. (Sec.) ( M i c h i g a n ) , V i d e o Production (Banff Centre) D . B l a n e y , I.D. ( U B C ) , C . P . S . R . G . C a m f i e l d , B . S c . (Hons.) (Monash), P h . D . ( U B C ) J . Gee, B . M u s . , M . A . ( U B C ) B . G i b s o n , B . A . , ( U . o f Sask), D i p . E d . ( U . of Sask), P h . D (UBC) J. Parrett, B . A . ( U . o f Western Ont.) J . Waters, B . A . (Hons.) ( U . o f M a n . ) , M . A . ( U . of Man.) Ex-Officio Members S.R. Gilbert, B . A . ( U V i c ) , M . A . ( U B C ) Richard B a n d , B . A . ( U B C ) , M . A . ( S F U ) R . L o n g w o r t h , B . S c , M . E d . (Concordia, St. Michaels), Sue Gardner, B . A . ( M c G i l l ) , B . P h i l . (Oxford), P h . D I.S.P. A . Lorek, B . A . , M . L . S . (McGill) P . M i e r , B . A . ( S F U ) , M . A . (Toronto) C . R u d y , B . A . ( U B C ) , B . C . Prof. Teach. Cert. ( U B C ) (Concordia) Greg L e e , B . S c . (Hons.) ( U B C ) , M . S c . ( U B C ) , P h . D (UBC) Carol M c Q u a r r i e BcnWilliams 9 Administration President Vice President, Finance, and Bursar; Board Secretariat Greg F . Lee, B . S c , M . S c , Ph.D. M a r i e Jessup, C . G . A . Vice-President, Academic Affairs William Gibson, B . A . , Ph.D., Dip. E d Director, Financial Services M a r k Vernon, B . A . , C A . Comptroller Alan Ng, B . S c , C.G.A. Dean of Arts Manager, Financial Reporting/Workload Systems John Waters, B . A . (Hons.), M . A . Greg Gates, C . M . A . Dean of Business, Human Services, and International Programs John Potts, B . A . , M . P . A . Dean of Community and Foundation Programs Stephanie Forsyth, B . A . , M . E d . Dean of Science and Media Technology Executive Director, College Relations Randi Duke, B . A . , M . A . Director, Development, Capilano College Foundation L a n a Robinson, B . A . Carol McCandless, B . A . , M . A . Dean of Student & Instructional Services Executive Director, Employee Relations James E . C o o k e , B . A . , M . A . Valerie Cochran, L L . B . Manager, Personnel Services C i n d y Rogers Registrar John Parrett, B . A . Associate Registrar Executive Director, Planning & Institutional Research Barb Robertson, B . E d . A l a n P . D . Smith, B . A . , M . A . Manager, Athletics and Recreation Joseph Iacobellis, B . P . E . , M . P . E . College Librarian Frieda W i e b e , B . A . (Hons.), M . L . S . , M . B . A . Director, Continuing Education and Contract Services L y n n Jest, M . E d . 10 Director, Facilities Ian Robertson Director of Supply & Services D a v i d Brewer, R . C . P . P . Manager, Computer Support Services Steve Gallagher, B . A . SPORTING EQUIPMENT Group Golf Lessons For Beginners and Experienced Players S •80 covered practice stations •Innovative target design •Floodlit for evening practice • Fully stocked CPGA Golf Shop •Short game practice area •Custom Club building and repair The Golf Shop at Seymour Creek Golf Centre 315 Seymour Blvd. North Vancouver 987-8630 T U D E N T D I S C O U N T 2 for 1 Show Your Cap College Student I.D. and You & Your Guest Will Receive One Free Menu Item When A Second Item of Equal or Greater Value Is Purchased THURSDAYS SHOW- CAP COLLEGE NIGHT Food and Drink Specials Door Prizes THE Q U E E N S C R O S S NEIGHBOURHOOD PUB 2989 Lonsdale St. 980-7715 ALL Subscribe today and get all the great daily features The Province has to offer 6 days a week • M O N D A Y : XXL SPORTS All the scores and stories behind the stats. • T U E S D A Y : FASHION Trendy tc traditional. Styles for all seasons. • W E D N E S D A Y : FOOD From gourmet to food on the go. • T H U R S D A Y : THE LIST in TAKE A BREAK! plus MONEY and XXL SPORTS • F R I D A Y : WHAT'S O N SUBSCRIBE NOW! All the movie listings and entertainment Call the Province guide in TAKE A BREAK! plus gear up for our CARS AND TRUCKS section. at 736-2281 • S U N D A Y : TAKE A BREAK! Call now before this All week plus Sundays. Explore Lifestyle, oner becomes just Travel and Recreation, plus in SPORTS another lesson in The Puck Drop Here and Planet Sports. Economics! Oiler expires September 30,1997. Otter CC97. Oder valid only to students with valid ID cards AND c L o t m * * CPS! North Shore S»ori Swap 229 Lower Mountain North Van 98*~2271 SPORTING EQUIPMENT ICBC Auto Plan INCREASE YOUR EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITIES Travel & Home Owner Insurance Mon-Wed 9-6 Thur & Fri 9-9 Sat 10-5 Sun 12-5 http://mastermall.com/fawcett 929-3494 106 - 1 1 6 9 Mt Seymour Road, North Van Dual Certification C o u r s e s (WCB & St. John Ambulance certificates) Emergency/ Standard First Aid Safety Oriented (WCB Level 1 Equivalent) WCB Level II, III, & III Recodification St. J o h n Ambulance Certification Emergency Child Care (Ministry of Health approved) Emergency Adult Residential Care (Vancouver Health Dept. approved) Chevron Highland Classes available days, evenings and weekends. Seven locations in the Lower Mainland, one ^within walking distance of Lonsdale Quay Chevron First in First Ai "for Supreme service that's always fast and friendly." St. J o h n Ambulance 3150 Edgemont Blvd. 987-8020 For More Info & Class Schedules Call 321-2651 A Career For You I n The R.C.M.P. GUARANTEED AUTOMOTIVE REPAIRS R . C . M . P . R e c r u i t i n g Information Basic Qualifications OUR 38th YEAR • SAME O Regular Member / Constable 1. Speak, read & write either of Canada's "official" languages, either French or English. 2. Be over the age of 19 years. Application may be made at the age of 18 years. 3. Be a Canadian citizen. 4. Possess a valid Canadian Drivers License in good standing. 5. Be a graduate of Grade 12 or its equivalency. Some post secondary education is preferred. 6. Successfully pass medical and dental exams 7. Vision standards: Uncorrected-20/60,20/60,20/40,20/100 Correctable to 20/20, 20/30 Good colour vision 8. Be able to obtain a security clearance. 9. Successfully complete the physical abilities requirement evaluation. 10. Have the desire and ability to perform the duties of a general duty police officer. 11. Base salary for a top level Constable attainable after four years service is $50,508 00 For More Information call (604) 264-2580 Not just a police force! For registration information please call Erick Paul at (604) 264-2564 Royal Canadian Mounted Police Gendarmerie royale du Canada /~y Lifetime on Collision, Brake Shoes, Pads & Mufflers 1 Full Year on Parts & Labor & Most Repairs. Canada J M COLLISION & MECHANICAL /AYLORMOTIV » SERVICE LTD. 174-176 Pemberon Avenue, North Vancouver Tel. 985-7455 I . C . B . C Fax. 985-7450 - - B . C . A . A . A . R . A A P P R O V E D WE REALLY CA HELPLINE TALKING T ELL Y E L L O W Accredited Collision Repairs P A G E S 299-9000 7455 TRUSTWORTHY SERVICE Ask About Student Discounts 4 1997 - 1998 Academic 1997 FALL TERM (973) Schedule D E C E M B E R 31 and JANUARY 1: New Year's Break. College closed. J U L Y 14 - A U G U S T 8: Registration for selected Career/Vocational programs. 1998 SPRING TERM (981) AUGUST 4: B.C. Day. College closed. JANUARY 5-9: A c a d e m i c Studies (university transfer) AUGUST 11 - 22: A c a d e m i c Studies (university and Business Administration In-person Registration. transfer) and Business Administration In-person Registra- (This date under review and subject to change.) tion. (This date under review and subject to change). JANUARY 12: Classes commence. Note: Career/ S E P T E M B E R 1: Labour Day. College closed. S E P T E M B E R 2: Classes commence. Note: Career/ V o c a t i o n a l courses commence on various days. Consult Vocational courses commence on various days from January 5 through January 12. Consult your program instructor for further information. your program coordinator for further information. JANUARY 12 - 23: A d d / D r o p period. S E P T E M B E R 2 - 15: A d d / D r o p period. JANUARY 23: Last day to add or drop a course, change S E P T E M B E R 15: Last day to add or drop a course, change sections, change from audit to credit or from credit to audit. Students w i l l be invoiced for full fees after this d a t e . S E P T E M B E R 16 - O C T O B E R 14: Withdrawal Period. D u r i n g this period, withdrawals w i l l be noted on the permanent student record as a " W " . O C T O B E R 3: Last day to submit application for program evaluation for 1997 Fall Graduation. O C T O B E R 13: Thanksgiving Day. College closed. sections, change from credit to audit or change from audit to credit. Students w i l l be invoiced for full fees after this date. JANUARY 24 TO FEBRUARY 20: W i t h d r a w a l Period. D u r i n g this period, withdrawals w i l l be noted on the permanent student record as a " W " . FEBRUARY 20: Last day to withdraw from a course and final date for payment of tuition fee balance for 1998 Spring T e r m . FEBRUARY 26 - 27: Reading Break. No classes. O C T O B E R 14: Last day to withdraw from a course and M A R C H 18: Spring Student A w a r d s N i g h t final date for payment o f tuition fee balance for 1997 Fall APRIL 10 - 13: Easter Break. College closed. Term. APRIL 20 - May 1: Examination Period, 1998 Spring N O V E M B E R 11: Remembrance Day. College closed. Term. NOVEMBER 13: Fall Convocation. N O V E M B E R 17 - D E C E M B E R 5: Early registration 1998 SUMMER TERM (982) for 1998 Spring T e r m for Career/Vocational programs, "open" Career courses, and A r t , M u s i c , A s i a Pacific, Engineering, Environmental Science, and Commerce M A R C H 2 - M A Y 8: Registration for 1998 Summer Term. (Subject to change.) (Coordinator signature required.) MAY 11: First day of Summer T e r m , Session I, 1998. N O V E M B E R 26: F a l l Student A w a r d s Night MAY 18: Victoria Day. College closed. D E C E M B E R 1: Last day o f classes. Note: Some MAY 21: Spring Convocation. courses/programs continue on until the last day o f the examination period. Consult your program instructor for J U L Y 1: Canada Day. College closed. further information. J U L Y 2: First day o f Summer T e r m , Session II, 1998. D E C E M B E R 2 - 12: E x a m i n a t i o n Period, 1997 F a l l J U L Y 13 - AUGUST 7: Registration for selected Term. Career/Vocational programs for Fall 1998. D E C E M B E R 24 - 26: Christmas Break. College AUGUST 3: B.C. Day. College closed. closed. General Information — Academic Schedule Admission and Readmission APPLICATION PROCEDURE • • Applications for A d m i s s i o n are available i n area Secondary students with superior academic records may secondary schools; through Admissions, Office the apply for limited admission which w i l l a l l o w enrolment Registrar; or at the reception area at all campuses. in one or two university transfer courses while still Submit all applications to: attending secondary school. Admissions, Office o f the Registrar 2055 Purcell W a y North Vancouver, B . C . , V 7 J 3 H 5 Canada • • Concurrent Admission The application must be co-signed by the applicant's parent or legal guardian and must be accompanied by a letter o f recommendation from the school Principal or designate, and an official copy o f the secondary school A $20 non-refundable fee must accompany all applica- academic record. Enquiries should be directed to A d m i s - tions ($100 for international applicants). sions, Office o f the Registrar. Include official transcripts o f the academic grade record from all secondary and post-secondary institutions attended. Mature Student and Discretionary Admission Status Applicants who lack the m i n i m u m admission requirement ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS POST- SECONDARY PROGRAMS Academic Studies/University Transfer Programs • may apply as mature students provided they have not attended secondary school for at least two years. Written requests for admission as a mature student w i l l be considered by the A d m i s s i o n s Office. Applicants should provide details o f other qualifications or experiences and British C o l u m b i a Secondary School Graduation an academic transcript o f education completed. A n (Grade 12) or equivalent with E n g l i s h 12 and three interview may be required. academic Grade 12 courses selected from: B i o l o g y 12 German 12 Calculus 12 M a n d a r i n 12 Chemistry 12 Mathematics 12 Computer Science 12 Physics 12 Economics 12 Probability & Statistics 12 E n g l i s h Literature 12 Spanish 12 French 12 Survey M a t h Francais-Langue 12 Western C i v i l i z a t i o n 12 Geography 12 W r i t i n g 12 Geometry 12 OR, • A d u l t Basic Education ( A B E ) Provincial D i p l o m a or, • General Education D i p l o m a ( G E D ) or, • Mature Student Status Additional admission requirements are noted in the International Credentials Applicants who possess the following equivalencies w i l l be considered for admission to C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . United K i n g d o m , Pass in 5 G C E subjects with 2 at the H o n g K o n g , and A d v a n c e d level. Equivalent standing Commonwealth in University o f H o n g K o n g Countries A d v a n c e d L e v e l Examinations. China Senior M i d d l e School D i p l o m a Japan Grade 12 D i p l o m a from K o t o G a k k o Korea H i g h School Grade 12 D i p l o m a Taiwan H i g h School Grade 12 D i p l o m a Iran 12 or better in the June written exam United States H i g h School Grade 12 D i p l o m a individual program descriptions i n this publication. Career/Vocational Programs Applicants with credentials from other countries are • considered according to international standards. British C o l u m b i a secondary school graduation (grade 12) or equivalent. Additional admission requirements are noted i n the individual program descriptions i n this publication. General Information 14 —Admission ENGLISH LANGUAGE REQUIREMENTS APPLICATION DATES A l l students must have a level o f E n g l i s h sufficient to Generally, applications for admission to the College may write assignments, understand class lectures, and take be submitted at any time. However, early application part i n class discussions. deadlines have been established for specific programs If E n g l i s h is not your first language, or you have received your education i n another language, you are required to and terms. Acceptance o f applications after the deadlines may not be possible. submit, along with your application, one o f the followSemester Early Application Deadline Date Acceptance Mailed Princeton, N e w Jersey U S A 03540) Fall M a r c h 31 July 15 September 30 December 15 E L A (English Language Assessment Test, contact: Spring Summer M a r c h 31 as processed ing: • T O E F L Score (Test o f E n g l i s h as a Foreign L a n guage, contact: Educational Testing Service, B o x 898, OR • Vancouver C o m m u n i t y College, K i n g E d w a r d C a m pus, 1155 East Broadway.) OR • International Applicants Applicants from other countries who require a student E S L Placement Test (Contact: E S L Department, authorization (student visa), must submit their applica- Capilano College, (604) 986-1911, ext. 2971 for tions two months prior to the commencement of the term testing appointment.) in order to be considered for admission to that term. Note: If y o u have written the I E L T S this w i l l also be acceptable. READMISSION TO THE COLLEGE The C o l l e g e reserves the right to also give consideration to the f o l l o w i n g : A l l applicants who have interrupted their studies, or who • H o w l o n g you have lived i n an English-speaking have completed their program and wish to be readmitted country must complete a new Application for A d m i s s i o n . • The number o f years o f secondary school or postsecondary education (e.g. college or university) and i f E n g l i s h was the language o f instruction • A secondary school or post-secondary degree or diploma, the grades received and the level o f E n g l i s h required. TRANSFER CREDIT A l l public B . C . colleges accept each other's credit upon transfer i f applicable to a program at the admitting college and i f there is suitable equivalency. If the C o l l e g e then decides you need additional instruction i n E n g l i s h you w i l l be asked to take an E n g l i s h examination suitable to the program area in which you wish to enrol. Specific testing requirements for admission: University Transfer/Academic Studies, Career or Vocational Programs • TOEFL 560 • ELA 145 • IELTS 6.5 overall, and no one score less than 6 Transfer credit may be granted for courses completed at other post-secondary institutions. Students seeking transfer credit must complete the "Request for Transfer Credit" form, attach official transcripts, i f not already submitted, or note that transcripts w i l l be sent from another institution, and submit to the Office Manager, Records and Registration. F o r courses completed at out-of-province institutions, detailed course outlines must also be submitted. A l l approved transfer credit is noted on the permanent student record, while the credit awarded does not affect English as a Second Language (ESL) Program the Grade Point Average, the credit w i l l be included in • TOEFL the total number o f credits completed and may be used to • E S L Placement Test 400 OR • complete certificate or diploma requirements i f applicable. ELA 55-144 General Information — Admission 15 Limit of Transfer Credits For diplomas and certificates, the final 50 percent of the Credit required must be completed while in attendance at Capilano College. certificates or diplomas at Capilano C o l l e g e . Students should be aware that other colleges and universities may not accept these courses for transfer credit. INTERNATIONAL BACCALAUREATE COURSES For students who are no longer residents o f the College region and lack one or two courses for certificate or Applicants who have completed the International Bacca- diploma completion, credit may be granted for an laureate D i p l o m a w i l l receive credit or waivers for some additional one or two courses from another institution. higher level subjects passed as follows: This arrangement must be made i n consultation with the Registrar i n advance o f enrolment at another institution. For the Associate Degrees, at least 30 o f the 60 semester credits must be completed at Capilano College within Anthropology—students presenting a mark o f 4 w i l l receive credit for A N T H 121 (3). Biology—students presenting mark o f 6 w i l l receive credit for B I O L 110 (3) and B I O L 111 (3). five years preceding the awarding o f the degree. Chemistry—students presenting mark o f 4 or better w i l l ADVANCED PLACEMENT receive credit for C h e m 108 (4.5) and C h e m 109 (4.5). Computing Science—students presenting mark o f 4 or Applicants who have passed an A d v a n c e d Placement better i n Computing Science A w i l l receive credit for Examination administered by the College Entrance C O M P 102 (3) or a prerequisite waiver for C O M P 110. Examination Board, with a mark o f 4 or better w i l l Students presenting a mark o f 4 or better on C o m p u t i n g receive credit as follows: Science A B w i l l receive credit for C O M P 110 (4) or a B i o l o g y — t h o s e completing A P B i o l o g y w i l l receive prerequisite waiver for C O M P 111. credit for B I O L 110 (3) and B I O L 111 (3). Economics—students presenting mark o f 4 or better i n Chemistry—those completing A P Chemistry w i l l receive Economics w i l l receive credit for E c o n o m i c s unassigned credit for C H E M 108 (4.5) and C H E M 109 (4.5). (6). Computer Science—those completing A P Computer English—students presenting mark o f 6 or better for Science A w i l l receive credit for C O M P 102 (3) or a E n g l i s h Language A w i l l receive credit for E N G L 103 prerequisite waiver for C O M P 110. Those completing (3). Students presenting a mark o f 6 or better for E n g l i s h Computer Science A B w i l l receive credit for C O M P 110 Language B w i l l receive credit for E N G L 100 (3). In or a prerequisite waiver for C O M P 111. addition, the E D T requirement is waived for those with a Economics—those completing A P Economics w i l l receive credit for E c o n o m i c s unassigned (6). English—those completing E n g l i s h Language w i l l receive credit for E N G L 100 (3). Those completing E n g l i s h Literature w i l l receive credit for E N G L 103 (3). In addition, the E D T requirement w i l l be waived. Mathematics—those completing Calculus A B w i l l receive credit for M A T H 110 (4.5). Those completing Calculus B C w i l l receive credit for M A T H 110 (4.5) and M A T H 111 (4.5) (under review). mark o f 6 or better on E n g l i s h Language A or B . Mathematics—students presenting mark o f 6 or better for Higher L e v e l Mathematics w i l l receive credit for M A T H 110 (4.5). Students presenting a mark o f 6 or better for Further Mathematics w i l l receive credit for M A T H 110 (4.5) and M A T H 111 (4.5) (under review). Physics—students presenting a mark o f 6 or better w i l l receive credit for P H Y S 110 (3) and P H Y S 111 (3). ADULT BASIC EDUCATION PROGRAMS Physics—those completing Physics B w i l l receive credit Applicants to the A d u l t Basic Education Program should for P H Y S 110 (3) and P H Y S 111 (3). Those completing be at least 18 years old and have been out o f the public Physics C (Mechanics) w i l l receive credit for P H Y S 114 school system for at least one year. Exceptions w i l l be (3). Those completing Physics C (Electricity) w i l l receive made only with departmental approval. credit for P H Y S 115(3). Note: Transfer credit granted for International Baccalaureate and A d v a n c e d Placement courses w i l l apply to W h i l e there is no educational prerequisite for entering the A B E program, placement in courses is based upon an assessment o f writing and mathematical skills. General Information —Admission 16 Restaurant Coupons Clip this page and Save 2 For 1 T E E N White Spot Park and Tilf Buy one Teen Burger at the regular price and enjoy a second Teen Burger F R E E . with the purchase of any entree with a minimum value of $5.95 FREE 1/2 Caesar Salad O n l y at M a i n Street A & W LEGENDARY PLACE LEGENDARY TASTE 1520 M a i n Street, N.Van 2 CAN DINE FOR Enjoy 2 Teen Burgers, 2 regular Fries and 2 regular A & W Root Beer all for the great price of $7.99 Only at Main Street A&W 1520 Main Street, N.Van We invite you and your guest to enjoy one complimentary menu item when a second menu item of equal or greater value is purchased. Valid until h- BUY1 - G E T O N E Buy one token for our driving range & get one token free 2**1 Seymour Creek Golf Centre 987-8630 C o m e in and enjoy with $5 off the p u r c h a s e of a large pizza. ©Bosronffeza One couoon Der table Not valid with other promotions. I- The Food Court at Capilano College welcomes you back for 199^98. Present this coupon a n d receive R O Y A L B O W L I N G 2 f o r 1 Break Away from Study with Boston Pizza North Vancouver To be used anytime before Dec 31, 1997. Not valid with other promotions PARK Dec 31,1997 ONE M E D I U M DRIP COFFEE L A N E S FREE BUY 2 GAMES, 3rd GAME FREE CAPILANO COLLEGE FOOD 1080 South Park Royal, West Van. 925-0005 COURT men. PARK B O W L I N G Buy a footlong sub and a medium drink and get a s e c o n d sub for only $ R O Y A L .99 L A N E S BUY 2 GAMES, 3rd GAME FREE 1080[South Park Royal West Van. 925 0005 VALID ONLY AT SUBWAY PARK & TILFORD h h 2forT Latte or C a p p u c i n o or Mocha $2°-°- $ $2 off your order of 2 for 1 Pizza "«w..««*V north M 1 6 West Esplanade, North Vancouver 987-3785 i_ OQQ 2 980-7111 113 West 1st St., N.Van $OQ0 2 1 Restaurant Coupons Clip fhis page and Save White Spot Park and Tilford 2 For 1 T E E N This offer is valid until June 30, 1997. One coupon per customer please. Not valid with any other promotional offer. No cash value. One coupon per person per visit. Not valid with any other offer. No cash value. Valid at White Spot Park and Tilford only after 4 pm, Sunday - Thursday only. From Feb. 1, 1997 to Dec. 31, 1997. Only at Main Street A & W 1100 - 3 3 3 Brooksbank A v e 988-4199 1520 Main Street, N.Van 2 CAN DINE Jake & Elwoods features... The largest, clearest Big Screen & 5 Satellites for all the sports action! 22 monitors - including ' personal booth t.v.s', There's lots of great date stuff. Pool tables, NTN Interactive games, darts, bowling, pinball, foosball, bubble hockey, crib, backgammon and more.. PLUS GREAT FOOD Valid until June 30. 1997. One coupon per customer please. Not valid with any other promotional o f f e r . No cash value. Mon-Sat Only at Main Street A&W 11-1am Sun 1 2 - 1 2 1080 Park Royal South (by the cinemas) 922-8399 FOR $7^ 1520 Main Street, N.Van h- _ Boston V a l i d Pizza O n l y A t Boston Pizza North Van 1078 Marine Drive North Vancouver Expires December 31,1997 CAPILANO C O L L E G E F O O D Hours of Operation: • 315 Seymour Blvd North Vancouver 987-8630 C O U R T This coupon entitles the bearer to one free medium size drip coffee. Limit of one coupon per person please. No cash surrender value. Offer expires December 31,1997 Mon - Thurs 8 a.m. - 8:30 p.m. The Golf Shop at Seymour Creek Friday 8 a.m 3 p.m. P A R K R O Y A L * Valid Sunday - Thursday when lanes available. Not valid with other discounts or other promotional offers. One coupon per person per day. Offer expires December 31, 1997 Park Royal Bowling Lanes 925-0005 h- Buy 2 deli-style breakfast sandwiches for $2°° with the purchase of any beverage VALID ONLY AT SUBWAY PARK & TILFORD h- Usoa\ ^Pizza Free Delivery (5 km) 980-7111 S e e our menu in the N.Van Yellow P a g e s Coupon expires Dec 3 0 , 1 9 9 7 . One coupon per order please P A R K R O Y A L * Valid Sunday - Thursday when lanes available. Not valid with other discounts or other promotional offers. One coupon per person per day. Offer expires December 31, 1997 Park Royal Bowling Lanes 925-0005 The Fine Print Buy one specialty coffee (Latte, Cappucino or Mocha) and get the second free. Limit of one coupon per customer. No cash value. Offer expires Feb. 28,1998 ».rth 116 West Esplanade, North Vancouver 987-3785 Registration RIGHT TO REGISTER 4 or higher in in A . P . E n g l i s h Literature, or 6 or higher in L B . E n g l i s h A or B A student who has not maintained satisfactory standing in a program i n any term may be denied permission to " B - " or better in an English transfer course from another college or university register i n that program i n a subsequent term. Individual a degree from an English-speaking university, or programs may require a G P A higher than that stated i n a pass on U B C ' s E C T (English Competency Test) the Probation P o l i c y to continue enrolment. Math Placement Test N o t e : Successful completion o f E S L 099 does not qualify a student to directly enter a regular E n g l i s h 010 or English 100. Students w i s h i n g to register for a Pre-calculus (Math 103, 105 or 107) or a Calculus I (Math 108 or 110) course must write a M P T i f either o f the following conditions apply. • Their mathematics prerequisite course was completed prior to 1994. • T h e i r mathematics prerequisite course was completed at Students who wish to enrol in any University Transfer English course must submit the results of the Language Proficiency Index Test (LPI), o r must sit the Capilano College English Diagnostic Test (EDT) prior to registration. E D T schedules will be printed in the timetable. a B . C . secondary school (or equivalent) with a final letter grade standing below: " C - " or " P " i n M a t h 12 for admission to M a t h 103 ADD, DROP, WITHDRAWAL AND REFUND POLICY AND PROCEDURES " C " i n M a t h 12 for admission to M a t h 105 or 107 " B " i n M a t h 12 for admission to M a t h 108 " A " i n M a t h 12, or at least a " B " i n both M a t h 12 and Before Classes Commence Course Change Procedure Calculus 12, for admission to M a t h 110. 1. Students may drop or add courses or change sections T o write the Precalculus M P T (for M a t h 103, 105 or 107) following their registration appointment and until the first students must have at least a " C " in M a t h 11 or at least a day o f classes. A course change form must be submitted " P " i n M a t h 12. to the Office o f the Registrar. T o write the Calculus M P T (for M a t h 108 or 110) 2. Faculty signatures are not required before classes commence. students must have at least a " C " in M a t h 12. Students who have completed Capilano College prerequisite courses within the present or past calendar year are not required to write the placement test i f their final grade standing meets the direct entry requirements for the course as listed in the College calendar. Note: Y o u may register for both the E D T and M P T , through the Records and Registration office, North Vancouver campus. A writing fee is charged for both exams. English Placement Test 3. Drops w i l l not be printed on the official transcript, but w i l l be maintained i n the permanent student record for accounting and statistical purposes. Complete W i t h d r a w a l Procedure For complete withdrawal before classes commence, a course change form listing a l l the courses to be dropped must be submitted to the Office o f the Registrar. A copy of the course change form listing the complete withdrawal w i l l be forwarded to the career or vocational department by the Office o f the Registrar. The E D T (or the L P I ) is required before registration in Fee for S e r v i c e any E n g l i s h course at the College, unless the student has A transaction fee w i l l not be charged before classes achieved one o f the following which allows exemption: commence. " A " i n E n g l i s h 12, or C h a r g e s a n d Refunds " A " i n Literature 12, or 1. If a course is dropped and another course is added at " A " in B E N G 42, or the same time and on the same course change form, the 4 or higher i n A . P . E n g l i s h Composition, or deposit w i l l be applied to the course added, provided the number o f credits remains the same. General Information — Registration 17 2. If the number o f credits falls below the original credit, International Fees) w i l l not be refunded . be made, and a grade of Fail (F) will be noted on the permanent student record. Requests for late adds or late drops will not be granted simply because the student was unaware of, or neglected to comply with, the College policies and procedures. 3. If a course add increases the number o f credit hours, Fee for Service number o f credits o f enrolment, the difference o f the deposit fee for the course dropped w i l l be retained and the m i n i m u m deposit o f $16 per credit hour ($90 per the student w i l l be responsible for the m i n i m u m payment of the deposit at $16 per credit ($90 per credit, Interna- $10 w i l l be charged for each Course Change form submitted. tional Fees) at the time o f the addition. Refund Policy 4. The m i n i m u m payment o f the $16 per credit deposit is non-refundable. However, i f the deposit is paid before 1. If a course is dropped and another course is added at June 30 and/or November 30 for F a l l and Spring Terms the same time and on the same form, the deposit previ- respectively, students may have the deposit refunded by ously paid for the course dropped w i l l be applied to the withdrawing from the College on or before June 30 or course added, provided the number o f credits o f enrol- November 30. Those w h o pay this deposit after June 30 ment remains the same. or November 30 are not eligible for any refund o f 2. If the number of credits falls below the original (or deposit. highest) number of credits of enrolment, and a change Add/Drop Period of $16 per credit hour w i l l be retained for the credits lowering the number o f credits is requested, the deposit dropped and w i l l not be refunded. Add/Drop Period: 1st through the 10th instructional day of each term. 3. If course adds or changes result in an increase in the number o f credit hours, the student is responsible for Add/Drop Procedure payment o f the additional charges (either in full, or by 1. Students wishing to add or drop a course(s), change m i n i m u m deposit per credit) at the time o f the addition or from credit to audit, or change from audit to credit, must change. complete a Course Change form, and take the form to the instructor for approval and signature. Withdrawal Period 2. W i t h the instructor's signature appearing on the Course Change form, students must then submit the form to the Office o f the Registrar. Forms w i l l be accepted until 6:30 p.m. on the 10th instructional day o f the term. Withdrawal period: 11th through the 30th instructional day of each term (third week through the end of the sixth week). Withdrawal Procedure: 3. Instructors may indicate a 48 hour deadline for submission o f the Course Change form, in order to allow other students to gain entry to the class during this period. 1. During this period, with the signature o f the appropriate instructor(s) on the Course Change form, students may withdraw from a course(s). 4. Course drops w i l l not be noted on the student transcript during this period; however, a record for drops w i l l 2. The Course Change form must be submitted to the be maintained on the permanent student record for Office of the Registrar no later than 6:30 p m . o f the 30th accounting and statistical purposes. instructional day (sixth week) o f each term. 5. I f a course change is requested by the instructor or 3. A withdrawal ( " W " ) w i l l be noted on the permanent student to a lower or less difficult level o f instruction in a student record. subject, the course change form must bear the signatures 4. Complete Withdrawal: If a complete withdrawal is of the instructor o f each course. requested, the request w i l l be granted i f the Course 6. If a complete withdrawal is requested, the request w i l l Change form bears the signature o f each faculty member be granted with the signature o f the instructor of each instructing each course o f withdrawal. course. - The Course Change form listing the request for c o m plete withdrawal must be submitted to the Office o f the Registrar no later than the end o f the 30th instructional day (end o f the sixth week) o f term. Note: Failure to attend classes does not constitute a course drop. Students who do not formally drop a course(s) will be assessed tuition fees, refunds will not General Information — Registration 18 - A withdrawal ( " W " ) w i l l be noted on the official 2. The permanent student record w i l l be annotated as transcript and the permanent student record. withdrawal for extenuating circumstances ( " W E " ) . Fee for Service 3. Withdrawal with extenuating circumstances w i l l not A $10 transaction fee w i l l be charged for each change be granted for lack o f academic performance on the part form submitted. Refund Procedure 1. Once the withdrawal period begins, refunds are no of the student. Fee f o r S e r v i c e A $10 transaction fee w i l l be assessed i f a " W E " is longer made for course or complete withdrawals. granted. 2. Students w h o withdraw from courses or completely Refund Policy withdraw during this period are responsible for the full Refunds w i l l not be made for " W E " withdrawal. payment o f the tuition and any other fees incurred. After the Withdrawal Period After the Eleventh Week of Classes 1. If the student believes an exceptional circumstance After the 30th instructional day (or after the end of the sixth week) of the term, and until the end of the term, course withdrawals or complete withdrawals exists which prevents h i m or her from completing the are not permitted except for the reasons listed below: grade. course during the regular time frame, the student may petition the course instructor for an incomplete ("I") 1. the student record is incorrect as the result o f an error 2. A n incomplete ("I") grade may be given where, i n the by the C o l l e g e ; judgement o f the instructor, the student should have 2. the student transfers to a lower level of the same course by instructor request. In this instance, only the final course o f enrolment w i l l show on the official reasonable expectation o f passing the course, but has not completed the required work. 3. A n incomplete is assigned only when the instructor transcript. A record o f the change w i l l also be main- and student have arranged for the w o r k to be completed tained on the permanent student record; by a specified date w h i c h is noted on the grade sheet 3. the student must withdraw for circumstances beyond his/her control. Official documentation is required to substantiate a l l claims o f such circumstances and should class list. If the student does not complete the work by the specified date, the instructor w i l l automatically assign a predetermined grade reflecting the w o r k not completed. be submitted on the "Request for Course W i t h d r a w a l " 4 I f the student completes the work by the specified form available from the Secretary in the Office o f the time, the instructor w i l l assign the final grade. Registar. This form may be supplemented with official documentation such as a typed letter from the physician, an official copy o f an accident report, or official docu- 5. If this incomplete procedure cannot be applied i n the opinion o f the instructor, the instructor is directed to contact the Registrar directly for resolution o f the issue. mentation o f a family emergency, death certificate, and so forth. Note: A completed Course Change form is required for Process for Summer Term (1), (2) or (3) listed above. 1. Same process as above, with the following restrictions: Procedure a) F o r Summer courses seven or eight weeks i n length: 1. Students w h o wish to apply for special status under i i i . i) The A d d / D r o p Refund Period is five instructional above must submit the "Request for Course W i t h d r a w a l " form or a letter, and the Course Change form, to the Registrar, explaining the problem and including official days. ii) The Withdrawal Period ends on the 10th instructional day. documentation. If, i n the opinion o f the Registrar, the request does not fall under (3) above, or the documenta- 2. F o r Summer courses 12 to 15 weeks in length: tion is insufficient to support the request, the request w i l l a) The regular Add/Drop/Refund/Withdrawal policies be denied. I f the request is granted, the Registrar w i l l apply. inform the student's instructors o f the W E status. General Information — Registration 19 COURSE OVERLOAD 1. Registration i n more than five academic courses or more than the full requirements specified for a career program constitutes a course overload. 2. Students may choose to register for a course overload (up to a total o f 21 credits) as long as they have discussed their need or wish for an overload with a counsellor and the Course Change form bears the counsellor's signature. Science students, however, are automatically allowed to register for more than 16 credits, as long as the total credits do not exceed 21 credits and does not arise from registration i n more than five courses. 3. Students may not register for a course overload until after the Registration period. COURSE CHALLENGE Registered students may request a course challenge whereby an examination for achievement may be awarded for a very specific and limited selection o f courses at the institution. Certain courses may not be challenged. Students interested in this procedure should contact a counsellor for further information. The regular tuition fee must be paid for a challenged course. A course challenged successfully w i l l be recorded on the permanent student record. N o t e : Credit for courses challenged successfully w i l l apply to certificates or diplomas at Capilano College. Students should be aware that other colleges and universities may not grant credit or transfer credit for credit received by course challenge. MEDICAL INSURANCE 1. Students are not covered by Workers' Compensation while attending Capilano College. Students are responsible for acquiring their o w n M e d i c a l Services Plan ( M S P ) and accident insurance coverage. 2. International Students: V i s a students may be covered under B . C . ' s M e d i c a l Services Plan after 90 days o f residence; however students must check with B . C . M S P directly upon arrival for current eligibility criteria. Students should arrange for coverage effective between the date o f arrival and the commencement o f the B . C . M S P coverage. Further information is available through the International Student Admissions Officer. General Information — Registration 20 WEEKENDS • •••>rms MONDAYS FOR STUDENTS ONLY 2 \ &—"—— Subscribe to T h e Globe and Mail n o w a n d save Thursday College Night No C o v e r Live Bands and Dance Music 1025 Marine Drive JOHN HENRYMA™ BICYCLES AND SNOWBOARDS 20% OFF % All Parts with a 985-4181 | Park & Tilford LE Main Street The Avalon ° / t0 Burgers and Pizza Half-Price Get Canada's best daily information package delivered Monday through Saturdav-plus-at no extra cost. Report on Business Magazine monthly. Your choice of 13-week term/26-week term/or 52-week term. Brooksbank Ave. John Henry The Bicycle Man TUNE UP(Pe) #100 - 400 Brooksbank Ave North Vancouver, B.C. To subscribe and save 35%, call now: 604-687-4435. CANADA'S NATIONAL 9 8 6 - 5 5 3 4 NEWSPAPER ^ T H E GLOBE AND M A S Internet: http:/lwww.vancouverbusiness.com/johnhenrybikes The Little C o m p u t e r Store PCs and Macs Knowledgeable Professional Staff Fully Equipped Service Center Complete customization service Free delivery and installation Serving the North Shore since '84 FINANCE PACKAGES A VAILABLE FOR STUDENTS APPLE ACER COMPAQ DTK IBM NEC NEC MOTOROLA TOSHIBA PANASONIC AND MANY MORE WESTCOAST 120 - 930 West 1 st Street North Vancouver, B.C. Just South of Capilano Mall please... COMPUTERS AUTO I II. I l l fl.'Jl'J MARINE ELECTRIC ITD. UAP/NAPA 1340 986-7680 PARTS The Real Auto Parts People Pemberton Avenue North Vancouver, B . C . Phone: 987-5255 L j B E S T W E S T E R N Capliano Inn Suites GREAT FEATURES SoUv\cxk North Vancouver 5 Lonsdale Ave. & Non-smoking rooms and suites, In-room coffee, Restaurant, Outdoor heated pool, Sauna, FREE parking. GREAT LOCATION North Van's Pest Souvlaki Since 1985 Open for lunch and dinner 7 days a week Reservations 9 8 5 - 9 8 5 3 1-800-644-4CAP (4227) or 987-8185 1634 Capilano Road, North Vancouver, B.C. The Modern Motel ApPIcSQN For Business or Pleasure INSURANCE INC See us for insurance on Cars, Homes, Boats, Business, Travel 3010 Lonsdale Street (at Queens) North Vancouver, B.C. V 7 N 3 J 5 983-3323 email:addison@mindlink.bc.ca Enter prise L H Grouse Mountain, Capilano Suspension Bridge, Stanley Park, Downtown and shopping all within 2 miles rent-a-car GREAT STUDENT RATES Free Pick Up...Cal I Canvon Court Motel Feature • Non-smoking rooms • Free in-room coffee • Heated Pool • Free Super Channel •Kitchenettes •Laundromat •In-room phones ©Free parking CANYON COURT MOTEL Tel. 988-3181 1748 Capilano Road, Worth Vancouver, B.C. V7P 3B4 Welcome Pack Cap College Students The Food Court at Cap College serves snacks and meals 5 days a week. mm 988-5878 751 Marine Drive, North Vancouver, B . C . V 7 M 1H4 Try our Food and Beverages Advertising in the Capilano College Calendar is coordinated by: & Pasta & Entrees Cappucino or Latte Pizza Espresso or Mocha Char Grill Iced Coffee or Tea Wok Station Steamed Milk Deli Sandwiches Light and Dark Submarines Drip Coffee InPrint Media Sales Ltd. Suite 119 - 736 Granville Street Vancouver, B.C. V 6 Z 1 G 3 Tel 669-3150 Fax 669-5141 Hours of Operation 8 a.m. - 8:30 p.m. Monday to Thursday • 8 a.m. - 3 p.m. Friday Fees Institute courses, Private M u s i c Instruction and FEES courses where the standard tuition fee exceeds $42.50 per credit hour. Fees listed in this calendar are those in effect at the time of publication and are subject to change subsequent to the • per term) is payable by all North Vancouver campus stu- Tuition fees are generally $42.50 per credit hour. A dents. This fee is optional for students at other cam- typical full time student who enrols in 15 credits w i l l pay puses. (Fees are under review and subject to change) fees o f $711.25 per term or $ 1,422.50 for a two-term academic year. Students' U n i o n Fees A compulsory fee of $2.75 per credit hour (max. $41.25 printing o f this publication. • Capilano Courier Newspaper Fee A compulsory fee o f $.75 per credit hour to a maxi- This example includes tuition fees plus incidental fees for the Students' U n i o n , Student Newspaper and Application/ mum o f $10 per term is payable by all students. • Graduation Fee Enrolment fees. Some program or course tuition fees w i l l A graduation fee o f $20 is payable by all students in vary from those stated above. their final term of enrolment and must be submitted with their application for program evaluation at FEES — INTERNATIONAL STUDENTS International student tuition fees are $235 per credit hour. registration or within the first 30 days o f term. • Laboratory Fee T y p i c a l l y , a full-time international student would pay The College may assess additional laboratory or approximately $7,200 in tuition and incidental fees materials fees in specific courses or programs. Students are notified o f these fees prior to registration. annually for a two-term, 32-week program. • TUITION AND RELATED FEES Application Fee and Term Enrolment Fee Late Payment Fee A fee o f $25 or $3 per credit, whichever is greater, is charged to all students paying tuition fees later than the fee deadline dates established by the College. A $20 ($100 for International Students) non-refundable application fee is payable by all applicants, and a $20 Other Fees non-refundable term enrolment fee is payable by students Course Change Fees, per transaction 10.00 registering in subsequent terms. Diploma/Certificate Replacement 20.00 Tuition Fees Out o f Province Document Evaluation 25.00 Grade Appeal 42.50 Late Registration 45.00 The standard tuition fee for most programs is $42.50 per Student Card Replacement 5.00 credit hour with no m a x i m u m . T 2 2 0 2 A Education Deduction F o r m Replacement 10.00 The f o l l o w i n g programs or courses have varying tuition Transcript Fee per Official Transcript 5.00 fees. • Early C h i l d h o o d Education, Fisheries Science, L a n d scape Horticulture, Legal Secretarial, M e d i c a l Office Assistant, Personal Care Attendant, Resident Care Attendant, all Office Technology programs, and Adult Basic Education programs: $42.50 per credit hour to a m a x i m u m o f $637.50 per term. • Bachelor o f M u s i c Transfer, Bachelor o f M u s i c REFUNDS Students who officially withdraw within the first 10 instructional days o f the term w i l l receive a refund o f $26.50 per credit. Students withdrawing after the 10th day of classes are not eligible for a refund o f tuition or tuition-related fees and are responsible for all fees incurred. Therapy and Jazz Studies: $42.50 per credit hour with a possible fee m a x i m u m o f $1,225 per term. • Business Administration 300 and 400 level Evening courses: $75 per credit hour. CONTINUING EDUCATION FEE POLICIES Fees • Private M u s i c Instruction: $43 per instructional hour • Senior Citizens tuition fee and are outlined in C o n t i n u i n g Education Persons 60 years and older, providing proper identifi- calendars and brochures. Continuing Education course fees vary from the standard cation may enrol in most courses on a tuition-free basis. There are exceptions, and these include all A r t General Information Refunds Refunds w i l l be given i n full for courses/programs/ workshops cancelled by the College. • A p p l i c a t i o n for withdrawal/refund w i l l not be accepted after the second session o f a course. F o r workshops o f short duration (up to three consecutive days) withdrawal applications must be received at least one working day before the workshop commences. • Refunds are subject to a $20 administration charge. • Refunds w i l l not be given, under any circumstances, after the end o f a course, program, or workshop. • A n y change from the foregoing policy w i l l be clearly stated i n the course or workshop description. F o r further information, telephone 984-4901. General Information — Fees 22 Financial A i d a n d GENERAL INFORMATION Financial A i d Office • Special Opportunity Grants for Students with D i s a b i l i ties ( S O G - S W D ) * South Campus • Work-Study Program 8:30 am to 4:00 p m M o n d a y • Other government programs as they become available R o o m 284 B i r c h B u i l d i n g , General Office Hours: A w a r d s through Friday Direct Telephone: (604)984-4966 Fax: (604)983-7563 Personnel: Applications for the Student Assistance Programs o f other provinces Doug C A M E R O N , Financial A i d Officer Assistance in preparing reassessments or appeals for B C Zulekha P I R A N I , Student Assistance Programs Financial A i d Assistant Emergency A i d (limited). Includes: Fee Deferrals, Advances o f Loans, Emergency Bursaries, and Emergency Loans Valerie K E N D R I C K , Clerk PROGRAMS ADMINISTERED BY THE FINANCIAL AID OFFICE Emergency individual financial counselling Workshops and information sessions on: A d u l t Basic Education Student Assistance Program • Financing your education (ABESAP)* • Budgeting • Deadline: E n d o f the first month o f classes (while Application forms for external assistance and awards funds available) Special Opportunity Grants for H i g h - N e e d Part-Time Students ( P T - S O G ) * • Deadline: E n d o f the first month o f classes in each term (while funds available) •IMPORTANT: Government Loan/Grant Programs are intended to assist students who do not have the resources available to pay for their education. Student and in some cases family Training Assistance Benefits ( T A B ) * resources may be required to form the basis for funding. • The amount o f money a student w i l l receive w i l l not Applications are processed on first-come, first-served basis Applications for internal scholarship and awards opportunities necessarily cover the entire costs associated with postsecondary education. It is expected that students create a financial plan and that they budget loan funds for each educational year. Scholarships and A w a r d s : Fall Term October 3 Spring T e r m January 30 Summer T e r m June 30 (subject to availability "Financial A i d and A w a r d s — A Student G u i d e " of funds) Government and internal pamphlets and brochures related to Student Financial A i d Other government programs as they become available SERVICES PROVIDED BY THE FINANCIAL AID OFFICE Information and applications for British C o l u m b i a Student Assistance Programs • British C o l u m b i a Student Assistance Program (BCSAP)* - Processing takes approximately six weeks - Deadline for applications is eight weeks prior to the end o f study period • Loan Remission PUBLICATIONS External pamphlets and brochures related to Student Financial A i d SCHOLASTIC AWARDS Deans' List Full-time students completing a term and meeting the Deans' list criteria w i l l receive a congratulatory letter from the College recognizing their achievement. T o be eligible for the Deans' list, the student must have a 3.67 or higher grade point average, have no Incompletes, no Credit Granted or F a i l grades and completed a m i n i mum o f 12 credits for that term. General Information — Financial Aid and Awards Merit List Part-time students with a cumulative grade point average o f 3.67 or higher upon the completion o f 30 or 60 credits w i l l receive a congratulatory letter from the College recognizing their achievement. The Governor-General's Collegiate Bronze Medal This award is presented to a D i p l o m a graduate from a two-year program who has achieved the highest cumulative grade point average, and who has attained this grade point average on a m i n i m u m o f 15 credit hours per term, or full program load as outlined i n the calendar, during attendance at Capilano College. The Lieutenant Governor's Silver Medal A w a r d e d for academic excellence and contribution to the College and community to a graduate in a Vocational or Career program o f less than two years' duration. SCHOLARSHIPS, BURSARIES, and AWARDS Various awards w h i c h recognize achievement, and/or financial need are available through general and individual application forms. A detailed listing o f these awards is contained in the free booklet: "Financial A i d and A w a r d s — A Student G u i d e " . CAPILANO COLLEGE FOUNDATION The Capilano C o l l e g e Foundation was formed in 1970 to build community support for Capilano College. A s a volunteer community organization established under the Societies A c t , the Foundation raises and administers funds to assist students and enhance the development o f a well-balanced learning environment. W o r k i n g with the College's Development Office, the Foundation seeks to expand its scholarship and bursary program to recognize and support deserving students who need assistance to reach their educational goals. For information, or to make a tax-deductible contribution, contact: R a n d i D u k e , Executive Director, College Relations, C a p i l a n o College, 2055 Purcell W a y , N o r t h Vancouver, B . C . V 7 J 3 H 5 . Telephone: (604) 984-1709; Fax: (604) 984-1714 General Information — Financial Aid and Awards 24 Graduation/Diplomas a n d Certificates C o n v o c a t i o n ceremonies are held in the Spring and F a l l terms. D i p l o m a s and certificates are issued only at these two ceremonies. Students completing before the ceremonies w i l l have their permanent student records and transcripts annotated as "Program Requisites Complete". Diplomas Capilano College offers a variety o f diplomas upon completion o f two years o f study at the university transfer level. The date that the d i p l o m a or certificate is awarded w i l l Note: A previously-awarded A c a d e m i c Studies D i p l o m a then be placed on the permanent student record and may be exchanged for an Associate Degree in Arts or transcript at the date o f the appropriate graduation. Science as appropriate, provided that the degree meets all Students w h o believe they w i l l complete their program o f study by the end o f their current semester o f enrolment must submit a "Request for Program Evaluation" form to the Office o f the Registrar, together with the $20 program evaluation fee at Registration, or no later than the following deadline: F a l l Graduation in November: September 15 Spring Graduation in M a y : February 15 the requirements for the Associate degree. This includes the five-year requirement w h i c h is applied to the date o f exchanging a d i p l o m a for an Associate Degree. Associate of Arts Degree T o be eligible for the Associate o f Arts, a student must have: 1. completed 60 semester credits o f courses that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the Students are strongly encouraged to submit this applica- 100-level or higher at the University o f B r i t i s h C o l u m b i a , tion and fee at in-person registration. Simon Fraser University, or the University o f V i c t o r i a ; 2. completed at least 30 o f these 60 semester credits GENERAL INFORMATION within five years preceding the awarding o f the Associate Minimum Duration and Number of Credits Required for Certificates and Diplomas Degree; 3. completed at least 30 o f these 60 semester credits at Capilano College within five years preceding the award- Diploma: requires at least two academic years or four ing o f the degree, o f which at least 12 credits are i n terms and completion o f 60 credit hours, O R courses that have assigned or unassigned university at least one academic year, or two terms, and 6 0 credits, transfer credit at the 200-level or higher; with 30 credits and the final 5 0 % taken at Capilano 4. completed at least six semester credits in courses that College and f o l l o w i n g completion o f a prior credential have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at and/or the granting o f one or more of: the 100-level in English; • Transfer Credit • Prior L e a r n i n g Assessment (under review) • Challenge Credit • Equivalence to another Capilano College program 5. completed at least 18 credits in Arts courses (other than English) that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 100-level; at least six o f these credits must be in the Humanities, and at least six o f these credits must be in the Social Sciences, and no more that six credits shall be in any one subject area; Certificate: requires at least one academic term and completion o f 15 credit hours. Citation: requires six to 14 credit hours. Statement of Completion: offered for particular courses in L a b o u r Studies, and other contract courses to fulfill 6. completed at least 18 semester credits in Arts courses that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 200-level or higher, these credits must be in at least two different subject areas; M i n i s t r y and business requests, and where documentation 7. completed at least nine semester credits in Science other than a transcript is required. courses, including at least three credits i n Mathematics or With Distinction Designation: A student completing an academic, career, vocational, A d u l t Basic Education, or E n g l i s h as a Second Language program with a m i n i m u m program cumulative grade point average o f 3.75, with no grade l o w e r than a C + in the program requirements, w i l l be awarded "Graduated with Distinction". Computing Science or Statistics (i.e. any statistics course that transfers to a university as a 100-level or higher Science course) and at least three credits in a Laboratory Science course (i.e. any course i n the Sciences list worth three credits or more and with a lab o f at least two hours, but excluding any course in A p p l i e d Science or Computing Science); General Information — Graduation 25 8. completed at least nine semester credits i n courses that Associate of Science Degree have assigned or unassigned transfer credit at the 100level or higher; credits may be for university transfer courses in subjects listed on the following page or for T o be eligible for the Associate o f Science, a student must have: university transfer courses i n other subjects (e.g. C o m - 1. completed 60 semester credits o f courses that have merce, Physical Education, Business Administration, assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the Communications, M e d i a Resources); 100-level or higher at the University o f B r i t i s h C o l u m b i a , 9. achieved a grade o f at least C - i n each course counting towards the 60-credit requirement, and a cumulative Grade Point Average o f at least 2.0 over a l l o f the courses counting towards the requirement. S i m o n Fraser University, or the University o f V i c t o r i a ; 2. completed at least 30 o f these 60 semester credits within five years preceding the awarding o f the Associate Degree. Note: History courses w i l l be considered as Humanities 3. completed at least 30 o f these 60 semester credits at courses for the purpose o f the Associate Degree. Capilano College within five years preceding the award- General Course Requirements for Associate of Arts courses w h i c h have assigned or unassigned university Courses/Programs # of Credits transfer credit at the 200-level or higher; ing o f the degree, o f w h i c h at least 12 credits are i n Conditions Total English 6 6 4. completed at least six semester credits i n courses that 100 Level have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 100-level i n E n g l i s h ; Arts Courses 100 Level Humanities 6 - excludes English Social Sciences 6 - only six credits max. Social Sciences or 5. completed a least six semester credits from the following Capilano Calculus courses: Mathematics 108, 109, 110, 111, 230, o r 2 3 1 ; in one subject area Humanities 6 18 Arts Courses 18 18 200 Level or Higher - credits must be in at least two subject areas Science Courses 100 Level or Higher Mathematics or C o m p . Science or Statistics - requires m i n . twohr. lab and excludes any course i n A p p l i e d or C o m p u t i n g Science Laboratory Science 6. completed at least 18 credits i n Science courses that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 100-level; no more than six credits shall be i n one subject area; 7. completed at least 18 credits i n Science courses that have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at the 200-level or higher; these credits must be i n at least two subject areas; 8. completed at least six semester credits i n A r t s courses at the 100-level or higher, excluding E n g l i s h and excluding any course that has university transfer credit in both Arts and Science (e.g. Mathematics); 9. completed at least s i x semester credits i n courses that Science Course have assigned or unassigned university transfer credit at Electives* 100 Level or Higher the 100-level or higher; these credits may be for university transfer courses i n subjects listed on the following page or for university transfer courses i n other subjects 60 (e.g. Commerce, Physical Education, Business A d m i n i s tration, Communications, M e d i a Resources); 10. achieved a grade o f at least C - i n each course counting towards the 60-credit requirements, and a cumulative Grade Point Average o f a least 2.0 over a l l the courses General Information — Graduation 26 counting towards the requirement. General Course Requirements for an Associate in Science Courses/Programs English # of Credits Conditions Total 6 100 Level Calculus 6 - from Mathematics 108, 109, 110, 111, 230 or 231 Science 18 100 Level - only six credit max. in one subject area Science 18 200 Level or Higher - must be in at least two subject areas Arts Elective 6 100 Level or Higher - excluding English and courses that have transfer credit in both Arts and Science Electives* 6 100 Level or Higher 60 *May be Arts or Science courses or other subjects, e.g. Commerce, Business Administration, Physical Education with university transfer credits. Classification of Subjects for Associate Degrees Only those Capilano College courses with university transfer credit at the University of British Columbia, Simon Fraser University, or the University of Victoria, will count towards the Associate Degree. For the purpose of the above requirements, Capilano College courses are categorized as follows: ARTS Humanities: Art History Chinese English French German History Japanese Social Sciences: Anthropology Criminology Economics Geography (Human) (100, 101, 102, 106, 108, 200, 201, 205) PoliUcal Studies Psychology Sociology Women's Studies (100, 110,122, 140, 220) SCIENCES Applied Science Biology Chemistry Computing Science Geography (Physical) (112, 114, 214, 221) Geology Human Kinetics and Philosophy Mathematics Physics Note: Some courses in the subjects listed above may not carry transfer credit and/or satisfy major requirements at a particular university. Please consult the transfer guide, university calendars, or the Advising Department. Diploma in Academic Studies To be eligible for a Diploma in Academic Studies, a student must have: 1. completed 60 credits, 50% of which must be completed at Capilano College; 2. achieved a cumulative grade point average of 2.00 or better; 3. Successfully completed at least 45 credits from the following subject areas (List A and B), including at least six credits from English (100-level or higher), at least six credits from subjects in List A; and at least 15 credits selected from 200-level courses; 4. All courses must be university transferable courses. Music Philosophy Spanish Studio Art Theatre Thai Women's Studies (100, 104, 106, 130) Applied Science Biology Chemistry Computing Science Geography (Physical) Geology B Anthropology Art History Chinese Commerce Criminology Economics English French Japanese Music Philosophy Political Studies Psychology Sociology Spanish Studio Art General Information — Graduation A H u m a n Kinetics Kinesiology Mathematics B Geography Thai (Human) German Theatre Women's Studies Physical Education History Physics Diploma in General Studies T o be eligible for a D i p l o m a i n General Studies, a student must have: 1. completed 60 credits at the 100 level or higher, 50% o f which must be completed at Capilano College; 2. achieved a cumulative grade point average o f 2.00 or higher. Diplomas in Career/Vocational Programs T o be eligible for a Career/Vocational Program diploma, a student must have: 1. completed program requirements, 5 0 % o f w h i c h must be completed at Capilano C o l l e g e ; 2. achieved a cumulative grade point average o f 2.00 or higher. Certificates in Career/Vocational Programs T o be eligible for a career or vocational certificate, a student must have: 1. completed program requirements, 50% o f w h i c h must be completed at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e . 2. achieved a cumulative grade point average o f 2.00 or higher. Diplomas/Certificates in Adult Basic Education/ESL T o be eligible for a d i p l o m a or certificate, a student must have: 1. completed program requirements, 5 0 % o f w h i c h must be completed at Capilano College. 2. achieved a cumulative grade point average o f 2.00 or higher. General Information — Graduation 28 Policies a n d Procedures ATTENDANCE Second Year Standing: Second year standing is based on the number o f credit hours completed within a pro- Students are expected to attend all classes in which they gram; are registered, as evaluation o f progress in any course is • cumulative and based on class assignments, participation and examinations. University Transfer (Academic Studies): successful completion o f 24 credit hours i n that program; • Career programs: successful completion o f 50 percent of the total credits required for a two-year d i p l o m a in a INSTRUCTIONAL YEAR The instructional year is comprised o f three terms: Fall: September through December Spring: January through A p r i l Summer Term #1: M a y through June. (Some courses may be scheduled for M a y through August.) Summer Term #2: July through August. specified program, or 30 credit hours. CREDIT HOUR AND COURSE CREDITS A credit hour is an assigned unit o f value that normally represents one hour per week o f classroom w o r k per term. M o s t courses are three credit hours, and normally require three or four classroom or lecture hours per week Note: A limited number o f courses are offered during the and may, in addition, require additional hours o f study i n Summer Terms. labs, seminars, tutorials, conversation labs, or practicums. ENROLMENT STATUS COURSE INFORMATION A student registered i n a m i n i m u m o f 12 credit hours is For academic offerings, course descriptions are listed classified as a full-time student. alphabetically in the " A c a d e m i c Studies/University Generally, for provincial and federal financial aid purposes, a student registered i n a m i n i m u m o f nine credit hours is classified as a full-time student. Transfer Section" o f this calendar. Students are urged to become familiar with the special information required to properly select courses. A r t , Graphic D e s i g n and Illustration, Studio A r t , Textile Arts, Jazz Studies and M u s i c Credit Status: A credit enrolment indicates the student courses appear under their respective program headings has officially registered in and paid for courses. In in this same section. addition, the student attends all classes, seminars, labs and submits required assignments and sits examinations. Course Description C o d e : to the right hand side o f each course description is a series o f code letters and numbers, Audit Status: A n audit enrolment indicates the student has registered i n and w i l l attend a course without writing examinations or submitting work, papers, lab reports, etc. F u l l fees are required for audit enrolment. Attendance at lectures, labs and seminars is required. However, for those students w h o do not meet the attendance requirement, their permanent student record and transcript w i l l be annotated with the comment A U D I T D E N I E D . A u d i t status in a particular course is not calculated in the G P A , does not have credit attached, may not be used toward completion o f a diploma, certificate, associate degree, or degree. for example, B i o l o g y 212 - Invertebrate B i o l o g y . B i o l o g y 212 Department N a m e Year L e v e l Course Number (3) (4,3,0) (F) I I Number o f credits Number of lecture hours per week Number o f lab hours per week I Number o f other hours per week (eg. seminar, conversation, practicum) Term normally offered Students are permitted to register for audit status in a particular course only after the last day o f in-person registration, o n a space available basis, with the instructor's signature. Students may change their registration in EQUIVALENCE, EXEMPTION, SUBSTITUTION, TRANSFER CREDIT a course from credit to audit or audit to credit on or before the last day o f the two week A d d / D r o p Period with the instructor's approval and signature. A l l requests for equivalence, exemption, substitution or transfer credit must be submitted to the Office Manager, Records and Registration Office, on the Transfer Credit General Information — Policies and Procedures Request form. A decision w i l l be made with the recom- in writing, or for institutional research projects approved mendation o f an appropriate program coordinator, i f by the College. Release o f Information forms are applicable. The credit or action w i l l be noted and available in the Records and Registration Office and approved by the Office o f the Registrar. Students w i l l be from your local college campus. notified i n writing o f the final decision. Equivalence: A n equivalence indicates two courses 2. Official transcripts/grade statements: • within the institution deemed to be practically equal i n content and credits, although they may be offered in two Grade statements are mailed or distributed from Records and Registration, Office o f the Registrar; • Official transcripts are issued by the Records and different program areas under different course numbers. Registration, Office o f the Registrar, only at the Exemption: A n exemption indicates a student is not request o f the student, and are mailed directly to the required to complete a particular course(s) in a program institution or agency or to the student in a sealed because o f successful completion o f a combination o f envelope. post-secondary courses which, overall, constitute equal content. • Unofficial transcripts are issued by the Records and Registration at the request o f the student and are mailed or given directly to the student. Substitution: A substitution indicates a C a p i l a n o course used in lieu o f another C a p i l a n o course to complete a 3. The records o f First Nations students (including program requirements. Credit hours must be equal. registration, transcripts and grades) held by the Office o f the Registrar may be released to the sponsoring band or Transfer Credit: Transfer credit is credit given for work successfully completed at another institution. The transfer credits reduce the total number o f credits required to complete a certificate, diploma, or associate degree. A p p r o v e d transfer credit is noted on the Permanent Student R e c o r d as type one, two or three credit, as per the B . C . Transfer G u i d e . W h i l e grades are noted, they are not included in the calculation o f the G P A . the Capilano College First Nations A d v i s o r only i f a release has been signed by the student. A copy o f this release must be on file with Records and Registration, Office o f the Registrar. Alternatively, a band may submit a copy o f a release signed by the student, together with their request for information. Requests must be received in writing and shall be responded to by letter from the Registrar or the Registrar's designate. Requests w i l l not be received by telephone. B a n d officials are to direct their inquiries to designated College representatives, including EXAMINATION PERIOD the Registrar or/and project coordinator. The last two weeks o f each instructional term is designated as an examination period. If a final examination is to be given, it w i l l take place during the examination period and w i l l be up to three hours in duration. PROTECTION OF PRIVACY AND ACCESS TO INFORMATION For some Career/Vocational Programs, classes w i l l Capilano College gathers and maintains information used continue as regularly scheduled throughout the examina- for the purposes o f admission, registration, alumni and tion period. In addition, a special examination schedule other fundamental activities related to being a member o f may be set. Detailed information is available from the Capilano College community and attending a public instructors or program coordinators. post-secondary institution i n the Province o f B r i t i s h The examination schedule w i l l be posted each term by the end o f the eighth week o f instruction. C o l u m b i a . In signing an application for admission, graduation, or registration form, a l l applicants are advised that both the information they provide and any other information placed into the student record w i l l be pro- STUDENT RECORDS/CONFIDENTIALITY tected and used in compliance with the B . C . Freedom o f Information and Privacy Protection A c t (1992). 1. A l l official permanent student records are kept in Records and Registration, Office o f the Registrar, and are considered confidential. T h e information on file for a student is always available to that individual. Information w i l l not be given to any agency or person other than the student, unless the student has given their permission General Information — Policies and Procedures 30 of total grade points for all terms, divided by the number GRADING SYSTEM of credit hours for all terms o f enrolment. The C o l l e g e employs a letter grade system. The m i n i m u m grade point average for graduation is 2.00. Letter Grade Point Value A+ 4.33 A 4.00 A- 3.67 B+ B 3.33 3.00 B- 2.67 C+ 2.33 C 2.00 C- 1.67 D 1.00 M i n i m a l Pass F 0.00 Fail Classification Audit A n audit indicates the student has registered in and Excellent attended a course without writing examinations or submitting work, papers, lab reports, etc. A n A u d i t status is not calculated in the GPA, does not have credit attached, and may not be used toward completion o f a Good diploma, certificate, associate degree or degree. Withdrawal — Extenuating Circumstances Withdrawal from a course after the end o f the withdrawal Satisfactory period given for circumstances beyond the control o f the student. CR or N C Grade The grades " C R " or " N C " are assigned to courses i n which a level o f mastery is required for successful completion but is not included in the GPA calculation. Non-Grade Designation CIP* CR* NC* I* W* WE* — — — — • — — Course in Progress Credit Granted A l l F a i l or " F " grades recorded on the student's transcript N o Credit Granted are assigned a value o f zero in the calculation o f a Incomplete student's term and cumulative GPA. Withdrawn Withdrawal Extenuating Circumstances AUD* ADN* — — F Grade Audit A u d i t Denied not calculated in Grade Point Average Grade Point Average (GPA) I Grade A n I grade or Incomplete may be assigned in exceptional circumstances when the student can achieve a passing grade by completing one or more units o f the course. It is the student's responsibility to determine from the instructor what must be done to complete the course. I f an Incomplete is not cleared within four months, the grade w i l l be changed to the evaluation attained at the time the I was assigned. Grade performance is expressed in terms o f a Grade Point Average ( G P A ) . G P A s are reported on each permanent GRADE APPEALS student record. T o find the term G P A , the grade point value for each grade is multiplied by the credit hours to Students must take immediate action for a grade appeal. produce a number o f grade points for each course. For Students must contact a counsellor no later than two example: an " A " received in a three-credit hour class weeks after receipt o f grades or Change o f Grade N o t i f i - w o u l d become, for purposes o f the calculation: cation. The counsellor w i l l discuss the grade and appeal A = 4.00 x 3cr = 12 grade points procedure with the student and with the instructor, w i l l provide the student with a "Final Grade A p p e a l " form, T o find the term G P A , the sum o f the grade points is then and w i l l submit a report to the Appeals Committee. divided by the number o f credit hours taken in one term only. S i m i l a r l y , the cumulative G P A recorded is the sum If the student wishes to pursue the appeal, he/she must complete the "Final Grade A p p e a l " form and submit it to General Information — Policies and Procedures 31 the Appeals Committee, along with a fee o f $42.50 for tion o f these grades in all courses o f enrolment, w i l l not each grade to be appealed, within 14 days after the be allowed to enrol for two semesters, F a l l and Spring. counsellor's report has been received by the Appeals Committee Secretary. Failure to meet this timeline w i l l be grounds for dismissal o f the appeal. Appeals are considered by an Appeals Committee chaired Students who must withdraw from all courses i n two consecutive semesters due to medical reasons, or due to circumstances beyond their control, may appeal to the Registrar for a permit to re-enrol. by one o f the C o l l e g e Deans. The Committee consists o f representatives from faculty, students, and a counsellor. D u r i n g the appeal process all term grades, including the final examination mark, are taken into consideration. In all cases the students are informed in writing o f the Committee's decision. Should the mark be changed, the fee is refunded. O n l y those appeals that follow the above process w i l l be considered. ACADEMIC PERFORMANCE Students at Capilano College are expected to maintain acceptable standards o f scholarship. Specifically, they are expected to maintain a m i n i m u m 1.80 C G P A (cumulative grade point average). A student w h o does not maintain this m i n i m u m C G P A w i l l be considered to be performing unsatisfactorily. T h e following procedures w i l l apply for evaluating the student performance i n REPEATED COURSES accordance with policy governing continuance, withdrawal and readmission. A course may be repeated for the purpose of improving a 1. A c a d e m i c performance w i l l be evaluated on courses grade, but no more than once. The grade for each attempt for w h i c h Capilano C o l l e g e grades have been assigned. w i l l be recorded with the higher grade used in the ("Assigned grade" w i l l include grades A + through D , F , computation o f the cumulative G P A . but w i l l exclude W , C R and A U D ) . N o course may be taken more than twice i f the student 2. F o l l o w i n g admission, no formal assessment w i l l take has received two failures, or made two withdrawals or place until the student has completed a m i n i m u m o f nine any combination o f failure and withdrawal. Subse- credit hours of assigned grades. quently, a student w i l l not be allowed to enrol in a third attempt unless all o f the following have been satisfied: 3. Students who were admitted to the C o l l e g e with an admission average below 1.80, and who have attempted a. a term G P A o f 2.5 or better is achieved; nine credit hours at a previous post-secondary institution, b. the signature o f either an educational advisor, or counsellor is entered on the registration form; w i l l be admitted on academic probation. c. the signature o f the faculty coordinator responsible for that subject is entered on the registration form. The Repeated Courses P o l i c y also applies to courses deemed to be equivalent, have a similar curriculum, and the same subject material; for example, B i o l o g y 108 and B i o l o g y 110. REPEATED SEMESTERS Students who enrol but withdraw from all courses in two consecutive semesters w i l l be ineligible to re-register for one semester, F a l l or Spring. Students who receive grades o f F a i l , W D , or a combination o f these grades in all courses o f enrolment in two consecutive semesters shall be ineligible to re-register for one semester, F a l l or Spring. If following a third semester of enrolment, students who receive grades o f F a i l , W D , or a combina- General Information — Policies and Procedures 32 Academic Probation Students who have received assigned grades for at least nine Capilano College credit hours with a G P A o f less than 1.80 based on the four-point scale, w i l l be placed on academic probation. Students w i l l be notified i n writing of their status and may be advised to book an appointment with an A d v i s o r or Counsellor prior to re-registering. Students permitted to register w i l l be limited to enrolling in nine credit hours or a m a x i m u m o f three credit courses. F o l l o w i n g completion o f the nine credit hours or three courses, the student records w i l l be reassessed. If, at the end o f the probation period: • the term G P A on assigned grades during the probation period and the cumulative G P A are 1.80 or higher, the student w i l l be returned to good academic standing; • the term G P A on assigned grades during the probation process; they may become disruptive to all concerned and period is 1.80 or higher, but the cumulative G P A is may hinder the College's basic purpose: to foster both less than 1.80, the student w i l l continue on academic learning and a constructive, positive attitude toward probation; learning. Therefore, the C o l l e g e w i l l not accept disruptive behaviour in classrooms or elsewhere on its property. • the term G P A on assigned grades during the probation period is less than 1.80, the student w i l l be required to 1. Disruptive Behaviour withdraw from the College for at least one term (fall or Disruptive behaviour is defined as: spring). • Speech or action that seriously distracts others from the Required to Withdraw pursuit o f their educational goals; Students w h o have been Required to Withdraw ( R T W ) , • Speech or action that is clearly not part o f a learning may not apply for readmission for one full term. W e process or that creates an atmosphere o f hostility, strongly advise students to contact an advisor or a intimidation, ridicule, or anxiety among other students, counsellor before submitting an application for readmis- staff or instructors; sion. • A c t i o n that impedes the delivery o f College services; Students w h o have been required to withdraw must make application for readmission. Permission for readmission w i l l be granted by the Registrar i n consultation with the appropriate department and an A d v i s o r or Counsellor, i f • A c t i o n that abuses College property and services by using them for unauthorized purposes; • Excessive and unreasonable demand for attention or necessary. If admitted, the nine credit hour enrolment special treatment from faculty or staff, to the detriment limit w i l l apply, as consistent with the probation policy. of other students; or Required to withdraw students granted readmission in the original program o f registration or a new program must achieve a grade point average o f 2.00 or better on those • Hindrance of other's work by failure to complete one's own work. credits attempted. Students who do not achieve this level 2. Threatening and Dangerous Behaviour w i l l be required to withdraw from the C o l l e g e for one full A l l members of the College community are expected to year and may only be readmitted by application to, and show respect for the C o l l e g e and its students and employ- with the approval o f the Admissions A p p e a l Committee. ees. Behaviour that is threatening or dangerous to others Note: Some Career and Vocational programs reserve the right to review performance after each term. This review could result i n denied permission to register. is unacceptable and w i l l be dealt with quickly and firmly. The College w i l l protect its students and employees against such conduct. Threatening or dangerous behaviour is: STUDENT CONDUCT POLICY • Subjecting or threatening to subject any student or College employee to physical or mental harm, injury, T o enhance their opportunities for educational success, indignity, harassment, or written or spoken abuse; the C o l l e g e expects all students to conduct themselves so as to help, not hinder, their fellow students, staff, and instructors i n achieving their common goals. One o f the most important o f those goals is to develop the • Physical intimidation o f any student or College employee; • Damage or threat to, or the unauthorized removal of, s k i l l o f critical thinking through the free expression and College property or the property o f students or College exploration o f a wide range o f ideas. T h i s may involve employees; challenges to students' and faculty's strongly held beliefs and values. A s long as such challenges are clearly • A c t i o n that deliberately endangers students or College employees. directed at ideas, and are not merely personal attacks on those w h o h o l d them, the College accepts and encourages them as part o f the learning process. 3. Procedure Complaints about any person's disruptive, threatening, or However, some kinds o f expression, conduct and behav- dangerous behaviour shall go to a Counsellor or to the iour are clearly not intended to further the learning appropriate Supervisor or Coordinator. The person General Information — Policies and Procedures 33 receiving the complaint shall investigate, consult a the course. After consulting the instructors) involved, Counsellor, Supervisor or Coordinator as appropriate, the College may impose further penalties for cheating, up and, i f warranted, immediately convey the complaint to to and including expulsion from the College. Cheating or the Dean o f Student Services. In cases where the behav- plagiarism penalties affecting a final grade may be iour is threatening or dangerous, the police should be appealed through the College's A p p e a l s Procedure. called directly at 911. Appropriate College personnel should then be advised o f the problem. In cases o f suspicious behaviour (for example: tampering with College equipment or cars i n the parking lot, vandalizing College property, etc.) campus security should be called at 1763. If any disciplinary action is taken (as outlined above) the Dean w i l l place a copy o f the disciplinary Students are responsible for ensuring that they understand and follow the principles and practices o f proper documentation and scholarship. I f i n doubt about these matters, students should consult their instructor, the Achievement Resource Centre, the W r i t i n g Centre, or the Library where explanatory documents are available. action on the student's file i n the Registrar's office. If the Dean has reason to believe that a student's continued COPYRIGHT POLICY presence in the C o l l e g e constitutes a continuing disruption, threat, or danger to others, the Dean shall immedi- A copy o f the College Policy and Procedures regarding ately suspend the student pending further investigation Canadian copyright law is available i n the Library and i n and/or disciplinary action. a l l departments. A student has the right to appeal the Dean's decision to This policy applies to all C o l l e g e departments, employees and students. suspend or to impose other disciplinary action. Such appeal must be made i n writing to the Vice-President, SEXUAL HARASSMENT POLICY A c a d e m i c Affairs within two weeks o f the Dean notifying the student o f the disciplinary action. The appeal The C o l l e g e is committed to providing a w o r k i n g and shall be heard by the Vice-President and another senior learning environment that is free from sexual harassment. administrator, w h o w i l l receive submissions by any other T o that end, the College has adopted a formal p o l i c y and person that the Vice-President and senior administrator procedures to handle complaints and, i f appropriate, to judge to have information bearing upon the case. impose discipline where sexual harassment occurs. MISUSE OF COMPUTER SYSTEM POLICY The misuse o f a computer system (such as unauthorized access to other computer accounts or unauthorized use o f system software) is not only unfair to other students but can result, at the instructor's discretion, i n suspension o f the offender's computer access i n a course, w h i c h may result in an " F " grade. Repeated offences may result i n a permanent revoking o f a l l computer privileges. CHEATING AND PLAGIARISM POLICY The College believes that those w h o allege that they are victims o f sexual harassment must receive the necessary support and protection to encourage complaints to be brought forward. The C o l l e g e believes that anyone against w h o m a complaint has been made should be given full opportunity to respond to those allegations, and that the principles o f natural justice should prevail. The Capilano College P o l i c y defines sexual harassment as comment or conduct o f a sexual nature, i n c l u d i n g sexual advances, requests for sexual favours, suggestive comments or gestures, or physical contact when any one of the following occurs: 1. The conduct or comment has the effect o f creating an W i t h i n an educational institution, any form o f cheating— intimidating, hostile or offensive environment, and may including plagiarism—is an extremely serious offence. include the expression o f sexist attitudes, language and Plagiarism is the presentation o f another person's or behaviour; source's words or ideas as i f they were one's o w n . Plagiarism and a l l other forms o f cheating are dishonest and are incompatible with education and scholarship. A c c o r d i n g l y , cheating offences w i l l normally result i n a grade o f zero on the examination, test, or assignment and, at the instructor's discretion, may result in a grade o f F in General Information — Policies and Procedures 34 2. The conduct or comment exploits the fiduciary relationship between students and employees o f the College; 3. The conduct or comment is accompanied by a reward, or the express or implied promise o f a reward, for compliance; 4. The conduct or comment is accompanied by reprisals, graduation requirements, academic regulations, and or an expressed or implied threat o f reprisal, for refusal to university admission. comply; 5. T h e conduct or comment is accompanied by the actual denial o f opportunity, or the expressed or implied threat o f the denial o f opportunity, for failure to c o m p l y . Copies o f the College's "Sexual Harassment Policy and 7. be notified o f class cancellations as soon as possible and to expect that classes w i l l start and end on time. 8. be informed o f your performance on occasions spaced throughout the semester. 9. have your instructor keep designated office hours. Procedures" are available from the Office o f the Sexual Harassment P o l i c y A d v i s o r or from Counselling. 10. review any of your examinations and major course assignments up to the beginning o f the following semester. T h e Sexual Harassment P o l i c y A d v i s o r is available to receive complaints o f sexual harassment, to provide advice and information to the parties to such complaints, and to investigate complaints as necessary. 11. retain intellectual property concerning your assignments, essay, theses, and other written work. Student Responsibilities It is your responsibility to acquaint yourself w i t h course STUDENT RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES outlines, content, evaluations and methodology. Y o u are Capilano C o l l e g e recognizes a set o f student rights and manner and in accordance with college policies as set out holds students responsible for their understanding and in the C o l l e g e calendar. Y o u are responsible for: also responsible for conducting yourself i n a reasonable conduct i n v i e w o f College policies, rules and regulations. 1. inquiring into the availability o f your instructors (time Student Rights and place). Y o u are entitled to have your rights respected by fellow 2. communicating with instructors and/or counsellors i n students, faculty, staff, administrators and other persons order to solve any o f the problems that y o u may encounter. associated w i t h the College. In addition to your rights 3. attending classes and being punctual. guaranteed under the Canadian Charter o f Rights, you have the right to: 1. a healthy and safe learning environment free from harassment and discrimination. 2. the confidentiality o f information regarding a l l student records and grades unless y o u consent in writing to its disclosure. Y o u also have a right to ethical behaviour 4. submitting your assignments i n the required format to your instructors within the deadline; or, i f y o u cannot do so, for making other arrangements with the agreement o f the concerned instructor. 5. being familiar with the information contained i n the course outlines and for seeking from your instructors clarification o f any areas o f concern. from C o l l e g e personnel who have access to your student records. 3. seek redress through appropriate C o l l e g e committees for any potential infringement o f your rights, according to the procedures i n effect at the College. 4. access to documents contained i n your student records, 6. undertaking to complete course requirements as described i n the course outline and to observe deadlines and schedules contained therein. 7. discussing any dissatisfactions with the instructor concerned before attempting further redress through appropriate College channels. and to add pertinent comments or documents as appropriate. 5. be informed i n advance o f the basic content and general 8. respecting the rights o f students, faculty, staff, administrators and other persons associated with the College. procedures o f a course and to be sure that the course w i l l 9. respecting other people's health and their right to not change substantially after registration. Y o u also have security and dignity. the right to receive at the beginning o f a course a written 10. adhering to College policies regarding improper outline and to receive written notification o f changes i n the student conduct including: course outline. The course outline normally w i l l include course objectives, teaching methods, evaluation system, a) cheating and plagiarism; and due dates and late penalties for major assignments. b) improper behaviour; 6. reasonable access to information on program and c) sexual harassment. General Information — Policies and Procedures 35 Services ACHIEVEMENT RESOURCE CENTRE For more information, call 984-4945 or drop by the Achievement Resource Centre, B i r c h B u i l d i n g . Faculty Janet, B L A C K , B . C . Teaching Cert, B . G . S . , Post B a c c , Special E d . ( S F U ) The Mathematics Learning Centre The Mathematics Learning Centre ( M L C ) , located in the John B R O O K S , B . A . ( S F U ) B i r c h B u i l d i n g , R o o m 289, provides services for all Ruth D ' H O L L A N D E R , B . C . Teaching Cert., B . E d . , M . E d . ( M c G i l l ) , C . A . S . (Harvard) students at the College. D u r i n g scheduled hours, students may obtain individual assistance w i t h math problems Bev H I L L , B.Ed. ( U B C ) from the lab supervisor or instructor on duty. The M L C Wendy L Y N N , B . S c . (Carleton), M . S c . (Waterloo) has two study areas (one for silent, individual study and Susan M U R R A Y , B . E d . ( T . E . S . L . ) (Concordia) M . A . ( A p p l i e d Linguistics) (Concordia) the other for quiet, group study), a multimedia station, and a video room equipped w i t h five video stations. In Peggy S H A N N O N , M . E d . ( U B C ) , First Nations A d v i s o r addition, the M L C has a library o f math reference texts, Jan S H I E L L , M . E d . ( U B C ) as well as a collection o f C D - R O M s and video tapes on Support Staff topics in calculus, precalculus, algebra and statistics. E r i c a B R A N T , Learning Assistant Writing Centre L y n n e H A M I L T O N , D i v i s i o n a l Assistant A l l students registered at the C o l l e g e may visit the Achievement Resource Centre — North Vancouver W r i t i n g Centre (FR402) for advice on written assignments or help with writing problems. The Centre is not a proofreading service, but aims to help students develop Students wanting to increase their learning efficiency are their writing ability. invited to use the services and facilities of the A c h i e v e - The Centre also offers resources for writing: quiet space, ment Resource Centre ( A R C ) , located in the B i r c h a collection o f reference books, information sheets and B u i l d i n g , T h i r d F l o o r , R o o m 337. Students who have exercises, and computers with word processing and specific learning difficulties are encouraged to discuss printing facilities. their concerns w i t h A R C faculty. The W r i t i n g Centre is staffed by faculty members from The Achievement Resource Centre offers the following the English, E S L and A B E Departments. campus wide services: posted. 1. Credit courses w h i c h provide opportunities for students to learn and adopt methods that lead to success in college. 2. Scheduled workshops on study skills to help all students succeed at college. 3. Personal assistance for students who are doing w e l l but want to improve further. 4. Assistance in using computer resources available in the Centre. Resources available are: 1. H a r d w a r e — M a c i n t o s h , I B M - c o m p a t i b l e computers. 2. Software—word processing, spelling, vocabulary and keyboarding skills. Open hours are Achievement Resource Centre — Squamish and Sechelt A R C programs and services are also offered in these locations. Contact the local C o l l e g e receptionist for more information: in Squamish 986-3515 (toll free from North Vancouver) or 892-5322 (local); in Sechelt 9871535 (toll free) or 885-9310 (local). THE ADVISING CENTRE Admissions advising/ Educational planning/ Recruitment 3. Self-paced learning programs on cassette, video, and computer diskette to improve study and learning sor, B . S c . (Wisconsin) skills. 4. Group and i n d i v i d u a l i z e d instruction for study skills development. tips. 36 I n f o r m a t i o n E l i n B R N J A C , Educational Planning Assistant M a r n i B U S H , Educational Planning Assistant Jeri K R O G S E T H , A d v i s o r , B . A . ( U B C ) , B . C . Teachers' The A R C also provides a variety o f handouts on study G e n e r a l Jean B E R R Y , A d v i s o r and International Student A d v i - — Services Certificate T h e A d v i s i n g Centre exceptional athletes, working with the experienced Blues • coaching staff and managers, have combined to produce • • provides prospective students with educational planning consistent with their career goals both provincial and national championship teams. F o r assists students and prospective students in making example, Capilano won both the men's and women's 96/ course selections consistent with their career goals 97 National Soccer title. Capilano C o l l e g e is proud o f organizes application and pre-registration workshops the accomplishments o f its student athletes and o f its on campus to help prospective students make an easy growing reputation for athletic excellence. and successful transition into college • provides on-going educational planning for students on campus • assists students i n planning their transfer to other institutions • provides the general public with information on all college programs through the " A d v i s i n g H o t l i n e " telephone • visits high schools i n the lower mainland to provide information on a l l college programs and to assist students i n their transition from high school to college. Appointments may be made at the A d v i s i n g Centre desk Campus Recreation A n expanding intramural program, utilizing the College's Sportsplex facility and the Weight Training Centre, together with recreation and fitness programs, are available during both F a l l and Spring terms. Some examples o f the scheduled activities available are: co-ed volleyball, basketball, indoor soccer, badminton, aerobics, karate, weight training and many more. The Sportsplex is located i n the south east corner o f the south campus parking lot across from B i r c h B u i l d i n g . in B i r c h B u i l d i n g , R o o m 238 or by calling the A d v i s i n g For detailed G y m Schedule and G a m e T i m e s call 984- Hotline at 984-4990. Drop-in advising is also available. 1737. F o r Intramurals, Recreational Programming call M i l t W i l l i a m s at 983-7532. F o r athletes seeking informa- ATHLETICS AND RECREATION tion about their sport status, call the Athletic Director, Joe Administration call John D o w l e r at 984-4997. O u r fax number is 984- Joseph I A C O B E L L I S , B . P . E . , M . P . E . ( U B C ) , Manager 1736. Faculty Sportsplex and Fitness Centre M i l t o n W I L L I A M S , B . P . E . ( U B C ) , Programmer The Sportsplex, one o f the finest multipurpose facilities Iacobellis at 983-7553. F o r general information please Support Staff John B R A I T H W A I T E , Weekend Attendant John D O W L E R , Program Assistant Wade K E E L E R , Senior Attendant G e o f f K E R S H A W , E v e n i n g Attendant T o m S M I T H , E v e n i n g Attendant in the province, houses the intramural programs, athletics, gymnasium-based programs, extension courses i n sports and recreation and a general activity drop-in program for those choosing a less structured schedule. E a c h o f these programs offer a variety o f activities w h i c h w i l l satisfy the recreational needs o f the student body. winners advancing to national finals. This affords our Facilities include a 14,500 sq. ft. gymnasium with seating capacity for 1,700, suitable for basketball, volleyball, badminton, indoor soccer, wrestling, martial arts and many other activities; a 2,400 sq. ft. aerobics g y m , weight and fitness centre, dressing rooms and sauna. A wide range o f services including towel service, locker rentals, first aid, laundry service and equipment loans are available. C o l l e g e ' s highly skilled student athletes an opportunity to Current hours o f operation during the term (September to meet w i t h and compete against the best college athletes i n A p r i l ) are: M o n d a y to Thursday: 8:30 a.m. to 11:00 p.m., Canada. Friday: 8:30 a.m. to 7:30 p.m. and Saturday/Sunday: Intercollegiately, Capilano Blues teams compete i n 1:00 p.m. to 5:00 p.m. Athletics Capilano is a full member o f the British C o l u m b i a C o l l e g e s ' A t h l e t i c Association, w h i c h is the governing body for all intercollegiate athletics i n the province. P r o v i n c i a l championships are determined annually, with soccer, basketball, and badminton both for women and men and w o m e n ' s volleyball. E a c h year, our many G e n e r a l I n f o r m a t i o n — Services 37 BOOKSTORE Ethelyn M c I N N E S - R A N K I N , B . A . (University o f Located i n the B i r c h B u i l d i n g , the Bookstore offers required and recommended texts, stationery, clothing and sundry items. W h e n classes are in session, the Bookstore is usually open M o n d a y through Thursday 8:30 a.m. to 8:30 p.m. and Fridays 8:30 a.m. to 4:00 p.m. The Winnipeg), M . A . ( U B C ) Susan M I T C H E L L , B . S . E d . ( N . Illinois), M . A . ( U V i c ) Sukhi S O H I , M A . ( U B C ) Suzanne W A L L S T E R , M . E d . (Montana) Support Staff Bookstore accepts V I S A , MasterCard and Interac. Ursel B R O W N For information regarding used books, please contact the Norma M c A L L I S T E R Capilano Students' U n i o n . General Information THE CAPILANO REVIEW The counsellors at Capilano C o l l e g e are professionals The Capilano Review is a tri-annual magazine o f the arts, publishing poetry, fiction, fine art and drama from all over Canada and the w o r l d . Since its beginnings i n 1972 in the Capilano C o l l e g e Humanities D i v i s i o n , the maga- trained to provide a variety o f counselling services designed to promote and support students' academic success, identification and achievement o f appropriate career goals, and personal growth. zine has been recognized five times for excellence by the A t present, the Counselling Department offers the National M a g a z i n e awards, twice by the Western M a g a - following services to Capilano C o l l e g e students: zine awards, and been cited by the Canadian Studies Association. Its distribution spans nine countries. The Capilano Review is published by the Capilano Press Educational Counselling is available to help students plan their college education according to their interests, aptitudes and career goals. Society; it receives support funding from the Canada C o u n c i l , the B . C . Cultural F u n d , Capilano College, and Students are advised to consult with a counsellor when the B . C . G a m i n g C o m m i s s i o n . Subscriptions are $25 for experiencing academic difficulties. Students m u s t see a one year (three issues) or $45 for two years. The student counsellor before registering for an overload or when rate for one year is $15. The Capilano Press Society considering filing a formal grade appeal. welcomes donations to its Friends and Benefactors Career Counselling offers help to students w h o are Program, w h i c h are tax deductible through The Capilano having trouble deciding on a career, who perhaps feel College Foundation. W r i t e to: The Capilano Review c/o unsure, confused, or lacking motivation. C o u n s e l l i n g and Capilano College. Telephone: (604) 984-1712. Fax: testing can help students make realistic career plans based (604) 983-7520. W e b Site: www.capcollege.bc.ca/ on their interests, abilities and values. departments/TCR/tcr.html CHILD CARE A new Capilano C o l l e g e C h i l d Care Centre opened on campus in 1996. B o t h full-time and part-time care is available for children age 3 - 5 . Full-time care is available for infants and toddlers. W e welcome new applications at this time. Priority w i l l be given to C a p i l a n o College students. Personal Counselling is available to help students who are experiencing personal difficulties w h i c h affect their ability to succeed i n college. Counsellors can help students to clarify issues, overcome obstacles and find effective ways o f dealing with their problems. C o u n s e l lors can also refer students to community agencies for further assistance. Workshops and Outreach Programs designed to help students succeed are offered throughout the term i n such areas as career exploration, goal-setting, test anxiety, Applications for child care are available at the C h i l d Care procrastination, stress management, communication and Centre or by calling 984-4950. assertion training. Credit Courses that are a full term i n length are co-taught COUNSELLING by the counsellors on strategies for student success. Faculty Daniel F R A N K E L , B . A . (Concordia), M . E d . ( M c G i l l ) D a v i d J O N E S , B . A . , M . A . (Dalhousie), P h . D . ( S F U ) Y v o n n e M c C O L L , B . A . (Simmons), M . E d . (Harvard) G e n e r a l 38 I n f o r m a t i o n — Services The Counselling Department is located on the second floor o f the B i r c h B u i l d i n g . Appointments to see a counsellor may be made through the receptionist, or by calling 984-1744. Appointment times are available M o n d a y through Friday, from 9 a.m. to 4 p.m. Drop-in Employers may use C o - o p students to assist i n building a counselling is also available to accommodate students i n work force that meets the short-term needs o f their crisis or emergency situations, or for short consultations. organization. Students can undertake special projects and A l l counselling is confidential. provide relief for permanent staff w h o may be undertaking other tasks. In the longer term, employers have a cost Those l i v i n g i n the Pemberton - H o w e Sound Region effective means o f evaluating potential future employees. requiring the assistance o f a counsellor should contact the Squamish Regional Campus. Appointments may be arranged by calling 892-5322. The C o - o p experience provides students with a superior, well-rounded education enriched by the practical application o f their skills. They obtain valuable "hands-on" Sunshine Coast R e g i o n residents should call the Sechelt Regional Campus, 885-9310. experience and are able to evaluate their career choices. The College receives immediate feedback on the quality Career Resource Centre and relevance o f the program areas and on the quality o f the students. C o - o p education also helps us develop The C o l l e g e assists students considering career options contacts with the business community in general. by p r o v i d i n g information and reference materials on a wide variety o f occupations. The Career Resource Centre is located i n the B i r c h B u i l d i n g . It houses a collection o f self-help books, vocational literature and information on labour market trends. T h e Centre also contains calendars The following are co-operative education programs at Capilano College: A s i a Pacific Management Business Administration from Canadian and foreign universities and colleges, and Accounting free informational brochures on campus and community Computing resources. Copies o f past and current course outlines for General Management C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e are available for reference in choosing Marketing courses and instructors. In addition, some career and Retail Marketing program information is on videotape, w h i c h can be T o u r i s m Management viewed i n the Centre. F o r assistance, contact the receptionist. The Career Resource Centre is open from 8:30 - Details on these programs are available in the appropriate program area o f this calendar. 5:00 p.m., M o n d a y through Thursday, and from 8:30 4:30 p.m. on Fridays. Peer Support Centre M e m b e r s o f the C o u n s e l l i n g Department are responsible for the training and supervision o f Peer Support Centre volunteers. These volunteers are students who can assist other students by providing information and through supportive listening. In addition, the Centre is engaged in a number o f outreach activities designed to support student success and to foster as sense o f community at Capilano College. The Centre is supported by the Capilano Students' U n i o n . DISABILITY SUPPORT SERVICES Faculty Jolene B O R D E W I C K , B . S c . (Ed) (Idaho), M . E d . ( U B C ) , P . D . P . ( S F U ) , A . R . W . — Office o f Educational Planning Lucas F O S S , B . A . (Carleton), M . A . C o u n s e l l i n g Psychology, (Adler School o f Professional Psychology), R . C . C . , A . R . W . — Office o f Educational Support Support Staff Margaret M A C A U L A Y , Secretary CO-OPERATIVE EDUCATION Services to students with disabilities are provided by the Co-operative education integrates a period o f classroom abilities (located i n the A d v i s i n g Centre — B i r c h B u i l d - learning with periods o f work experience to enable ing) and the Office o f Educational Support for Students Office of Educational Planning for Students with D i s - students to apply their knowledge and skills. Students with Disabilities (located in Counselling — B i r c h alternate periods o f full-time study with periods o f paid Building). Students with learning disabilities are also employment i n business, industry, government and non- offered services through the Achievement Resource profit organizations. The goal is to develop high calibre Centre. graduates, better able to assume productive jobs. G e n e r a l I n f o r m a t i o n — Services 39 Contact with the Office o f Educational Planning must be made at least four months before students plan to begin courses. Knowledge Network The third component o f the Open L e a r n i n g A g e n c y , the Knowledge Network also offers a w i d e range o f credit F o l l o w i n g an intake interview and provision o f appropri- and non-credit courses. F o r further information, call 660- ate and current documentation, a variety o f services can 2000 (toll-free 1-800-663-1678). be provided for students: • transition and educational planning Open Learning In British Columbia • college orientation and access information In addition to the courses offered by the Open Learning A g e n c y , there are many more open learning courses • registration assistance offered by British Columbia's colleges and universities. • instructor notification for classroom accommodation The Open Learning A g e n c y can advise w h i c h courses are • exam invigilation available, but specific enquiries should be directed to the • individualized support services sponsoring institution. • taped texts EMPLOYMENT CENTRE FOR STUDENTS • interpreting services Contact: Dave S H A R R O C K , A d v i s o r Lynne S O M E R V I L L E , Advisor • notetakers and scribes The Student Employment Centre equips students and • exit planning Faculty are available M o n d a y through Thursday. C a l l alumni with the knowledge and skills necessary to secure employment specific to their individual needs. 983-7526 for more information. It is critical to understand the new w o r l d o f work and DISTANCE EDUCATION how it affects opportunities i n the 21st century. T o meet Fish Science—Capilano College The F i s h Culture Technician Program is available i n distance learning format only. Students may register i n one or more courses. U p o n completion the student is awarded the F i s h Culture Technician Certificate. The distance learning program has been designed for individuals who are currently w o r k i n g or seeking employment in the fish culture field and wish to upgrade their academic credentials. Individualized programs may be available. this challenge, the Student E m p l o y m e n t Centre provides students with a variety o f services including: • practical self-assessment before y o u start the "search" • what it means to market yourself • developing a "network" • how to research the hidden j o b market • review o f all employment-related documentation • tips on interviewing • assessment of job offers • support and encouragement through a l l phases o f the work search process In addition to providing employment guidance, the Open Learning Agency Open College and Open University Centre also displays hundreds o f employment opportuni- The Open C o l l e g e and Open University, two components A l l types o f positions are available: full-time, part-time, o f the Open L e a r n i n g A g e n c y , offer a wide variety o f seasonal, contract and career-oriented. credit and non-credit courses through open learning The Centre offers drop-in service, individual appoint- methods. Courses and programs can lead to one o f ments and in-class group presentations. Students are several college diplomas or certificates or to a university degree. F o r information on course offerings and transfer credit, visit or write to the Open Learning Agency's Student Services office at 4355 Mathissi Place, Burnaby, B . C . V 5 G 4S8, or call (604) 431-3000. G e n e r a l 40 I n f o r m a t i o n — Services ties that are posted daily on a central Job Posting B o a r d . encouraged to visit the Centre early i n their academic term to establish an on-going connection o f support for employment concerns throughout the duration o f their studies. FIRST NATIONS STUDENT SERVICES Physiotherapist: Paige L A R S O N , B.Sc.(PT), B P E , M C P A Faculty Peggy S H A N N O N , M . E d . ( U B C ) , First Nations A d v i s o r Health and Physiotherapy services are located i n the Birch Building, Room 249A. T h e F i r s t Nations Student A d v i s o r provides direct General medical services are available to students at no services to First Nations students in a variety o f ways: charge on Tuesday and Thursday throughout the term. assistance w i t h course selection and registration; informa- M e d i c a l specialists and physiotherapy services are tion concerning College resources; advisor for special available to college employees and students on a fee-for- programs; liaison w i t h First Nations B a n d education service basis according to the schedule posted i n the officers and college instructors; consultation regarding Health Services area. Appointments may be made personal and educational matters. The A d v i s o r also acts through the receptionist. as resource to the student-based First Nations Issues Committee. First A i d is administered through the Facilities Department: call local 2772 or 984-1772 Special programs and services for First Nations students First A i d Services are available on campus at the follow- and prospective students are also offered at the College's ing times: campuses i n Sechelt and Squamish. D u r i n g S p r i n g a n d F a l l Semesters Presently located i n the Achievement Resource Centre at M o n d a y - Thursday: 8:30 a.m. - 2:00 a.m. the N o r t h V a n c o u v e r campus, the A d v i s o r also coordi- Friday - Sunday: continuous coverage from 8:30 a.m. on F r i d a y nates advice provided to the C o l l e g e from its First Nations A d v i s o r y Committee, an external advisory group M a y to A u g u s t : w h i c h meets quarterly. M o n d a y - Friday FOOD AND BEVERAGE SERVICE 8:30 a.m. - 4:30 p.m. Evenings and weekends as required The main cafeteria is located i n the B i r c h B u i l d i n g . T h e cafeteria offers a variety o f full hot meal service during the F a l l and Spring terms from approximately 8:00 a.m. through 8:30 p.m. daily, except Fridays when it closes at 3:00 p.m. F o r special events, catering services are available. Contact the F o o d Services Director, 9844970. A kiosk located in the F i r B u i l d i n g provides a selection o f pastries, salads, sandwiches and coffee. The kiosk is open from 8:00 a.m. through 2:00 p.m. M o n d a y to Friday when classes are i n session. LIBRARY Administration Frieda W I E B E , B . A . ( U o f S), M . L . S . , M . B . A . ( U B C ) , College Librarian Faculty Karin H A L L , B . A . M . L . S . ( U B C ) David L A M B E R T , B . A . ( U of A ) , M . L . S . ( U B C ) Annette L O R E K , B . A . , M . L . S . ( M c G i l l ) George M O D E N E S I , B . A . , M . L . S . ( U B C ) V e n d i n g service offering limited food, beverage and Sidney M Y E R S , B . A . ( U B C ) , M . L . S . (Western) confectionery items is available i n M a p l e , B i r c h and F i r Maureen W I T N E Y , B . A . (Trent), M . L . S . ( U o f T ) B u i l d i n g s , Library and Sportsplex. Staff L i m i t e d d i n i n g space (seating and circulation) does not a l l o w for the use o f the F o o d Service area for special John B O Y L A N , Technical Services functions during the period the food service is i n opera- Kathleen C O S G R O V E , A u d i o - V i s u a l Services tion, unless the function is designated by the College's H e i k e F A E R B E R , A u d i o - V i s u a l Services Sharon F E Y E R , A u d i o - V i s u a l Services administration. June H U N T E R , M e d i a Production Services HEALTH SERVICES AND FIRST AID Karen K L A V E R , Circulation Services Dianella K N I G H T , M e d i a Production Services Director o f M e d i c a l Services: D r . B i l l M A C K I E , B . S c , M.D. (UBC), CCFP, FCFP James K W O K , C i r c u l a t i o n Services A n n e M O Y E , Secretary C a r o l N O O N A N , Technical Services G e n e r a l I n f o r m a t i o n — Services N o l a O ' B R I E N , T e c h n i c a l Services G a i l O W E N , Circulation Services Diane P A R K E R , T e c h n i c a l Services T i m P A U L , A u d i o - V i s u a l Services E d n a S A K A T A , M e d i a Production Services K a r y n S C H M I D , Circulation Services Circulation Services Students are required to present current C a p i l a n o College I.D. to borrow library materials. I . D . cards must be renewed each term. F o r loan periods and reserves see the Library G u i d e for Students available i n the library. Joanna S P U R L I N G , Circulation Services N O T E : Fines are charged on all overdue library materi- Judy S T E A R , Circulation Services als. H o u r l y and daily charges vary depending on whether Deborah S W I G A R T , Circulation Services the item is on reserve, recalled, or o n regular loan. Please Karen W A U G H , T e c h n i c a l Services note the due date on each item borrowed and return materials on time. Failure to return materials and pay a l l Library Hours - North Vancouver Campus fines at the end o f each term w i l l result i n debt listing M o n d a y - Thursday 8:00 am - 10:30 p m (transcripts are withheld and further registration is Friday 8:00 a m - 4 : 3 0 p m prohibited). Saturday - Sunday 1:00 p m - 5:00 p m Audio-Visual Services A u d i o V i s u a l Services M o n d a y - Thursday 8:00 am - 10:30 p m Friday 8:00 a m - 4 : 3 0 p m 8:30 am - 4:30 p m Library Hours - Squamish Campus M o n d a y - Thursday 9:00 a m - 7:00 p m Friday 9:00 am - 4:00 p m Library Hours - Sechelt Campus M o n d a y - Thursday 9:00 am - 7:00 p m Friday 9:00 am - 4:00 p m Collections Students have access to a book collection o f 100,000 volumes, periodical and newspaper collections o f 750 current titles, and collections o f videos, compact disks, C D - R O M and online databases, maps, government documents, annual reports and pamphlets. The I N N O P A C online catalogue provides access to the library's materials and a gateway to a variety o f online indexes and other library catalogues. Reference computer workstations provide access to C D - R O M , Internet, and other online information resources. Research Assistance and Instruction Students receive a library orientation and basic research methods class during the first year E n g l i s h , Psychology, and Communications courses. Other courses often include a class i n the use o f library materials specific to the subject area. Individual research assistance and Internet research classes are also offered. Numerous guides to resources and services are available i n the library. G e n e r a l 42 I n f o r m a t i o n — available for use i n the library or may be booked for classroom presentations. F i l m s , videos, records, cassette tapes, and C D ' s are listed i n the library's catalogue. M e d i a Production Services M o n d a y - Friday A variety o f audio-visual software and equipment is Services Projectors, video players, cassette recorders, C D players and record players are available for individual use at library study carrells or for small group use i n the library's preview room. Media Production Services Assistance i n the design, preparation, and production o f audio-visual materials is provided. Selected equipment is available for self-help use. Overheads, laserprints, laminating, slides, video and audio products are available at the cost o f materials. A s k at M e d i a Production Services. Computers are available for use i n the L i b r a r y Computer L a b . Sechelt and Squamish A small collection o f reference and information materials is housed at each regional campus. A c c e s s to the entire college library collection is provided v i a the I N N O P A C catalogue. A library orientation and basic research methods class is provided at the beginning o f each term. Inter-campus loans and telephone reference services are also provided. Adaptive Technologies The Library has a workstation designed for use by visually impaired students. This includes a very large screen monitor and text enlarger, a digital scanner, a voice synthesizer and a B r a i l l e printer. LOST AND FOUND SECURITY Students may inquire about lost or found items i n the Capilano College is concerned w i t h the safety and Student U n i o n office, located i n the M a p l e B u i l d i n g . security o f students, faculty, staff and visitors on campus. There is also a Library lost and found in the Library at the C i r c u l a t i o n counter. PARKING Paid permit and daily paid parking is i n effect on the N o r t h V a n c o u v e r campus. Illegally parked vehicles are subject to towing at the owner or driver's risk and expense. F o r further information, contact Supply and Services at 984-4904. Parking permits for persons with disabilities may be applied for at Disability Support Services or Supply and Services. Security at the North Vancouver campus is provided by uniformed officers. These officers are available to escort any member o f the C o l l e g e community. A d v a n c e notice is appreciated, but not required. C a m p u s security may be reached at 984-1763. A security awareness orientation is provided to every class at the beginning o f each term. Faculty, particularly those teaching evening classes, promote and actively encourage the buddy system. Students are advised to walk with a friend or, i f possible, travel i n groups to parked cars or to other locations, or get a ride to their vehicle i f they are parked some distance away from others. Car Pool Registered car pools o f three or more individuals arriving and unloading at the same time, i n one vehicle, i n the SEXUAL HARASSMENT POLICY ADVISOR Janet K E E , B . A . ( U o f T ) , L L . B . ( U o f T ) designated parking area, w i l l be provided with F R E E The primary work o f the Sexual Harassment P o l i c y parking i n the C a r P o o l area. Information and registration A d v i s o r is to assist campus members to informally for car p o o l i n g may be obtained from the Purchasing resolve sexual harassment problems. T h i s work can Department located i n Arbutus B u i l d i n g , R o o m A R 0 1 8 or include discussing effective responses, facilitating by calling 984-4904. communication between the concerned individuals, and A computer car pool ride matching system is located i n the Library just inside the main entrance o f the L i b r a r y — l o o k for the E A S Y R I D E R sign. The system is free and helping complainants initiate a formal complaint under the College Sexual Harassment P o l i c y (see Policies and Procedures i n this calendar). easy to use! T h e computer scans the bar code on the The A d v i s o r also offers presentations and workshops on student ID/library card and prints out a list o f persons i n campus on many topics, including sexual harassment, y o u area w h o want to form a car pool. dating violence, cross-gender communication, and assertiveness training. The A d v i s o r and her resource REGISTRAR'S OFFICE John P A R R E T T , Registrar, B.R.(Western) Barbara R O B E R T S O N , Associate Registrar, B . E d . ( U B C ) C h e r y l H E L M , Office Manager, Records and Registration, B . A . ( U B C ) library are available to all student researchers w i t h questions about sexual harassment and related topics. T h e A d v i s o r is located i n the B i r c h B u i l d i n g , R o o m 278. Appointments may be arranged by calling 984-1744. STUDENT NEWSPAPER The Office o f the Registrar is responsible for maintenance o f all permanent student records, admission and registration procedures for a l l prospective and continuing students, and administration o f C o l l e g e policies pertinent to those areas. In addition, all semester and examination timetables and official course articulation is coordinated by the Office o f the Registrar. The student newspaper at Capilano C o l l e g e is the Capilano Courier, published every other week. The Courier is run by an independent staff o f student volunteers, autonomous from the student society and College administration. Questions should be directed as follows: campus, there is always a need for help. Students are A d m i s s i o n s and Records: 984-4913 encouraged to take part i n news and feature writing, Since the Courier is written, organized, and l a i d out on Transcripts: 986-1911, ext. 2084 reporting, editing, layout, photography, artwork, desktop F a x : 604-984-1798 publishing, graphic design, and advertising. T h e newspaper is not a "class project" and therefore offers the chance G e n e r a l I n f o r m a t i o n — Services for all students to participate i n the democratically-run collective staff. The Courier STUDENT STORE — CAP CORNER The student store, located in the Library building, is welcomes input from the entire College community. Classified ads (which are free to students, staff, and faculty), letters to the collective, and other contributions can be submitted to their offices. operated by the Retail M a r k e t i n g students. The store serves as a teaching aid a l l o w i n g students to put into practical use the skills they learn w h i l e i n the classroom. The store sells Capilano College sweatwear, school STUDENTS' UNION The Capilano Students' U n i o n is an organisation comprised o f all registered full- and part-time students at the supplies, c o m m o n pharmaceutical items, gifts, candy, snacks and cold drinks. College. M e m b e r s h i p i n the U n i o n commences at Special sweatwear orders for clubs, organizations, and registration, upon payment o f the U n i o n membership various athletic teams can be arranged. fee*, and ceases at the end o f the last semester o f study. Hours o f operation are M o n d a y to Thursday from 10:15 In 1981, a referendum was held at Capilano College in a.m. to 4:30 p.m. which students voted by a 90.4% majority in favour of joining the Canadian Federation o f Students, a national alliance o f college and university students' unions. Provincial and national Federation fees* are calculated per credit per semester. O n campus, the Students' U n i o n works to protect the rights and advocate for the interests o f its members. The U n i o n appoints student representatives on the C o l l e g e committees, providing student perspectives i n the College decision-making process. The U n i o n also organises oncampus social and cultural activities, and provides a variety o f services to its members. Provincially and nationally, the U n i o n works through the Federation to positively affect government and post-secondary education policies i n such areas as tuition fees and student financial assistance. The activities o f the Students' U n i o n are coordinated on a day-to-day basis by an elected Executive Committee. Elections o f all vacant and expiring positions on the U n i o n ' s Executive Committee are held during the first five weeks o f each C o l l e g e semester. One member of the Executive Committee sits on the provincial Executive o f the Canadian Federation o f Students. For more information about the U n i o n , or a copy of the U n i o n ' s Constitution and B y l a w s , please stop by the U n i o n office, R o o m 116 i n the M a p l e B u i l d i n g . * Fees are currently under review and subject to change. Consult the Students' U n i o n for current information about fees. G e n e r a l 44 I n f o r m a t i o n — Services Information f o rInternational Students The C o l l e g e welcomes Applications for A d m i s s i o n from students w h o normally reside in countries outside Canada. O v e r 350 international students study at Capilano C o l l e g e annually. They are enrolled in university transfer programs, specialized career/vocational 2. Applicants without Grade 12 may be considered for admission, based on the discretionary admission policy. Applicants should include a letter o f intent, outlining their educational and work experience since leaving high school. programs, and E n g l i s h as a Second Language. In certain programs, enrolment limitations are i n effect 3. English Language Requirements: both for international students and for Canadian citizens a. English as a Second Language Program (ESL) and residents. Entry to these programs is competitive and is based on academic standing and other published criteria. In accord with provincial government policy, international students are subject to higher tuition fees than Canadian students. N o r m a l l y , international students must enrol i n a full-time program o f studies. • A l l applicants are required to write an English placement test. This test is available in selected countries and at Capilano College. • Applicants may also write the E n g l i s h Language Assessment Test ( E L A ) available at Vancouver C o m m u n i t y C o l l e g e i n Vancouver. Contact the Manager o f the International Student Centre or the Admission for International Applicants 1. International students are eligible for admission i f they have completed the equivalent o f secondary school graduation (Grade 12) in British C o l u m b i a . Examples of Equivalence: China Senior M i d d l e School D i p l o m a France Baccalaureate (2ieme partie) (Series A - E ) International Student A d v i s o r at Capilano C o l l e g e for further information. • A d m i s s i o n may be granted before writing any o f these placement tests. b. University Transfer and Career/Vocational Programs If E n g l i s h is not your first language or you have received your education i n another language, y o u must submit one o f the following: Germany and Austria • T O E F L score o f at least 560 Reifezeugnis or Arbitur • Test o f E n g l i s h as a Foreign Language: Educational Hong Kong Passes i n five G C E / H K C E E subjects, two of which must be at the Advanced Level. Indonesia Sekolah M e n e n g a h A t a s ( S M A ) L e a v i n g Certificate Japan Grade 12 D i p l o m a from K o t o G a k k o Korea H i g h School Grade 12 D i p l o m a Malaysia S P M / S T P M or C O S C / C O H S C Singapore Singapore-Cambridge General Certificate o f Education ( G C E ) w i t h two A d v a n c e d level subjects Taiwan H i g h S c h o o l Grade 12 D i p l o m a Thailand United Kingdom and Commonwealth Passes in five G C E subjects, two o f w h i c h must be at the A d v a n c e d L e v e l Testing Service, C N 6151, Princeton, N e w Jersey, U S A . Applications are available at the A d v i s i n g Centre o f Capilano College. • Submission must be an original document sent directly to Capilano College by the Educational Testing Service OR • E L A (English Language Assessment Test) score o f at least 145 This test is written in Vancouver. Contact the Manager of the International Student Centre or the International Student A d v i s o r at Capilano C o l l e g e for further information OR • IELTS score o f 6.5 overall, with no score less than 6 c. Adult Basic Education (ABE) A l l applicants must be at least 19 years of age and been out o f school for one year or more. A d m i s s i o n to the program is based on a series o f assessment tests, including English, administered by the Adult Basic Education Department. The tests are administered at Capilano College. Information for International Students 47 Interested students should contact the ABE Department Some courses, for example some sciences w h i c h have a directly for assessment testing. laboratory component, the tuition fee is slightly higher. 4. Document Requirements 8. Health Insurance A l l applications must be accompanied by official and International students are not eligible to receive B r i t i s h original high school transcripts (record o f marks). Fax or C o l u m b i a M e d i c a l Plan Insurance ( B C M e d i c a r e ) until photocopies w i l l not be accepted. A certified translation they have lived in the province for three months. must accompany the transcript. Students must bring medical insurance with them from Applicants who have attended college or university need their home country, or purchase such insurance from to submit only the transcript from their most recent private insurers once i n Canada. institution. Applications for B C M e d i c a r e are available at the A d v i s - Applications for all programs except English as a Second ing Centre. Language must arrange to have either an original T O E F L or I E L T S score sent directly to Capilano College. 9. Services Applicants already i n the V a n c o u v e r area may present an a. International Student Advisor: Jean Berry E n g l i s h Language Assessment ( E L A ) test score. The International Student A d v i s o r gives assistance to international students both prior to and after their admis- 5. Special Consideration sion to the College and w i l l provide specific assistance to Some applicants may not meet all specified requirements applicants with student visa requirements, home stay to a university transfer, career, or vocational program, but accommodation, social and special programs, educational may be offered admission to a program comprised o f up counselling and orientation. to three E S L courses plus one or two academic/career/ vocational courses. b. International Student Counsellor: Ethelyn Mclnnes-Rankin 6. Deadline Dates The counsellors at Capilano C o l l e g e are professionals trained to provide a variety o f counselling services a. Applications: designed to promote and support student's academic • F o r F a l l T e r m (September to December): 15 July • F o r Spring T e r m (January to A p r i l ) : 15 November • F o r Summer T e r m ( M a y to August): 15 M a r c h Applications received after these dates cannot be guaranteed consideration i n time for admission to the term. Applications received after these dates w i l l , i f necessary, be considered for the f o l l o w i n g term. A s soon as possible after the application deadline dates noted above and as l o n g as space is available. 7. Fees Application: $100.00 Tuition: The fee for most courses is $705.00 per term For Example: 5 courses for one term (4 months) = 5 x $705.00 = $3,525.00 4 courses for one term (4 months) = 4 x $705.00 = $2,820.00 48 educational counselling, career counselling, and personal counselling. c. A n International C l u b on campus provides opportunities for Canadian and international students to interact i n social, recreational, and learning activities. Contact the b. Accompanying Documentation (Transcripts; Language Test Results): Information for International Students success, identification and achievement o f appropriate career goals, and personal growth. Services include International Student Counsellor for details. International Asia Pacific Management Co-op Program T h i s program, unique in Canada, enrolled its first class in Programs business management training for Indonesian managers, and a business linkage project in Thailand. 1987 and was an immediate success. Over 200 students have completed work terms i n A s i a . A two-year graduate d i p l o m a program in A s i a Pacific studies and business, it is open to students who normally have completed an undergraduate degree from a recognized university or those w h o are sponsored by their employer. Other International Courses A number o f individual programs offered in the A c a demic Studies/University Transfer and Career/Vocational divisions have specific courses providing international content. Some o f them are optional, while others are an C o m b i n i n g an examination o f culture, history, language, integral part o f the curriculum leading to a college business, politics, and economics o f Pacific R i m regions degree, diploma or certificate. Examples o f these w i l l be over the course o f a full time, nine-month intensive found in the relevant sections o f this calendar in Business period at the College, and followed by a co-operative Management, B i o l o g y , Geography, History, Political w o r k experience o f 12 months, usually overseas, gradu- Studies and Sociology. ates become immediately involved i n w o r k i n g with industry i n development and trade-related business. See Post-Graduate Programs section for details. The Languages Department currently schedules first-year university level courses in French, German, and Spanish as w e l l as first year level i n Japanese, M a n d a r i n , Chinese and T h a i . English as a Second Language courses provide CANASEAN foreign and new immigrant students a variety o f interme- C A N A S E A N is another unique program at the College, diate and advanced courses to help improve competency specifically designed to meet the needs o f business men in English for work, daily life, and post-secondary study. and women in Canada and from countries forming part o f English language training is also offered in the summer; the Association o f South East A s i a n Nations ( A S E A N ) these home-stay programs are designed for groups only. plus C h i n a . B e g u n in the mid-1980s as a short seminar/ workshop series, it now has become a four-month International Exchanges program. In the F a l l term, A S E A N managers take part in intensive training on campus and with local enterprises The College has been active for a number o f years in on business and culture, plus a period o f j o b observation promoting exchanges with colleges, universities and understanding how Canadian businesses work and how other agencies outside Canada. Students from Capilano business can be developed between Canada and A s i a . College and Japanese institutions have exchanged as have T h i s project is w h o l l y funded by ministries o f the federal and provincial governments. Interested applicants should contact the C A N A S E A N Manager. Thailand, and Open University o f H o C h i M i n h C i t y in faculty from Rajamangala Institute o f Technology, Custom-Designed Programs F r o m time to time, the C o l l e g e offers specific programs designed to meet the needs o f particular groups, industries, governments or agencies. In recent years, these included programs i n international tourism management, E n g l i s h language culture, the Chinese Summer School and .small business entrepreneurship. Vietnam. Capilano College and A i c h i Gakusen C o l l e g e o f Toyota C i t y , Japan established a special relationship i n 1983 w h i c h provides for the annual exchange o f students between the two colleges. U p to three Capilano College female students study and work at A i c h i Gakusen from late September until m i d winter. E a c h student is provided with a scholarship o f Y 7 5 0 , 0 0 0 (approx. C d n . $7,500), a Vancouver-TokyoNagoya round trip ticket and free tuition in a special program o f studies specifically tailored to the individual International Projects and Initiatives student. The total value o f the scholarship is approxi- W i t h a particular focus on Pacific R i m endeavours, mately C d n . $20,000 for each student. Capilano C o l l e g e has been and continues to be involved Formal agreements have been signed with other postsecondary educational institutions i n C h i n a , M a l a y s i a , Thailand, Japan and other countries o f the Pacific R i m which w i l l continue to enhance opportunities for exchange. in development and training activities in Malaysia, the Philippines, T h a i l a n d , Japan, Indonesia, V i e t n a m and the People's R e p u b l i c o f C h i n a . Current examples include curriculum development at a university in V i e t n a m , small International Programs 49 A special exchange agreement with Kushiro Public University in Japan provides for faculty exchange annually. As a member of a number of international education training associations in Canada and the United States, the College is able to provide a variety of opportunities for students and faculty to study, travel, or work overseas. International 5H Programs Preparatory ADULT BASIC EDUCATION/PRE-COLLEGE LEVEL COURSES Many students who enter Capilano College require precollege level courses to meet entry level requirements for a particular college program, or to upgrade their academic skills from basic literacy to the Provincial Level (grade twelve equivalent standing Diploma). Students who have been out of school for a number of years and want to resume their education often find that the Adult Basic Education program best meets their needs. Most courses in the program are self-paced and may be taken on a part-time basis. Full-time students attend classes in which they work up to five hours a day in the classroom with college instructors. In addition, some courses require independent study outside of class. The level of courses in the Adult Basic Education program ranges from Basic Literacy to Provincial (grade twelve) level. Many of the upper-level courses, taken alone or as part of a larger program of studies, will meet entry requirements for Academic Studies and Career/ Vocational Programs. The pre-college level courses which are offered by a number of Academic departments at the College are designed to upgrade students who lack course prerequisites for Academic Studies and Career/Vocational programs. Many of these courses are taught in two hour classes that meet twice a week for an academic term (16 weeks). In addition, considerable independent study is required outside of the formal instruction period. There are also (like Adult Basic Education) some flexible selfstudy courses available in Math. Either the Adult Basic Education Program or the preparatory courses offered in the Academic Studies departments may satisfy your upgrading needs. Students should refer to the Adult Basic Education section of the calendar or contact the Program Coordinator. For information on other preparatory courses consult the Advising Centre or Counselling. Programs PRE-COLLEGE LEVEL COURSES For students who do not have some of the course prerequisites for Academic Studies or Career programs, the College offers upgrading and flexible self-study courses. For complete course descriptions, refer to specific sections of Academic Studies. C H E M 030 (3) Introduction t o Chemistry Prerequisite: none This course is designed for those students who have had no previous chemistry and wish to go on in science. ENGL 010 Language Skills (3) Prerequisite: EDT Placement (see English) An intensive course in basic language skills to enable students to proceed without difficulty to an academic college program. Curriculum will evolve from the assessed needs of the students. M A T H 009 Arithmetic (1) (0,3* 0)(SU,F S,) f f Prerequisite: none A review of basic arithmetic operations. Applications to percentage, ratio, proportions, areas and volumes. This is a self-paced course primarily intended for returning students who require basic math refresher. •Students are generally required to attend three scheduled hours per week for this course. M A T H 090 (1.5) (4\0,0)(SU.F.S) Introductory A l g e b r a w i t h Functions Prerequisite: Math 11 with at least a "C-" grade or permission of a Mathematics instructor. Develops the concepts of introductory algebra with emphasis on the real number system, the algebra of exponents, and polynomial arithmetic at the elementary level. This course is intended for students who require a basic introduction to algebra. *This course meets four hours per week for seven weeks (half of a term). Preparatory Programs — Pre-College Level Courses 53 MATH 095 (1.5) (4*,0,0)(SU,F,S) Intermediate Algebra with Functions Prerequisite.MATH 010 or M A T H 090 or B M T H 045 with at least a " C - " grade, or Math 11 with at least a " C " grade, or permission of a Mathematics instructor. Develops the concepts of intermediate algebra including polynomials, rational expressions, radical expressions, quadratic equations and an introduction to logarithms. This course is intended for students who have already completed a basic introduction to algebra. *Four hours per week for seven weeks (half of a term) or two hours per week for the full term. ACHIEVEMENT RESOURCE CENTRE CREDIT COURSES Contact: 984-4945 ARC 100 (3) Strategies for Student Success (3,0,0) (F,S) Learn and adopt attitudes and methods that promote success in college. A R C faculty co-teach this course with Counselling faculty. This course includes: memory techniques, time management, reading a textbook with improved retention, test taking tips, note taking strategies, using college resources, communication skills, stress management, goal setting, and career exploration. ARC 110 Reading Dynamics (3) (3,0,0) (F,S) A 3 credit course in which participants learn and practice flexible reading skills. Strategies for developing reading comprehension are also included. ARC 105 (3) College Reading and Study Skills (3,0,1) (F,S) Students may not enrol in A R C 100 and A R C 105 concurrently. Learn and adopt methods and attitudes that promote success in college. This course includes: memory techniques, time management, test taking and note taking. The reading component addresses problems college students have with textbook comprehension, vocabulary, critical reading and retaining information from texts. Preparatory 54 Programs — Achievement Resource Centre Adult ADULT BASIC EDUCATION Basic Education G . B . R U D O L P H , B . S c . ( U B C ) , B . C . Teacher's Cert., M.Ed. (UBC) Contact: Sechelt Campus: 885-9310 ( T o l l Free: 987-1535) J. S O U T H E R S T , B . A . , B . E d . ( U B C ) , B . C . Teacher's Cert. Squamish Campus: 892-5322 (Toll Free: 986-3515) J . B . T A L L O N , B . A . , (Hons.)(Carleton), B . E d . ( U . o f T ) , N o r t h V a n c o u v e r Campus: 984-4971, R o o m B R 3 4 4 B . C . Teacher's Cert. Please note: Offerings and procedures at Sechelt Campus A . G . T H O M L I N S O N , B . A . , M . S c . ( U B C ) , B . C . Teach- and Squamish Campus are slightly different. Contact the er's Cert. local A B E coordinator. R . W E D E L , B . A . ( S F U ) , B . C . Teacher's Cert. Instructional Faculty D . E . Y O U N G , B . A . ( S F U ) , S . R . N . (London), S . C . M . D . J . A T H A I D E , B . S c , (Hons.) ( M c G i l l ) , M . S c . ( U B C ) , (Scotland), D i p . T . N . (London), M . F . A . ( U B C ) B . C . Teacher's Cert. D. B E N T L E Y , General Information T . R . B R A N D , B . S c . ( S F U ) , B . E d . ( U B C ) , Teachers Cert The A d u l t Basic Education ( A B E ) Program enables y o u M . C . C A I R N S , B . S c . (Math) (Calgary), A l t a . Teach. to upgrade your knowledge o f E n g l i s h , Mathematics, Cert. B i o l o g y , Chemistry, Earth Sciences, Physics, Geography, M . D E K K E R , B . S c . (Hons.) ( U . o f A . ) , I N G . (Amster- History, Social Studies and Computers. Y o u may select dam) D i p . Computer Management (Cap. C o l l . ) from one to five subjects, depending upon your educa- B . D R U R Y , B . S c . (Brock) tional and occupational goals. Y o u can pursue any o f the J . F I E L D , B . S c . ( U V i c ) , P h . D . (University o f Queens- following goals: land) • preparation for employment • personal desire to upgrade or refresh mastery o f a • secondary school qualifications demanded by employers C . B . M A C L E A N , B.Ed. (SFU), M . E d . ( U B C ) • • vocational training (including apprenticeships) career training G . N E W M A N , B . A . (Hons.), Post-graduate Certificate o f • technical training V . G I E S B R E C H T , B . A . (Western Washington U ) , M . E d . ( U B C ) , B . C . Teacher's Cert. subject J. H I N D , B . A . (1st Class Hons.) ( S F U ) , M . A . ( U B C ) P. H O D G S O N , B . A . (Hons), B . E d . (Queen's) M . E d . (UBC) Education (Leeds University), B . C . Teacher's Cert. • academic studies (including college and university J. P A S S , B . A . ( U B C ) , B . C . Teacher's Cert. programs) P. PI, B . S c . ( M c G i l l ) , M . S c . ( U . o f M a n . ) , B . C . Teacher's The program operates year-round, offering instruction in Certificate two-hour classes. B o t h self-paced and term-paced classes M . R A W S T H O R N E , M.Ed. (UBC), R.D.N. are offered. Placement in courses is based on pre- J. R O S E , B . A . (Western), B . C . Teacher's Cert., M . E d . registration assessment o f academic background. (UBC) Courses Fundamental Intermediate Advanced Provincial Level BENG BSCI 021* 031* 040 or 0 4 1 * 042* 021 032* BMTH 021* 031* BCHM 041 or 045 * 041 046 042 BESC 041 BPHY 041 BBIO 041 or 042 —*Choose 2 —*Choose 3 042 042 BGEO 042 BHST 042 BSOC 031* 041 BCMP 031 041 042 * Required for Certificate or D i p l o m a A d v a n c e d math is a prerequisite for Provincial L e v e l For further details please arrange an assessment/interview by phoning 984-4971. Preparatory Programs — Adult Basic Education 55 M a n y students benefit by enrolling i n A . B . E . courses transfer credit toward A B E certificates and the Provincial while registered i n academic or career/vocational pro- Diploma. grams at the College. The program also offers instruction for students preparing Students who need more than four months to complete a for the General Education Development (Grade 12 course may re-register i f they are attending and progress Equivalency) tests. is satisfactory. Students who finish a course before the Advanced and Provincial level A . B . E . courses may also end o f the term may immediately register for the next be used for transfer credit towards a B . C . A d u l t Senior higher course i n the given subject. H i g h enrolment may Secondary School Graduation Certificate. necessitate limiting students to a m a x i m u m o f 3 classes in a subject area. Course Descriptions Class times are as follows: M o r n i n g classes: 8:30 a.m. and 10:30 a.m. English Afternoon classes: M o n d a y - 1 2 : 3 0 p.m. and 2:30 p.m., BENG 021 Tuesday, Wednesday and Thursday-2:30 p.m., Fundamental Level English: Essential Writing F r i d a y - 1 : 3 0 p.m. Skills, Spelling a n d W o r d Attack. E v e n i n g classes: 7:00 p.m. (F.S) A n introductory Fundamental course in reading and in writing o f sentences and short paragraphs. Admission Requirements Students should be at least 18 years o l d and preferably out o f the public school system for a m i n i m u m o f one year. Exceptions w i l l only be made with departmental BENG 031 (F,S,SU) Intermediate Level English: Mechanics, Basic Skills a n d Paragraph W r i t i n g . approval. Students should apply at least three months A n Intermediate course i n writing. M o s t A B E students prior to anticipated date o f entry. enter the English program at this level. Students write a series of paragraphs and two longer compositions. Registration Students are interviewed before registration i n order to determine the course(s) or program which best meets their educational goals. Regular attendance and satisfactory progress are conditions for re-registration in A B E courses. Students may be directed to other programs i f their attendance and performance in A B E does not match their stated educational goals. ABE Certificates & Diploma The A B E Program offers courses at four levels as outlined in the table: The Provincial Diploma, issued by the M i n i s t r y o f Education S k i l l s and Training, provides an alternate route for adults to achieve a grade twelve standing to postsecondary institutions in B . C . BENG 040 (F.S.SU) A d v a n c e d Level English: Short Report W r i t i n g Prerequisite: B E N G 031 A short-report writing course with a vocational/technical emphasis in its subject matter and approaches to writing. Students develop the summarizing, note-taking, and outlining skills necessary to organize information from a variety o f sources into well-written reports. BENG 041 (F.S.SU) A d v a n c e d English: A d v a n c e d Report W r i t i n g Prerequisite: B E N G 031 A n advanced course in short-report writing. Students develop the summarizing, note-taking, and outlining skills necessary to organize information from a variety o f sources into well-written reports. B E N G 041 has a Intermediate & Advanced Certificates are issued by technical/academic emphasis i n its subject matter and Capilano C o l l e g e and provide prerequisites for career and approaches to writing and includes introductory work in vocational programs throughout the province. literary analysis and evaluation for students proceeding to Fundamental level instruction provides basic reading & B E N G 042. writing skills and number skills. A B E Certificates also satisfy most employers' requirements. Certain high school courses may qualify as Preparatory Programs —Adult Basic Education 56 BENG 042 (F.S.SU) Provincial Level English: Critical Reading a n d Essay W r i t i n g Prerequisite: 7 0 % i n B E N G 041 BCMP 041 (F.S) A d v a n c e d Level C o m p u t e r Studies Prerequisite: B C M P 031 A paced, graded course offering both an introduction to A P r o v i n c i a l level course in essay writing. Students commonly used business software and essential computer study and write a variety o f essays to prepare for written concepts and terminology. Software used includes: word work at the university-transfer level or equivalent i n processing, spreadsheets, databases, graphics, M S - D O S d i p l o m a programs. B E N G 042 has an academic/literary and W i n d o w s . Computer concepts include examination emphasis i n its subject matter and approaches to writing. of: processors, storage devices, input/output devices, computer communications, security, ethics, ergonomics, Social Studies and purchasing considerations. BSOC 031 B C M P 042 Intermediate L e v e l Social Studies (S) Provincial Level C o m p u t e r Studies A n introduction to the fundamental principles o f E c o nomics, Canadian history, government legal system and the development o f analytical and interpretive skills. BSOC 041 (F) Prerequisite: B C M P 041 and M a t h 10 or B M T H 031 with a m i n i m u m " B - " standing, or permission o f the instructor. A paced, graded course offering an introduction to computer programming and an introduction to the use o f A d v a n c e d Level Social Studies the Internet. In the programming portion, students w i l l A study o f economic, political, and social issues i n analyse problems, design solutions, develop Q B A S I C Canada and i n some neighbouring countries. programs, test, debug and document the software they Students w i l l learn basic skills o f social analysis that w i l l write. In the Internet portion, students w i l l learn to enhance their ability to participate i n decisions and connect to the Net, send e-mail, transfer files, search the policies that affect their economic, political and social W o r l d W i d e W e b for information and develop their o w n interests. web pages. B G E O 042 A d v a n c e d Level G e o g r a p h y (S) Mathematics B M T H 021 A study o f the peoples o f British C o l u m b i a , their (F.S.SU) Fundamental Level Mathematics physical environments and the basis o f their economies. Students w i l l learn to assess the adaptation of people to their physical environment and to the natural resources it provides. A prime objective w i l l be to judge the sustainability o f B r i t i s h C o l u m b i a communities, their landscapes and resources. BHST 042 Provincial Level History W h o l e numbers, fractions, decimals, ratio and proportion, percent, powers and roots, averages and graphs. This course is designed to prepare students for an Intermediate course i n mathematics. B M T H 031 Intermediate Level Mathematics (S) A survey o f 20th Century History including major issues in present day Geopolitics. Introductory algebra and elementary plane and solid geometry. This course is designed to prepare students for an A d v a n c e d course in mathematics. B M T H 041 Computer Studies B C M P 031 (F.S.SU) (F.S.SU) A d v a n c e d Level M a t h - Business Mathematics (F.S) Prerequisite: B M T H 031 with at least a " C " Intermediate Level C o m p u t e r Studies A paced, credit course offering an introduction to commonly used business software such as word processing, spreadsheets and databases. A l s o included is an introduc- Business mathematics; statistics; formulas used i n business and industry; simple and compound interest; discounts, investments. It is the equivalent o f Business M a t h 11. tion to M S - D O S and Windows; disk and file management. Preparatory Programs — Adult Basic Education 57 B M T H 045 (F,S,SU) A d v a n c e d Level M a t h - A l g e b r a & T r i g o n o m e t r y Prerequisite: population concerns. Laboratory exercises are included. Prepares students for many career/vocational programs. B M T H 031 or equivalent with at least a BBIO 042 Provincial Level Biology "B-" (F.S.SU) R e v i e w o f real numbers, powers, laws o f exponents; polynomials and rational expressions, factoring, quadratic equations, m a x i m a and m i n i m a ; functions and relations; Prerequisites: S C I 032 or Science 10 and E n g l i s h 11 or equivalent or B E N G 031 as a co-requisite quadratic functions; transformations o f relations; circle Topics include cell structure and function, cell division, geometry, theorems and proofs; trigonometry, right and cell metabolism, photosynthesis, human biology, includ- oblique triangles, functions o f angles i n standard position. ing reproduction genetics, digestion, circulation, i m m u - A n A B E A d v a n c e d Certificate course, B M T H 045 is nity, respiration, excretion, nervous system, hormones. designed to prepare students for a precalculus course. It is Includes laboratory investigations. Prepares students for the equivalent o f M a t h 11 or M a t h 090/095. college level post-secondary programs for w h i c h B i o l o g y 12 is a prerequisite. B M T H 046 (F,S,SU) B C H M 041 A d v a n c e d Level Chemistry Provincial Level M a t h - A l g e b r a a n d Trigonometry Prerequisite: B M T H 045 or equivalent with at least a " B - " S o l v i n g linear, absolute value, quadratic, and rational Prerequisites: Science 10 (F.S.SU) B M T H 031 or M a t h 10, and B S C I 032 or inequalities; analyzing, manipulating and graphing Introduction to atomic theory, periodicity, bonding, functions, approximating the roots o f p o l y n o m i a l ; naming compounds, mole concept, chemical reactions, graphing rational functions; exponential and logarithmic gases, solutions. Optional topics include organic chemis- functions; trigonometric functions, analytic trigonometry; try, nuclear chemistry, industrial chemistry. Includes series and sequences; complex numbers; conic sections. laboratory exercises. Prepares students for college A n A B E P r o v i n c i a l Certificate course, B M T H 046 is a science courses and many career/vocational programs. precalculus course for students intending to enrol i n a equivalent o f M a t h 12 or M a t h 105. B C H M 042 Provincial Level Chemistry Sciences Prerequisites: B C H M 041 or Chemistry 11 Corequisite: B M T H 045 or M a t h 11 first year program i n sciences or mathematics. It is the BSCI 021 (F.S.SU) Fundamental Level General Science A n introduction to the basic scientific concepts and language o f general science. BSCI 032 Intermediate Level General Science (F.S.SU) Basic scientific principles i n biology, chemistry and physics needed to progress to higher level science courses. BBIO 041 (F.S.SU) B S C I 032 or Science 10 and E n g l i s h 11 or equivalent or B E N G 031 as co-requisite. Topics include cell structure and function, cell division, evolution, microbe and plant structure and diversity, behavioural ecology, biosphere, ecosystems, human Preparatory 58 Topics include shapes o f molecules, thermochemistry, rates o f reactions, chemical equilibrium, solubility, acids and bases, oxidation-reduction, electrochemistry. O p tional topics include nuclear chemistry, organic chemistry. Includes laboratory investigations. Prepares students for college chemistry and technology programs for w h i c h Chemistry 12 is a prerequisite. BESC 041 (F.S) A d v a n c e d Level Earth a n d Environmental Sciences A d v a n c e d Level Biology Prerequisite: (F.S.SU) Programs — Adult Basic Education Prerequisites: B S C I 032 or Science 10 A n introduction to the earth sciences, w i t h environmental applications and a British C o l u m b i a emphasis. Areas o f study include earth materials, notably minerals, rocks and mining; water, including sources, processes and contamination, and natural earth hazards, such as earthquakes and volcanoes, landslides and flooding. Laboratory investigations and field trips are involved. Prepares students for further courses i n physical and social sciences. BPHY 041 (F.S.SU) Advanced Level Physics Prerequisites: B M T H 031 or Mathematics 10, and B S C I 032 or Science 10 Corequisite: B M T H 045 Introduces motion, forces, vectors, gravitation, momentum, work, power, energy, electricity, series and parallel circuits, electric fields, rotational motion, light, magnetism, waves, heat. Includes laboratory investigations. Prepares students for college courses and many career/ vocational programs. BPHY 042 Provincial Level Physics Prerequisites: Corequisite: (F.S.SU) B P H Y 041 or Physics 11 B M T H 045 or M a t h 11 Topics include kinematics, dynamics, vectors, work and energy, circular motion, momentum, rotational motion, equilibrium, electrostatics, circuits and instruments, electromagnetic induction, waves, sound, electromagnetic waves, optics. Includes laboratory investigations. Prepares students for college physics and technology programs for w h i c h Physics 12 is a prerequisite. Preparatory Programs — Adult Basic Education 59 Adult Special Education ALTERNATIVE CAREER TRAINING Admission Requirements Foundations Program The A C T Foundations Program is in session for eight Contact Person: Terry Byrnes, Coordinator, Room months (two terms), and classes are offered for eight weeks, with community work/volunteer practicums Birch 357, Phone 984-1711. offered for an additional eight weeks per term. Entry is Instructional Faculty class work with self-selected volunteer or employment by referral and interview. Students may combine their in- Terry B Y R N E S , M . A . (UVic) R. D A M O N training sites based upon aptitude, attitude, ability and interest. Jann GIBBS, R.P.N., R.S.W. Each candidate is interviewed by the Program faculty Priscilla S T A N B U R Y , B . A . (UBC), Cert, of Ed. and a maximum of 14 students will be admitted. Some (London) students may elect to take the Program part-time and students may be accepted for a second year by faculty Laverne T H O M P S O N , M . E d . (Lesley College) permission. Appointments for interviews take place between January General Information 15 and April 15, with interviews and letters to the The Alternative Career Training Foundations Program is successful candidates sent by May 30. an employment exploration program with a unique focus and approach. The program is based on a developmental perspective and is committed to working with adults with special learning needs. Students are educated to accept the responsibilities of independent living as young adults, Course Descriptions A C T P 001 (3) Job Search A n d M a i n t e n a n c e Techniques as well as the demands of competitive entry-level em- The focus of this course is to encourage students' needs ployment, and will be able to address any social or to develop and use job search techniques and appropriate emotional issues which could act as barriers to employ- employment behaviours. Students will also be encour- ment. The A C T Program combines in-class instruction with practical work experience, emphasizing the develop- aged to practice self-advocacy in terms of their employment needs. ment or maintenance of skills which may be used in Personal goals will be set and monitored throughout the A C T P 002 (3) Occupational Preparation A n d Safety In T h e Workplace year. The focus of this course provides students with practical Student Profile experience in a work situation including preparation prior employment situations. Students meet with faculty to discuss an individual course plan that best fits their needs. to placement and follow-up concluding the practicum. Students who will find the A C T Program beneficial are learning or developmentally delayed. In addition, they may present any or all of the following characteristics: a) difficulty grasping academic information (for example, mathematical problem solving, reading print, writing) b) persons with a disability. A C T P 005 (3) Visual A n d Print C o m m u n i c a t i o n Skills The focus of this course is to extend students' awareness, knowledge and understanding of communication skills required for obtaining employment and their ability to Students who will obtain the most benefit from the A C T communicate effectively using a variety of mediums (eg. Program are those who have reached a moderate level of computer, printed words, signs). independence (i.e. they are responsible for self-care; they travel independently locally; they have had some work or volunteer experience; they can articulate several areas of interest or a willingness to try various work sites). Class time is comprised of discussions, talks, worksheets, field trips, role-plays and hands-on experience. Students will be given instruction in computer skills, Word Perfect 5 and Microsoft programs will be used. Preparatory Programs — Adult Special Education 60 A C T P 006 (3) Leisure Education T o assist students to clarify their leisure interests and values and use their leisure time more constructively. Students w i l l be encouraged to become more aware o f their o w n feelings and beliefs about leisure so that future leisure decisions w i l l be by their o w n choice and from their o w n value system. A C T P 007 (3) C o n s u m e r Preparation This course provides students with strategies and opportunities to practice and improve a range o f consumer related skills. A C T P 008 (3) Interpersonal C o m m u n i c a t i o n s T h i s course provides students with an opportunity to discuss and develop the skills involved with effectively communicating in a diverse range o f interpersonal roles and relationships. (Friend, neighbour, consumer, citizen). A C T P 009 (3) W o r k Experience T o give the student a practical experience in a work situation including preparation prior to placement and follow-up concluding the practicum. Preparatory Programs — Adult Special Education 61 English as a Second Language ENGLISH AS A SECOND LANGUAGE Documents a n d Official Transcripts Contact: E S L Department, Office B i r c h 344, Official records (grade reports, transcripts, etc.) o f all secondary, post-secondary or equivalent education must Phone 984-4971, F A X 984-1718 be submitted with the application, whether or not the course o f study has been completed. These records Instructional Faculty should indicate the individual courses studied and the J. A C O S T A , B . A . (Calif.), E . S . L . Cert. (San Francisco State U . ) marks or grades received. If your records are i n a language other than English, please provide certified English translations and the original documents. R e - D . B O U V I E R , B . A . ( L o n d o n School o f Economics), P G C E Postgraduate Certificate in Education (London placeable documents submitted i n support o f your University), M . A . ( U C S D ) application become the property o f the C o l l e g e and w i l l not be returned. Other documents w i l l be returned, upon N . J . C O L L I N S , B . A . (London), M . A . Professional request. Teaching Cert. ( U B C ) M . F R Y , B . E d . , M . E d . ( U B C ) , B . C . Professional Teaching Cert. If any document is i n a name different to that under which application is made, proof o f change o f name S. H A L S A L L , B . A . ( S F U ) , M . B . A . ( M c G i l l ) (marriage certificate, court order, etc.) is required. W . H U G H E S , B . I . S . (Waterloo), M . F . A . ( U B C ) , T . E . S . L . Cert. ( V C C ) D . J O H N S T O N E , B . A . , M . A . , T E S L (American Univer- Application Fee Canadian Citizens or permanent residents: A non- sity i n Cairo) J. R I T C H I E , B . A . , M . A . , ( S t . F . X . ) A d u l t Education refundable fee o f $20 must accompany your A p p l i c a t i o n A . S E D K Y , B . A . , M . A . , P h . D . ( A i n Shams University) for A d m i s s i o n . A. SOUZA, B.A., M.A. (UBC) International Students: A non-refundable fee o f $100 L . T A M O R I , B . A . , M . A . ( U T ) , T . E . S . L . Cert. (George B r o w n College) (Canadian funds) must accompany your A p p l i c a t i o n for Admission. E . W 1 T K O W S K I , M . A . (Jaqiellonian), B . C . Professional Address all applications to: Teaching Cert. L . Z H A N G , B . A . , M . A . , (Nanjing), M . E d . ( U . o f Alta.), Admissions, Office o f the Registrar B C / A l b e r t a Professional Teaching Cert. Capilano College 2055 Purcell W a y E n g l i s h as a Second Language ( E S L ) courses offer North Vancouver, B . C . , Canada permanent residents and international students a variety of Intermediate, A d v a n c e d and College Preparatory Telephone (604) 984-4913 Fax (604) 984-1798 E n g l i s h courses to help them improve their competency i n E n g l i s h for work, daily life, and post-secondary study. Courses cover reading, writing, speaking, listening and grammar skills. E S L courses are offered part-time day and evening. Admission Once all documents and records have been received, we w i l l consider your application. If y o u are admitted, the College w i l l send y o u an official Letter o f Admittance by mail. Admission Procedures/Requirements English Language Requirements Application A p p l i c a t i o n for A d m i s s i o n forms are available from Canadian Citizens a n d P e r m a n e n t Residents Admissions, Office o f the Registrar. Once students are accepted, they w i l l be contacted by the E S L department to come i n and write the E S L placement test. Students who wish to enrol in E S L as w e l l as other courses in A c a d e m i c Studies, Career, Vocational, or A d u l t Basic Education courses should refer to the General Information- A d m i s s i o n section o f calendar, under C . English Language Requirements see " 3 . Special." Applications and supporting official transcripts and documents should be submitted to Admissions, Office o f the Registrar by the f o l l o w i n g dates: F a l l T e r m (Sept. to D e c ) : July 1 Spring T e r m (Jan. to A p r . ) : October 1 Summer T e r m ( M a y to A u g . ) : February 1 Preparatory 62 Programs — English as a Second Language International Students ESL.038 For the English as a Second Language Program (ESL) the College requires one of the following: • a valid English Language Assessment (ELA) score of 55-144 OR • a valid Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL) score of 400-560, plus the ESL Department Placement Test. Listening & Reading & Writing & Sneaking Vocabulary Grammar Lower Intermediate ESL.031 ESL.038 ESL.039 Upper Intermediate ESL.041 ESL.048 ESL.049 Lower Intermediate Reading a n d Vocabulary Lower Advanced Upper Advanced ESL.051 ESL.061 ESL.058 ESL.068 ESL.059 ESL.069 College Prep Level I College Prep Level II College Prep Level III ESL.071 ESL.081 ESL.091 ESL.078 ESL.088 ESL.098 ESL.079 ESL.089 ESL.099 (3) (4,0,0)(F.S.Su) The focus of this course is on the development of basic reading, comprehension and vocabulary skills while learning skimming and scanning, identifying main ideas, using the dictionary, using context clues, and understanding and stating pronoun referents. ESL.039 (3) (4,0,0)(F.S.Su) Lower Intermediate G r a m m a r a n d W r i t i n g This course prepares students with the grammar and writing skills required for higher level courses such as ESL. 049. Upper Intermediate Level Courses ESL.041 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) U p p e r Intermediate Listening a n d Speaking Course Descriptions Lower Intermediate Level Courses E S L 031 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) L o w e r Intermediate Listening a n d Speaking This course helps students develop the listening and speaking skills required for the Upper Intermediate Level. Course topics include idioms, formal/informal English, oral reports, listening practice, vocabulary and pronounciation. ESL. 033 (3) Introduction t o Canadian Culture (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) This course provides an introduction to Canada. Students will practise their speaking, reading, writing and listening skills while studying such topics as Canadian culture, history, geography, and education. ESL. 034 (F,S,Su) (1.5) (2,0,0) This course helps students develop the listening and speaking skills required for the Advanced Level. Course topics include idioms, impromptu speeches, oral reports, relaxed conversational forms, pronunciation, and listening practice. ESL.048 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) Upper Intermediate Reading a n d V o c a b u l a r y This course is designed to improve students' reading comprehension and vocabulary in preparation for the Advanced Level. Course topics include identifying main ideas and details, vocabulary development, word families and context clues. ESL.049 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) U p p e r Intermediate Writing a n d G r a m m a r This course helps students develop the grammar and writing skills required for the Advanced Level. Stress is on sentence structure, grammar, and short writing assignments. ' L o w e r Intermediate Pronunciation This course prepares students to discover, recognize and use English word stress, sentence stress, intonation patterns and high-frequency vowels and consonants. ESL. 035 (F.S.Su) (1.5) (2.0,0) Educational Studies f o r ESL Learners This course combines all four language skills of writing, reading, speaking and listening in order to integrate the ESL experience as a whole, and to identify ESL related problems in the four skill areas. Lower Advanced Level Courses ESL.051 (3) (4.0.0) (F.S.Su) Lower A d v a n c e d Listening 8c Speaking This course assists students in developing the listening and speaking skills required for the Upper Advanced Level. The focus will be on idioms, relaxed speech structures, listening to lectures, oral presentations, rhythm, stress and intonation. Preparatory Programs — English as a Second Language 63 ESL. 053 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) Reading Plus - Western Studies College Preparatory English College Preparatory English Level I This course is designed to improve students' reading skills as w e l l as i m p r o v i n g understanding o f Western culture. Through reading newspaper articles and literary stories, students w i l l acquire knowledge and skills needed for ESL. 071 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) College Preparatory English Level I — Listening & Speaking studying successfully in Canada. This course helps students improve their oral and listen- ESL. 058 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) Lower Advanced Reading and Vocabulary ing skills to prepare them for college studies. Students w i l l practise speaking through speeches, This course introduces students to reading skills and vocabulary development at the A d v a n c e d L e v e l . Stress w i l l be placed on i m p r o v i n g comprehension, increasing reading speed, using context clues and inferencing. dialogues, oral reports and summarizing. Through group work and role-playing, both formal and informal speech patterns w i l l be explored. Vocabulary development w i l l also be stressed as students incorporate new words and ESL. 059 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) Lower Advanced Writing and Grammar This course introduces more complex grammatical structures used in controlled and free paragraph writing. It prepares students for the sentence and writing skills expressions i n their speech. ESL. 078 (3) (4,0.0) (F.S.Su) College Preparatory English Level I — Reading 8c Vocabulary This course introduces the E S L student to the basic required for E S L . 069. reading and vocabulary skills necessary for entry into the A c a d e m i c and Career/Vocational D i v i s i o n s . Focus w i l l Upper A d v a n c e d Level Courses be on reading comprehension at the literary, inferential ESL. 061 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) Upper Advanced Listening and Speaking This course assists students in developing the listening and speaking skills required for College Preparatory English courses. The focus w i l l be on the comprehension and discussion o f academic lecture material, idioms and relaxed speech structures, oral reports, debates, listening and critical levels. Course material w i l l include sample texts from various content areas. ESL. 079 (3) (4.0.0) (F.S.Su) College Preparatory English Level I — Writing & Grammar This course w i l l focus on the paragraph as the standard medium for written communications. It w i l l also intro- improvement, rhythm and intonation. duce students to the essay as the standard m e d i u m for ESL. 068 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) Upper Advanced Reading & Vocabulary academic writing. The course w i l l continue to refine the usage of all grammatical structures. This course is designed to raise students' reading and vocabulary skills to the level where they can enter College College Preparatory English Level II Preparatory E n g l i s h courses. Focus w i l l be on recognizing ESL. 081 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) College Preparatory English Level II — Listening & Speaking different typco oi -viiting, organizational patterns, identifying point-of-view and inferencing. ESL. 069 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) Students w i l l learn to gain confidence in public speaking and listening to academic lectures. Various rhetorical Upper Advanced Writing 8c Grammar techniques, such as debating, w i l l be introduced. The emphasis i n this course is on composing at the para- Through group work and formal presentations, students graph level. The a i m o f this course is to bring E S L w i l l have many opportunities to become more effective students' writing skills up to the level required for College speakers and listeners. Preparatory E n g l i s h courses. Preparatory 64 Programs — English as a Second Language ESL. 088 (3) (4,0.0) (F,S) TOEFL PREPARATION COURSES College Preparatory English Level II — Reading 8c Vocabulary This course continues the development o f reading and vocabulary skills necessary for entry into the A c a d e m i c and Career/Vocational Divisions. The stress w i l l be on inferencing skills, context clues and critical reading. Students w i l l w o r k with sample reading texts from various content areas. ESL 089 •ESL.066 TOEFL Preparation I This course helps students improve their T O E F L scores. Students w i l l learn h o w to enhance their grammar, as w e l l as the listening and reading skills needed for the T O E F L test and other E n g l i s h proficiency tests. •ESL 067 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) (1.5)(2.0,0) (F.S.Su) (.5) (Su) TWE I - Preparation for Test of Written English College Preparatory English Level II — Writing & This course is designed for students for w h o m E n g l i s h is Grammar a second language. Its aim is to assess and improve T h i s course assists students in achieving proficiency i n writing essays at pre-college and pre-university level with a m i n i m u m o f E S L errors. Students w i l l develop strategies for a variety o f essay requirements for college and university courses. students' ability to write academic E n g l i s h that may be typical o f the kind required i n college. Students should have a m i n i m u m T O E F L score o f 490 or equivalent to register i n this course. *ESL. 076 (1.5)(2.0,0) (F.S.Su) TOEFL Preparation II College Preparatory English Level III ESL. 091 (3) A continuation o f E S L . 066 (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) *ESL 077 (.5) (Su) College Preparatory English Level III — Listening & Speaking TWE II - Preparation for Test of Written English Students w i l l practise giving both formal and informal A continuation o f E S L . 067. speeches, with emphasis on academic topics and current Students should have a m i n i m u m T O E F L score o f 520 or issues. There w i l l be many opportunities to sharpen equivalent or E S L . 067 i n order to register i n this course. communication skills by means o f research reports, interviews and formal debates. * These courses are fully funded by tuition fees paid, and ESL. 098 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) College Preparatory English Level III — Reading & Vocabulary w i l l be offered only i f there are enough students. The primary a i m o f this course is to provide E S L students with the necessary reading skills for entry into the A c a d e m i c and Career/Vocational Divisions. T h e focus o f this course w i l l be on academic reading strategies, determining an author's tone/point o f view and critical reading. Sample readings from various content areas w i l l be used. ESL. 099 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) College Preparatory English Level III — Writing & Grammar This course refines students' awareness o f the strategies for a variety o f essay structures required for college and university courses. The course w i l l also focus on sequencing o f ideas, essay organization skills, summarizing, paraphrasing, critical reading, evaluating sources and preparing a 1000-word processed research paper. Preparatory Programs — English as a Second Language 65 Speech Assisted Reading A n d Writing Foundations Program Students registered i n the class w i l l have a complete C o n t a c t P e r s o n : D o n K i r k b y , Coordinator, S A R A W computer station installed i n their residence. R o o m B i r c h 355, Phone 984-4971 - L o c a l 2552. S A R A W can also be installed into a students existing computer, provided it is a compatible system. This Instructional Faculty D. B E N T L E Y D . K I R K B Y , B . E . D . (Winnipeg) R. W E D E L , B . A . ( S F U ) , B C Teacher's Certificate system w i l l be on loan from Capilano C o l l e g e to the students for the length o f their registration i n the class. The S A R A W program uses trained tutors to assist students with the completion o f course w o r k as assigned by the instructor. A s the type o f tutorial assistant required by S A R A W learners is unique, the department General Information reserves the right to appoint specifically trained tutors to work with students registered i n the class. The S A R A W program offeres literacy upgrading to students who have physical disabilities, limited or no Students are encouraged to act i n a mature, independent speech and rely on the use o f l o w technological commu- manner regarding decision making, transportation and nication devices such as Cannon communicators, B l i s s y m b o l i c boards etc. Speech Assisted Reading and completion o f assignments. Transportation arrangements are the responsibility o f the student. W r i t i n g ( S A R A W ) offers an unprecedented range o f opportunities to explore and address the literacy needs o f Admission Requirements this unique group o f learners. Students interested i n enrolling in S A R A W classes must S A R A W classes at C a p i l a n o College's North Vancouver first arrange an interview with the department. They Campus enable students to upgrade their literacy level should be able to demonstrate a firm knowledge o f the using computers with adaptive, voice synthesized alphabet and the sounds related to each letter. They technology. should also be able to articulate a goal for literacy Students set goals for each semester w h i c h are evaluated on an ongoing basis. Some examples o f goals set by students are listed below. upgrading. Students w i l l be asked to produce a short writing sample to identify strengths and weaknesses i n reading and writing. 1. T o learn to read personal correspondence independently. Course Descriptions 2. T o improve the reading and understanding o f employment related print material. BENG 011 Basic Literacy Level English 3. T o achieve high school equivalency. A course in basic reading and writing. Students focus o n These goals are personal i n nature and represent the individual's o w n needs for literacy achievement. The the composition o f words and basic sentences. accumulation o f individual achievements may lead to formal higher eduction such as that offered by an A d u l t Basic Education program. The classes are held over two semesters (fall and spring), offering students self-paced instruction i n various time slots. Students must attend a m i n i m u m o f twenty hours per week. Graduates have accomplished this through various combinations of: 1. In-Iab instruction at the College 2. In-residence instruction 3. In-residence tutorials 4. Independent in-residence time 5. Independent lab time at the College Preparatory Programs — Speech Assisted Reading And Writing 66 (3) Academic Studies/University Transfer Academic Studies/University Transfer Associate in Arts and Science Degree A c a d e m i c transfer courses at Capilano College provide Capilano College offers Associate Degrees i n Arts and i n students with a variety o f options. Students can select a Science for two years o f university-level study i n accord- full program o f study equivalent to the first two years o f ance with the requirements outlined under the Gradua- university (see note on Course Selection and Advising), tion/Diplomas and Certificates section o f the Calendar. and can enroll on a full-time or part-time basis. A c a d e m i c Transfer courses are o f interest both to students who plan Diploma in Academic Studies to transfer to a university and to students who do not intend to continue to upper-level studies. Students who have completed the requirements o f any four term College program may receive a D i p l o m a in F o r those students who need extra help in basic skills, Academic Studies, provided they have fulfilled the Capilano C o l l e g e offers preparatory courses and aca- conditions as outlined under the Graduation/Diplomas demic support services (see notes on the W r i t i n g Centre, and Certificates section o f the Calendar. the A c h i e v e m e n t Resource Centre and the M a t h Learning Centre). Students interested i n special fields o f study such as Canadian Studies, Environmental Science, Women's Studies, or Labour Studies can select from innovative programs i n these areas (as offered from year to year). Transfer To and From Other Institutions The Arts and Sciences D i v i s i o n maintains transferability of its courses with other post-secondary institutions. T h e College's representatives meet regularly with those o f other institutions to ensure that Capilano's program o f A c a d e m i c instruction at Capilano College is both disci- first and second year courses are fully transferable as plinary and inter-disciplinary and is o f a high intellectual university courses. calibre. The College carefully reviews the content and the delivery methods o f its academic courses to ensure that those courses are current and that they continue to meet university standards. Students i n academic transfer courses should expect to work at least two to three hours outside o f class for every hour o f class time. T h e C o l l e g e offers a library collection and full media and There is agreement among all public B . C . colleges to accept each other's credits upon transfer, i f applicable to a program given in the admitting college, and given suitable equivalency. C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e reserves the rignt to review individual course credit. Transfer credits are granted to students on admission for acceptable work done at other institutions; the transfer credits reduce the total number o f credits w h i c h are reference services to complement the courses o f study. required at Capilano College for a certificate, diploma, or T h e A r t s and Science D i v i s i o n offers a range o f courses Associate Degree. Students wishing transfer credit in various disciplines which are grouped in four divisions should present suitable documentation to the Registrar's as follows: Humanities Division (984-4957): Art History, Chinese, E n g l i s h , French, German, Japanese, Linguistics, Philosophy, Spanish, T h a i Social Science Division (984-4953): Anthropology, C o m m e r c e , C r i m i n o l o g y , E c o n o m i c s , Geography, History, Political Studies, Psychology, Sociology, Women's Studies office for adjudication by the appropriate faculty. A l l approved transfer credits are noted on the student's Permanent Student Record. F u l l information on transfer of specific courses is available from an A d v i s o r , Counsellor, and i n the pertinent instructional division. Transfer information accurate to the time o f printing is to be found in the B . C . Transfer G u i d e or the Capilano College Transfer Guide. Students are urged to read this guide when establishing their programs o f study. Pure and Applied Sciences Division (984-4955): B i o l o g y , Chemistry, C o m p u t i n g Science, Engineering, Environmental Science, Geology, Kinesiology, M a t h ematics, Physics Visual and Performing Arts Division (984-4911): Textile A r t s , Studio A r t , Bachelor o f M u s i c Transfer, Jazz Studies, Theatre Academic Course Descriptions F u l l descriptions o f all academic courses can be found i n the alphabetical listings following. Students are urged to read the general discipline information included in each section carefully. It is the student's responsibility to be familiar with the special information needed to select academic courses. Academic — General Information 69 C o u r s e D e s c r i p t i o n C o d e : O n the right hand side o f Students with any one o f the f o l l o w i n g are exempt from each course description there is a series o f code letters this requirement: and numbers, for example: BIOL 105 Environmental Biology (3) (4,3,0) (S) E a c h course is designated by the department name and 1. A final grade o f " A " in E n g l i s h 12 or E n g l i s h Literature 12, or 2. A final grade of 4 or better i n an A d v a n c e d placement course i n E n g l i s h Composition or E n g l i s h Literature, or course number (e.g. B I O L 105). The number i n paren- 3. A final grade o f 6 or better i n the International theses following the course designation—i.e. (3) i n the Baccalaureate course i n E n g l i s h A or E n g l i s h B , or above example—indicates the number o f credits for the 4. A i n Capilano B E N G 042, or course. 5. B - or higher i n an E n g l i s h transfer course from another The second set i n parentheses includes the lecture, lab college or university, or and other hours for the course. F o r B I O L 105, for example, there w i l l be 4 lecture hours, 3 lab hours, and 6. A degree from an English-speaking university. no other hours per week. In some courses the department may convert the fourth English Diagnostic Test (EDT) lecture hour to another scheduled instructional activity. E D T s are given prior to and during the registration week Where this occurs, students w i l l be advised by the course at Capilano College. These tests are administered by the instructor and i n the course outline given out at the E n g l i s h Department and may be used for admission to beginning o f the term. The third set o f parentheses indicates the term i n which the class is usually offered. Example: F — F a l l , S — S p r i n g , Su—Summer. B I O L 105 is offered i n the Spring term. Please check the Timetable to confirm the term offered as this may change after the Calendar is printed. The course title (Environmental B i o l o g y ) is indicated on the line below the department name and course number. E n g l i s h courses offered at Capilano College only. Preregistration is required at the Office o f the Registrar and a fee o f $25 is charged. Schedules o f E n g l i s h Diagnostic Tests w i l l be available i n : Registrar's Office—984-4913 Squamish Learning Centre—892-5322 (986-3515) Sechelt Learning Centre—885-9310 (987-1535) Humanities D i v i s i o n — 9 8 4 - 4 9 5 7 A d v i s i n g Centre—984-4990 The nominal length o f a term is 16 weeks. Please see the A c a d e m i c Schedule for the first and last days o f classes and for the dates o f the examination period. Course Selection and Advising Advisors or Counsellors assist students i n selecting the A schedule is also printed on the first section o f the timetable. Students wishing to write the E D T should pay i n advance at the Office o f the Registrar. (Please check office hours.) Achievement Resource Centre best program o f studies. The final responsibility for course selection, however, rests with the student. A l l academic students are advised to see an A d v i s o r or a Counsellor to plan their courses o f study. Students should consult the B . C . Transfer G u i d e available on the Students wanting to increase their learning efficiency are invited to use the services and facilities o f the A c h i e v e ment Resource Centre ( A R C ) , new location R m 337, 3rd floor, East W i n g , B i r c h B u i l d i n g . Internet or i n paper format through A d v i s i n g and the Reception Desk at a cost o f $2.00. Writing Centre (FR402) English Entrance Requirements W r i t i n g Centre for advice o n written assignments or help A l l students registered at the College may visit the Students w h o w i s h to enroll i n E n g l i s h courses must, BEFORE REGISTERING IN A N Y ENGLISH C O U R S E , write either the Language Proficiency Index (administered by E M R G ) or the E n g l i s h Diagnostic Test ( E D T ) given by the E n g l i s h Department o f Capilano College. Academic — General Information 70 with writing problems. The Centre is not a proofreading service, but aims to help students develop their writing ability. T h e Centre also offers resources for writing: quiet space, a collection o f reference books, handout sheets and exercises, and computers with w o r d processing, outlining and editing programs. The W r i t i n g Centre is located in F R 4 0 2 . It is staffed by Math Entrance Requirements student to pursue studies i n Precalculus and C a l c u l u s I on a self-study format. M A T H 110 (Calculus I) is offered on a video-based format. Refresher courses i n math through the Grade 12 level are also available i n a selfstudy format. O n l y those students with sufficiently high grades i n These packaged courses, prepared for home study with prerequisite courses completed within the previous year the aid o f study guides, video tapes and computer assisted faculty members from the E n g l i s h , E S L , C o m m u n i c a tions and A B E Departments. O p e n hours are posted. w i l l be a l l o w e d to directly enrol i n a Precalculus ( M A T H instruction, are designed for students who are unable to 103, 105, 107) or Calculus I ( M A T H 108, 110) course maintain regular attendance at the North V a n c o u v e r without writing a placement test. A l l other students Campus or a regional centre. They are also available to w i s h i n g to enrol i n one o f these courses must write a students who are attending any Capilano C o l l e g e campus, placement test prior to registration. Please refer to the providing these students with a viable alternative to the Mathematics section o f the calendar for the direct entry usual classroom lecture/tutorial instructional format. and placement test requirements for each o f these courses. Registration Priority Math Placement Test (MPT) w i l l be given to students who have not attempted the M P T s are offered on a regular scheduled basis throughout course previously at Capilano College. A n y student who the year with frequent sittings available during the pre- has attempted the course within the last year may not be registration period. These tests are administered by the allowed to register without the instructor's permission. M a t h Department and are used for admission to Registration procedures for A r t and M u s i c programs are detailed in the calendar section for the particular program. Precalculus and Calculus I courses offered at Capilano C o l l e g e . Pre-registration is required at the Office o f the In some courses with high demand, registration priority Registrar and a $10 fee is charged. Schedules o f the M P T are available i n : Registrar's O f f i c e — 984-4913 Lab/Course Relationship Squamish L e a r n i n g Centre—892-5322 (986-3515) M a n y courses require that students complete a lab and/or Sechelt L e a r n i n g Centre—885-9310 (987-1535) tutorial. Students should ensure that they are aware o f Pure and A p p l i e d Sciences D i v i s i o n — 9 8 4 - 4 9 5 5 lab/tutorial requirements and the timetable for these Advising Centre—984-4990 components. Students should note that it is necessary to A Schedule is also printed on the first section o f the timetable. pass both labs and lectures. The cost of the lab is included i n the tuition fee, except for lab manuals and some field trip costs. M a t h Learning Centre The M a t h L e a r n i n g Centre ( M L C ) , located i n B R 2 8 9 , provides services for all students at the College. D u r i n g Special Programs W o m e n ' s Studies Program instructor on duty. The M L C has two study areas (one A Women's Studies Program, consisting o f a variety o f transfer credit, college credit and credit-free courses, has been developed at Capilano College. for silent, individual study and the other for quiet, group In addition to the Women's Studies College credit and scheduled hours, students may obtain individual assistance w i t h math problems from the lab supervisor or study), a video r o o m and a library o f math reference transfer credit courses, there are career and academic texts. The M L C video room is equipped with six video courses in other disciplines o f special interest to women. stations where students may view math video tapes on topics i n calculus, precalculus, algebra and statistics. Writing Across t h e Curriculum Sections In the F a l l Semester, a small number o f E N G L 100 Self-Study Courses (Composition) sections are paired w i t h a section o f In keeping w i t h the College's policy for the development another course. Students planning to take E N G L 100 o f alternative instructional modes, it is possible for the (Composition) should consider enrolling i n one o f these W r i t i n g Across the C u r r i c u l u m sections as identified i n Academic — General Information 71 the course timetable. Instruction i n the two courses w i l l be coordinated, with the writing assignments in the Ethnic a n d Cross-Cultural Relations Program The Ethnic and Cross-Cultural Relations Program is a E n g l i s h course growing out o f the content o f the other two-term, multidisciplinary program. It studies ethnic course. Students w i l l receive the full 3 credits for both relations developed in the context o f the multicultural and courses, and w i l l benefit from having two o f their polyethnic nature of Canadian society. It also explores subjects connected w i t h each other. the cross-cultural interaction among Native people, the Please consult the E n g l i s h Department for information on founding English and French Canadian people, and the the paired sections for F a l l 1997. different immigrant groups that constitute the Canadian "mosaic." These all help to shape the national character Canadian Studies Specialty Students who w i s h to concentrate their studies on Canadian content courses can choose courses from the list below. A l l courses (except some L a b o u r Studies courses) hold full transfer credit and transfer into the Canadian and the culture o f this country. The program also examines the international aspect o f cross-cultural communication, w h i c h is o f special meaning to Canada because immigrant communities here can maintain healthy contacts with their countries o f origin. Studies Program at S F U . T o qualify for a Canadian The Program includes the various disciplines involved in Studies Specialty, complete a College diploma with at ethnic studies: history, geography, anthropology, sociol- least 24 credits from the f o l l o w i n g list. Choose these ogy, political studies and urban studies, religious studies, credits from courses i n at least three different depart- communications, language and literature. There are no ments. O f the 24 credits y o u choose, at least six must be special criteria for student selection, although students numbered 200 or above. F o r a Canadian Studies must formally register for the two-term Ethnic and Cross- Specialty to be applied to a General Studies D i p l o m a , an Cultural Relations Certificate, w h i c h w i l l be awarded English or Communications course is required. upon completion o f the program. Fall T o complete the program, a student needs to earn 30 A N T H 204 credits. Specialized courses i n ethnic relations and two A N T H 206 English courses are required; the rest can be chosen from B I O L 204 a variety o f electives. A l l the program's courses (except E N G L 202 Labour Studies) have transfer credit to the provincial F R E N 270 universities where the student can work towards a degree G E O G 106, 108 in Ethnic Studies. S i m o n Fraser University also has H I S T 110, 205, 111 recently developed a Graduate Program i n this field. L S P . 100, 110, 111, 115, 117, 119, 142, 170, 181, 182, Capilano College Continuing Education Services may 210 P O L . 104 offer additional courses during the evenings for people already working i n job-related fields. S O C . 200 First T e r m Spring REQUIRED: A N T H 208 E N G L 1 0 0 — C o m p o s i t i o n (or other E n g l i s h course i f B I O L 105, 205 approved). E N G L 203 A N T H 2 0 4 — E t h n i c Relations F R E N 271 ELECTIVES: G E O G 108 Language: French, German, Spanish, Japanese, Chinese G E O L 111 or T h a i . H I S T 110, 111,208 A N T H 200—Intermediate Social Anthropology or L S P . 101, 110, 111, 116, 131, 140, 181 P S Y C 2 0 0 — S o c i a l Psychology or P O L . 104 G E O G 1 0 0 — H u m a n Geography. S O C . 201 G E O G 1 0 6 — B . C . : A Regional A n a l y s i s or Course descriptions appear under the appropriate disci- S O C . 2 0 0 — C a n a d i a n Society or pline. H I S T 1 1 1 — C a n a d a since Confederation or A P P L Y T O T H E R E G I S T R A R to have the Specialty added to your D i p l o m a at the time o f graduation. Academic — General Information 72 P O L . 104—Canadian Government. Second Term REQUIRED: E N G L 103—Contemporary Literature A N T H 2 0 5 — I m m i g r a t i o n , Multiculturalism and Ethnic Conflicts. ELECTIVES: Second term o f the language course taken i n first term. A N T H 2 0 6 — N a t i v e Peoples o f B . C . A N T H 2 0 8 — N a t i v e Peoples o f N o r t h A m e r i c a or G E O G 205—Pacific R i m L S P . 119 & 1 3 1 — C i v i l Rights and Race and Ethnic 2. Science Students Capilano College Pure and A p p l i e d Sciences D i v i s i o n offers a first and second year university transfer program in biology, chemistry, computing science, mathematics and physics, and first year university transfer programs i n engineering, geology and kinesiology. In addition, the Pure and A p p l i e d Sciences D i v i s i o n offers science transfer requirements i n the following: pre-Medicine, pre-Veterinary, pre-Dentistry, Oceanography, Forestry, Agriculture, Pharmacy, H o m e E c o n o m i c s , Rehabilitation M e d i c i n e , and Dental Hygiene. Relations at the Workplace G E O G 2 0 1 — U r b a n Studies or 3. Engineering Program S O C . 211 — S o c i o l o g y of the T h i r d W o r l d or Capilano C o l l e g e offers a complete first year university G E O G 1 0 8 — C a n a d a : A Topical Geography or transfer program i n engineering. Bachelor degree c o m - HIST 205—B.C. pletion generally requires three additional years o f study S O C . 2 0 1 — B . C . Society or at U B C , S F U , or U V i c . F o r additional information, P O L . 2 0 2 — G o v e r n m e n t and Politics o f B . C . consult the "Engineering Program" section. PURE AND APPLIED SCIENCES: 4. Kinesiology Program Capilano College offers a complete first year university General Information T h e f o l l o w i n g options are available from a wide range o f pure and applied sciences. transfer program i n kinesiology designed for students planning on transferring to the Kinesiology Program at S F U for their second year. F o r additional information, consult the " K i n e s i o l o g y Program" section. A. UNIVERSITY TRANSFER COURSES 1. Non-Science Students Students planning to continue studies at a university are advised to consider the following courses to fulfil their science requirement. It should be noted that transfer credit for a number o f these courses is limited to nonscience students. Students should refer to individual discipline areas i n this calendar. B I O L 104, 105, 113 C H E M 104, 105 B. POST BACCALAUREATE DIPLOMA PROGRAM 1. Environmental Science Program Capilano College offers a one year Post Baccalaureate D i p l o m a program i n environmental science for students who have already completed a degree i n science or engineering and who are interested in further practical studies in environmental fields. F o r additional information, consult the "Environmental Science Post B a c c a l a u reate D i p l o m a Program" section. C O M P 101, 102 G E O L 110, 111 G E O G 112, 114 * A l s o see: A s i a Pacific Management Co-operative PostBaccalaureate D i p l o m a Program i n this Calendar. M A T H 101, 102, 105, 107, 108, 109 Please check the prerequisites given i n the individual course descriptions. Note: B I O L 104 and C H E M 030 or C H E M 104 fulfill biology and chemistry entrance requirements for the N u r s i n g Program at B C I T . Completion o f B I O L 104 and B I O L 113 permits students (upon entering Basic Health Sciences at B C I T ) to receive credit for B H S C 105. Academic — General Information 73 Anthropology A N T H 124 Instructional Faculty B . B E R D I C H E W S K Y , B . A . ( U . o f Chile), P h . D . ( M a - (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) H u m a n Origins A n introduction to the theoretical foundations and drid) evidence for human origins as presented by Archaeology K. LIND, B.A., M . A . (UBC) and Physical Anthropology. T h e b i o l o g i c a l and cultural R. M U C K L E , B . A . , M . A . ( S F U ) evolution o f humankind as indicated through a study o f General evolutionary theory, primate behaviour, skeletal remains, Information and archaeological discoveries. Anthropology is the study o f humankind, offering views on the human condition from evolutionary and compara- A N T H 200 tive perspectives. B y developing an understanding and Intermediate Social A n t h r o p o l o g y appreciation o f cultural and biological diversity, courses in anthropology should be beneficial to a l l students. Students who have career aspirations as anthropologists may find work i n teaching, research, or museum studies. They may also work as consultants to governments, corporations, and native groups. (3) (4.0.0) (F) A study o f the social structure and organization o f various cultures o f the w o r l d . Emphasis on the dynamics of culture, the cross-cultural approach, the theoretical issues i n Anthropology. A N T H 202 (3) (4,0.0) (F o r S) Major branches o f anthropology include Social Anthro- Introduction t o Cultural Ecology pology, Archaeology, and P h y s i c a l Anthropology. The study o f the interaction o f people, culture and Students intending to major or minor i n anthropology or environments, emphasizing human adaptive strategies. archaeology should take Anthropology 121 and one or Focus o f the course w i l l vary each semester, exploring both o f Anthropology 123 and 124. Students interested such topics as subsistence patterns, systems o f knowledge in a Canadian Studies specialty should consider Anthro- in traditional cultures, modernization and globalization, pology 204, 206, and 208. T h e Ethnic and Cross-Cultural and current issues. Relations Program requires Anthropology 204 and 205. A N T H 204 (4,0.0) (F) (3) University Transfer Credit Ethnic Relations A l l Anthropology courses at Capilano transfer to S F U , A study o f the relations between ethnic groups and an U B C and U V i c . examination of how ethnic groups come to be defined, how they are maintained, stereotyping, and h o w these processes interrelate with other social variables such as Course Descriptions economics, education, violence and the family. T h e A N T H 121 (3) (4,0.0) (F.S) Introduction t o Social A n t h r o p o l o g y focus w i l l usually be Canada. Students w i l l be engaged in some primary research. A survey o f social anthropology to include the study o f communication, economic systems, kinship and family A N T H 205 patterns, social control, political organization, religion, Multiculturalism and the arts. A l s o includes understanding the methods A study of multiculturalism, particularly i n Canada. and effects o f culture change. Examples o f different Contemporary issues, government policies, immigration cultural practices w i l l be drawn from societies throughout and cultural identity, and ethnic conflicts. (4,0,0) (S) (3) the world. A N T H 206 A N T H 123 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) Introduction t o A r c h a e o l o g y (3) (4,0.0) (F o r S) Native Peoples of British C o l u m b i a A study o f the cultural history, diversity, and complexity A n introduction to the theoretical foundations and of the Native Peoples o f British C o l u m b i a . T h e archaeo- methods o f Archaeology, including the techniques used logical past, traditional lifeways, and current issues are to discover, reconstruct, and interpret the past. Examples examined. w i l l be drawn from archaeological research around the world. Academic — Anthropology 74 A N T H 208 (3) Native Peoples o f North A m e r i c a (4,0,0) (F o r S) A survey o f the cultural history and social organization o f native peoples o f the North A m e r i c a n continent including Canada, the United States and M e x i c o . A n examination o f traditional lifestyles including family, political, religious and ecological patterns; and current issues. A N T H 241 A r c h a e o l o g y Field School (6) (6,0,0) (Su) A course i n archaeological methods, techniques and theories dealing with excavation, recovery, analysis and interpretation o f archaeological material. This is a practical field course, participants acquiring such skills as mapping, surveying, photography, computer applications, preparation o f reports and interpretation. This course usually w i l l be in cooperation with other colleges as a joint endeavour. A N T H 249 (3) (4,0,0) (Su) C o m p a r a t i v e Cultures: A Field Study in Anthropology A n interdisciplinary course to consider i n depth a particular geographic area and its people. Comparative institutions, cultural ecology, contemporary issues, methods o f observation and study. Students and instructor study i n the field. W o m e n ' s Studies 122 W o m e n in A n t h r o p o l o g y (3) (4,0,0) T h e anthropological perspective applied to women i n different cultures o f the w o r l d ; their role i n economic, political, religious, kinship and expressive systems. E x p l o r a t i o n o f the work o f women anthropologists and the effect o f theory on understanding women. What is w o m e n ' s experience in cultures o f the world? Please see W o m e n ' s Studies for further information. Academic — Anthropology 75 Art: Graphic Design and Illustration T h i s p r o g r a m is a d e p a r t m e n t w i t h i n the M e d i a public relations agencies. C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e produces T e c h n l o g y D i v i s i o n . F o r other A r t p r o g r a m s , see also illustrators and designers prepared to shape the future o f Studio A r t P r o g r a m and Textile A r t s Program. visual communication, utilizing traditional and current electronic mediums. Instructional Faculty D . C A R T E R , E m i l y C a r r Institute o f A r t and Design Admission and Registration Procedures J. E D G E , Alberta C o l l e g e o f A r t This program requires a high level o f maturity and J. E D W A R D S G R I F F I N , B . A . (University o f Alberta) integrity. Students with life experience following high F. F O R S T E R , A l b e r t a C o l l e g e o f A r t school are usually more knowledgeable and mature i n K . H O L L A N D , D i p . (Johannesburg School o f A r t ) their choice o f direction and better prepared; however, K . J A G E R , D i p . ( E m i l y C a r r Institute o f A r t & Design) highly motivated high school graduates can succeed here, S. L L E W E L L Y N , B . A . (Manchester College o f A r t & and we encourage those students to apply. Design) Applicants to the program must supply the f o l l o w i n g J. L O N G , B . P . A . A r t Center ( L o s Angeles) documentation to the college by M a r c h 27, 1997. (No D. M A C L A G A N , A . O . C . A . , I.D.C., F . C A . late applications accepted.) R . M A R T I N , B . A . ( U . o f Washington) J. N E W T O N - M A S O N , D i p . (Worthing C o l . , England) • Completed Capilano C o l l e g e A p p l i c a t i o n for L . S A V A G E , B . A . (McGill), M . E d . ( U of A ) Admission P. S I N G E R , M F A (Concordia University) • Secondary and Post-secondary Transcripts D . T A J T , E m i l y Carr, D i p . V . S . A . ( E C C A D ) • Certificate o f E n g l i s h Language Assessment Test D. Y A S I N S K I ( E L A T ) or Test o f E n g l i s h as a Foreign Language For further information contact the Graphic Design & ( T O E F L ) , i f applicable Illustration Program at 984-4911. N o t e : A l l applications for admission must be submitted to the Office o f the Registrar. Official transcripts and General Description GRAPHIC DESIGN and ILLUSTRATION PROGRAM THREE YEAR DIPLOMA The Graphic D e s i g n and Illustration program is an intensive, three year full-time commitment. Students are expected to achieve and maintain the highest standards working independently and as a team member, developing time management and organizational skills. The curriculum encompasses historical, social, ethical and evolutionary developments i n the visual communications industry. Students are engaged i n acquiring skills other documents should be attached. Portfolio submission dates are A p r i l 28, 29, 30 and M a y 1 1997. N o portfolio w i l l be reviewed i f proper documen- tation has not been received at the C o l l e g e by M a r c h 27, 1997. (No late portfolio submissions accepted.) Portfolios are reviewed by an A d m i s s i o n s Committee on the basis o f drawing, design, colour, creativity, media variety and presentation. Applicants whose portfolios meet the standards o f the Program are called for interviews and testing on M a y 12 and 13. F i n a l decisions on the make-up o f the new class are made by M a y 23. and sensitivity i n various media and becoming effective Portfolio Requirements in the creative and production process. Instruction There is no formula for an acceptable portfolio. In encourages imaginative conceptual thinking, technical general, you should submit your best and most recent and business analysis, and expertise. work. There should be a m i n i m u m o f 10 and a m a x i m u m Courses are taught by practising, professional artists and design consultants. Classes include projects, demonstrations, lectures and critiques, as w e l l as scheduled professional and industrial presentations and tours. of 15 original samples produced, drawn, designed, or photographed by the applicant representing their current abilities. Imaginative and experimental design and drawings i n any medium and representing your personal interests and abilities are welcome additions to the Graduates are prepared to practise independently or portfolio. Samples must be flat, not rolled; they should collaboratively and i n a variety o f employment opportu- not be framed or glassed. nities such as design studios, illustration, computer graphics, multimedia, animation, film, advertising and We will not accept portfolios larger than 20" x 26" (50 cm x 66 cm). Photographs or slides o f larger work or 3 D Academic — Art: Graphic Design & Illustration 76 projects may be sent; however, they do not replace the G R P H 235 Painting for Illustration I 3.0 required m i n i m u m o f 10 samples o f original work. G R P H 236 Computer Applications 1Q_ The applicant's name and address must be on the outside o f the portfolio in large letters. M a r k the back o f each 21.0 FOURTH TERM portfolio piece w i t h your name. Please be sure to include the completed "Program Information Sheet". G R P H 241 Typography II 3.0 G R P H 242 Graphic Design II 3.0 If a portfolio is to be returned, send either stamps or G R P H 243 D r a w i n g for Illustration II 3.0 cheque to cover the cost o f return postage. D o not send G R P H 244 A p p l i e d Design II 3.0 any portfolios b y bus system as they are not delivered to G R P H 245 Painting for Illustration II 3.0 Capilano C o l l e g e . Parcel Post insured or A i r Parcel Post G R P H 246 V i s u a l Communications III 10 insured is usually the best way to have portfolios sent and 18.0 returned. FIFTH T E R M C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e cannot accept responsibility for loss or damage to an applicant's work. Program Content M a j o r Program Requirements General Education Requirements Credits 99.0 G R P H 352 3-D Graphic Design I 3.0 G R P H 353 Illustration M e d i a I 3.0 G R P H 354 A p p l i e d Design III 3.0 G R P H 355 Advertising Illustration I 3.0 G R P H 356 Production Processes 2J) 15.0 12.0 SIXTH T E R M 111.0 G R P H 361 Advanced Typographic Design G R P H 363 Illustration M e d i a II G R P H 364 A p p l i e d Design I V 3.0 G R P H 365 Advertising Illustration II G R P H 366 Business o f Design 10 FIRST T E R M A H I S 104 V i s u a l Literacy I 3.0 C M N S 120 Effective W r i t i n g & Speech 3.0 G R P H 152 L i f e D r a w i n g I 3.0 G R P H 154 General D r a w i n g I 3.0 G R P H 155 M e d i u m s and Techniques I 3.0 G R P H 156 V i s u a l Communications I 3.0 G R P H 158 Design I 3J) 3.0 3.0 3.0 15.0 Course Descriptions For A r t History and Communications course descriptions see the appropriate department sections i n this Calendar. 21.0 SECOND TERM GRPH 152 Life D r a w i n g I (3) (4,0,0) (F) A H I S 105 V i s u a l Literacy II G R P H 157 V i s u a l Communications II 3.0 3.0 G R P H 159 M e d i u m s and Techniques II G R P H 164 General D r a w i n g II 3.0 3.0 G R P H 170 Introduction to Computers 3.0 body. L i n e characteristics i n pencil, pen, conte and G R P H 178 Design II 3.0 charcoal techniques. Contour, cross-contour, gesture and G R P H 184 L i f e D r a w i n g II 1Q volume drawings from draped and undraped models. 21.0 N o t e : Students who w i s h to substitute E n g l i s h courses for Communications 120 may do so with the C o m m u n i c a tions Program Coordinator's approval. THIRD T E R M C M N S 153 C o m m u n i c a t i o n & the Arts 3.0 G R P H 231 Typography I 3.0 G R P H 232 Graphic Design I 3.0 G R P H 233 D r a w i n g for Illustration I 3.0 G R P H 2 3 4 A p p l i e d Design I D r a w i n g from observation o f the human figure; exercises in developing visual perception, memory and basic drawing skills. Study o f the proportions o f the human GRPH 154 General D r a w i n g I (3) (4,0,0) (F) A n introduction to representational drawing, mediums and techniques. D r a w i n g as an expression o f observation and perception o f visual aspects o f environment and visual thinking. Study of graphic means o f representing objects, structure, planes, volumes, space and surface characteristics. Learning to perceive, isolate and select visual elements for descriptive rendering i n pencil and charcoal. Academic — Art: Graphic Design & Illustration 77 GRPH 155 Mediums and Techniques I (3) (4,3,0) (F) GRPH 159 Mediums and Techniques II (3) (4,0,0) (S) A n introduction to basic painting and illustration tech- Prerequisite: G R P H 155 w i t h at least a " C " grade niques. F i e l d location drawing and wash studies using A continuation with further drawing analysis techniques. watercolour, pencil, coloured pencil, ink and combina- Consideration and use o f various mediums as they relate tions o f the above. D e v e l o p i n g location studies into more to specific subjects from location studies and classroom controlled, finished classroom works. development o f same. GRPH 156 Visual Communications I (3) (4,3,0) (F) Introduction o f various graphic design styles, their historic significance, the social environments in w h i c h these styles were conceived and technical innovations w h i c h designers used to advance modern graphic design. Application o f selected styles to practical, contemporary assignments w i t h techniques o f conceptualizing and layout composition demonstrated in a lecture form. Introducdon o f basic photography darkroom techniques (b/w print processing and the photogram). Students are introduced to various communication problems and solve these problems w i t h specified b/w mediums. GRPH 157 Visual Communications II (3) (4,3,0) (S) GRPH 164 General Drawing II (3) (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: G R P H 154 w i t h at least a " C " grade. Exploration o f drawing with emphasis on expressive and interpretive approaches. D e v e l o p i n g themes and drawings aimed at illustration, for both reproduction and individual expression. Stylization, distortion and caricaturization are explored i n relation to the study o f line, mass, value and contrast. V a r i o u s pen and ink drawing techniques are explored. Emphasis on initiative in researching, investigating and exploring drawing theories, schools and techniques. GRPH 170 Introduction to Computers (3) (4,3,0) (S) A n introduction to the basic concepts o f computer Prerequisite: G R P H 156 w i t h at least a " C " grade. hardware and software. Students w i l l gain experience The further study o f graphic design styles and designers with the operating system and programs for desktop such as A r t D e c o , Post M o d e r n , Swiss and N e w Y o r k publishing. This is an ideal first course for students with design movements are examined. Introduction to basic little or no computer experience and serves as the basis 3 5 m m camera operations, basic b/w film processing, for future courses i n electronic composition, computer print enlarging and photo applications. Students are illustration, typography and pre-press. given specific problems to solve utilizing photography GRPH 178 Design II and various mediums. GRPH 158 Design I (3) (4,3,0) (F) (3) (4.3,0) (S) Prerequisite: G R P H 158 w i t h at least a " C " grade. A continuation with more sophisticated design, composi- Introduction to design elements and application to design projects w h i c h solve communication problems. A l l the beginning design exercises use black and white only. tion and colour applications. Assignments are produced using conventional drawing/inking/painting tools. A d v a n c e d design concepts are explained using various Assignments are produced using conventional drawing/ visual methods (videos - blackboard - paper - M a c i n t o s h inking tools. C o l o u r studies i n v o l v i n g the production of computer using A d o b e Illustrator/Photoshop software - colour charts w i l l be given with appropriate design film, etc.). The class w i l l move toward actual design/ projects, i n colour. The ability to verbally explain communication problems and business procedures and concepts w i l l be stressed throughout the semester. A n verbal skills i n presentation w i l l be stressed. emphasis towards actual work situations w i l l be stressed. Graphic design business procedures w i l l be explained throughout the semester. Academic — Art: Graphic Design & 78 Illustration GRPH 184 Life Drawing II Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (S) G R P H 152 with at least a " C " grade. Further study o f drawing from direct observation o f the GRPH 235 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Painting for Illustration I (formerly GRPH 195) Prerequisite: G R P H 159 with at least a " C " grade. This course offers expanded skills i n perception, visuali- human figure. Exercises i n perceiving and interpreting zation and continued practice i n control o f various plane, mass, rhythm and form as they relate to perceptual painting media. It gives the student the opportunity to elements o f drawing media. Investigation o f more develop similar styles to the o l d masters as w e l l as complex drawing techniques and materials; drawing from experiment with his/her o w n drawing and painting. memory and imaginative reflection o f visual experience. GRPH 231 (3) Typography I (formerly GRPH 162) (4,3,0) (F) GRPH 236 Computer Applications Prerequisite: Historical origins o f the alphabet, numerals and letter forms. Proportion and spacing. Lettering indication i n pencil, brush, chalks and felt markers. Comprehensive lettering indication and reproduction art to improve craftsmanship and drawing skills. GRPH 232 (3) Graphic Design I (formerly GRPH 177) (4,3,0) (F) A n introduction to the pragmatic, formal, and contextual issues i n v o l v e d i n the creation o f visual messages. A n emphasis is placed on the development o f a philosophical and practical foundation for critical, creative thinking as applied to visual problem solving. The grammar and the elements o f visual language are explored in relation to perception, semiotics, and psycholinguistics. Students (3) (4,0,0) (F) G R P H 170 with at least a " C " grade. Introduction o f computer software programs for the application o f electronic composition and imaging. Students w i l l use an advanced page layout program and drawing program. GRPH 241 (3) Typography II (formerly GRPH 197) Prerequisite: (4,3,0) (S) G R P H 231 with at least a " C " grade. This course expands upon the major role typography has on advertising layouts and graphic design. Construction o f various styles o f letter forms in pencil, felt marker and brush w i l l be studied. Basic application o f typography i n advertising and graphic design using computers w i l l be investigated. gain experience using both traditional and desktop GRPH 242 (3) (4,3,0) (S) Graphic Design II (formerly GRPH 179) publishing methods. GRPH 233 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Drawing for Illustration I (formerly GRPH 180) T h e purpose is to develop the students' awareness and capacity to perceive objects correctly and the skills necessary to draw with quality and creativity. Introduces the students to skills that must be developed i f they are to visually communicate consciously and effectively. Basic drawing and wash media w i l l be used. GRPH 234 (3) Applied Design I (formerly GRPH 192) Prerequisite: (4,3,0) (F) Prerequisite: G R P H 232 with at least a " C " grade. Further development o f understanding and application o f visual problem solving methods as related to graphic design; students explore ideas and concepts w h i c h precede the making o f design. A n emphasis is placed on application o f typography and photography as major components o f visual messages. Further exploration o f the applications o f computer technology i n contemporary graphic design. G R P H 178 with at least a " C " grade. A n introduction to visual communication and the role o f professional advertising, art directors and graphic designers. D e s i g n principles and layout techniques, with emphasis on concept and comprehensive finish using basic marker rendering skills. Academic — Art: Graphic Design & Illustration 79 GRPH 243 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Drawing for Illustration II (formerly GRPH 181) Prerequisite: G R P H 233 with at least a " C " grade. purchase design is introduced and model-building techniques are studied as w e l l as the use o f colour i n merchandising and display. The students play an advanced role i n the choices o f GRPH 353 reference materials, mediums and techniques used. The Illustration Media I (formerly GRPH 251) skilful and imaginative use o f illustrative methods is stressed using lighting, negative shapes, depth, abstractions for emphasis, perspective and correct perception. Prerequisite: (3) (4,2,0) (F) G R P H 243 and G R P H 245 with at least a " C " grade. Uses o f drawing and wash mediums w i l l be expanded. A continuation o f drawing skills needed to explore the A s w e l l , the student w i l l be expected to become familiar mediums necessary for illustration. The course develops with current uses o f illustration. through stages from pencil, pen and ink, ink and wash, watercolours and eel v i n y l . The use o f the illustrator's GRPH 244 (3) (4,3,0) (S) tools and processes such as repellents, air brush, m i x e d Applied Design II (formerly GRPH 193) media, etc., are reviewed. Prerequisite: GRPH 354 G R P H 234 with at least a " C " grade. A continuation relating to presentation o f ideas at a professional level representing real advertising agency and client situations. M a k i n g rough layouts and finished comprehensives o f ideas that are evaluated against (3) (4.3.0) (F) Applied Design III (formerly GRPH 252) Prerequisite: G R P H 242 and G R P H 244 with at least a " C " grade. The application of design and rendering skills to the established client criteria. development o f solutions to print advertising. Explores GRPH 245 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Painting for Illustration II (formerly GRPH 196) Prerequisite: G R P H 235 with at least a " C " grade. The student's personal style o f drawing and painting is companies, products, services, corporate identification and their relationship to print advertising layouts and tight comps prepared for class critiques. Comprehensives are developed with the computer as w e l l as traditional approaches. pursued to a m u c h finer degree. Structured tutorials in the use o f various mediums and student/instructor GRPH 355 criticisms o f work-in-progress are emphasized. Experi- Advertising Illustration I (formerly GRPH 295) mentation i n both style and m e d i u m is encouraged. GRPH 246 (3) (4,3,0) (S) Visual Communications III (formerly GRPH 175) Prerequisite: G R P H 236 with at least a " C " grade. Prerequisite: (3) (4,2,0) (F) G R P H 243 and G R P H 245 with at least a " C " grade. A comprehensive study of contemporary advertising illustration styles, techniques and materials with projects developed from original concept to final presentation. In this course students are introduced to colour photogra- Emphasis on working with an art director with attention phy applications and basic artificial lighting techniques. to specifications, deadlines and professionalism. Students must solve communication problems using the 3 5 m m camera and c o l o u r transparencies. A r t direction GRPH 356 and conceptualization for assignments is stressed. Production Processes (formerly GRPH 278) Students are introduced to digital photography and Prerequisite: (3) (4,3,0) (F) G R P H 236 with at least a " C " grade. computer photo i m a g i n g . Familiarization with various print processes and pre-press GRPH 352 (3) (4,0,0) (F) 3D Graphic Design (formerly GRPH 277) Prerequisite: G R P H 242 and G R P H 244 with at least a " C " grade. A n introduction into the procedures involved in the design o f small retail environments such as boutiques and service shops i n shopping centres and malls. Point o f Academic — Art: Graphic Design & Illustration 80 operations including preparation o f art, photos, typography, halftone screening, colour separations, image stripping, assembly and proofing; paper and its effect upon printing. Includes the use o f M a c i n t o s h computers for digital pre-press production. GRPH 361 (3) (4,1,0) (S) Advanced Typographic Design (formerly GRPH 279) Prerequisite: G R P H 241 w i t h at least a " C " grade. Assignments demonstrate visual concept and economy o f thought i n advanced graphic forms, w i t h emphasis on typography as a medium and message o f design. A d vanced application o f the grid to facilitate the integration o f both typography and visuals, underscored by sound use o f conceptual thinking. GRPH 363 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Illustration Media II (formerly GRPH 269) Prerequisite: G R P H 353 with at least a " C " grade. Further developing finished illustrations for advertising, books, magazines, etc. A n expansion o f the uses o f mediums to include m i x e d media while concept is stressed as an emphasis on self-expression and relevant professional solutions. GRPH 364 (3) (4,2,0) (S) Applied Design IV (formerly GRPH 253) Prerequisite: G R P H 354 with at least a " C " grade. The interrelationship o f illustration, photography and graphic design into advertising, packaging and point o f purchase with extensive consultation on student portfolios and the needs o f advertising agencies and graphic design studios. GRPH 365 (3) (4,1,0) (S) Advertising Illustration II (formerly GRPH 298) Prerequisite: G R P H 355 with at least a " C " grade. Further exploration o f advertising illustration techniques w i t h the emphasis on actual studio and advertising agency w o r k i n g methods. A bridge between the educational experience and working in the field. GRPH 366 (3) (4,3,0) (S) Business of Design (formerly GRPH 289) H o w to establish and operate a free-lance design/illustration business. Emphasis is upon client relations, suppliers contact, estimating, project management, taxation and accounting practices and industry ethics. The designers role i n an advertising agency, design studio and production or printing facility w i l l be investigated. Academic — Art: Graphic Design & Illustration 81 Art: Studio Art Studio Art is a department within the Visual and Performing Arts Division. For other Art programs see also the Textile Arts Program, the Graphic Design and Illustration Program and the Animation Program. related fields. Because the program also exposes students to creative thinking and problem-solving, it may also serve as a foundation for further general education. Part-time Courses There may be a number o f positions open i n many o f the Instructional Faculty credit courses offered in Studio A r t . These courses may M . B O W C O T T , A . O . C . A . (Ontario), M . A . ( R . C . A . be credited toward either a D i p l o m a i n Studio A r t , a London) D i p l o m a i n A c a d e m i c Studies or a D i p l o m a i n General N . B O Y D , B . A . (Waterloo) Studies, depending on the student's educational objec- B . C O G S W E L L , N . D . D . (Hammersmith) ( R . C . A . ) tives. F o r Diplomas other than Studio A r t , see D i p l o m a s W . E A S T C O T T , Sr. Cert. ( V . S . A . ) ( R . C . A . ) & Certificates section i n this calendar. J. J U N G I C , B . A . , M . A . ( U B C ) Students taking Studio A r t courses must be available for S. K W A N ( E . C . C . A . D . ) the labs attached to Ceramics, Sculpture and Printmaking D . N E A V E , B . A . H o n s . (Manchester), M . A . ( U V i c ) w h i c h take place on the afternoon o f scheduled classes. G. R A M M E L L , (E.C.C.A.D.) Students must ensure that courses taken outside o f Studio For further information contact the A r t Department at A r t w i l l not conflict with these labs. 984-4911. The Department encourages students to take both terms of any given discipline (i.e. both D r a w i n g I and II) i n the TWO YEAR DIPLOMA IN STUDIO ART General Description interests o f effective University transfer status. The program w i l l pre-register returning part-time students into spring term courses. Studio A r t offers a program o f studies leading to a two year diploma. The Art Institute Studio A r t may have openings i n many o f its courses for The A r t Institute, specializing i n Sculpture and part-time study. It also offers individual credit courses i n Printmaking, is a one year post-graduate certificate A r t Institute advanced studies. program unique i n the college system. Comparable to artist-in-residence programs, the Institute offers advanced The Program The Studio A r t Program at Capilano College provides a studies to artists with several years experience i n sculpture or printmaking, or to recent college, university or art school graduates. thorough, high quality foundation i n the fundamentals o f art. It enables students to make informed decisions regarding future career choices and enables them to Career and Educational Opportunities prepare high quality portfolios to aid them i n gaining The fields o f further study listed below lead to specific acceptance to the advanced art and design programs o f career or job opportunities. It is recommended that an their choice. Graduates o f the Studio A r t Program education i n these specific careers should follow a high usually complete their education at university, art school quality broad A r t foundation such as that offered by or i n a college design program. Studio A r t . Students may find they need to study out o f the province to pursue these educational goals. The Studio A r t Program provides studio experiences i n 2 D Studies, 3 D Studies and D r a w i n g and courses in F I N E A R T S : sculptor, printmaker, painter V i s u a l Literacy, A r t History, and English. G A L L E R I E S A N D M U S E U M S : curator, restorer, Through exposure to a broad range o f concepts, materi- illustrator als, techniques, and processes, students are assisted i n I N D U S T R Y : industrial, interior, furniture designer developing personal interests, directions, and creative maturity. T h e emphasis o f the program is on preparing C R A F T S : ceramic, textile, jewellery artist students to function effectively within the context o f I L L U S T R A T O R : fashion, medical, advertising, current thought and practice within the fine arts, while publishing preparing them for further studies i n art and design- Academic — Art: Studio Art 82 A R C H I T E C T U R E : model maker, Tenderer, restorer E D U C A T I O N : instructor, art therapist, consultant • Certificate o f E n g l i s h Language Assessment Test ( E L A T ) or Test o f E n g l i s h as a Foreign Language ( T O E F L ) , i f applicable. Students who study full or part-time and acquire either a D i p l o m a i n Studio A r t or a D i p l o m a i n A c a d e m i c Studies (including art courses) should find that educational opportunities exist i n these and other fields. APPLICANTS MUST PHONE T H E A R T DEPARTM E N T A T 984-4911 B E F O R E T H E END OF APRIL T O A R R A N G E A PORTFOLIO INTERVIEW FOR EARLY MAY. Please return your Studio Art Questionnaire to the Art Admission Requirements Department Office (AR 202) prior to your interview. Students interested in study with the Studio Art Special Fees and Expenses Program should contact the Art Department at 9844911 or write to The Art Department, Capilano Although the Studio A r t Department can supply some o f College, 2055 Purcell Way, North Vancouver, B . C . the materials required for the courses, the student can V7J 3H5 expect a financial outlay for some basic supplies, as FULL-TIME STUDENTS C o m p l e t i o n o f Grade 12 or equivalent or mature student status required. Applicants are admitted on the basis o f an interview and portfolio presentation. The candidate decides on the indicated in the course outlines. University Transfer A l l Studio A r t courses are University transferable to many other institutions. Students should refer to the B . C . Transfer G u i d e . nature and scope o f work presented, but should provide a representative picture o f past and current artistic activities. Program Content Credits In addition to completed work and sketchbooks, research M a j o r Program Requirements 60 material and preliminary studies should be included wherever possible. Slides, photographs or any other FIRST T E R M Credits supporting evidence may also form part o f the portfolio. It is not necessary for prospective students to mount work for the portfolio, since the quality of work is more important than the presentation. PART-TIME STUDENTS Applicants may be eligible to take courses where space is available. F e w places are available for part-time students in courses other than drawing. After M a y , interested students should check with the A r t office at 984-4911 regarding availability o f spaces. Students wishing to register into the open D r a w i n g classes may do so during the normal A c a d e m i c Registration period. A H I S 104 Intro, to V i s u a l Literacy I S A R T 150 D r a w i n g I and 3 o f the f o l l o w i n g : S A R T 163 S A R T 167 S A R T 171 S A R T 182 Lab hours 3 3 3 - D Studies - C e r a m i c A r t I (3) 3 - D Studies - Sculpture I (3) 9 2 - D Studies - Painting I (3) 2 - D Studies - P r i n t m a k i n g I (3) _ (3) (3) (1.5) 15 SECOND TERM A H I S 105 Intro, to V i s u a l L i t e r a c y II 3 S A R T 151 D r a w i n g II 3 and 3 o f the f o l l o w i n g (with prerequisites): * S A R T 165 3-D Studies - C e r a m i c A r t II (3) S A R T 172 2 - D Studies - Painting II (3) Prior to the portfolio interview applicants must supply the S A R T 174 3 - D Studies - Sculpture II (3) f o l l o w i n g documentation to the College Registrar's S A R T 183 2 - D Studies - Printmaking 11(3) _ Application Proceedure Office by the end of April: • (3) 9 (3) (1.5) 15 C o m p l e t e d Capilano C o l l e g e Application for Admission • Secondary and Post-Secondary Transcripts (indicating 6 credits E n g . 100 i f applicable). Academic — Art: Studio Art 83 SART 150 Drawing I THIRD T E R M A H I S 210 History o f M o d e r n A r t 3 (19th Century) S A R T 262 3 tual aspects o f the drawing process through a wide and 3 o f the f o l l o w i n g (with prerequisites): * 2 - D Studies - Painting III (3) S A R T 257 3 - D Studies - Sculpture III (3) S A R T 273 S A R T 282 (4,0,0) (F) A n investigation o f the conceptual, technical and percep- D r a w i n g III S A R T 250 (3) variety o f methods, materials and stimuli. D e s i g n elements are a major component o f this course. E x p e r i 9 (3) ences i n current approaches and concerns, including 3 - D Studies - C e r a m i c A r t III (3) (3) representational, interpretive and experimental drawings 2 - D Studies - Printmaking III ( 3 ) _ (1.5) in assorted media. Emphasis w i l l be on developing the 15 student's confidence, knowledge, graphic sensitivity and control o f media. Specifics to this course w i l l be: study FOURTH TERM A H I S 211 History o f M o d e r n A r t S A R T 263 Drawing I V of design elements (line, tone etc.), m e d i a investigation, 3 perspective, structural analysis (of natural form), life (20th Century) study. 3 SART 151 Drawing II and 3 o f the f o l l o w i n g (with prerequisites): * S A R T 255 2 - D Studies - Painting I V (3) S A R T 265 3 - D Studies - Sculpture TV (3) S A R T 274 3-D Studies - C e r a m i c A r t I V (3) (3) S A R T 283 2 - D Studies - P r i n t m a k i n g I V ( 3 ) _ (1.5) 9 (3) 15 Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (S) S A R T 150 A continuation o f S A R T 150, w i t h the inclusion o f the following specifics: composition and further design exploration, colour, collage and image development. A n emphasis is placed on balance between control and English Requirement S i x credits o f E n g l i s h are required as prerequisite to Studio A r t , and therefore to receiving a Studio A r t D i p l o m a . A student accepted into the program without the E n g l i s h requirements must complete the two English courses prior to a p p l y i n g for a Studio A r t D i p l o m a . expression. SART 163 (3) (4,3,0) (F) Three-Dimensional Studies: Ceramic Art I A n introduction to the use o f clay as an expressive medium. H a n d construction and wheel forming w i l l be presented as well as glazing, firing and clay body tech- Students who complete all o f the major program requirements but fail to take E n g l i s h w i l l be granted a D i p l o m a in General Studies. nology. Design, history and conceptual theory w i l l be • SART 165 (3) (4.3,0) (S) Three-Dimensional Studies: Ceramic Art II Where scheduling permits, second year students may elect to do the f o l l o w i n g ; drop one of their three selected disciplines, then pick up both terms o f the first year discipline not previously studied. reviewed as it relates to the ceramic object and to general art applications. Prerequisite: S A R T 163 A continuation o f S A R T 163 w i t h greater emphasis on personal development. Casting, m o u l d m a k i n g , glaze Course Descriptions preparation and application and firing technology w i l l be For A r t History, and E n g l i s h course descriptions see the fundamental aspects o f this course. Contemporary appropriate department sections i n this Calendar. A l l studio courses include the following: slide/lectures, demonstrations, individual and group critiques, field trips and guest artist speakers. applications o f ceramics w i l l be explored. SART 167 (3) (4,3,0) (F) Three-Dimensional Studies: Sculpture I A n introduction to 3-dimensional w o r k as a means o f expression, communication and discovery. Some basic sculptural techniques and materials w i l l be explored; these w i l l include: w o o d assemblage, clay modelling, mould making and casting. Academic — Art: Studio Art 84 Sculptural content and subject matter w i l l be considered in the context o f the student's own work. A n examination of historical sculpture developments w i l l be a feature o f the class; however, the emphasis w i l l be upon developing an understanding o f contemporary sculptural concerns. SART 171 (3) (4,0,0) (F) SART 182 (3) (4,1.5.0) (F) T w o - D i m e n s i o n a l Studies: Printmaking I A foundation course for those with little or no experience. A n introduction to the basic techniques o f hardground, softground, drypoint and acquatint. Discussions regarding the image-making potential o f printmaking and the creative processes in general w i l l be ongoing. Particular T w o - D i m e n s i o n a l Studies: Painting I emphasis w i l l be given to the relationship between Through a combination o f assigned studio work, personal printmaking and painting with the student producing a research projects and an introduction to recent and number o f pieces demonstrating technical competency current trends i n the V i s u a l Arts, students w i l l gain an and creative potential. M o s t work w i l l be executed i n understanding o f how both abstract and concrete con- black and white. cerns may be expressed in terms o f imagery and through a variety o f methods and materials. Participants w i l l learn about the dimensions o f colour and how to effectively indentify and replicate colour and form. A c r y l i c s w i l l be the preferred m e d i u m but students w i l l be encouraged to investigate the characteristics and possibilities o f other m e d i a according to their individual needs. Guest speakers, field trips and slide-lectures w i l l be a feature o f the course and both individual and. group critiques w i l l be conducted at regular intervals. S A R T 172 (3) T w o - D i m e n s i o n a l Studies: Painting II (4.0.0) (S) Prerequisite: S A R T 171 A continuation o f S A R T 171 with added emphasis on developing personal areas o f interest and research i n SART 183 (3) (4,1.5.0) (S) T w o - D i m e n s i o n a l Studies: Printmaking II Prerequisite: S A R T 182 A continuation o f S A R T 182 with emphasis on printing procedures both i n black and white and colour. The student w i l l also be introduced to mono and relief printing methods (including lino/wood blocks and etched plates) and editioning procedures. Discussion o f historical and contemporary approaches to image-making w i l l be ongoing. SART 250 (3) T w o - D i m e n s i o n a l Studies: Painting III (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: S A R T 172 addition to designated painting problems w h i c h w i l l Students w i l l be assigned painting problems relating to require students to express their ideas i n multiple or historically familiar genres; portrait, still life, landscape, mixed-media techniques o f a more ambitious nature. figure and abstraction. W i t h i n these structured projects, There w i l l be opportunities for students to relate their students w i l l be given as much freedom as possible painting activities to other areas o f study within the regarding content, methods, scale etc. Students w i l l be program and to become more responsible for determining encouraged to re-define the painting process in terms o f their o w n priorities and goals. There w i l l be further their o w n needs and priorities. Emphasis w i l l be placed exposure to contemporary philosophies and activities i n on relating work i n this course to other areas o f the the V i s u a l A r t s . Program and to current trends in the V i s u a l Arts. SART 174 (3) (4.3.0) (S) T h r e e - D i m e n s i o n a l Studies: Sculpture II Prerequisite: S A R T 167 A continuation o f S A R T 167, but with the inclusion o f the f o l l o w i n g materials and techniques: w o o d construction and jointing, steel welding, and plaster modelling. Academic — Art: Studio Art 85 SART 255 (3) (4,0,0) (S) SART 265 (3) (4,3,0) (S) T w o - D i m e n s i o n a l Studies: Painting IV Three-Dimensional Studies: Sculpture IV Prerequisite: Prerequisite: S A R T 250 S A R T 257 A continuation o f S A R T 250 but with an increased need A further study o f historical and current sculptural for students to define their o w n areas o f interest and to ideologies. Assignments require individual strategies to extend their thinking i n an innovative, self-challenging respond to social/environmental and interactive issues. fashion. A s i n S A R T 250, guest speakers, field trips, Participation i n group debates and critiques w i l l foster slide lectures etc. w i l l be a feature o f the course. There constructive dialogue and criticism. w i l l be a continuing stress on relating work i n this course to contemporary activities i n the V i s u a l A r t s and to other SART 273 areas o f the Program. Experiments with images, methods Three-Dimensional Studies: Ceramic A r t III and materials w i l l be encouraged, with a view to the Prerequisite: development o f personal modes o f expression. Towards the end o f the course, students w i l l be required to define their o w n areas o f research and visual articulation as they embark on a thematically linked series o f work. SART 257 (3) (4,3,0) (F) Three-Dimensional Studies: Sculpture III Prerequisite: S A R T 174 (3) (4,3,0) (F) S A R T 165 Students w i l l undertake further exploration o f processes and materials, including the development o f original glazes and manipulation o f glaze characteristics. Students w i l l be encouraged to explore ways to bring to ceramic art their personal expressive interests within the context of contemporary ceramic usage. SART 274 (3) (4,3,0) (S) A resumption o f the investigation o f ideas, materiality Three-Dimensional Studies: Ceramic A r t IV and form, to broaden the participant's visual, tactile and Prerequisite: conceptual abilities. Traditional and current sculptural ideologies and techniques w i l l be examined i n the context of 20th century developments. (4,0,0) (F) craftsmanship and design o f functional and non-funcexplored i n greater depth. Glazes and other methods o f decoration w i l l continue to be examined. D r a w i n g III Prerequisite: T h e course w i l l include an increased emphasis on tional forms. Architectural ceramic applications w i l l be (3) SART 262 S A R T 273 S A R T 151 SART 282 (3) (4,1.5,0) (S) Continued study o f drawing as a means o f discovery, T w o - D i m e n s i o n a l Studies: Printmaking III (S) expression and communication. Conceptual, perceptual (3,3) and technical aspects o f drawing w i l l be examined. Prerequisite: Specifics to this course w i l l include advanced graphic elements, unconventional media, objective/subjective research. S A R T 183 A comprehensive study o f intaglio and relief printing methods, this course is primarily designed for the advanced printmaking student. Other areas that come under (3) SART 263 (4.0,0) (S) D r a w i n g IV Prerequisite: consideration w i l l include collographs, uninked embossing and the practical application o f colour theory. Discussion o f current directions i n printmaking and their S A R T 262 relationship to painting and sculpture w i l l be ongoing. Further study o f drawing with an emphasis on the development o f personal modes o f expression. The work SART 283 o f the three previous courses w i l l be reviewed, with the T w o - D i m e n s i o n a l Studies: Printmaking IV addition o f perceptual exploration and portfolio presenta- Prerequisite: tion i n the form o f a small series o f thematically linked work. (3) (4,1.5.0) (S) S A R T 282 Designed for the advanced printmaking student, the main concern w i l l be combined colour printing techniques based upon the individual's need. A folio o f w o r k w i l l be produced to document this research. T e c h n i c a l aspects that surface w i l l include photographic possibilities and dimensional prints. Academic 86 — Art: Studio Art Art: The Art The A r t Institute, specializing i n Sculpture and Institute Submissions should be addressed to: Printmaking, is a one year post-graduate certificate program unique i n the college system. Comparable to The A r t Department artist-in-residence programs, the Institute offers advanced Capilano College studies to artists with several years experience in sculp- 2055 Purcell W a y ture or printmaking, or to recent college, university or art North Vancouver, B . C . school graduates. V 7 J 3H5 M e m b e r s o f the Institute have access to well-equipped T e l . 984-4911 studios and specialized equipment, plus auxiliary facilities such as a darkroom, computer lab and media centre. Supplies and materials are available at cost. Lectures, seminars and tutorials feature guest artists and faculty w h o are professionals in their fields. W i t h the permission o f the instructor, and at no additional cost, members m a y also pursue individual research beyond the one-year certificate. A major component o f the Institute experience is the Fees The 1996/97 tuition fees for the A r t Institute were $678 per term. There are two terms per year. Although the normal shop supplies are provided, students can anticipate charges for materials directly involved with the production o f work. Art Institute: Advanced Options Courses interchange among the participants, which may include critiques, encouragement o f work i n progress, or expo- ART. 300 sure to new materials. A l o n g with providing the artist Art Institute I — Sculpture a n d Printmaking (12) (4,0,0) (F) with studio space, the Institute offers the expertise o f The Institute is designed to meet the needs o f students special speakers and workshop experiences. T h e atmos- with several years of experience in sculpture or phere is stimulating and supportive o f the individual's printmaking or who have left college, art school or aesthetic development. university and may no longer have access to specialized Admission Requirements access to w e l l equipped studios as w e l l as lectures, equipment and facilities. The A r t Institute w i l l emphasize C o m p l e t i o n o f A r t School D i p l o m a or B F A studies are required to enter this program. Exceptional students with equivalent w o r k experience may be accepted at the discretion o f the instructors. Note that it is not absolutely necessary to be specifically proficient i n the chosen area of study. Parallel experience w o u l d be considered, i.e. painting to printmaking. Enquiries and applications are accepted at any time throughout the year, although the normal registration periods are M a y and December for the first and second terms, respectively. Phone 98*4-4911 by the end o f A p r i l for an interview in early M a y . seminars and tutorials with instructors and invited professional artists. The format w i l l be one day o f class time and four or more days o f studio time. T h e studios are available during the evenings and weekends. ART. 301 (12) (4,0,0) (S) Art Institute II — Sculpture a n d Printmaking A continuation o f A R T . 300. Submissions 1. R e s u m e — t o include pertinent travel and other life experiences. 2. P o r t f o l i o — o r i g i n a l works where possible; however, slides, photographs or other printed material w i l l be acceptable. Where appropriate, and with the coordinator's permission, the portfolio requirement may be waived. 3. P r o p o s a l — a n outline o f the anticipated directions o f work. T h i s should be as specific as possible. Academic — Art: The Art Institute 87 Art: Textile Arts The Textile Arts Program is a department within the Visual and Performing Arts Division. For other Art Programs see also Graphic Design and Illustration Program and Studio Art Program. Contact: Ruth Scheuing, Coordinator Office: A R 206. Phone: 986-1911, ext. 2008. experience that w i l l facilitate entering a professional career. A n elective, to be chosen i n consultation with the Coordinator from general A r t courses, w i l l a l l o w students to develop understandings i n other disciplines. A critical and analytical approach to their own work w i l l enable graduates to be proficient i n a range o f professional activities. Optional two-week practicums w i t h artists, crafts people, Instructional Faculty related businesses or organizations take place in M a y , N . B O Y D , B . A . (Waterloo) after the end o f the school term. They provide a useful K . H O L L A N D , D i p . (Johannesburg School o f A r t ) work experience for students i n the Textile Arts Program. E . J U S T M A N N , B . A . (Debuque, Iowa), M . E d . (Arts) (McGill) A . M A L L I N S O N , (Westdean College, Sussex, England) L . R I C H M O N D , Teach. Cert. (London, G B ) M . A r t E d . Career Opportunities Past graduates are w o r k i n g professionally as artists, crafts people or designers i n fashion or interior design. Some (W. W a s h . State) R. S C H E U I N G , B . F . A . ( N o v a Scotia College o f A r t & graduates have found employment i n f i l m or theatre productions or work for arts organisations or related Design) P. S I N G E R , B . A . (Sir George W i l l i a m s ) , M . F . A . (Concordia) businesses. The Textile Arts Program can also be a stepping stone toward further studies i n degree granting programs and For further information contact the A r t Department at 984-4911. previous students have transferred to institutions across Canada and the U S A to pursue studies i n V i s u a l A r t s , Design, Fashion, Textile Conservation and A b o r i g i n a l General Description Arts. Options also exist to combine Textile A r t s w i t h T h e Textile A r t s Program offers a full-time, two-year studies i n academic areas such as Anthropology and A r t program leading to a D i p l o m a . History. It also offers a one year A d v a n c e d Textile Arts Certifi- Textile Arts form an important aspect o f the cultural life cate Program. in any community and many ways exist to apply the skills The T e x t i l e A r t s Program also offers the following part- learned and build a professional career. time professional courses: Professional and Business Instructional S k i l l s i n Arts and Crafts teaches students Skills i n A r t s and Crafts and Instructional Skills in Arts who are already experienced i n their chosen crafts or arts and Crafts. It also offers occasional evening part-time discipline. The focus is on instructional skills, human courses. relations, and adaptation techniques for people w i t h special needs. A two-week practicum offers practical experience. The Program Students learn about Textile A r t s by exploring many different processes and by studying historical and (This program is currently undergoing some changes and will not be offered in 1997.) contemporary w o r k s . Admission Requirements Gallery and studio visits, as w e l l as guest lectures by visiting artists and other professionals working i n textiles Textile Arts Diploma Program or related areas augment regular teaching sessions. They Completion o f Grade 12 or equivalent or mature student show distinct approaches to an artist's work and also status. provide practical information on how careers are built. Prospective students are admitted on the basis o f an The core content o f W e a v i n g and Textile Surface Design interview. N o previous experience in textile arts is is complemented by courses i n D r a w i n g , Design, V i s u a l required. Students should bring up to 20 pieces o f w o r k Literacy, Communications and Textile History. A new to the interview. A n y combination o f m e d i a are ac- course i n "Professional and Business S k i l l s i n Arts and cepted, such as textiles, painting, photographs, ceramics, Crafts" provides students w i t h information and hands-on Academic 88 — Art: Textile Arts drawing etc. Slides or photographs can be shown instead of actual works. Students should understand that advanced standing i n any institution is usually based on an interview and a portfo- Students without previous art background, but with lio submission, as well as credits. See the B . C . Transfer suitable academic experience w i l l also be considered. Guide for transfers i n British C o l u m b i a , and contact the Art Department for more specific information. A d v a n c e d Textile Arts Certificate Program A two year D i p l o m a i n V i s u a l Arts or equivalent studies with courses in the following areas for a combined total of 24 credits: Painting, Photography, Printmaking, Sculpture, Ceramics, W e a v i n g , Surface Design and Fashion D e s i g n . Special Fees and Expenses Some materials needed for the courses are supplied and are covered by a supply fee. In addition, students should expect an outlay for midterm, final projects, basic supplies, and textbooks. In addition 6 credits in each o f the following areas are also required: Design, Drawing, A r t History or V i s u a l Program Content Literacy, E n g l i s h or Communications. Textile Arts D i p l o m a Program Students also need to show a portfolio and come for an M a j o r Program Requirements Credits 36.0 General Education Requirements 18.0 interview to be admitted. N o previous experience in textile arts is required. Students w h o miss some prerequisites may be admitted into the advanced program on condition that they take the Electives 6.0 60.0 missing courses before graduating. A l t h o u g h this is primarily a full-time program, some parttime options may be possible with the coordinator's approval. C M N S 120 Effective W r i t i n g & Speech or a 100-level E n g l i s h course 3.0 Application Procedures T X T L 158 Design I 3.0 T X T L 160 T e x t i l e Surface D e s i g n I 3.0 T X T L 168 Weaving I Contact the A r t Department prior to M a y 1 to arrange an interview. Submit the following documentation to the A d m i s s i o n s Office o f the Registrar prior to M a y 1. • C o m p l e t e d C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e A p p l i c a t i o n for A d m i s sion • Secondary and Post-secondary Transcripts • Official copies o f E n g l i s h Language Assessment Test ( E L A ) or Test o f E n g l i s h as a Foreign Language ( T O E F L ) , i f applicable • Questionnaires N o t e : A p p l i c a t i o n s for A d m i s s i o n must be submitted to A d m i s s i o n s , Office o f the Registrar, together with official transcripts and the pertinent documents. Some additional interviews may be scheduled in August, space permitting. E v e n i n g interviews are available. Transfer Credits FIRST T E R M A H I S 104* Intro, to V i s u a l L i t e r a c y I 3.0 10 15.0 SECOND TERM A H I S 105* Intro, to V i s u a l Literacy II C M N S 153 Communications & the A r t s T X T L 154 T X T L 161 T X T L 169 or a 100-level E n g l i s h Course Introductory D r a w i n g I Textile Surface D e s i g n II W e a v i n g II 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 10 15.0 THIRD T E R M A H I S 2 3 1 * History o f Textile A r t 3.0 T X T L 178 3.0 D e s i g n II T X T L 267 W e a v i n g III 3.0 T X T L 284 Textile Surface D e s i g n III 3.0 Elective 3.0 15.0 FOURTH TERM Courses marked with an asterisk (e.g. A H I S 105*) carry A H I S 232* Aspects o f Textile A r t 3.0 transferability to U B C , S F U , U V i c and other academic T X T L 153 3.0 degree-granting institutions. Other courses can be T X T L 268 Weaving I V 3.0 transferred to programs w h i c h include Textile Arts in T X T L 285 T e x t i l e Surface D e s i g n I V 3.0 their curriculum. Introductory D r a w i n g II Elective 3.0 15.0 Academic — Art: Textile Arts 89 T X T L 154 A d v a n c e d Textile Arts Certificate (3) (4,0,0) (S) Credits Introductory Drawing I M a j o r Program Requirements 18.0 This course offers students drawing skills that w i l l be General Education Requirements 6.0 useful in their practice. Concentration w i l l be given to Electives 6.0 the study o f primary drawing media and basic techniques, 30.0 including pencil, pen and ink, brush and ink, marking FIRST T E R M pens, conte and pastel. It includes the study o f perspec- T X T L 384 Surface Design V 4.5 tive drawing from direct observation and representational T X T L 367 Weaving V 4.5 rendering techniques o f objects, structures, surfaces and A H I S 231 Textile H i s t o r y or A r t History elective (Humanities, Studio/ 3.0 textures. Students w i l l learn h o w to visualize in graphic terms, to symbolize and to stylize in terms o f line and line Textile Art) characteristics, and to develop power o f observation and 15.0 SECOND TERM T X T L 384 Surface D e s i g n V I T X T L 368 A H I S 232 TXTL158 4.5 Weaving V I T e x t i l e History or A r t History 4.5 3.0 Textile A r t or (3) (4,0,0) (F) Design I Basic design elements and principles o f colour theory w i l l be studied. Sources o f inspiration and imagery w i l l elective: Humanities, Studio/ T X T L 230 graphic sensibility. Prof, and Business be explored using a variety o f materials and processes. T w o dimensional repeat design w i l l be studied for application to surface decoration and compositional S k i l l s i n A r t s and Crafts 3.0 15.0 elements w i l l be investigated and adapted for textiles. M a i n project w i l l be presented in textiles. TXTL160 Textile Surface Design I Course Descriptions (3) (4,3,0) (F) For A r t History and Communications course descriptions, see the appropriate department sections in this Calendar. This is an introduction to traditional methods o f printing on fabric using found objects, blocks and stamps with pigment and dyes. W a x resists and bleach discharge TXTL153 Introductory D r a w i n g II (3) (4.0,0) (S) effects w i l l be explored. B o u n d and tied resists w i l l also be used with natural and fibre-reactive dyes. D e s i g n possibilities w i l l be studied for each m e d i u m and tradi- Prerequisite: T X T L 154 or any other drawing courses or by portfolio tional dye techniques from many cultures w i l l be examined. This course is a further exploration o f drawing media and techniques i n w h i c h students explore a balance between TXTL161 technical/perceptual skills and personal expression. Textile Surface Design II Study includes both representational and interpretive Prerequisite: (3) (4,3,0) (S) T X T L 160 work in assorted media, including charcoal, conte, ink and collage. Students w i l l develop confidence, k n o w l edge, graphic sensitivity and facility w i t h media while learning more about line, value, structure, depth and This is an introduction to printing fabric with stencils using pigments, fibre-reactive and natural dyes. Katazome techniques with rice paste resists w i l l be space and composition as they work w i t h various still life demonstrated. A p p l i q u e and stitching techniques w i l l be set-ups and the human figure. used for surface decoration and design possibilities for each medium w i l l be explored. Printed fabrics from different cultures and time periods w i l l be studied. Academic 90 — Art: Textile Arts T X T L 168 Weaving I (3) (4,3.0) (F) TXTL 267 W e a v i n g III This course is divided into two parts. One segment deals Prerequisite: with basic fibre properties and construction techniques such as felting, yarn construction, d y i n g and various offloom weaving techniques. T w i n i n g and coiling for basketry w i l l be studied and historical as w e l l as contemporary objects from various cultures w i l l be discussed. Tapestry is the subject o f the second half o f the course. A sampler is woven to learn the basic vocabulary o f traditional techniques. Analysis o f techniques used by medieval and contemporary artists helps students to explore the application o f the basic techniques. Studies in tapestry include the discussion o f the great mural tapestries o f medieval Europe and the rebirth of tapestry during the 20th century. One finished piece is woven. (3) (4,0,0) (F) T X T L 169 Hand-manipulated structures, ikat and painted warps w i l l w i l l be explored. The first part o f the course emphasizes weave structures for use in 3-Dimensional work or for imagery, i.e. double weave and weft brocade; the second part looks at graphic imagery and weaving. B o t h technical skills and personal expression w i l l be developed, and traditional and contemporary textiles w i l l be discussed i n class and through research. TXTL 268 W e a v i n g IV Prerequisite: (3) (4,3.0) (S) T X T L 267 This is a further exploration of techniques and ideas i n T X T L 169 (3) (4,3,0) (S) W e a v i n g II weaving and/or combinations with other methods o f textile constructions. Students w i l l develop a personal This introduction to loom weaving includes warping the focus and necessary techniques for individually designed l o o m and drafting pattern weaves on four harnesses. It projects, involving sampling, research and final projects. w i l l include samples and finished pieces, with an empha- Techniques can include rug-weaving, advanced m u l t i - sis on colour relationships, textures, and use o f different harness weaving, supplementary warp/weft, as w e l l as fibres. advanced projects i n felt, basketry and off-loom tech- Controlled dye techniques w i l l be introduced and historical and contemporary weaving from different niques. Critical discussions w i l l be encouraged i n class. cultures w i l l be studied. T X T L 178 (3) (4.0,0) (F) Design II Prerequisite: TXTL 284 Textile Surface Design III Prerequisite: T X T L 158 (3) (4,0,0) (F) T X T L 161 This study o f screen printing techniques using paper, Elements and principles of 2 D and 3 D design and advanced colour studies w i l l be explored. Problem solving techniques and concepts focusing on themes w i l l be used to explore sources o f imagery and inspiration. Different design media with their adaptation to textiles w i l l be used. wax, screen filler and direct emulsion stencils involves a variety o f methods for producing a repeat design w i t h different registration possibilities. There w i l l be an option for using photographic stencils for projects. L i g h t sensitive dyes w i l l be used for direct effects on fabric and hand-painting with different dyes and pigments w i l l be combined with screening techniques. T X T L 230 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Prof, a n d Business Skills in Arts a n d Crafts Prerequisites: One year full-time study in a visual arts program or equivalent experience. TXTL 285 (3) (4.3.0) (S) Textile Surface Design IV Prerequisite: T X T L 284 This course addresses basic self-management practices i n Direct hand-painting techniques w i l l be introduced and the arts; topics include the current cultural climate, different dyestuffs and pigments for natural and synthetic networking, finding contracts, creating a business and fabrics w i l l be used. R e l i e f and 3 D fibre construction action plan, developing a communications package, methods w i l l be used with fabric embellishment tech- financial management and understanding legal issues. It niques and direct dyeing techniques to create fibre gives an overview and practical hands-on experience o f structure. Basic paper-making techniques w i l l be studied, various careers i n arts and crafts and provides the re- exploring the possibilities o f paper collage, cast paper, sources for setting up a self-employed career in the arts. use o f different pulps, colouring and making pulp from plants. Academic — Art: Textile Arts 91 TXTL 367 (4.5) (4,6,0) techniques to create fibre structure. Direct hand-painting techniques w i l l be introduced and different dyestuffs and Weaving V Students w i l l expand their knowledge o f basic weaves through experimental pieces and finished projects. Handmanipulated structures, such as double weave and brocading, w i l l be explored as well as working with pigments for natural and synthetic fabrics w i l l be used. Chemical processes w i l l be introduced w h i c h alter the structure o f the cloth by distressing, shrinking, and destroying parts o f it. colour through ikat, painted and printed warps. This course emphasizes graphic approaches to weaving; w i l l be developed and traditional and contemporary INSTRUCTIONAL SKILLS IN ARTS AND CRAFTS (previously "Craft Instructor Training") textiles w i l l be discussed i n class and researched. This is a part-time evening program that enables students the use o f figurative and symbolic imagery or abstract patterning. B o t h technical skills and personal expression to teach arts and crafts i n a variety o f learning situations TXTL368 (4.5) (4,6,0) and to people with various levels o f physical and psycho- W e a v i n g VI logical abilities. Students learn about different instruc- This is a further exploration o f techniques and ideas in tional approaches, human relations and adaptive aids. weaving and/or combinations with other methods o f Issues o f aging and various disabilities are also discussed. textile constructions. Students w i l l develop necessary Students are introduced to basic administrative functions techniques for individually designed projects, involving of an arts and crafts coordinator as w e l l as approaches for sampling, research and final projects. developing projects and courses for schools, community Topics can include loom-weaving such as rug-weaving, computer assisted designing for advanced pattern weaving and special techniques designed for 3-dimensional weavings; non-woven techniques include felting, basketry and off-loom techniques. Students w i l l be encouraged to combine weaving with surface design processes projects, and institutional settings. Students develop a suitable portfolio and complete a two-week practicum i n an institutional setting. (This program is currently undergoing some changes and not w i l l be offered 1997/ 98. Contact the V i s u a l Arts Office for further information at 984-4911) Students need to present a portfolio of their work to enter and other media. the course. Some students who have related experiences T X T L 384 (4.5) (4,6,0) but who do not have a portfolio may be admitted under Surface Design V the condition that they prepare a portfolio and/or take The study o f screen printing using paper, wax and direct applied arts or crafts courses before graduating. F o r emulsion stencils involves a variety o f methods for admission please see general information for Textile Arts producing single images as w e l l as repeat designs with Program. different registration possibilities. Photographic effects N o t e : Applications for A d m i s s i o n must be submitted to w i l l be explored i n combination with discharge and resist the Office o f the Registrar together with official tran- processes. L i g h t sensitive chemicals w i l l be used for scripts and other pertinent documents. direct effects on fabric and hand-painting with different dyes and pigments w i l l be combined with screening Instructional Faculty techniques. T. A D L E R , B . A . (Toronto), M . S . W . ( U B C ) TXTL 385 Textile Surface D e s i g n VI (4.5) (4,6,0) Basic paper-making techniques w i l l be studied, exploring the possibilities o f paper collage, cast paper, use o f different pulps, colouring and making pulps from plants. R e l i e f and 3 D fibre construction methods w i l l be used with fabric embellishment techniques and direct dying Academic — Art: Textile Arts 92 H . A V E R Y , M . F A . ( U B C ) , B . F A . (Victoria), P h . D . (UBC) L . H A N S E N , D i p l . , (Capilano) L . W O O L F , D . T . A . T . I . (Toronto), B . A r c h . (Toronto) Course Descriptions TXTL 187 (3) Instructional Skills in Arts and Crafts I (4.0.0) (F) (3) (4,0,0) (F) This is an introduction to l o o m weaving. Students w i l l Students w i l l learn adaptation techniques and instructional skills to teach people with various levels o f physical and psychological abilities. Students w i l l also be introduced to issues o f aging and human relations processes that relate to teaching situations. learn about warping a loom, basic pattern drafting and weaving on four harness looms. T h e class w i l l include the weaving o f samples and finished pieces with an emphasis on colour relationships, texture and use o f different fibres. D y e methods w i l l also be introduced. Slides and examples o f historical and contemporary TXTL 287 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Instructional Skills in Arts and Crafts II Prerequisite: TXTL 194 Loom Weaving woven textiles w i l l be used as an inspiration for further study. T X T L 187 M o r e adaptation and instructional skills w i l l be taught, as w e l l as human relations skills. Students w i l l also learn to design, administer and maintain a craft program, gain the ability to implement innovative curriculum and acquire the ability to teach i n a variety o f situations. Students w i l l be required to complete a two-week practicum i n a hospital, senior citizen centre, school, or community centre as w e l l as a portfolio of their work. TEXTILE ARTS PROGRAM EVENING COURSES The Textile A r t s Program may offer selected evening courses as funding becomes available. Please contact the A r t Department i n M a y for further information at 9844911 or contact Extension Programs for non-credit evening courses. TXTL 198 Fabric Printing Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (S) None T h i s course is designed to develop a strong personal focus for people w i s h i n g to work i n Textile Surface Design. Students w i l l explore design exercises and develop ideas on issues and concepts that they can apply to dyeing, printing or embellishment techniques. Academic — Art: Textile Arts 93 Art History AHIS 104 (3) Introduction to Visual Literacy I Instructional Faculty J. J U N G I C B . A . , M . A . ( U B C ) (4,0,0) (F) This course is designed to encourage students to become D . N E A V E , B . A . (Manchester), M . A . ( U V i c . ) visually literate and confident i n the analysis/interpreta- P. S I N G E R , B . A . (George W i l l i a m s ) , M . F . A . tion o f all aspects o f the visual arts. Confrontation with a (Concordia) wide range o f ideas, images and media w i l l stimulate discussion and provide a deeper understanding o f the General Information creative process. The purposes o f art w i l l be discussed A r t History concerns itself with visual culture both past and the relationships between art and society explored. and present. V i s u a l art is explored and analysed i n order The interdisciplinary nature o f art w i l l be examined as to understand how it is composed and constructed and well as the achievements o f Canadian artists. how it functions as a carrier and producer o f meaning within society. A n a l y t i c a l tools that promote the critical decoding o f images, so relevant i n today's world, are emphasized i n a l l art history courses. AHIS 105 (3) Introduction to Visual Literacy II (4,0,0) (S) What is the impact o f advertising on the viewer? W h a t are the achievements o f women artists? W h a t are the University Transfer Credit current issues concerning art and censorship? These and A l l A r t History courses offered at Capilano College are other topical subjects relating to the arts w i l l be addressed transferable to U B C , S F U , and U V i c . Please check the in this course. Attention w i l l also be given to such themes B . C . Transfer G u i d e for further information. as magic and ritual i n art, the nude i n art, the artist as observer, the landscape in art and aspects o f photography. The material w i l l include the art o f the past as w e l l as the Course Descriptions AHIS 100 The History of Art I current art scene. Consideration w i l l also be given to the (3) (4,0,0,) (F) achievements o f Canadian artists. This course is designed to help students decode their visual w o r l d and become This course studies the history o f art beginning with the pyramids o f E g y p t and concluding with the Gothic Cathedrals and Italian fresco paintings o f the H i g h M i d d l e A g e s i n Europe. A n understanding and appreciation o f art are the aims o f the course and through lectures visually literate. AHIS 106 (3) (4,0,0)(F) Pre-Columbian, African and Northwest Coast Indigenous Art and class discussion students w i l l develop an "eye" for This course introduces the student to aspects o f Pre- seeing and appropriate terms to describe the works C o l u m b i a n art, Northwest Coast Indian art and A f r i c a n shown. O u r involvement with the art o f the past clearly art. The art, architecture and performing arts o f indig- reveals how changing styles in architecture, painting, and enous peoples w i l l be examined i n the context o f cultural, sculpture are influenced by the historical context and the religious and social issues. Students w i l l learn about political, social, and religious thought o f each period. civilizations that flourished i n M e x i c o prior to the Spanish Conquest. A section on the art o f the Northwest AHIS 101 The History of Art II (3) (4.0,0) (S) B e g i n n i n g with the art o f the Italian Renaissance, this course studies the history o f painting, sculpture, and architecture to the present day. Individual artists including Leonardo, M i c h e l a n g e l o , Rembrandt, G o y a , V a n G o g h and Picasso are studied in addition to the larger Coast Indian w i l l illuminate the achievements o f local indigenous cultures and their inherent relationship with the environment. In the component on African art, students w i l l study the early history o f African art and later artistic developments i n a variety o f regions ranging from Senegal to Zaire. their age, the economic, social, and religious ideas o f AHIS 107 (3) The Art of India, China and Japan each period w i l l be closely considered. Explore exotic Indian temples, ancient Chinese burials period styles. Because works o f art so perfectly reflect (4,0,0) (S) and Japanese shrines i n this introductory course to A s i a n art. Indian, Chinese and Japanese works o f art w i l l be examined in the light o f cultural, religious, social and political issues to emphasize the close connections Academic 94 — Art History between art and society. In particular, the impact o f attention on the creators o f the new style, the architects, H i n d u i s m , B u d d h i s m and Confucianism on the arts w i l l sculptors and painters o f Florence, A r e z z o , M a n t u a and be examined. Students w i l l gain insights into the evolu- Venice. The intellectual, religious and political climate o f tion o f important periods, styles and artistic traditions i n the fifteenth century, linked to the expression i n this new A s i a n art. Consideration w i l l be given to a wide range o f art, w i l l also be considered, as w i l l be the emerging art forms, including the performing arts and the Japanese importance of private patronage. tea ceremony. AHIS 221 AHIS 109 (3) (4,0,0) W o m e n , A r t a n d Art History (3) (4.0,0)(S) High Renaissance a n d Mannerist A r t in Italy This course studies the art o f the H i g h Renaissance and T h i s course w i l l present a broad historical survey o f the emerging view o f the artist as sovereign genius. The women's involvement i n Western art. It w i l l focus on the work o f Leonardo, M i c h e l a n g e l o and Raphael is exam- w o m a n artist i n society and consider the social, cultural ined i n depth. Focus is then given to the artists o f the and economic background o f each period i n order to Mannerist School, whose highly subjective and artificial understand the conditions under w h i c h women artists style dominates the latter part o f the sixteenth century. have w o r k e d from Antiquity to the 20th century. The The contributions o f the Venetians as w e l l as the archi- course w i l l also investigate the "image o f w o m a n " i n the tecture o f Palladio w i l l also be considered. tradition o f art history. Students taking this course cannot receive duplicate credit for W M S T 130. AHIS 231 (3) (4,0,0) (F) History of Textile A r t This course first studies the textile traditions o f the Near AHIS 210 (3) (4,0,0) (F) History of M o d e r n Art (19th Century) East by considering A n c i e n t E g y p t and its great linen manufactories, and the silk guilds o f the Byzantine This course studies the mainstreams o f modern art beginning with the paintings o f Jacques L o u i s D a v i d produced during the French Revolution and concluding with the art o f Cezanne. Emphasis is given to individual artists, and works by G o y a , Delacroix, Monet, V a n G o g h , Gauguin and others are studied i n depth. Aesthetic revolutions and counter-revolutions are explored i n conjunction w i t h the social and political upheavals o f the Empire, as w e l l as tracing the influence o f Sassanian designs. Cotton and the central role it played i n the struggle for Indian independence is highlighted as we move further east to consider the evolution o f the Dragon Robes o f C h i n a and the kimonos o f Japan. T h i s study concludes with textile designs and tapestries produced i n M e d i e v a l and Renaissance Europe where the important contributions o f such leading artists as Raphael and Rubens are fully considered. 19th century. AHIS 211 (3) History of M o d e r n A r t (20th Century) (4,0,0) (S) This history o f 20th century art begins with the work o f AHIS 232 Aspects of Textile A r t (3) (4,0,0) (S) This course first explores the textile traditions o f A f r i c a Picasso and Matisse and studies the impact o f revolution- and the Americas. The textiles o f the K u b a o f Zaire, ary movements o f art such as Futurism, Constructivism, Ancient Andean cloth and Contemporary M a y a n textile Dada, and Surrealism. America's post war contribution— designs are examined as important artistic expressions o f Abstract Expressionism, Pop, M i n i m a l i s m , Conceptual these cultures. Navaho weaving and the great tradition o f and Earth A r t — i s studied, leading to a full discussion o f the Chilkat Dancing Blanket o f the Pacific Northwest are Post M o d e r n i s m and the art o f the 90's. The aim of this studied as examples o f cross cultural expressions. O u r course is to demystify modern art by studying the attention then focuses on the effects o f the Industrial underlying concepts and theories, w h i c h w i l l reveal how Revolution on textile practices and the contributions o f closely art expresses the ethos o f contemporary life. W i l l i a m M o r r i s and the A r t s and Crafts M o v e m e n t . The course concludes w i t h a discussion o f 20th Century AHIS 220 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Early Renaissance A r t in Italy textiles and explores the work o f some o f the leading contemporary textile artists. This course traces the origins o f the Early Renaissance i n Italy, beginning w i t h the art o f Giotto and focusing Academic — Art History 95 Biology Instructional Faculty C . B E R E Z O W S K Y , B . S c . (Hons.), M . S c . (Sask.), P h . D . (Guelph) R . G . C A M F f f i L D , B . S c . (Hons.) (Monash), P h . D . ( U B C ) M . D E J O N G - W E S T M A N , B.Sc, M.Sc. (UBC) M . F T T Z - E A R L E , B . S c . (Nottingham), M . S c , P h . D . (Toronto), Coordinator o f B i o l o g y N . A . R I C K E R , B . A . (Calif.), M . S c , P h . D . ( U B C ) enter professions such as Agriculture, Dentistry, M e d i cine and Pharmacy should consult the institutions offering the programs to determine the specific B i o l o g y and other courses they require. N o t all second year courses are offered each year. A l l biology courses except B I O L 200, B I O L 201 and B I O L 206 require weekly laboratory periods and/or field trips. L a b manuals for those courses requiring them must V . M . T R O U P , B . S c . (Hons.) (McMaster), M . S c . ( U B C ) be purchased. Some courses also have field trips, w h i c h L . K . W A D E , B . S c , M.Sc. (UBC), Ph.D. have extra costs associated with them. S o m e courses (Austral.Nat. U ) Laboratory Supervisors and Technicians C . B E A T S O N , B . S c . (Waterloo), M . S c . ( W . Ontario), Laboratory Supervisor C . H A R R I S O N , B . S c . (Hons.) ( U V i c ) , Laboratory may have materials costs associated with them. University Transfer Credit A l l biology courses transfer to S F U , U B C , and U V i c For more details consult the B . C . Transfer G u i d e or the Capilano College Transfer G u i d e . Technician J. R I C H A R D S O N , B . S c . ( U V i c ) , M . S c . ( U B C ) , R . P . B i o . , Laboratory Supervisor Biological Sciences FIRST Y E A R C . R Y M E S , B . S c , M . S c . ( M c G i l l ) , D . V . M . (Guelph), Laboratory Supervisor C . S A N D E R S O N , B . S c . (Hons) (Durham), Laboratory Supervisor N . S E G S W O R T H , B . S c . (Hons.) (Michigan), R . T . ( C . S . L . T . ) , Laboratory Supervisor J. T H O M P S O N , Laboratory Technician L . W O N G , Laboratory Technician General Information Capilano College B i o l o g y Department offers courses to meet a variety o f educational needs. The B I O L 104/105 B I O L 108 or 110/111 C H E M 110/111 or 108/109 P H Y S 110/111 or 108/111 or 114/115 M A T H 110/111 English (six credits) SECOND YEAR A complete selection o f second year courses w h i c h are transferable to all three B . C . universities is available. Consult the B i o l o g y Department for the specific requirements to transfer into third year at the university o f your choice. and 104/113 sequences meet the laboratory science requirements for A r t s students as well as general interest biology courses. Students planning a major i n B i o l o g y or another life science, such as Botany, C e l l B i o l o g y , E c o l o g y , Genetics, M a r i n e B i o l o g y , M i c r o b i o l o g y , Physiology, Oceanogra- Course Descriptions BIOL 104 Human Biology I Prerequisite: (3) (4,3,0) (F) None phy or Z o o l o g y , should enrol i n B I O L 108 or 110 and This is the first term o f a course designed primarily as a 111. laboratory science elective for non-science students not Students lacking a " B " i n B I O L 12 (or B B I O 042) and/or Chemistry 11 should enrol i n B I O L 108 rather than B I O L 110. planning to take further courses i n biology. T h e basic concepts o f human biology and the position o f man as an organism are examined. M a j o r topics include: the evolution o f man, the structure and function o f human A complete selection o f second year courses is available w h i c h meet the credit transfer requirements o f S F U , U B C cells and tissues, cell division, human genetics, human and U V i c . Some o f these courses may be included i n the requirements for pre-professional programs, and for specific life science programs. Students who intend to B I O L 104 fulfills the entrance biology requirement for Academic — Biology 96 reproduction, development, digestion, and nutrition. the Nursing program at B C I T . BIOL 105 Environmental Biology Prerequisite: (3) (4,3,0) (S) BIOL 113 Human Biology II Prerequisite: None (3) (4,3,0) (S) B I O L 104 or permission o f the instructor. This course, designed primarily as a laboratory science A continuation o f the study o f human biology c o m - elective for non-science students, examines a wide range menced i n B I O L 104. The course focuses on the o f environmental issues from a biological perspective. anatomy and physiology o f the following organ systems: Basic principles o f ecology are developed and the impact cardiovascular, respiratory, musculoskeletal, nervous, and of modern society on the environment is assessed. The urinary. Special emphasis w i l l be given to health and overall focus is global; however, the basic ecological fitness as well as discussion o f disease and treatment. principles are developed using primarily British The laboratory sessions w i l l provide complementary C o l u m b i a n and other Canadian examples. Major environmental issues relevant to Canada are also stressed. Major practical study o f the systems, and introduce techniques used to make physiological evaluations (e.g. heart rate, topics include: ecological concepts, conservation and E K G , blood pressure, urine analysis). C o m p l e t i o n o f endangered species, air pollution and global warming, B I O L 104 and B I O L 113 permits students (upon entering water resources and water pollution. T h i s course serves Basic Health Sciences at B C I T ) to receive credit for as a Canadian Studies credit and, together with B I O L B H S C 105. 104, as a prerequisite for B I O L 204 and 206. BIOL 108 Basic Introductory Biology (4.5) (6,3,0) (F) This course is designed for the student who has not received a m i n i m u m o f " B " standing i n B i o l o g y 12 (or B B I O 042) or w h o has not taken Chemistry 11 (or B C H M 041). U p o n successful completion o f B I O L 108, students are qualified to take B I O L 111 i n the Spring semester. T h e course topics are the same as for B I O L 110. (3) (4.3,0) (F) B i o l o g y 12 (or B B I O 042) with a m i n i - m u m o f " B " standing and Chemistry 11 (or B C H M 041), or with the permission o f the instructor. Prerequisite: B I O L 108 or 110 and 111, and C H E M 110 (4,0,0) (F) and 111 or 108 and 109. A n introduction to the principles and mechanisms o f heredity. Emphasis w i l l be placed on an analytical approach to transmission genetics, genetics o f humans, introductory molecular genetics, quantitative genetics and population genetics. There is no laboratory for this BIOL 111 Introductory Biology II (3) BIOL 201 Genetics II Prerequisite: (4.3,0) (S) B I O L 108 or 110. (4.0,0) (S) B I O L 200. B I O L 214 and concurrent registration (if not already completed) i n B I O L 215 are A continuation o f the principles and mechanisms o f heredity, with emphasis on the genetics o f microorganisms, molecular genetics, genetic engineering and developmental genetics. There is no laboratory for this course. BIOL 204 Ecology I A continuation o f B I O L 110 w h i c h further develops the Prerequisite: discussion o f basic biological concepts including biologi- and 105. cal systems, evolution and ecology. (3) recommended. T h e standard introductory biology course for students who plan to take further courses i n science. Major topics w i l l include the origin o f life, cell structure and function, cell division and introductory genetics. Prerequisite: (3) course. BIOL 110 Introductory Biology I Prerequisite: BIOL 200 Genetics I (3) (4,3,0) (F) B I O L 108 or 110 and 111, or B I O L 104 A n introduction to the principles o f ecology w i t h emphasis on ecosystem and community dynamics and structure; ecosystem concepts, components, interrelationships, energy flow and nutrient c y c l i n g . Introduction to vegetation analysis i n the B . C . context. B o t h plants and animals w i l l be considered but plants w i l l be emphasized. Academic — Biology 97 W e e k l y field trips examine local biogeoclimatic zone biology and ecology o f each group. T h e course is structure and composition, while a southern B . C . field designed around the major unifying concept o f evolution. trip introduces several inland biogeoclimatic zones. Problems o f contemporary interest i n the field o f inverte- This course serves as a Canadian Studies credit. brate zoology. The laboratory complements the lecture components and the course includes a three-day field trip BIOL 205 (3) (4,3,0) (S) to the Bamfield M a r i n e Station. Ecology II BIOL 213 Prerequisite: B I O L 204. (3) (4,3,0) (S) Vertebrate Z o o l o g y A continuation o f ecological principles, with the intro- Prerequisite: B I O L 108 or 110 and 111. duction and application o f quantitative concepts. The emphasis w i l l be on animal ecology including population A comparative survey o f the major classes o f vertebrates, dynamics, animal behaviour, competition, predator-prey emphasizing evolutionary trends especially i n develop- relationships, and other aspects o f interactions o f plant ment and morphology o f organ systems. A d a p t i v e and animal populations. W e e k l y field trips and a three- features i n vertebrates are considered. T h e laboratory day field trip to the Pacific R i m National Park area w i l l complements the lecture component with representative be included i n the course. vertebrates being examined. T h e lab component includes several half day field trips. This course serves as a Canadian Studies credit. BIOL 214 BIOL 206 (3) (4,0,0) (F) (3) (4,3,0) (F) Cell Biology Ecology o f t h e W e s t e r n Pacific Prerequisite: Prerequisite: B I O L 108 or 110 and 111, or B I O L 104 B I O L 108 or 110 and 111 and concurrent registration i n C H E M 200, i f not already completed. and 105, or G E O G 112 and 114, or by permission o f the B i o l o g y Coordinator. Corequisite: Transfer to U B C requires C H E M 200/201. This course examines the complex ecology and biogeog- A n integrated study o f the structure and function o f cells raphy o f the lands bordering the western Pacific Ocean. and their components. Ultrastructure o f cell organelles as Basic principles o f biogeography and ecology w i l l be determined by electron microscopy w i l l be related to the presented with reference to the regions concerned. molecular functions o f cells. Selected environmental issues and biogeographic charac- placed on the techniques used to study cells, the evolu- Emphasis w i l l also be teristics w i l l be discussed for the following regions: the tionary origin o f cells and their components, and on A s i a n M a i n l a n d , with emphasis on Japan and China; the comparisons between specialized cell structure and M a l a y Peninsula and Indonesia; and Australasia, focus- function. The laboratory exercises w i l l use modern ing on Australia, Papua N e w G u i n e a and N e w Zealand. methods o f microscopy and separation techniques i n a There is no lab for this course. detailed study o f cell structures and their functions. BIOL 210 (3) (4,3,0) (F) BIOL 215 (3) M o r p h o l o g y o f Vascular Plants Biochemistry Prerequisite: B I O L 108 or 110 and 111. Prerequisite: (4,3,0) (S) B I O L 214 and concurrent registration i n C H E M 201, i f not already completed. A comparative study o f the vascular plant groups, the pteridophytes, gymnosperms and angiosperms with A n examination of the fundamental principles and basic emphasis on the evolution, morphology, ecology and facts o f biochemistry starting w i t h protein structure and function o f each o f the groups. Discussions o f problems enzyme functions. C e l l energetics, biosyntheses and in plant morphology. mechanisms w h i c h control cell metabolism w i l l also be considered. T h e laboratory w i l l involve detailed experi- BIOL 212 (3) (4,3,0) (F) Invertebrate Z o o l o g y Prerequisite: B I O L 108 or 110 and 111. A comparative survey o f the major phyla and classes o f invertebrates with emphasis upon phylogeny, adaptive Academic 98 — Biology mental analyses, using the current techniques o f biochemistry, o f the molecular functions o f cells and tissues. BIOL 220 (3) (4,3,0) (F) Microbiology I Prerequisite: B I O L 108 or 110 and 111; C H E M 110 and 111. Corequisite: Transfer to U B C requires C H E M 200 and 201. A comprehensive treatment o f introductory microbiology. The origin, basic structure, growth and metabolism o f micro-organisms w i l l be discussed. The lab provides practical experience i n standard microbial techniques. BIOL 221 (3) (4,3,0) (S) Microbiology II Prerequisite: B I O L 220 A continuation o f B I O L 220, emphasizing genetics, i m m u n o l o g i c a l aspects, and ecology o f micro-organisms. The role o f micro-organisms in agriculture, various industries, health and sanitation is considered. Academic — Biology 99 Chemistry Instructional Faculty S. A L B O N , B . S c , M . S c . ( U B C ) M . E . E V A N S , B . S c . (South Wales), P h . D . (London, U K ) P . C . L E C O U T E U R , B . S c , M . S c . (Auckland), P h . D . (Calif.), Chair, Pure and A p p l i e d Sciences D i v i s i o n P H Y S 200/201 and 210/211 or 218/222 and 210/211 M A T H 200 and 230, and 235 depending upon university (consult a faculty member) Elective Science Elective from math or physics C . G . G I L L , B . S c (Hons) (Acadia), P h . D . ( U B C ) Students planning to pursue a major or honours course i n K . G . T Y E R S , B . S c (Hons), M . S c . (Western Ontario), chemistry should consult a faculty member as require- P h . D . ( S F U ) , Coordinator o f Chemistry, G e o l o g y and ments differ with individual universities. Physics J.R. W O L F , A . B . (Dartmouth), P h . D . (Massachusetts) Course Descriptions Laboratory Supervisors and Technicians A n Introduction to Chemistry B . A D D I S O N - J O N E S , B . S c . (Hons) (Manitoba), Prerequisite: C H E M 030 Laboratory Supervisor K . B . H A C K , B . S c . ( U B C ) , Laboratory Supervisor B . J . M O I R , D i p . Tech. ( B C I T ) , Laboratory Technician D . F . S H E R A T O N , B . A . S c , P h . D . ( U B C ) Laboratory Supervisor (3) (4,2,0) (S) N o n e ( N o university transfer credit) This course is designed for those students who have had no previous chemistry, and w h o w i s h to go on i n sciences. T w o hour labs are given. A t o m s , molecules, the mole, chemical formulas, ionic and covalent bonding. Balancing equations, simple stoichiometry problems, solutions, acids, bases and salts, equilibrium, gas laws. I. S M I T H , H . N . C . (Aberdeen), Laboratory Supervisor C H E M 104 (3) General Information Fundamentals of Chemistry I A l l chemistry courses include weekly three-hour labora- Prerequisite: tory periods unless otherwise stated. The cost o f the labs Some chemistry recommended. is included i n the course tuition fee except for lab manuals. Students are required to have (and wear) safety glasses i n all laboratory periods. C H E M 030 and C H E M 104 fulfill the entrance chemistry requirement for the N u r s i n g program at B C I T . University Transfer Credit A l l chemistry courses, except 030, carry transfer credit to S F U , U B C and U V i c F o r details consult the B . C . Transfer G u i d e or the Capilano College Transfer G u i d e available at the A d v i s i n g Centre or College reception. (4,3,0) (F) M a t h 11 or M A T H 095 or equivalent. A course specifically designed for the non-science students who need first-year chemistry requirements for nursing, home economics and human kinetics, etc. A study o f chemical principles, stoichiometry, the chemical bond; atomic structure; chemical periodicity; introductory thermochemistry; gases. C H E M 105 (3) Fundamentals o f Chemistry II Prerequisite: (4,3,0) (S) C H E M 104. A study o f liquids, solids, and changes o f state; oxidaChemistry tion-reduction, electrochemistry, representative inorganic chemistry; equilibrium; acids, bases and salts; organic FIRST Y E A R C H E M 110/111 or 108/109 chemistry. P H Y S 114/115 or 110/111 or 108/111 M A T H 110/111 English (six credits) Elective (six credits) SECOND Y E A R C H E M 200/201 and 204/205/206 Transfer to U B C or S F U (consult a faculty member) Academic 100 — Chemistry NOTE: C H E M 108,109,110, and 111 students: students who lack mathematics prerequisite or corequisites should see a chemistry instructor prior to registration to discuss possible prerequisite waivers. C H E M 108 Basic Chemistry I (4.5) (6,3,0) (F) C H E M 200 Organic Chemistry I (3) (4,3,0) (F) Prerequisite: C H E M 11 or C H E M 030. Prerequisite: Corequisite: M A T H 105 or 110. has attempted the course previously w i l l not be allowed C H E M 105, 109 or 111. A n y student who Students with B C H M 041 or 042 should see D r . K e n to register without the instructor's permission. Tyers, Chemistry Coordinator, for appropriate placement. A study o f nomenclature, structure, and spectroscopy o f organic molecules; alkanes, alkenes, alkynes, organometallic compounds, alcohols, ethers, a l k y l halides; mechanisms and stereochemistry. Students with Chemistry 12 are not permitted to enrol in C H E M 108 except with Chemistry Department's permission. This course covers the material o f C H E M 110, and, in addition, provides the background necessary for a student C H E M 201 who has not taken Chemistry 12. Prerequisite: C H E M 109 Basic Chemistry II Prerequisite: (4.3.0) (S) (3) Organic Chemistry II (4.5) (6,3,0) (S) C H E M 108. M a t h 110 must be taken concurrently, i f not already completed. Students with C H E M 200 Aromatic chemistry, aldehydes, ketones, acids and their derivatives, carbanions; amines; nitro, azo, diazo and related compounds; heterocyclics; carbohydrates, protein chemistry; polymers; natural products. C H E M 110 permitted to enrol i n C H E M 109 only with Chemistry Department's permission. T h i s course covers the material o f C H E M 111, and, in addition, provides the background necessary for a student who has not taken Chemistry 12. C H E M 110 (3) (4,3,0) (F.S) Principles a n d M e t h o d s o f Chemistry I Prerequisite: Chemistry 12. Corequisite: M A T H 105 or 110. Students with B C H M 042 should see D r . K e n Tyers, Chemistry Coordinator, for appropriate placement. A course for students who plan careers in science. A study o f stoichiometry; the gaseous state; solids; liquids; solutions; atomic structure; the periodic system; chemical bonding; thermochemistry. CHEM 110/111 may be completed by guided self-study format; however, this option is not available in 1997/98. C H E M 111 (3) (4,3,0) (S) Principles a n d M e t h o d s o f Chemistry II Prerequisite: C H E M 204 (3) Introduction t o Physical Chemistry (4,0,0) (F) Prerequisite: C H E M 109 or 111, or C H E M 105 with a " B " standing, M A T H 111. This course is an introduction to chemical thermodynamics and its application to gas behaviour, chemical and phase equilibria, colligative properties and electrochemistry. C H E M 205 (1.5) Introduction t o Inorganic Chemistry (2,3,0) (S) Prerequisite: C H E M 109 or 111, o r C H E M 105 with a " B " standing. A n introduction to the properties, bonding, structure and reactivity of coordination complexes o f the first r o w transition elements. C h e m i c a l kinetics and current spectroscopic methods w i l l also be covered. T h e laboratory component emphasizes the synthesis o f inorganic compounds and the use o f modern analytical instruments. C H E M 110. M A T H 110 must be taken concurrently, i f not already completed. C H E M 206 (1.5) Introduction t o Analytical Chemistry (2,3,0) (F) Thermodynamics, kinetics, equilibrium, acids, bases and salts; redox equations, electrochemistry; organic chemis- try. CHEM 110/111 may be completed by guided selfstudy format; however, this option is not available in 1997/1998. Prerequisite: C H E M 109 or 111, or C H E M 105 T h e basic principles and techniques o f analytical chemistry, including neutralization, complex-formation and gravimetric reactions. Spectroscopic methods include ultraviolet-visible spectrophotometry and atomic absorption spectroscopy. Academic — Chemistry 101 Chinese Instructional Faculty learn more grammatical structures and Chinese charac- B . N G . , B . A . (Intl. Christian U . , Japan), M . A . (London), Teach. Cert. G r a d . Master (Hong K o n g ) Y . Q U , B . A . (Shandong Teachers' U . ) , M . A . (Beijing Foreign Studies U . ) , P h . D . ( U B C ) ters. They w i l l also learn how to use a Chinese dictionary as a tool for further study. CHIN 150 (3) (4,2,0) (F, Su) Spoken M a n d a r i n I: For Speakers o f O t h e r Chinese Dialects A l l courses in M a n d a r i n Chinese consist o f four hours o f lectures and one and three quarters o f an hour o f conversation/laboratory practice. This is a M a n d a r i n conversational course for speakers o f other Chinese dialects. Students should have a good command o f Chinese characters and grammar. This Students with a competence in the language beyond the course is designed for students to gain fluency in spoken level o f the course i n w h i c h they are registered w i l l be Mandarin Chinese, particularly i n the areas o f aural required to withdraw. F o r example, native speakers o f comprehension and oral fluency. Mandarin and/or other Chinese dialects and those who have taken M a n d a r i n courses in high school are not CHIN 151 allowed i n the first year courses. Students with some Spoken M a n d a r i n II: For Speakers o f O t h e r knowledge o f Chinese must consult with an instructor for Chinese Dialects placement. University rules governing such students differ within departments, but the Language Department (3) (4,2,0,) (S.Su) Prerequisite: C H I N 150 or the equivalent or permission of instructor. has correspondence dealing with matters relevant to credit transfer and point o f entry. In order to avoid This conversational course continues with the develop- misunderstanding, students are invited to discuss these ment o f aural comprehension and oral fluency i n M a n d a - problems with the Department prior to enrolment. rin for speakers o f other Chinese dialects. Contrasts between M a n d a r i n and other dialects w i l l be made. Students who are not sure o f their language level must Perfection o f Mandarin pronunciation " P i n y i n " w i l l be consult an instructor. stressed. University Transfer Credit CHIN 200 Intermediate Chinese I Chinese courses at C a p i l a n o College transfer to U B C , (3) (4,2,0) (F) S F U and U V i c . F o r details consult the B . C . Transfer Prerequisite: Guide. This course is for students who k n o w the basics o f Mandarin phonetics and grammar and approximately 600 Chinese characters, or for those who have completed C H I N 100 and 101. It teaches more Chinese characters, focusing on reading and writing o f simple Chinese texts. Chinese literature is also introduced. Course Descriptions (3) CHIN 100 (4,2,0) (F, Su) Beginning Chinese I C H I N 101 or permission o f instructor. Introduction to M a n d a r i n Chinese using the Pinyin system o f pronunciation i n M a i n l a n d C h i n a . F o r complete beginners (spoken and written) i n Chinese. This course starts with basic tones and pronunciation to prepare students to speak the language. It also teaches basic grammar and the writing o f about 150 Chinese CHIN 201 Intermediate Chinese II Prerequisite: (3) (4,2,0) (S) C H I N 200 or permission o f instructor. Continues the work o f Chinese 200. characters. CHIN 101 (3) (4,2,0) (S, Su) Beginning Chinese II Prerequisite: C H I N 100 or permission of instructor. C H I N 101 takes students who have learned basic M a n d a rin phonetics and about 150 Chinese characters. This course stresses conversational skills and listening c o m prehension using situational dialogues. Students w i l l Academic — Chinese 102 NOTE: Other Chinese language courses are listed under the Asia Pacific Management Co-operative Program section of this Calendar. Commerce Instructional Faculty J.E. S A Y R E , B . S . , B . A . (Denver), M . A . (Boston) K . V . T O W S O N , B.Sc., M.Sc. (SFU) J. W A T E R S , B . A . (Hons.) M . A . , P h . D . ( S F U ) C . W A T K I S S , B . S c . (Carleton), M . S c , P h . D . (Toronto) J. W I L S O N , B . C o m m . ( U B C ) , C A . Y e a r I courses are complete and grades received. Students who wait until late summer may find that all spaces have been filled. In the F a l l T e r m students admitted to Y e a r II take: C O M M 290, 292, 293, E C O N 211 and one university transfer elective. A F a l l T e r m Grade Point Average ( G P A ) o f 2.67 with no The C o l l e g e offers a two-year transfer package to U B C consisting o f Y e a r I and Y e a r II as follows: grade below C - must be achieved to continue into the Spring term, when the following courses are taken: Year I C O M M 291, 294, 297, 392 and one university transfer elective. Students do not need to apply to the Commerce Department to enter the first year. S i m p l y apply to the College through the Registrar's Office and ensure that the follow- Admission ing courses are taken: Applications for admission must be submitted to A d m i s - a) E C O N 111 and 112; transcripts and other pertinent documents. sions, Office o f the Registrar, together with official b) E N G L 100 followed by O N E o f E N G L 103, 104, 105, 106; c) M A T H 108 and 109 • the prerequisite to M A T H 108 is the M a t h Placement Test ( M P T ) O R completion i n the past year o f M a t h 12 w i t h a B grade or better, or M A T H 103, M A T H Transfer to University of British Columbia The current policy o f U B C is to automatically admit into Y e a r III all students who complete Capilano College's Y e a r II program (in one year) with a G P A in Y e a r II o f 3.0 or higher. 105, M A T H 107 or B M T H 046 with at least a C grade. • Students not ready for M A T H 108 w i l l take M A T H 107, followed by M A T H 108 and 109. Students not • Transfer to Simon Fraser University or University of Victoria ready for M A T H 107 should see an advisor at the Some courses i n the U B C transfer package do not C o l l e g e ' s A d v i s i n g Centre to plan a preparatory year. transfer to S F U or U V i c . Students wishing to transfer to Note: M A T H 110 and 111 may be substituted for either of these institutions are, therefore, strongly urged M A T H 108/109, but this combination is oriented more to see a Counsellor or A d v i s o r before applying for toward science than business; admission to Y e a r II. d) F o u r electives: any four university transfer courses; e) C o m m e r c e students should N O T take M a t h 101 or Course Descriptions 102 and should also note that credit w i l l be granted for only one computer language—i.e. C O M P 101 or C O M P 102 but not both. Year II U p o n completion o f Y e a r I, students must A P P L Y for admission to the C o m m e r c e Program by completing a " C o m m e r c e Program A p p l i c a t i o n " w h i c h can be obtained from the Social Sciences D i v i s i o n . There are 36 seats available i n Y e a r II and preference is given to students COMM 290 (3) Quantitative Methods for Business (4,0,0)(F) A study o f standard quantitative methods used i n business and industry, including decision theory and basic probability. The study o f computer software packages is included. COMM 291 (4) Applications of Statistics in Business (6,0,0) (S) with the best Y e a r I records who want to take the entire Prerequisite: Y e a r II Program. Applications to the Commerce Pro- The methods and applications o f statistics i n business; gram should be made immediately i n late spring once the C - or better i n C O M M 290 continuous random variables; sampling; estimation o f parameters; hypotheses testing and regression analysis. Academic — Commerce 103 C O M M 292 (4) (6,0,0) (S) Principles of Organizational Behaviour Behaviour i n organizations as it affects people or individuals, their relationships with others, their performance i n groups and their effectiveness at work. C O M M 293 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Financial Accounting A n introduction to the construction and interpretation o f financial statements and reports including the balance sheet, income statement, statement o f retained earnings and the statement o f change i n financial position. C O M M 294 (4) (6,0,0) (S) Managerial Accounting Prerequisite: C - or better i n C O M M 293 Introduction to the development and use o f accounting, information for management planning and control and the development o f cost information for financial reports. C O M M 297 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Capital Markets and Institutions Introduction to the economic environment in which businesses operate including the role o f the B a n k o f Canada. A n a l y s i s o f domestic and international money markets and institutions and the basic capital asset valuation models. C O M M 392 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Labour Relations A n introduction to union-management relations which includes the study o f trade union history and structure, the collective bargaining process and labour legislation. Academic — Commerce 104 Computing Science Instructional Faculty M A T H 110 Calculus I J . D . B O N S E R , B . A . S c , M . A . S c . ( U B C ) , P h . D . (Waterloo), C . N . I . ( N o v e l l ) R. B R E W S T E R , B . S c , M.Sc. (UVic), Ph.D. (SFU) P. C A R T E R , B . S c . (Hons) (Sheffield), M . S c , P h . D . (UBC) A P S C : 3 credits C O M P 101 Introduction to C o m p u t i n g Science 3.0 Y . C O A D Y , B . S c . (Gonzaga), M . S c . ( S F U ) , C . N . I . C O M P 110 Fundamentals o f Programming 4.0 (Novell), Coordinator o f Computing Science C O M P 111 Fundamentals o f C o m p u t i n g 3.0 A P S C 100 4.5 C o m p u t i n g Career S k i l l s 3.0 C o m p u t i n g : 24 credits T . D A K I C , B . S c , M . S c . (Zagreb) C O M P 133 Scheme and Computer Programming 1.0 E. K U T T N E R , B . S c , M.Sc. ( U B C ) C O M P 201 W o r k i n g w i t h Operating Systems 4.0 C O M P 222 Data Structures and A l g o r i t h m s 3.0 C . W A T K I S S , B . S c . (Carleton), M . S c , P h . D . (Toronto), C.N.I. (Novell) M A T H 223 Discrete Mathematics w i t h Applications 3.0 D. W E S T C O T T , B . S c , M . S c (UBC) One of: C O M P 212 Introduction to D i g i t a l Hardware C O M P 213 Software Engineering General Information 3.0 3.0 T h e C o m p u t i n g Science Department offers computing Note: C O M P 101 and/or M A T H 105 requirements may science courses at the first and second-year university be waived for those with appropriate background. level. Note: C O M P 213 and A P S C 100 w i l l be offered for the Students enrolled in these courses have excellent access to the College's computing facilities. Students first time in Spring 1998. Those with equivalent elective planning to major i n computing science and science or experience may have A P S C requirement waived. students fulfilling computing science elective requirements normally take C O M P 110/111 i n their first year. Other students w i s h i n g an introduction to computers and programming normally take C O M P 101. C o m p u t i n g courses are continuously being updated. Please contact the Computing Science Department for current course offerings and transfer status. University Transfer Credit M o s t Computing Science courses transfer to S F U , U B C and U V i c . F o r details consult the B . C . Transfer G u i d e or Capilano College Transfer G u i d e available at the A d v i s ing Centre or C o l l e g e reception, or c a l l the C o m p u t i n g Science Department. Computing Science DIPLOMA PROGRAM IN COMPUTING SCIENCE FIRST Y E A R Capilano C o l l e g e has identified the need to offer formal recognition for the completion o f a certain set o f courses i n C o m p u t i n g Science. The D i p l o m a Program in C o m puting Science provides both part-time and full-time students an opportunity to obtain an understanding o f the fundamentals o f computers and programming, enabling students to secure many o f today's computing career opportunities. Requirements: C O M P 110/111 ( U B C , S F U ) C O M P 133 ( U B C ) M A T H 110/111 P H Y S 108/111 or 110/111 or 114/115 ( U B C ) C H E M 108/109 or 110/111 ( U B C ) E N G L (6 credits) ( U B C , U . V i c ) E N G L (3 credits) or Philosophy 110 ( S F U ) Electives (9 credits) ( S F U ) Electives (12 credits) ( U . V i c ) Completion o f 60 credit hours o f course work (30 credits SECOND YEAR and the final 5 0 % taken at Capilano College) with a C O M P 222 m i n i m u m grade point average o f 2.00. Courses must C O M P 212 M A T H 200 include the f o l l o w i n g : E n g l i s h : 6 credits E N G L 100 Composition E N G L 103/104/105 Credits 3.0 3.0 M a t h : 7.5 credits M A T H 105 Precalculus Mathematics M A T H 205 ( U B C , S F U ) M A T H 223 M A T H 230 ( U B C ) M A T H 235 ( U V i c ) A r t Electives (6 credits) ( U B C ) 3.0 Academic — Computing Science 105 Electives (9 credits) ( U B C ) A n introduction to computer programming emphasizing Electives (12 credits) ( S F U ) principles of functional decomposition and procedural Electives (15 credits*) ( U V i c ) abstraction; principles o f problem solving and algorithm * C S C 230 (Computer Architecture) and C S C 275 design, basic techniques for representing and manipulat- (File Structures) at U V i c are required courses not ing problem data. The student w i l l learn h o w to design, offered at C a p i l a n o College. develop and document well-structured programs. N o programming experience is necessary, but previous exposure to microcomputers is helpful. Prerequisites The C o m p u t i n g Science Department requires at least a " C - " grade i n a prerequisite before allowing a student to proceed with a subsequent course. Students should note C O M P 110 (F,S,Su) (4,0,1.3) (4) Fundamentals o f Programming that while a " C - " is the m i n i m u m required to proceed, a better grade is recommended to ensure the best chance o f Prerequisite: success i n the subsequent course and a satisfactory G P A least a " C - " grade in M A T H 103 O R M A T H 105. A t for transfer to a university. least a " B " grade i n C S 12 or C O M P 101. Students w i l l not be allowed to retake a prerequisite once A disciplined approach to modular program design. The they have completed a subsequent course with a " C - " course emphasizes the design o f data structures and the grade or better. development o f algorithms, with applications to areas o f M A T H 12 with at least a " B " grade, or at theoretical computing science. C o m p i l a t i o n and execution processes and associated data structures are studied. Course Descriptions Topics include data abstraction and abstract data types, C O M P 101 (3) (3,0,1) (F,S,Su) dynamic data structures, strings, stacks and lists, recur- Computers a n d their Applications sion, searching and sorting methods. Prerequisite: This course is designed for science students with a solid M a t h 11 with at least " B " grade, or at least " C - " grade i n M A T H 0 9 5 , or permission o f the instructor. A n introduction to the basic concepts o f computer hardware and software, operating systems, applications software and programming, and a study o f some o f the social and ethical implications o f the increasing use o f computers. course also includes an introduction to problem solving, algorithm design and computer programming. This course serves as an introduction to Computing Science for students w h o do not have previous computing experience. It also serves as a good science option for students i n Arts or C o m m e r c e . COMP102 computing science as a core or elective i n the first year. Together with C O M P 111, it forms the prerequisite for the second year computing science program. (3) Prerequisite: (3,0,1) (F) M a t h 110 as a corequisite or permission o f the instructor. N O T E : T h i s course is intended for students registered in the Engineering program, and other students may enrol only with the permission o f the instructor. — Computing (3) (4,2,0) (F.S) Fundamentals of C o m p u t i n g Prerequisite: A least a " C - " grade i n C O M P 110. M A T H 110 is a corequisite. A theoretical and practical introduction to concepts o f computing and machine organization. O n the theoretical side, the course deals with the issues o f computability and solvability o f problems, and introduces the T u r i n g machine as a model o f an abstract computer. Practical experience with programming i n a low-level language exposes the student to the fundamentals o f number Introduction t o P r o g r a m m i n g 106 level language such as Pascal, who wish to continue with C O M P 111 Students w i l l gain experience with a microcomputer operating system, various software packages including word processor, spreadsheet and database, and an interpreted programming language environment. The Academic foundation i n modular algorithm design using a h i g h - Science representation, organization o f memory, implementation o f high level language instructions, operations o f assemblers, linkers and loaders, execution o f programs, and processing o f interrupts and system calls. C O M P 130 (1) (1.3,0,0) (S)* Introduction t o A P L Prerequisite: A " C - " grade or better i n C O M P 110 or permission o f the instructor. A n introduction to A P L ( A Programming Language) both C O M P 201 (4) (4,0.1.3) (S) W o r k i n g w i t h C o m p u t e r Systems a n d Networks Prerequisite: A " B " grade in C O M P 101. A n introduction to the concepts o f operating systems i n the context o f practical applications. T h i s course is as mathematical notation and as a computer programming intended to give students a w e l l rounded background i n language. A P L primitives and their use, arrays of data working with a variety o f computer systems including and their manipulation, modular design o f vector solu- multi-user environments and networks. A p p l i c a t i o n s tions to problems, practical experience in writing and include: using initialization and batch files to customize a using A P L programs. microcomputer system, and managing network files and • ( N o t offered i n 1997/98) security in a client/server system. C O M P 131 (1) (1.3,0,0) (S) C++ a n d Object O r i e n t e d P r o g r a m m i n g C O M P 212 (3) Introduction t o Digital H a r d w a r e Prerequisite: Prerequisite: A t least a " C - " grade in C O M P 102 or (4,2.0) (S) A " C - " grade or better i n C O M P 111. permission o f the instructor. A n introduction to the design and analysis o f digital This course serves as an introduction to data abstraction computer circuitry. Hardware storage o f numeric and for students w h o have experience with procedural logic values. Introduction to arithmetic/logic digital abstraction. T o p i c s include object oriented programming circuitry and integrated circuits. D e s i g n and analysis o f data structures, lists, recursion, searching and sorting combinational and sequential logic circuits including adders, comparators, decoders, multiplexors and methods, and dynamic storage allocation. counters. Finite state machines and state equations. M S I C O M P 132 Introduction t o Prolog Prerequisite: (1) (1.3,0,0) (F)* A " C - " grade or better in C O M P 110 or permission o f the instructor. A n introduction to the logic programming language P r o l o g and to the basic concepts o f logic programming. Topics include: using propositional and predicate logic to represent facts; relating the Prolog language to predicate logic; developing Prolog databases using predicates, lists, and recursion. • ( N o t offered i n 1997/98) C O M P 133 (1) Scheme a n d C o m p u t e r Programming (1.1,0) (S) and L S I components: registers, counters, R A M . C O M P 222 (4) (5.3,0,0) (F) Data Structures Prerequisite: A " C - " grade or better i n C O M P 111 or permission o f the instructor. A study o f frequently used data structures and algorithms for manipulating them. T h i s course emphasizes abstract data types and object-oriented programming. Topics studied include lists, stacks, queues, trees, sets, tables and graphs, static and dynamic implementations o f these data types, recursion, analysis o f the algorithms, searching and sorting. Prerequisite: A " C - " grade or better i n C O M P 110 or permission o f the instructor. A n introduction to the programming language Scheme. Scheme is an ideal language for illustrating and clarifying fundamental computer programming concepts. It is a small language and easy to learn quickly, yet supports powerful facilities or abstraction and generalization. T h i s course uses Scheme to investigate concepts such as data abstraction, procedural abstraction, recursion, functional programming and object-oriented programming. Academic — Computing Science 107 Criminology Instructional Faculty C . H A T H A W A Y , B . A . ( S . U . N . Y . ) M . A . (Wash U ) , Mo.) General Information C r i m i n o l o g y is the study o f all aspects o f crime from an interdisciplinary and integrative approach. The goal o f C r i m i n o l o g y is to reveal the complexities o f criminal behaviour and society's reaction to crime. C r i m i n o l o g y also offers both theoretical and practical knowledge o f the Canadian c r i m i n a l justice system. C R I M 101 transfers to S F U , U B C , and U V i c . CRIM 101 Introduction to Criminology (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) This course is intended to introduce students to the analysis o f the relationship between crime and society. The core concept is that " c r i m e " is embedded i n social structure and process and therefore must be understood in relation to rather than apart from " n o r m a l " social activity. A variety o f classical and contemporary perspectives o n the definition, causes and consequences o f crime w i l l be explored and student analysis of contemporary issues i n v o l v i n g crime i n Canadian society w i l l be encouraged. Academic — Criminology 108 Economics Instructional Faculty N . A M O N , B . A . , (Hons.) (Kent), M . A . ( S F U ) ECON 111 (3) Principles of Microeconomic Theory K . W . M O A K , B . A . (UVic), M . P . A . (UVic) A study o f the theoretical constructs o f consumer behav- A . J . M O R R I S , B . A . , (Hons.) (Manchester), M . A . ( S F U ) A.C.I.S. ( U K ) (4,0,0) (F,S) iour and the operation o f business firms in the market economy under conditions o f perfect competition, M . N I A , B . A . (Hons) (Tehran), M . A . ( Y o r k ) oligopoly, monopoly and monopolistic competition. J.E. S A Y R E , B . S . , B . A . (Denver), M . A . (Boston) Included is the analysis o f the firm's equilibrium c o n d i - M . Y A S E R I , B . A . (Hons) (Thames), M . A . (Saskatchewan) tion and the determinants o f income distribution. (Students cannot receive credit for both E C O N 111 and the former 201.) General Information E c o n o m i c s is the social science concerned with the allocation o f scarce resources and the production, distribution and consumption o f goods and services. E C O N 100 is an introductory course w h i c h raises and explores the kinds o f issues that economists deal with. It therefore serves both as a survey course for those students planning to major in other areas o f the social sciences and an introduction to the discipline for those ECON 112 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Principles of Macroeconomic Theory Prerequisite: E C O N 111 The formal Keynesian theory o f income determination and contemporary critiques are considered. Included is the study o f the possible causes and solutions to unemployment and inflation and the importance o f the international economy. Government fiscal and monetary policies are examined i n detail. (Students cannot receive who are undecided about their future plans. credit for both E C O N 112 and the former 200.) Students w h o plan to major i n E c o n o m i c s must complete E C O N 111 and 112 before proceeding to second year courses at the C o l l e g e or the universities. Students w h o plan to major i n economics at S F U are also advised to complete their second year economics requirements from E C O N 250, 252, 290 or 291. E C O N 250 and 252 are ECON 207 Managerial Economics (3) (4,0,0) Prerequisite: E C O N 111 and 112 This course is an application o f microeconomics theory designed both for students majoring i n Economics and for to a variety o f management and planning decisions such other second year social science students who need as output maximization and cost minimization given the economic history courses to complement their studies, constraints faced by firms. e.g. Political Studies. Students who plan to enter the C o m m e r c e Program must take E C O N 111 and 112 i n their first year. ECON 210 Money and Banking (3) (4,0,0) Prerequisite: E C O N 111 and 112 University Transfer Credit Unless otherwise indicated after the course description, all E c o n o m i c s courses transfer to the universities. Course Descriptions ECON 100 Introduction to Economics (3) This course is designed to facilitate an understanding o f financial markets and financial institutions both i n Canada and in other major industrial countries. T h e course w i l l examine current issues in the regulation o f financial institutions and analyze the factors behind the determination o f exchange and interest rates. (4.0,0) (F.S) A course w h i c h traces the development o f conflicting ECON 211 (3) Intermediate Microeconomic Analysis views o f the nature o f the capitalist economic system. It Prerequisite: focuses on the historical development o f capitalist society and the divergent interpretations o f the operation o f capitalism as found i n the writings o f such economists as A d a m S m i t h , D a v i d Ricardo, K a r l M a r x , J . M . Keynes and M i l t o n Friedman. It deals with contemporary issues (4,0,0) (F) E C O N 111 and 112, M A T H 108 or 110. This course presents an in-depth l o o k at such topics as consumer behaviour, production, exchange, equilibrium o f the firm under different market structures, factor markets, and economic welfare. N o t transferable to S F U . and such basic concepts as supply and demand. Academic — Economics 109 E C O N 212 (3) (4,0,0) (S) ECON 291 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Intermediate M a c r o e c o n o m i c Analysis Public Policy II Prerequisite: E C O N 111 and 112, M a t h 108 or 110 Prerequisite: E C O N 111 and 112 The course presents an in-depth look at such topics as The course involves an examination o f current govern- income and employment theory, monetary theory, the ment macroeconomic policies, i n c l u d i n g fiscal and open economy, economic fluctuations and growth. N o t monetary policies, debt management policies, international finance and exchange rate management, federal transferable to S F U . provincial relations, etc. E C O N 250 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Economic History o f t h e Pre-lndustrial Era Prerequisite: E C O N 111 and 112, or permission o f the instructor A broad sweep o f economic history from the O l d Stone A g e to the Industrial R e v o l u t i o n . T h e economics o f the prehistoric era, the R i v e r Civilizations, Classical A n t i q uity and Europe i n the M i d d l e A g e s are studied, while emphasis is placed on the transition from feudalism i n Europe to early forms o f capitalism. (Students cannot receive credit for both E C O N 250 and the former 120.) E C O N 252 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Economic History o f t h e Industrial Era Prerequisite: E C O N 111 and 112, or permission o f the instructor A study o f the Industrial Revolution and subsequent economic growth i n the context o f several countries, including Canada. Contrast is made between the paths o f development o f today's industrial economies and those nations now attempting to industrialize. (Students cannot receive credit for both E C O N 252 and the former 121.) ECON 290 Public Policy I (3) (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: E C O N 111 and 112 The course involves an examination o f current government microeconomic policies, including resource management, utility regulation and pricing, international trade, income distribution, taxation, education and health care. Academic — Economics 110 Engineering Instructional Faculty J.D. B O N S E R , B . A . S c , M . A . S c . ( U B C ) , Ph.D. (Waterloo), Convenor o f Engineering R . H A U S C H I L D T , B . S c (Hons.) (Queen's), M.Sc.(UBC) General Information Capilano C o l l e g e offers a full first year university transfer program in engineering. Bachelor degree completion generally requires three additional years o f study at U B C , S F U or U V i c . B . E n g . degree consists o f eight academic and six work terms. Students who complete first year engineering at Capilano College with a grade point average o f at least 2.5 may be eligible for admission to second year at U V i c . Admission General In addition to satisfying the general admission requirements for the College (see " A d m i s s i o n " section i n this Calendar), students must apply for admission to the engineering program itself by submitting an "Engineering Transfer to University of British Columbia Program A p p l i c a t i o n " , available from the Office o f the T h e C a p i l a n o College first year engineering program is modelled after that o f U B C . Students who complete first year engineering are eligible to be considered for admission to second year engineering at U B C provided they have obtained an overall grade point average o f at least 2.5. other pertinent documents, should be received by the The Faculty o f A p p l i e d Science at U B C offers programs Registrar. T h i s form, together with official transcripts and Office of the Registrar before the end o f M a r c h . Enrolment w i l l be limited to 36 students, and students w i l l be selected on the basis o f their academic record. Students who apply to the engineering program after M a r c h risk having their applications denied due to lack o f available spaces. leading to the Bachelor o f A p p l i e d Science ( B . A . S c . ) degree in the following areas o f engineering: B i o Resource, C h e m i c a l , C i v i l , Electrical, Geological, M e c h a n i c a l , Metals and Materials, M i n i n g and M i n e r a l Process, and Engineering Physics. Students w i l l normally complete the B . A . S c degree with three additional Note that students may be required to achieve an acceptable grade i n a diagnostic test before enrolling i n some courses in the Engineering program (e.g. E N G L 100, M A T H 110). Please see the individual department sections o f the calendar for details. years o f study at U B C , except for Engineering Physics, Prospective students are encouraged to take these tests w h i c h requires four additional years. early to avoid delays in acceptance and/or registration. Transfer to Simon Fraser University Admission f r o m Secondary School T h e S c h o o l o f Engineering Science at S F U offers fouryear programs leading to a Bachelor o f A p p l i e d Science ( B . A . S c . ) degree i n Electronics Engineering, Computer Engineering, Engineering Physics, B i o m e d i c a l Engineering and Systems Engineering. Students w h o complete first year engineering at Capilano C o l l e g e with a grade point average o f at least 3.0 may be eligible for admission to second year engineering. E l i g i b l e students must contact S F U ' s School o f Engineering Science to arrange for a summer course in Basic Students entering the engineering program directly from secondary school must satisfy the general admission requirements o f the C o l l e g e (see " A d m i s s i o n " section i n this Calendar) and have B . C . Grade 12 graduation (or equivalent) with at least a " B " in M a t h 12 and at least a " B " average i n Chemistry 12 and Physics 12. H i g h school students are encouraged to graduate with E n g l i s h 12 and Calculus 12 i f they intend to study Engineering. Poor performance i n E n g l i s h and M a t h hinders a student's ability to complete the program and ultimately to obtain employment as an Engineer. Electronics Engineering to allow for direct entry into semester three o f the Engineering Science common core. A d m i s s i o n f r o m First Y e a r Science Transfer to University of Victoria Transfer Program after completion o f some or all o f first The Faculty o f Engineering at U V i c offers programs year science. A m i n i m u m 2.5 G P A i n transferable leading to the Bachelor o f Engineering (B.Eng.) degree i n courses is required to be eligible. Exemptions w i l l be Electrical, M e c h a n i c a l and Computer Engineering. The given from some first year engineering courses i f the Students may apply for admission to the Engineering student achieved a grade o f at least " C " i n the equivalent Academic — Engineering 111 science course. In that case, the student w o u l d then SFU. typically take a m i x o f first year engineering and second competitive, students should realize that the above m i n i - Since admission to engineering programs is very year science courses. mum G P A values do not guarantee admission, and that Admission as Part Time or Mature Student excess o f the m i n i m u m . specific engineering options may require values w e l l i n Students who have been out o f school for a number o f years and those who wish to begin their studies towards Curriculum an Engineering degree part time are encouraged to apply. First Year Core (for direct entry from secondary school) Applicants w i l l be considered on an individual basis. Prospective students who have not studied M a t h , Physics or Chemistry for several years, or who lack grade 12 FIRST T E R M equivalency i n any o f these subjects, are encouraged to A P S C 120 Introduction to Engineering Credits 1.0 upgrade their background before applying. A l l students A P S C 150 Engineering Graphics 3.0 who do not have a good current mark i n grade 12 equiva- C H E M 110 Principles & Methods o f Chemistry I 3.0 lent M a t h course must write the M a t h Placement Test. C O M P 102 Introduction to Structured Admission in January E N G L 100 Composition 3.0 M A T H 110 Calculus I 4.5 P H Y S 114 Fundamental Physics I 3.0 Programming A limited number o f places i n the program are available for the Spring term. Students must have successfully 3J) 20.5 completed M A T H 110, C H E M 110 and P H Y S 114, with a m i n i m u m 2.5 G P A i n transferable courses, to be considered for admission. W i t h completion o f Engineering courses usually offered i n the summer at other colleges, it is possible to complete the first Engineering program before the f o l l o w i n g fall term. SECOND TERM Credits A P S C 121 Society and the Engineer C H E M 111 Principles & Methods o f Chemistry II 3.0 M A T H 111 Calculus II M A T H 152 L i n e a r A l g e b r a & Differential Equations 1.0 4.5 3.0 Registration P H Y S 115 Fundamental Physics II 3.0 Qualified candidates are notified o f their acceptance into P H Y S 116 Fundamental Physics III 3.0 the program by m a i l . Acceptance begins i n M a y , and Complementary Studies Elective 2M 20.5 continues through the summer until all places i n the program are taken. Students have two weeks from the date o f the acceptance letter to reply, submitting a nonrefundable deposit, to ensure a seat i n the Engineering Transfer Program. Transfer to University of British Columbia Students should complete the above standard curriculum. Students w h o intend to study Electrical Engineering or Students w h o complete A d v a n c e d Placement ( A P ) Engineering Physics and have completed C S 12 with at least courses with sufficiently h i g h grades are eligible for a " B " may enrol i n C O M P 110 instead o f C O M P 102 in the advanced credit, and may choose to complete other fall term and C O M P 111 and C O M P 133 instead o f the electives instead o f the A P credit course. Please see the complementary studies elective i n the spring term to receive admissions section o f the calendar for more details. advance credit on transfer to U B C . Second Term Registration Transfer to Simon Fraser University Students require a G P A o f at least 1.8 i n the transferable Students should take C O M P 110 instead o f C O M P 102 in courses o f the first term o f the Engineering program to the F a l l term. remain i n the program for the second term. P H Y S 116 should be replaced by C O M P 111. Transfer to University E N G L 100 may be replaced by an elective. U p o n completion o f the first year, students require a G P A o f A P S C 150 should be replaced by a complementary at least 2.5 to be eligible for admission into second year studies elective. Students should consult the S F U engineering at U B C and U V i c , and a G P A o f at least 3.0 for calendar for recommended electives. Academic — Engineering 112 Transfer t o University of Victoria Course Descriptions Students should take C O M P 110 instead o f C O M P 102 in the F a l l term. P H Y S 116 should be replaced by C O M P 111. First Y e a r Core (for students transferring f r o m first y e a r science) Students w h o have completed first year science successfully may be exempted from certain engineering courses if they have achieved a grade o f " C " or better in the equivalent science courses. A typical course load may be: FIRST T E R M APSC Credits 120 Intro, to Engineering APSC150 Engineering Graphics Linear Algebra Calculus m MATH 200 M A T H 230 Electives SECOND TERM A P S C 121 Society and the Engineer M A T H 205 M A T H 231 Credits Intro, to Probability & Statistics Calculus I V M A T H 235 Intro, to Differential Equations PHYS Fundamental Physics III 116 1.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 6,0 16.0 Elective 1.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 10. 16.0 APSC 120 Introduction t o Engineering (1) (1,0,0) (F) This course uses guest speakers, video taped material and field trips to provide students with an orientation to a career as a professional engineer. Attendance at scheduled activities is the only course requirement. F i n a l "grades" are reported as C R (Credit Granted) or N C ( N o Credit Granted). APSC 121 Society and the Engineer (1) (1,0,0) (S) This course deals with the social context within w h i c h engineering is practised. Topics w i l l include the history o f engineering, engineering ethics, professionalism, gender issues, employment equity, environmental issues, multiculturalism. APSC 150 Engineering Graphics (3) (1,4,0) (F) A n introduction to engineering graphics emphasizing the development o f spatial visualization and graphical communication skills; technical sketching and engineering drawing using projection and sectioning techniques; principles, practices and conventions o f engineering graphics; descriptive geometry and graphical solution methods to engineering problems; use o f microcomputer based graphics tools. Notes: 1. The above science transfer curriculum assumes that the student has obtained maximum exemption for equivalent science courses. Other course mixes are possible. N o t e : Other courses in this program are described in the appropriate section in this Calendar, (e.g., Mathematics, Computing Science, etc.). 2. M a x i m u m exemption consists o f the following courses: C H E M 110/111; M A T H 110/111; P H Y S 1 1 4 / 1 1 5 ; C O M P 102/110/111. 3. The electives w i l l usually be "complementary studies" (i.e. non-science) electives. Scholarships A number o f scholarships administered by the college are available to Engineering students. There are scholarships for both i n c o m i n g high school students and students entering from first year Science. These scholarships include tuition waivers, textbooks, calculators, as well as scholarship grants. Please refer to the Financial A i d Department. Academic — Engineering 113 English Instructional Faculty T. ACTON, B.A. (Victoria), M.A., Ph.D. (Calgary) J. CLIFFORD, B.A., M.A. (UBC), Ph.D. (York) P.L. CONNELL, B.A., M.A., Ph.D. (UBC) R. COUPE, B.A. (Tasmania), Ph.D. (UBC) P.L. COUPEY, B.A. (McGill), M.A. (UBC) M.L. FAHLMAN REID, B.A. (UBC), M.A. (Toronto) G.N. FORST, B.A., Ph.D. (UBC) S.R. GILBERT, B.A. (UVic), M.A. (UBC) W. GOEDE, B.A. (Wisconsin), M.A. (Edinburgh), Ph.D. (California) M. HINDMARCH, B.A., M.A. (UBC) C. HURDLE, B.A., M.A. (UVic) D. H. J A N T Z E N , B.A. (UBC), M.A. (York) D. MUNTEANU, M.A. (Bucharest), M.A.(UBC) R. NICKOLICHUK, B.A. (Carleton), M.A. (UBC) J. PENBERTHY, B.A. (Univ. of Natal, South Africa), M.A., Ph.D. (UBC) M . QUARTERMAIN, B.A., L.L.B., M.A. (UBC) W.G. SCHERMBRUCKER, B.A. (Capetown), P.Grad.Cert. in Ed. (London), M.A., Ph.D. (UBC) R.G. SHERRIN, B.F.A., M.F.A. (UBC) G. STANLEY, B.A., M.A., (San Francisco State U.) S. THESEN, B.A., M.A. (SFU) A. WESTCOTT, B.A. (Alberta), M.A. (Queens), Ph.D. (Toronto) General Information University Transfer Credit Unless otherwise indicated after the course description, all English courses transfer to SFU, UBC and UVic. For details consult the B.C. Transfer Guide. Forfirst-yearEnglish transfer credit to the universities, students must take two courses of: a) ENGL 100, 103, 104, 105, or 106. For second-year English transfer credit to the universities, English majors should take English 200-201; all other second year students can take any two second-year level English courses. English Diagnostic Test Those students who wish to enrol in English courses in the Academic Division must submit the results of the Language Proficiency Index Test or the College's English Diagnostic Test (EDT). Students with any one of the following are exempt from this requirement: 1. afinalgrade of "A" or higher in English 12 or English Literature 12, or Academic 114 — English 2. afinalgrade of 4 or higher in an Advanced Placement course in English Composition or English Literature, or 3. afinalgrade of 6 or higher in the International Baccalaureate course in English A or English B, or 4. afinalgrade of "A" in BENG 042, or 5. afinalgrade of "B-" or higher in an English transfer course from another college or university, or 6. a degree from an English-speaking university. EDTs are scheduled monthly throughout the year. During registration periods, EDTs are scheduled almost daily. Thetimesfor these sittings are published with the timetables. Students wishing to write the EDT must pay the exam fee in advance at the Office of the Registrar and bring receipts to the appropriate test sitting. If you need further information, please contact the Humanities Division (984-4957). English as a Second Language See listing in the Preparatory Programs section. Writing Centre All students registered at the College may come to the Writing Centre for advice on work in progress or help with writing problems. The Centre is not a proofreading service, but aims to help students develop their writing ability. The Centre also offers resources for writing: quiet space, a collection of reference books, handout sheets and exercises, and computers with word processing, outlining, and editing programs. The Writing Centre is located in FR402. It is staffed by faculty members from the English, ESL, Communications and ABE Departments. Open hours are posted. Course Descriptions ENGL 010 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) Language Skills An intensive course in basic language skills to enable the student to meet the demands of an academic college program. Curriculum will evolve from the assessed needs of the students. This course is not transferable to the universities. A student will receive credit or no credit (not a letter grade) for the course. Certain sections of English 010 are designed for the needs of students of English as a second language. ENGL 100 Composition (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) W h i l e E N G L 100 is not a prerequisite, competence i n essay writing and research is expected. A course i n the fundamentals o f good writing, giving students intensive practice i n writing for a variety o f ENGL 106 purposes, with emphasis on the essay form. Progres- Drama (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) sively increasing emphasis is given to effective organiza- A study o f selected and representative plays primarily o f tion and development o f material. Research techniques the 20th century. The chief a i m o f the course, beyond and documentation are taught. Problems i n mechanics o f broadening the student's understanding and appreciation writing are dealt with individually, i n group discussion of literature, is to encourage original responses to literary and by revision o f essays. Certain sections o f English expression i n well-developed oral and written criticism. 100 are designed for the needs o f students o f English as a second language. ENGL 103 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) Studies in C o n t e m p o r a r y Literature A study o f selected and representative 20th century literature, including poetry, fiction, and drama. W o r k s studied w i l l be chosen for their intrinsic literary merit and may, i n certain sections, also reflect a particular theme o f significance i n the contemporary world. (When material is selected for theme, the issue under consideration w i l l be announced during the registration period.) The chief aim o f the course, beyond broadening the student's understanding and appreciation o f literature, is to encourage original responses in well-developed oral and written criticism. W h i l e E N G L 100 is not a prerequisite, competence i n essay writing and research is expected. ENGL 190 Creative Writing (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) A n intensive workshop course designed to help students develop expressive skill and craftsmanship i n poetry, fiction, and drama. Students must have good compositional skills and are required to write extensively in their chosen genre (approximately 10 hours per week). They w i l l also develop an awareness, through written practice, o f at least one o f the other genres. Students are required to submit their writing regularly for group discussion. Students w i l l be encouraged to develop their work to the point where it w o u l d become acceptable for publication. W h i l e E N G L 100 is not a prerequisite, competence i n essay writing and research is expected. ENGL 191 (3) (4,0,0) (S) (3) (4,0,0) (F) Creative Writing ENGL 104 (3) (4,0.0) (F,S,Su) Fiction A study o f selected 20th century short stories and novels of intrinsic literary merit. The chief aim o f the course, beyond broadening the student's understanding and appreciation o f literature, is to encourage original responses to literary expression in well-developed oral and written criticism. W h i l e E N G L 100 is not a prerequisite, competence in essay writing and research is expected. E N G L 105 Poetry (3) A continuation o f E N G L 190. ENGL 200 English Literature t o 1660 Prerequisite: A n y combination o f two first-year English courses or instructor's written permission. A study o f texts in all major genres by representative authors, from the medieval period to the middle 17th century. This course w i l l provide the student with a broad historical and critical frame o f reference, and the opportunity to study selected major works in detail. (4,0,0) (F,S) A study o f selected major and significant minor 20th century poets whose poetry is o f intrinsic literary merit. The chief aim o f the course, beyond broadening the ENGL 201 English Literature Since 1660 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: A n y combination o f two first-year E n g l i s h courses or instructor's written permission. student's understanding and appreciation o f literature, is to encourage original responses to literary expression in well-developed oral and written criticism. Academic — English 115 A course similar to E N G L 200, but covering the later A study o f individual poets or schools o f poetry selected period since 1660. by the instructor and drawn from any era between Chaucer's time and the present. Prosody, poetic forms, ENGL 202 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Canadian Literature - Beginnings to M o d e r n i s m Prerequisite: A n y combination o f two first-year E n g l i s h and critical approaches w i l l be studied, as w e l l as the historical and cultural contexts o f the poems and o f poetic movements. The aims o f the course are to increase the student's knowledge o f the craft o f poetry and to study courses or instructor's written permission. selected texts closely. A study o f texts in all major genres from the origins o f Canadian literature into the modernist era. This course ENGL 210 w i l l investigate various motifs and forms o f writing Studies in Drama which have evolved through early Canadian literature and which continue i n contemporary work. Prerequisite: (3) (4.0.0) (F.S) A n y combination o f two first-year E n g l i s h courses or instructor's written permission. ENGL 203 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Canadian Literature - M o d e r n i s m a n d B e y o n d Prerequisite: A n y combination o f two first-year E n g l i s h A study o f dramatic literature from various perspectives: the examination o f dramatic types from various periods with reference to the history and development of dramatic forms, o f sub-genres o f drama, o f techniques i n dramatic courses or instructor's written permission. literature and performance, and o f the relationship o f The continuation o f E N G L 202, becoming more intensive literary text to performance. M a j o r plays from various in the investigation o f individual, major, contemporary periods and national theatres w i l l be considered. The aim authors o f poetry, novels and plays i n Canada . This of the course is to increase the student's knowledge o f course w i l l study the emergence o f significant contempo- drama as an art form which has e v o l v e d out o f literary rary motifs and approaches to writing. and cultural history and out o f performance. ENGL 205 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) M o d e r n A m e r i c a n Literature Prerequisite: A n y combination o f two first-year E n g l i s h courses or instructor's written permission. tive authors from the late 19th century to the present day. Students w i l l closely examine selected texts as literary achievements and set them within the history o f A m e r i can literature and the framework o f A m e r i c a n culture. (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) Studies in Fiction (The Novel) Prerequisite: (3) (4.0.0) (F.S) Prerequisite: A n y combination o f two first-year E n g l i s h courses or instructor's written permission. A course w h i c h explores the works o f major representa- ENGL 208 ENGL 211 Studies in Short Fiction A n y combination o f two first-year E n g l i s h courses or instructor's written permission. A study o f the development o f the short story and novella form, through an exploration o f the cultural and literary history i n which the genre developed and through a detailed analysis o f representative texts. Texts and critical approaches may vary from section to section, although examples from both the 19th and 20th centuries w i l l be studied. The aim of the course i s to give the student an understanding o f the development o f the genre in context and o f writers o f major significance to the genre. A study o f the novel from various perspectives which consider the evolution and diversity o f the novel as a literary form. Texts and critical approaches may vary ENGL 212 (3) from section to section. The aims o f the course are to Prerequisite: give the student an awareness o f the cultural context in courses or instructor's written permission. w h i c h the novel came into being and became popular, and to study selected texts closely. ENGL 209 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) A n y combination o f two first-year E n g l i s h courses or instructor's written permission. Academic — English 116 A n y combination o f two first-year E n g l i s h A study o f the literary traditions i n w h i c h Western literature has developed. The course studies influential Studies in Poetry Prerequisite: (4.0,0) (F,S) Traditions in Western Literature works of literature (often i n translation) from various periods and countries with reference to mythology, religion, and history. Emphasis w i l l be placed on the way in w h i c h these works have helped to form Western literary convention and a Western construction o f history. W M S T 104 The a i m o f the course is to familiarize the student with C o n t e m p o r a r y English-Canadian W o m e n Writers (3) these traditions so the student may understand how Western literature has evolved, and to present to the student an objective history o f literary convention against w h i c h to read literature. ENGL 213 Readings in W o r l d Literature Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) W M S T 106 (3) C o n t e m p o r a r y A m e r i c a n W o m e n Writers W M S T 107 (3) Contemporary E u r o p e a n W o m e n Writers A n y combination o f two first-year E n g l i s h (In Translation) courses or instructor's written permission. A course i n w o r l d literature beyond the Western tradition. The specific focus w i l l be announced at the time o f registration. ENGL 290 Creative W r i t i n g - Poetry Prerequisites: permission. (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) E N G L 190 and 191 or instructor's written A n intensive workshop i n the writing o f poetry, concentrating on furthering the student's knowledge o f current poetic forms w h i l e at the same time increasing awareness of her or his o w n voice, her or his individual ground for writing, and the development o f her or his own poetic. Students w i l l be expected to read a variety o f contemporary work, both poems and statements that poets have made about their o w n poetics. Students w i l l have the opportunity to try a variety o f forms, for instance, the short lyric, the serial poem, narrative verse, prose poetry. E N G L 291 Creative W r i t i n g - Fiction Prerequisites: permission. (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) E N G L 190 and 191 or instructor's written A n intensive workshop i n the writing o f fiction. T h e course w i l l concentrate on furthering the student's knowledge o f the state o f current fiction and give students the opportunity to develop an awareness o f voice, rhythm, dialogue, diction, character, and point-of-view. Students w i l l be expected to read a variety o f works o f contemporary fiction and to discuss various techniques. They w i l l have the opportunity o f trying out these techniques i n both short and extended forms o f fiction. See Women's Studies section for the following course descriptions. Academic — English 117 Environmental Science ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE POST BACCALAUREATE DIPLOMA Inquiries for admission and further information should be directed to the Environmental Science Program, Pure and A p p l i e d Sciences D i v i s i o n , telephone 983-7562 Admission Requirements The normal requirement for admission is a degree in a science or engineering discipline. Successful applicants w i l l have strong written and interpersonal communication skills and w i l l be selected on the basis of academic record, relevant experience and a personal interview. The m a x i m u m enrolment is 26 students per year. Instructional Faculty J . D . B O N S E R , B . A . S c , M . A . S c . ( U B C ) , P h . D . (Waterloo) T o apply for the Program, students must submit two application forms: (1) a general C o l l e g e admission form (see " A d m i s s i o n " section i n this calendar), and (2) A . D U F F Y , B . A . (Hons.) (Guelph), M . C . S . (Calgary) Environmental Science Program application form. Forms S. G R O V E S , A . B . (Radcliffe), P h . D . ( U B C ) , Coordinator are available through the Pure and A p p l i e d Sciences of Environmental Science L . H . N I K L , B . S c , M.Sc. (SFU) J. H . N O R I E , B . A . S c ( U B C ) , M . E n v . D e s . (Calgary) R . K . P A I S L E Y , B . S c . ( U B C ) , M . S c . (Washington), J . D . (California), L L . M . ( L o n d o n School o f Economics) D i v i s i o n or the Office o f the Registrar. These applications, together w i t h the official transcripts and other pertinent documents, should be received by the Office of the Registrar by M a r c h 31. C . T. R E A R D O N , B . A . , L . L . D . (Dalhousie), M . A . (Queen's), M . A . ( M . I . T . ) A . R O J A S , M . A . , Ph.D. (York) D. F. S H E R A T O N , B . A . S c , Ph.D. ( U B C ) V . M . T R O U P , B . S c . (Hons.) ( M c M a s t e r ) , M . S c . ( U B C ) , Coordinator o f Environmental Science A. W H I T E H E A D , B.Sc. (UVic), M . S c (UBC) S. W I L K I N S , B . A . , M . S c . ( M c M a s t e r ) Program Content Credits FALL TERM E N S C 500 Applied Ecology 3 E N S C 502 Environmental Ethics 3 E N S C 503 Environmental L a w Computer Applications i n E N S C 3 E N S C 507 E N S C 508 Seminar: Selected Topics in E N S C I 3 3 15 Laboratory Supervisors and Technicians J. R I C H A R D S O N , B . S c . ( U V i c ) , M . S c ( U B C ) , R . P . B i o . , Laboratory Supervisor J. T H O M P S O N , Laboratory Technician SPRING T E R M Environmental T o x i c o l o g y & Waste Management Environmental Planning & Project 3 E N S C 504 E N S C 505 Management Environmental Impact Assessment 3 3 E N S C 506 L a n d Use Impact & Sustainability 3 E N S C 509 Seminar: Selected T o p i c s i n E N S C II 3 15 S. Y E E , B . S c ( U B C ) , Laboratory Supervisor General Information The D i p l o m a Program i n Environmental Science is Credits E N S C 501 intended for students who have already completed a degree i n science and who w i s h to acquire the knowledge and practical skills necessary for dealing w i t h environ- SUMMER TERM mental issues and projects in the work place. E N S C 510 F i e l d School ( M a y ) 3 This is a full year program designed to prepare students E N S C 511 Practicum / C o - o p 3 Credits 6 to accept leadership roles in environmental problem solving through a combination o f academic studies and field assignments. Course Descriptions Areas o f emphasis include applied (3) (4.4,0) (F) ecology, toxicology, project management, environmental ENSC 500 assessment, law, and ethics. C o m p l e t i o n o f an in-depth A p p l i e d Ecology assignment i n v o l v i n g work placement or directed studies A n examination o f the impact o f human activities on is also required. ecosystem structure and dynamics. H u m a n interactions with ecosystems are emphasized as w e l l as the principles o f sustainable development and pollution ecology. Academic — Environmental Science 118 E N S C 501 (3) Environmental T o x i c o l o g y a n d Waste Management (4,4,0) (S) transmission lines, site contamination, land fills, erosion, and acid rock drainage. Remediation, evaluation o f land use competition, and native land claims w i l l be discussed. A n investigation o f the toxicology o f exposure to envi- Case studies w i l l be used for illustration. ronmental contaminants, i n humans and other organisms, in a range o f environments. Measurement, monitoring and remediation techniques are examined. ENSC 502 (3) (4,0.0) (F) E n v i r o n m e n t a l Ethics ENSC 507 (3) (4,0,0) (F) C o m p u t e r Applications in E n v i r o n m e n t a l Science A n introduction to the use o f computers for simulation, modelling and geographically-based information storage in environmental science. A n application of ethical concepts to environmental issues. Topics w i l l include environmental decision making, the relationship between market economics and the ethics o f environmental preservation, and the implications o f environmental ethics for various sectors of society. ENSC 503 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Environmental Law T h e current status o f environmental l a w i n Canada, ENSC 508 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Seminar: Selected Topics in Environmental Science I This seminar series is designed to provide a forum for discussion between faculty, students, and invited guests. Topics w i l l be chosen on the basis o f student interest, current environmental issues, and the availability o f guest speakers. particularly within the province o f British C o l u m b i a , w i l l be examined. T h e course w i l l include a critical analysis o f important case studies and current environmental assessment guidelines. ENSC 509 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Seminar: Selected Topics in E n v i r o n m e n t a l Science II A continuation o f E N S C 508. ENSC 504 (3) E n v i r o n m e n t a l Planning a n d Project Management (4,0,0) (S) ENSC 510 (3) (2,4,0) (Su) Field School A n introduction to basic management skills w h i c h have Practical experience i n data collection, field techniques, practical value i n environmental planning and decision and project development. M o s t o f this course w i l l be making. C r i t i c a l thinking, risk management, project conducted off the main campus at strategic environmental planning, budget management, and community involve- locations. Students w i l l be given assignments w h i c h ment i n environmental planning w i l l be discussed. emphasize instrumentation, environmental monitoring, data collection, and teamwork. ENSC 505 (3) Environmental Impact Assessment (4,0,0) (S) A n examination o f the environmental impact assessment process ( E I A ) as a tool i n environmental decision making. T h i s course w i l l review current federal and provincial procedural requirements and the relationship between E I A and other regulatory processes. Integration o f E I A and social issues and the role o f public hearings w i l l also be discussed. Case studies w i l l be used as focal points for discussion. ENSC 506 (3) ENSC 511 (3) Environmental Science Practicum (4,0,0) (Su) A n opportunity to apply classroom theory through work experience. T h i s is an in-depth assignment i n v o l v i n g work placement or directed studies i n resource-based, industrial, or public sectors. Students sponsored by a specific sector or employer may be able to fulfill this requirement under supervision i n their normal work place. (4,0,0) (S) Land Use Impact a n d Sustainability T h i s course w i l l investigate environmental issues arising from c o m m o n land use practices and critically evaluate approaches to sustainable land use and land use conflict. T o p i c s include linear developments such as highways and Academic — Environmental Science 119 French Instructional Faculty L. CANTIN ORR-EWING, B.A. (Montreal), M.A. (SFU) L. GAREAU, B.A. (Laval), M.A. (SFU) O. KEMPO, B.A. (Alta.), M.A., Ph.D. (UBC) A. SIMPSON, B. Ed, M.A., Ph.D. (UBC) Instructional Associates H. LACOURSE, Dip. Court Interpreting (VCC), Dip. Conflict Resolution (Mediation), Justice Institute (B.C.) J.D. VEILLEUX, B.A. (Laval U., P.Q.) Teaching Certificate, (Laval U., P.Q.) Summary of Programs LEVEL COURSES Beginning French (0-Grade 11) FREN 100/101 Univ. Preparatory French (Grade 12) FREN 120/121 1st year Univ. French FREN 170/171 2nd year Univ. French FREN 270/271 Prerequisite: FREN 100 This course, together with FREN 100, covers high school French Grades 8, 9, 10 and 11 and prepares the student for FREN 120. FREN 120 (3) University Preparatory French I (4,1.75,0) (F) Prerequisite: FREN 100/101 or French 11 or permission of the instructor. This course, together with FREN 121, constitutes Grade 12 French. The comprehensive approach to this course consists of instruction in basic grammar, and the development of students' speaking, understanding and writing skills. Computer material is included. (4,1.75,0) (S) This course, together with FREN 120, constitutes Grade 12 French. A continuation of FREN 120, this course is designed to give a limited fluency in speaking and reading as well as writing skills. FRENCH PROGRAMS French courses generally meet on a twice-a-week basis for four hours of instruction, plus one hour of conversation with a native French speaker, and a drop-in lab. Students with a competence in the language beyond the level of the course in which they are registered will be required to withdraw. Students with an enhanced speaking ability should register in the special section of French 170 or 171 or in French 270 or 271. Students who are not sure of their language level should contact an instructor. (3) (4,1.75,0) (F) For absolute beginners and those who do not have Grade 11 French or the equivalent. An intensive introduction to the French language through written and spoken exercises, enhanced by computer practice. 120 (4,1.75,0) (S) Prerequisite: FREN 120 (minimum Grade C-) or permission of the instructor. All French courses are transferable to SFU, UBC and UVic. For details consult the B.C. Transfer Guide. Academic — French (3) FREN 121 (3) University Preparatory French II UNIVERSITY TRANSFER CREDIT FREN 100 Beginning French I FREN 101 Beginning French II FREN 170 First Year University French I (3) (4,1.75,0) (F) Prerequisite: Grade 12 French, FREN 120/121 or permission of the instructor. To be taken by all students intending to proceed to a major or honours program at another institution. Continues the linguistic development of the student by means of grammar revision, weekly written and oral exercises, compositions and appreciation of francophone literature. FREN 171 (3) First Year University French II (4.1.75,0) (S) Prerequisite: FREN 170 (minimum Grade C-) or permission of the instructor. A continuation of the work done in FREN 170. FREN 270 (3) Second Year University French I (4,1.75,0) (F) Prerequisite: FREN 170/171 with a grade of "C" or better, or permission of the instructor. This advanced course offers a review of French grammar aimed at developing students' writing skills, and introduction to a variety of literary texts by francophone authors and an awareness of francophone culture through the medium of videos and music. Activities will include an interactive approach to the review of gammar, written assignments (including structural exercises), compositions and translation, and the reading of short stories and poems. FREN 271 (3) Second Year University French II (4,1.75,0) (S) Prerequisite: F R E N 270 with a grade of " C " or better, or permission of the instructor. A continuation of the work of F R E N 270. Geography Instructional Faculty use o f water, the food we eat, herbicides and pesticides, and our overall use o f energy. T h i s is an excellent course K . E W I N G , B . A . , M . S c . (Michigan) C. G R A T H A M , B . S c ,M.Sc. (UBC) C . G R E E N B E R G , B . A . , M . A . , ( U . o f Manitoba), P h . D . (UBC) for those concerned about the w o r l d we live i n . Lectures, seminars, informal discussions, and audio-visual materials are used to make students aware of, examine and analyze some o f the most serious concerns i n the w o r l d S. M A C L E O D , B . A . , M . A . , P h . D . ( U B C ) B . MCGILLrVRAY, B . A . , M . A . ( U B C ) today. The environment is i n jeopardy from our actions — what can we do about it? J. M E L I G R A N A , B . A . (Toronto), M . A . (Queens) J. M I K I T A , B . A . , M . A . ( S F U ) S. R O S S , B . S c , M . S c . (UBC) General Information GEOG 102 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Environmental Geography: Global Concerns The focus of this environmental course is the recognition that environmental issues are not restricted to isolated re- Geography courses are offered for students who are gions; rather, they have become global crises. A c i d rain, interested i n pursuing a career i n geography as well as for the greenhouse effect, depletion o f the w o r l d ' s resources those students desiring both A r t s and Science electives, are but a few of the examples illustrating the global scale or for those who wish to have a better understanding o f of our environmental problems. Identifying and under- the cultural and physical landscapes. The study o f standing the processes responsible for the problems are geography opens the doors for men and women i n a wide most important; however, finding solutions is also critical variety o f fields including: Teaching, Urban Planning, to this course. Forestry, Resource Management, T o u r i s m , Recreation, Information Systems, M e t e o r o l o g y , and M a p making. GEOG 106 (3) (4,0,0) (F) British Columbia: A Regional Analysis The focus o f geography is on the environment in which A body o f information that is frequently missing from our we live. These courses i n geography w i l l give you a education is that o f the province i n w h i c h we live. T h i s whole new perspective on the world. course informs you about B . C . — its physical environ- E c o n o m i c Consulting, M i n i n g , Fisheries, Geographic ment, the risks o f l i v i n g i n this province, the variety o f University Transfer Credit A l l Geography courses at Capilano transfer to S F U , U B C and U V i c . Course Descriptions GEOG 100 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Human Geography: People, Places and Cultures Different cultures i n different landscapes are compared peoples, and the economics i n v o l v e d i n its resources. F r o m an economic, political, historical, and cultural perspective one learns that contemporary problems are frequently a function o f the past. F o r those interested i n business, teaching, or wanting a basic knowledge o f B . C . , this is an excellent course. Note: This course also serves as Canadian Studies credit to S F U . many issues o f human population, perception o f the GEOG 108 (3) Canada: A Nation of Regions environment, diffusion o f ideas, and cultural aspects o f The understanding o f Canada and Canadians is becoming resource use and urban growth, to give students a view more and more important to our economic and social w e l l into the many concerns on the human side o f geography. being. This course examines Canadian problems and and contrasted to our o w n . T h i s course examines the GEOG 101 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Environmental Geography: Perception and Change There are numerous environmental issues that reach a crisis from time to time. T h i s course examines how we perceive the environment, our lifestyles, and h o w our attitudes affect the environment. Such issues include our Academic — Geography 122 (4,0,0) (F,S) issues i n terms o f the different regions i n Canada. Topics include the changing economy, cultural diversity, urban growth, and resource management, as we focus on the Maritimes, Quebec, Ontario, the Western provinces, and the Northern frontier. Note: This course carries Canadian Studies credit to S F U and is a component o f the professional development program. GEOG 112 (3) Introduction to Earth Environments (4,2,0) (F,S) slides, films, and field research. U r b a n studies leads to careers in urban planning, real estate, land management, A n introductory, physical geography course about the architecture, and urban politics as w e l l as giving general earth's various land forms. Plate tectonics, volcanism, community awareness. weathering and erosion w i l l be explained i n order to understand how a landscape develops. Studies o f glacial, coastal and fluvial features w i l l be placed i n a Canadian GEOG 205 Asia Pacific Geography (3) (4,0,0) (S) context. Environmental changes due to human activities T h i s course examines the A s i a Pacific i n terms o f its w i l l also be emphasized. social, economic, physical, historical and political Note: B o t h G E O G 112 and 114 are lab science courses and fulfill university science requirements. G E O G 112 can be taken either prior to, or after, G E O G 114. It is not recommended that they be taken concurrently. GEOG 114 Weather and Climate (3) (4,2,0) (F,S) geography. The emphasis is placed on the historical development and present day relationships i n both East and Southeast A s i a . This course introduces the concept of the Pacific Century and recognizes B r i t i s h C o l u m b i a ' s position on the Pacific. This is an excellent course for those interested in the past, present and future o f the A s i a Pacific region and especially for those considering a business career in this region. A n introductory, physical geography course about our atmosphere. Principles o f meteorology and climatology w i l l be explained i n order to understand the weather we experience daily and seasonally. Further studies w i l l examine how the atmosphere is connected with the GEOG 214 (3) Our Atmospheric Environment Prerequisite: (4,2,0) (S) G E O G 114 or permission o f the instructor w o r l d ' s oceans and plant communities, and how humans This course w i l l provide an intermediate understanding o f are modifying these natural environments. Emphasis w i l l the processes at work i n our atmospheric environment. be placed on Canadian examples. Broad topics to be covered are atmospheric energy, Note: B o t h G E O G 114 and 112 are lab science courses and fulfill university science requirements. G E O G 114 can be taken prior to, or after, G E O G 112. It is not recommended that they be taken concurrently. GEOG 200 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Technology and Economic Environments A n examination o f the concepts and themes of economic geography i n terms o f production and consumption. The traditional primary, secondary, tertiary and quaternary divisions i n economic geography are reviewed i n terms o f contemporary issues. The purpose o f this course is to illustrate the importance o f economic processes and tools to understand our environment. moisture, and winds. These concepts w i l l be applied to phenomena such as urban climates and air pollution at the small scale, weather and forecasting at the intermediate scale, and climate change, ozone depletion, and E l N i n o / Southern Oscillation on a global scale. T h i s course w i l l involve lectures, labs, and field work. GEOG 221 (3) Map and Airphoto Interpretation Prerequisite: (4,2,0) (S) A t least one other Geography course This is a second year course that is essential for those intending to make Geography their academic major. It is also appropriate for those considering careers i n E n v i r o n mental Studies, Forestry, Geology, Archaeology, History and other disciplines that rely extensively on maps and GEOG 201 Urban Studies (3) (4,0,0) (S) M o r e and more o f us are l i v i n g i n an urban world. This course is designed to examine problems and issues that air photos. This course uses lectures, labs and field work to cover the basic principles o f map and photo interpretation, surveying and satellite imaging. B o t h human and physical landscapes w i l l be analysed. arise w i t h urban l i v i n g ; including psychological prob- Students w i l l undertake a research project on a L o w e r lems, the cost o f housing, transportation issues, slums, M a i n l a n d neighbourhood. The project w i l l involve suburban l i v i n g , and the future direction o f cities. W h i l e archival research, census data analysis and field studies. this course uses local examples, it also draws on exam- It w i l l examine how this information can be displayed ples from other cities i n the world. This course ap- through the use o f various mapping techniques. proaches these topics through field trips into the city, Academic — Geography 123 Geology Instructional Faculty It examines how nature's recycling o f these materials D . J . A . A T H A I D E , B . S c . (Hons) ( M c G i l l ) , M . S c . ( U B C ) , Prof. Teacher's Cert. ( B . C . ) A . G . T H O M L I N S O N , B . A . , M . S c , Prof. Teacher's Cert. (UBC) results i n both the origin and the eventual transformation of igneous, sedimentary and metamorphic rocks. Next, it investigates how lithospheric plates interact w i t h each other and with external recycling (atmospheric and hydrospheric cycles). Finally it considers ways people may best adapt to these ever-changing earth environ- General Information ments and act as stewards o f earth's environments and Geology courses are designed for students planning a resources. university degree program i n the geological sciences or i n 111 are especially appropriate for students i n need o f a GEOL 111 Historical Geology the arts, humanities or social sciences. G E O L 110 and (3) (4,2,0) (S) laboratory science. They provide an understanding o f the Prerequisite: origin, structure, composition and history o f the earth. with instructor recommendation. Courses include weekly laboratory investigations and This course examines the methods geologists use to several field trips, both local and distant (overnight). L a b deduce the origin, age and evolution o f earth and its life. tuition fees are included i n the course fee, however These methods are then used to investigate how earth's students must purchase a lab manual and testing kit, and lithosphere, hydrosphere and atmosphere evolved before share some field trip costs. giving rise to life, and how ever since, life has interacted University Transfer Credit our "home" continent and adjacent ocean basins are Geology 110 or equivalent; or G E O G 112 with land, water and air. Next, the origin and growth o f studied. Finally, the processes and events that shaped A l l G e o l o g y courses at Capilano transfer to S F U , U B C (and are still shaping) our immediate environment are and U V i c . F o r details consult the B . C . Transfer G u i d e looked at i n more detail. Uses and abuses o f earth [http://www.islandnet.com/bccat] or Capilano College resources and environments since the arrival o f human Transfer G u i d e available at the A d v i s i n g Centre or beings also form part of the course. College reception. This course serves as a Canadian Studies credit. GEOLOGICAL SCIENCES (INCLUDING GEOPHYSICS, GEOCHEMISTRY, GEOLOGICAL ENGINEERING, ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES AND OTHER EARTH SCIENCES) FIRST Y E A R O N L Y G E O L 110/111 P H Y S 108/111 or 110/111 or 114/115 C H E M 108/109 or 110/111 M A T H 110/111 E N G L (six credits) Course Descriptions GEOL 110 Physical Geology Prerequisite: (3) (4,2,0) (F) N o n e . H o w e v e r , experience i n secondary level chemistry and physics w i l l contribute greatly to mastering physical geology. This course views the earth as a heat engine which continuously recycles air, water and solid earth materials. Academic — Geology 124 German Instructional Faculty The student wishing to major in German fulfills depart- B . H A N K I N , B A . ( U B C ) , M . A . (Wash.), Teach. D i p . (UBC) ment requirements with G E R M 310, w h i c h may be taken in the second year i f the student has first class standing in G E R M 200 or third year by permission o f the depart- B . P I R E S - S T A D L E R , Teach. D i p . (Zurich), M . A . ( S F U ) ment. Course Descriptions Instructional Associate R. F R E I B E R G , B . E d . (Gottingen University, Germany) General Information GERM 100 Beginning German I (3) (4,1.75,0) (F) A comprehensive introduction to the German language: N O T E : German courses include four hours o f instruction comprehension and speaking are reinforced through per week, and one and 3/4 hour o f laboratory/conversa- reading, writing and computer programs. F i l m s , tapes, tion practice. activities, etc. help develop an awareness o f the cultures Native speakers o f German are not allowed in first year of the German-speaking countries. courses. Those who wish to take a first or second-year German course must consult with a German instructor first. University rules governing such students differ GERM 101 Beginning German II (3) (4,1.75,0) (S) within departments, but the Language Department has Prerequisite: correspondence dealing with matters relevant to credit 9 or 10, Beginner's German 11, or the equivalent with transfer and point o f entry. In order to avoid any misun- written permission o f the instructor. derstanding, such students are invited to discuss these problems with the department prior to enrolment. G E R M 100 (minimum Grade C ) , German This course is a continuation o f G E R M 100 and must be taken in order to realize First Y e a r level college/univer- Students with a German A b i t u r are not permitted to enrol sity German. G E R M 101 should be taken, whenever in the courses. possible, in the term following G E R M 100. Students with a competence in the language beyond the level of the course in which they are registered w i l l be required to withdraw. Students who are not sure o f their language level should contact an instructor. GERM 200 Intermediate German I Prerequisite: (3) (4,1.75,0) (F) G E R M 101 (minimum Grade C+), Grade 11 or 12 German or the equivalent with written permis- University Transfer Credit sion o f the instructor. Placement tests are available. A l l German courses at Capilano transfer to S F U , U B C G E R M 200 reviews basic German grammar and usage, and U V i c . F o r details consult the B . C . Transfer Guide. and introduces students to modern German literature. It aims through the discussion o f the cultures and concerns SFU: Students who wish to proceed to S F U and to pursue of the German-speaking peoples to increase the ability to further courses in German are reminded o f the present communicate in the fullest sense o f the term. equivalency standards. Transfer and course challenge credit in German w i l l be given at S F U for Capilano College German courses to a total o f 11 semester hours. E x e m p t i o n from and placement in higher courses are GERM 201 Intermediate German II (3) (4,1.75,0) (S) determined by the results o f a placement test or other Prerequisite: G E R M 200 (minimum Grade C ) , German 12 (or its equivalent with written permission o f the assessment procedure. instructor.) Placement tests are available. Continues the review and development o f German UBC: In the case o f U B C , present equivalent standards language skills at the Intermediate level. Together with provide transfer credit on the following basis: G E R M 200 it completes the requirements for the Second Y e a r of college/university German. Capilano College UBC G E R M 100 and 101 100 (3) (3 credits each) G E R M 200 and 201 200 (3) (3 credits each) Academic — German 125 History Instructional Faculty HIST 103 R . C A M P B E L L , B . A . (California), M . A . ( U B C ) (3) (4,0,0) (S) Europe in the 19th a n d 20th Centuries R. F U H R , B . A . ( U B C ) , M . A . (McGill) Topics include the Industrial Revolution, the rise o f H. JONES, B.A., M.A. (UBC) political ideologies, nationalism and imperialism, the M . L E G A T E S , B . A . (Wash.), M . A . , M . P h i l . , P h . D . Russian Revolution, the two w o r l d wars, and the interwar period. (Yale) D . S U T H E R L A N D , B . A . ( U B C ) , M . A . (Memorial) HIST 108 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Issues and T h e m e s in U.S. History: 1607-1877 Ph.D. (SFU) American history from 1607 to 1877 including analysis General Information of social and political developments from early settleHistory teaches an understanding o f the past that helps people cope with the present and suggests possibilities for the future. Critical thinking and analysis form the core o f this discipline and are essential skills i n a rapidly changing society. ment through the C i v i l W a r era. Emphasis is placed o n the development of an " A m e r i c a n " culture, with appropriate comparisons to the development o f Canada. HIST 109 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Students planning to major i n History should have at least Issues a n d T h e m e s in U.S. History : 1865-present four history courses at the College. These can be A N Y U . S . history from 1865 to the present. A study o f the four courses. A n intended major should also have a broad sampling o f courses i n the Social Sciences and Humanities. Students planning to major in history at development o f A m e r i c a as a w o r l d power after the C i v i l War. Special emphasis is given to " A m e r i c a n " culture, and appropriate comparisons are made with Canada. S F U should take six history courses i n the first two years. F o r U B C the requirement is four history courses. Stu- HIST 110 dents planning to take honours should acquire a reading Canada Before C o n f e d e r a t i o n (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) knowledge o f an appropriate non-English language. A study of N e w France and British North A m e r i c a . Special emphasis is placed on issues and ideas w h i c h University Transfer Credit have been significant in the creation o f Canada and, in A l l History courses at C a p i l a n o (including W M S T 220) particular, the making o f Canadian society i n pre- transfer to S F U , U B C and U V i c and count as Humanities Confederation years. credit for the Associate Degree. HIST 111 Course Descriptions HIST 100 (3) (4.0,0) (F,S) Canada Since C o n f e d e r a t i o n (3) (4.0,0) (F) History of the A n c i e n t W o r l d The development o f Canada since 1867. In particular we discuss the issues that affect most Canadians: relations with the United States, prosperity and poverty, class and The origins o f civilization i n Egypt and Mesopotamia, the civilizations of Ancient Greece and Rome, the origins and development o f Judaism and the early Christian Church. gender relations, and the making o f a Canadian "culture". B y the end o f the course students should have not only a better understanding of this country's past, but also what makes Canada unique. HIST 102 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Europe f r o m the Reformation to the French HIST 205 Revolution British Columbia A survey o f European history beginning with the 16th c. F r o m the first contact between natives and whites i n the (3) (4.0,0) (F) Protestant Reformation and including absolutism, the 18th century to the present, this course analyses the main scientific revolution, the Enlightenment, the o l d regime issues that have affected British Columbians. It also and the French Revolution. examines some aspects of the development o f the N o r t h Shore. Academic — History 126 HIST 207 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Europe in the M i d d l e A g e s a n d Renaissance This course covers a colourful and creative period i n European history from the 3rd to the 15th century. Topics include the late R o m a n E m p i r e and rise o f Christianity, monasticism and the church, feudal society and politics, the rise o f towns, the crusades, the B l a c k Death, and the art, culture and society o f Renaissance Italy. HIST 208 (3) (4,0,0) (S) C a n a d i a n - A m e r i c a n Relations This course examines the major events and themes that have shaped the Canadian-American relationship. F r o m the A m e r i c a n Revolution, the war that ultimately created both countries, to recent years, we analyze the influence that the U n i t e d States has had on Canada. HIST 209 (3) (4,0,0) (S) History of the Native Peoples of Canada U s i n g ethnohistorical approaches, this course examines the history o f Canadian Indian, Inuit and M e t i s peoples. It gives particular emphasis to the attitudes, practices, policies and experiences that have shaped native-white relations and affected native peoples from 1450 to the present. W M S T 220 (3) (4,0,0) W o m e n a n d the Past: A Historical Survey See W o m e n ' s Studies section for course description. Academic — History 127 H u m a n Kinetics Instructional Faculty L. A L E X A N D E R , M.P.E. (UBC), M.Ed. (UBC) M . W A L S H , B.P.E., M . P . E . (UBC), Ph.D (SFU) General Information analysis and evaluation o f health information w i l l also be covered. KIN. 142 Introduction to Kinesiology (3) (4,2,0) (S) A n introduction to the range o f subject areas encom- The Department o f Kinesiology and H u m a n Kinetics passed in the discipline o f kinesiology, with basic offers first year university courses i n Kinesiology or assessment procedures for individual status and perform- H u m a n Kinetics, which enables students to meet the first ance according to functional anatomy, biomechanics, year requirements for the universities as noted below. exercise physiology, and motor learning principles. Note that H u m a n Kinetics courses may not be available in 1997/98. See the College timetable for details o f courses being offered or contact the Pure and A p p l i e d Sciences D i v i s i o n , 984-4955. KIN. 143 (3) (2,2,0) (F) Exercise M a n a g e m e n t A n introduction to exercise management and exercise physiology; conditioning methods, exercise techniques Transfers to SFU Kinesiology Program The Kinesiology Program at S F U offers four different areas o f concentration: (1) A c t i v e Health, (2) Health and Physiological Sciences, (3) H u m a n Factors/Ergonomics, and fitness appraisal. HKIN110 (3) (2,2,0) (S) Analysis of Individual Sport a n d Dance Performance and (4) H u m a n M o v e m e n t Sciences. T o determine w h i c h Capilano College courses are Pre- or corequisite; tor. K I N . 142, or permission o f instruc- transferable to S F U , students should consult the S F U calendar, the B . C . Transfer Guide, or the Capilano A n examination of the specific sport science principles College Transfer G u i d e and academic advisors at S F U which are used to analyze sports and dance skills, detect and/or Capilano College. errors, and provide methods for correction. T h e basis for understanding relationships between aesthetics and Transfers to the University of Victoria The University o f V i c t o r i a Faculty o f Education, School of Physical Education, also accepts transfer o f some courses from Capilano College. T o determine which courses are transferable, advisors at University o f V i c t o ria and/or Capilano C o l l e g e should be consulted. movement i n performance, and for understanding the role of form in evaluating individual performances i n sport and dance are also emphasized. HKIN161 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Introduction to Social Aspects o f Leisure a n d Sports areas o f concentration: (1) Exercise Science, (2) Health A n introduction to and examination o f the relationships between leisure, sports activities, and society. The political, economic and social basis o f the development of sports and leisure i n the West are emphasized. and Fitness, (3) Physical Education, and (4) Leisure and (This course does not transfer to S F U ) Transfers to UBC Human Kinetics Program The U B C Department o f H u m a n Kinetics offers four Sport Management. In planning their program, students should consult the U B C calendar, the B . C . Transfer HKIN 164 Guide and advisors at U B C and/or Capilano College. Dynamics o f M o t o r Skill A c q u i s i t i o n (3) (4,0,0) (F) A n introductory examination o f motor s k i l l acquisition, Course Descriptions and the variables which influence the learning and KIN. 140 (3) (4,0,0) (Su) C o n t e m p o r a r y Health Issues Examination o f current health issues from a holistic perspective with emphasis on the role o f personal behaviours and other factors influencing health. Critical Academic 128 — Human Kinetics performance o f motor skills. Investigation o f the relationship between skill acquisition, growth and development. Japanese Instructional Faculty K. MITO, B.A. (UBC), M . A . ( U B C ) Instructional Associate K. B E N T L E Y , B . A . (UVic) T. B E R W I C K , B . A . ( K o b e Gaidai) * T h i s is a very demanding course w h i c h requires a serious commitment. JAPN 101 Beginning Japanese II (3) (4,1.75,0) (S) Prerequisite: J A P N 100 or the instuctor's permission. This course is a continuation o f J A P N 100 and must be University Transfer Credit taken in order to complete the First Y e a r level o f Japanese. Students w i l l learn more about the structure o f A l l Japanese courses at Capilano C o l l e g e transfer to modern Japanese and further develop their language U B C , S F U , and U V i c . F o r details, consult the B . C . skills i n a socio-culturally functional way. Transfer G u i d e . level o f the course i n w h i c h they are registered w i l l be JAPN 200 Intermediate Japanese I required to withdraw. Students who are not sure o f their Prerequisite: Students w i t h competence in the language beyond the language level should contact an instructor. (3) (4,1.75,0) (F) J A P N 101 or the instructor's permission. This course provides students with further socio-cultural knowledge at an intermediate level o f Japanese. E m p h a sis w i l l be placed on developing a comprehensive General Information A l l courses i n Japanese include four hours o f instruction per week, and either one 3/4 hour o f conversation practice or one hour conversation practice plus a 3/4 hour lab session. The computer lab may be used for some knowledge o f modern Japanese through authentic materials and w i l l include reading and writing practice. JAPN 201 Intermediate Japanese II (3) (4,1.75,0) (S) courses. Prerequisite: J A P N 200 o r the instructor's permission. In order to provide for the most appropriate student placement, students with Japanese 9 , 1 0 or Beginners 11 This course continues to develop higher skills at the credit should register i n J A P N 100; students with Japa- intermediate level and provides the students with a solid nese 11 high school credit should register in J A P N 101, foundation on w h i c h to base further study o f the language not J A P N 100. Students with a Japanese 12 high school and to develop socio-culturally functional competence. credit can register i n either J A P N 200 or J A P N 101. Students w h o have studied Japanese elsewhere cannot register i n J A P N 100. Note: O t h e r Japanese courses a r e listed u n d e r the Asia Pacific Management Co-operative P r o g r a m section i n this C a l e n d a r . T h e instructor is available for consultation regarding placements. Contact the department prior to registration if y o u are not sure o f your placement. Course Descriptions JAPN 100 Beginning Japanese I (3) (4,1.75,0) (F, Su) This course offers a comprehensive introduction to modern Japanese through the study o f vocabulary, grammar and culture. The beginning o f the course w i l l be devoted to learning the Japanese writing systems ( H I R A G A N A and K A T A K A N A ) . 5 0 to 100 Chinese characters (kanji) w i l l also be taught. Students w i l l develop basic language skills i n a socio-culturally functional way. Academic — Japanese 129 Jazz S t u d i e s Contact Person: M i k e Reveley, Coordinator, Office influences from many different musical genres, graduates C E 1 2 4 , Phone 984-4951. w i l l have been exposed to music from diverse cultural sources, historical periods and media. Jazz is an applied Instructional Faculty F. A R D I E L , B . A . (SFU) D . D U K E , B . M u s . ( U B C ) , M . A . ( U . o f N o r t h Carolina), Ph.D. (UVic) L . F A L L S , A . R . C . T . (Toronto), B . M u s . , M . M u s . ( U B C ) J. G E E , B . M u s . , M . A . ( U B C ) art form; therefore, the achievement o f specific high standards i n vocal and/or instrumental performance, improvisation, composition, and arranging are fundamental goals o f the program curriculum. Demonstration o f ability i n these areas is a qualifying requirement for a l l graduates. S.GUNN C. H A N N E Y , B.Mus. ( U B C ) Career Opportunities A. HAWIRKO The two year Diploma program is intended to provide S. K A R P , B . A . (Calif. State U . ) its students with the skills necessary to develop careers as L . K A A R I O , B . M u s . ( U B C ) , M . M u s . (W.Wash.) self-employed professionals i n the contemporary music L. K E L L E T T industry. N . K O L E S N I K O V , B . A . (Gnessin's M u s i c a l College) I. K U K U R U D Z A S. M A D D O C K , D i p . (Peel School o f the Arts) R. M A R O I S , B . M u s . (Laval) R. M C K E N Z I E , B.Mus. (UBC), M . M u s . ( U B C ) G. M C N A B , B.Mus. (UBC), M.Mus. (UBC) C. N E L S O N T. N I C K E L S , B . A . ( U C L A ) K. M O O R E P. O L F R E Y , B . M u s . ( U . Manitoba), M . M u s . (Ithaca) T. O X B O L , D i p . (Copenhagen) M . R E V E L E Y , B . M u s . ( U B C ) , Coordinator, D i p l o m a (Berklee School o f M u s i c ) P. S C H R E I B E R , B . M u s . ( U B C ) The four year Degree program provides a curriculum which balances and integrates the instruction o f jazz, traditional music, and general academic electives to provide an enriched education at the degree level. It is an attractive option for those who w i s h to pursue music as self-employed professionals, for those w h o w i s h to continue their musical development as part o f a liberal arts education before pursuing other careers, and for those interested i n teaching music i n the public school system. Majors in V o c a l Performance, Instrumental Performance, Arranging/Composition, and General Studies with an Education Stream are available. Those interested i n teaching w o u l d enrol i n the Education Stream o f the General Studies Program. C. S I G E R S O N B . T U R N E R , B . M u s ( W . Wash.), M . M u s . ( N . Texas) A . W O L D , B . M u s . ( U B C ) , A . R . C . T . (Toronto) General Information Capilano C o l l e g e offers four music programs: a two year D i p l o m a i n Jazz Studies, a two year Bachelor of M u s i c Transfer Program, and four year degrees i n Jazz Studies and M u s i c Therapy. T h e degree programs are offered i n Facilities A s recording experience has become an essential part o f today's musical training, the Jazz Studies Program has now integrated multi-track recording into the curriculum. V o c a l , instrumental, and arranging/composition students all make use o f our multi-track facilities. C o m p o s i t i o n and arranging students w i l l work with electronic instruments i n our M i d i Studio. co-operation with the Open Learning A g e n c y ( O L A ) with degrees granted by the Open University of B . C . F o r Computer labs are available to students for supplemental more information see sections on M u s i c Therapy Pro- help i n ear training, sight reading, and other basic music gram and Bachelor o f M u s i c Transfer Program. skills, as well as the printing and recording o f theory and arranging assignments. Jazz Studies Program Mission and Goals T h e Bachelor o f M u s i c i n Jazz Studies is an applied academic degree. The program's mission is to produce graduates with a broad-based academic background and comprehensive abilities i n music with j a z z as the main focus. A s j a z z is an eclectic art form that draws upon Academic — Jazz Studies 130 Faculty The Jazz Studies program prides itself i n the number and quality o f specialized faculty it has on staff. M o s t instructors are also top professional musicians who bring extensive practical experience to their classes. Admission Requirements for First Year (Diploma) A l l applicants must: 1. Have Grade 12 graduation or equivalent or mature student status. 2. Demonstrate an adequate knowledge of theory rudiments through a department test. 3. Display a sufficiently high level of performance and sight-reading ability on their concentration instrument (see Auditions). 4. Pass a simple aural aptitude test involving pitch and rhythm matching. 5. Submit two letters of recommendation from music professionals or instructors. courses before the completion of their Diploma on a parttime or probationary basis with the permission of the instructors involved, but official acceptance into the Degree program is necessary before any opportunity to graduate should be anticipated. Transfer students should not anticipate immediate acceptance into the degree program, as there are normally some lower level music courses and/or general electives that must be completed before this can take place. Official acceptance into a major of the degree program can be applied for once the requirements for the two year Jazz Studies Diploma have been met. (See Graduation Requirements, Two Year Diploma.) Admission Procedures: Admission Requirements for Transfer/ Returning Students (Diploma) A l l applicants must: 1. Meet the general admission requirements of Capilano College. 2. Display a sufficiently high level of performance and sight-reading ability on their concentration instrument (see Auditions). 3. Take an aural test to determine their basic acceptability and placement within the ear training sequence (see Transfer of Credit). 4. Take a keyboard proficiency test to determine their placement within the class keyboard sequence (see Transfer of Credit). 5. Submit two letters of recommendation from music professionals or instructors. The auditioning instructor will make recommendations regarding: acceptance, eligibility and placement in some performance classes, placement in Private Music Instruction (PMI), and required remedial work. Admission Prerequisites for Fourth Year Degree Program Upon completion of the two year Diploma in Jazz Studies, students may register as a third year student in one of the degree options. Permission to enrol in any major will be based on completion of prerequisite requirements, and the recommendation of the faculty concerned. Continuation in the Vocal Performance, Instrumental Performance and Arranging/Composition majors is subject to review at the end of the third year of studies. Students may be accepted into some upper level 1. Submit the Application for Admission to Admissions, Office of the Registrar, together with official transcripts of all secondary and post-secondary education. 2. Information meetings, auditions and placement tests are held in May. Please call (604) 984-4951 for meeting times and audition appointments. Auditions Auditions are required for all entrants. Live audition and testing is preferred, but if you cannot attend in person, it is possible to audition by audio or video cassette and write your theory test under local supervision. Contact the Jazz Studies Program for more details and specific audition requirements. Entrance into the Jazz Studies Program is competitive as seats are restricted. Applicants are ranked in comparison with others who audition on the same concentration instrument with the entrance year applied for taken into consideration. Providing that all other entrance requirements have been passed, students will be admitted in the order of their ranking until the seats available for that instrument have been filled. Separate auditions are held for the College Singers, Jazz Choirs, Stage Bands, and Studio Vocal Performance Class. Acceptance into the program does not guarantee acceptance into these ensembles. It is the student's responsibility to sign up for and attend these auditions. Transfer of Credit The Jazz Studies Program accepts credits from other post-secondary institutions if they are applicable and have suitable equivalency. Because of the wide variations that exist in approach and emphasis in various Academic — Jazz Studies 131 music programs, the Jazz Studies Program reserves the Arranging/Composition right to examine for competency according to o u r course Concentration P M I (Composition) requirements before transfer credit is approved. A l l required Theory courses Transfer o f concentration performance instrument course, Arranging I, II, III, I V keyboard and ear training credit w i l l only be possible up R h y t h m Section W r i t i n g to the placement level determined by the auditioner and keyboard and ear training test results. Since the Capilano program emphasizes j a z z studies and most other Canadian music degree programs provide a study o f traditional music, block transfer o f courses to other institutions is not available. Several individual courses have, however, been accepted by institutions with similar offerings. Special Fees and Expenses Instrumental Performance Concentration P P M I Improvisation I, II, III, I V A l l S m a l l Ensembles A l l Large Instrumental Ensembles Vocal Performance Concentration P P M I Improvisation I, II V o c a l Master Class I, II The fees for private music instruction (P.M.I.) w i l l be Studio V o c a l Performance I, II, III, I V announced at least one month prior to the beginning o f V o c a l Jazz Master Class I, II, III, I V the F a l l term. A l l V o c a l Ensembles In 1996-97 the fees for P . M . I , were $430 ($215 per credit hour) for the Jazz Studies Program and are subject to change without notice. P . M . I , lab fees are $30. " C " grades ( C - , C , C+) i n these courses can only be applied for credit toward the Bachelor o f M u s i c i n Jazz Studies with the permission o f the Jazz Studies Grade Appeals Committee. W h e n unusual circumstances have Satisfactory Standing resulted i n lower than expected grades i n a student's first Students considered to be i n "Satisfactory Standing" are semester o f a continuing course, instructors may recom- entitled to pre-register i n the next term o f the program. mend to the Committee that the student be given probationary acceptance into the next semester o f the course. A student who has not maintained a satisfactory standing in a program i n any term may be denied permission to register i n that program i n a subsequent term, or be If the student fails to achieve a m i n i m u m o f B - i n the next level o f the course, no credit for either course can be applied toward the specialized degree. required to re-audition. T o maintain satisfactory standing, all Jazz Studies students must be enrolled i n a full-time course o f study (at least nine credit hours) that includes a reasonable number o f courses specific to their major (normally three) and must achieve a grade point average above 1.8. TWO YEAR DIPLOMA The grade o f D i n a course, although a m i n i m a l pass, is ments for either the vocal or instrumental concentrations not sufficient to fulfill prerequisite requirements. as outlined below. The E n g l i s h and General E l e c t i v e Students should refer to the section on academic perform- credits are only required o f those planning on continuing Graduation Requirements Students w i l l be awarded a two year d i p l o m a i n Jazz Studies upon completion o f the first two years o f require- ance i n the C o l l e g e Calendar for further information on toward a four year degree. F o r the purposes o f the " A c a d e m i c Probation". diploma, M U S . 222 and 223 may be replaced by six credits o f Jazz, M u s i c or i f approved by the coordinator, In addition, to qualify and continue i n the specialized General Electives. majors, Jazz Studies Degree students are expected to achieve a m i n i m u m grade o f B - i n all courses directly U p o n demonstration of sufficient piano skills a student related to that major. These courses are: may be given advanced placement i n Class Piano. These required credits may be replaced with credits from any Jazz, M u s i c or General Electives. Academic — Jazz Studies 132 Program Content I N S T R U M E N T A L C O N C E N T R A T I O N FIRST Y E A R V O C A L C O N C E N T R A T I O N FIRST Y E A R Credits Fall Term * E N G L 100 or 102 3.0 J A Z Z 103 3.0 The Language o f M u s i c J A Z Z 114 Class Piano I 1.0 J A Z Z 136 V o c a l Master Class I 1.5 J A Z Z 184 Sightsinging/Ear Training I Large Ensemble 1.5 1.0 J A Z Z 170 History o f Jazz 3.0 P M I . 129 Jazz V o i c e 2JJ 16.0 Spring Term Credits Fall Term * E N G L 100 or 102 3.0 J A Z Z 103 The Language o f M u s i c 3.0 J A Z Z 114 Class Piano I 1.0 J A Z Z 170 History o f Jazz 3.0 J A Z Z 184 Sightsinging/Ear Training I 1.5 J A Z Z 194 S m a l l Ensemble I 1.5 Large Ensemble 1.0 PMI. lxx 2J) 16.0 Spring Term * E N G L 103, 104, 105 or 106 * E N G L 103, 104, 105 or 106 3.0 J A Z Z 105 R h y t h m Section W r i t i n g 1.5 . 3.0 J A Z Z 105 R h y t h m Section W r i t i n g 1.5 J A Z Z 106 Traditional Harmony and C o m p . 1.5 J A Z Z 106 Trad. Harmony and C o m p . 1.5 J A Z Z 107 Jazz Theory and C o m p o s i t i o n I 1.5 J A Z Z 107 Jazz Theory and C o m p o s i t i o n I 1.5 J A Z Z 115 Class Piano II 1.0 J A Z Z 115 Class Piano II 1.0 J A Z Z 185 Sightsinging/Ear Training II 1.5 J A Z Z 137 V o c a l Master Class II 1.5 J A Z Z 195 S m a l l Ensemble II 1.5 J A Z Z 185 Sightsinging/Ear Training II 1.5 Large Ensemble Large Ensemble 1.0 P M I . 2xx P M I . 229 2J0 Jazz V o i c e 14.5 SECOND YEAR SECOND YEAR *Gen. Elective * G e n . Elective 3.0 J A Z Z 203 Jazz Theory and Composition II 1.5 J A Z Z 214 C l a s s Piano III 1.0 J A Z Z 236 Studio V o c a l Performance I 1.5 J A Z Z 238 V o c a l Jazz Master Class I 1.5 J A Z Z 284 Sightsinging/Ear Training III Large Ensemble 1.5 1.0 to Early Classical Jazz V o i c e 3.0 J A Z Z 203 Jazz Theory and C o m p o s i t i o n II 1.5 J A Z Z 214 Class Piano III 1.0 J A Z Z 282 Improvisation I 1.5 J A Z Z 284 Sightsinging/Ear Training III 1.5 J A Z Z 294 S m a l l Ensemble 1.5 ffl Large Ensemble 1.0 * * M U S . 222 M u s i c History: Renaissance * * M U S . 222 M u s i c History: Renaissance to Early Classical 3.0 P M I . 3xx Spring Term 16.0 Spring Term *Gen. Elective * G e n . Elective 3.0 J A Z Z 204 Jazz Theory and Composition III 1.5 J A Z Z 215 Class Piano I V 1.0 J A Z Z 237 Studio V o c a l Performance II 1.5 J A Z Z 239 V o c a l Jazz Master Class II 1.5 J A Z Z 285 Sightsinging/Ear Training I V L a r g e Ensemble 1.5 1.0 * * M U S . 223 M u s i c History: Late 18th, 19th 3.0 Jazz V o i c e 2JJ 3.0 J A Z Z 204 Jazz Theory and Composition III 1.5 J A Z Z 215 Class Piano TV 1.0 J A Z Z 283 Improvisation II 1.5 J A Z Z 285 Sightsinging/Ear Training I V 1.5 J A Z Z 295 S m a l l Ensemble I V Large Ensemble M U S . 223 and 20th Century 3.0 2J3 10 16.0 P M I 429 m 14.5 Fall Term Fall Term P M I . 329 1.0 1.5 1.0 M u s i c History: Late 18th, 19th and 20th Century P M I . 4xx 3.0 10 16.0 16.0 *See A c a d e m i c Course Requirements. Academic — Jazz Studies 133 **Degree students must complete M U S . 222, 223 to fulfil FOURTH YEAR their traditional M u s i c History requirement. Fall Term Graduation Requirements J A Z Z 172 Arranging I 1.5 J A Z Z 310 Jazz Pedagogy 1.5 J A Z Z 410 Conducting I 1.5 Students must complete a l l courses outlined i n one o f the J A Z Z 460 C o m m e r c i a l Relations 1.5 following major areas o f study to be eligible for the J A Z Z 494 S m a l l Ensemble V I I 1.5 Bachelor of M u s i c i n Jazz Studies degree from the Open Large Ensemble *Gen. Elective FOUR YEAR DEGREE 3.0 2.0 P P M I 729 University o f B . C . or 745 Performance These major areas o f study may include Jazz or M u s i c electives w h i c h should be chosen in consultation with the Coordinator o f the program. 3J) 15.5 Spring Term *Gen. Elective 3.0 Certain courses i n the third and fourth years of the degree J A Z Z 272 A r r a n g i n g II 1.5 program are offered on a rotational basis every two years. J A Z Z 300 20th Century Theory 3.0 B e sure to consider the year that these courses are due to J A Z Z 411 Conducting II 1.5 be offered when planning your course load for the year. J A Z Z 495 S m a l l Ensemble V f f l 1.5 The placement o f these rotating courses i n your schedule Large Ensemble w i l l not necessarily conform to the semester plans P P M I 829 presented below. Please take every precaution to ensure or 845 2.0 Performance that you have a l l the necessary prerequisites i n place 3X) 15.5 when y o u plan to take them. The courses offered on a Total Credits 124.5 rotational basis are subject to change, but presently are J A Z Z 410/411, J A Z Z 460, J A Z Z 370, J A Z Z 470, J A Z Z * See A c a d e m i c Course Requirements 336/337, J A Z Z 310, J A Z Z 300, M U S . 210/211 and M U S . 218/219. M A J O R IN INSTRUMENTAL P E R F O R M A N C E THIRD Y E A R M A J O R IN V O C A L P E R F O R M A N C E Fall Term THIRD Y E A R *Gen. Elective Fall Term J A Z Z 172 Arranging I 3.0 J A Z Z 240 F o r m and A n a l y s i s 1.5 1.5 J A Z Z 370 Jazz Styles 1.5 *Gen. Elective J A Z Z 240 F o r m and A n a l y s i s 3.0 1.5 J A Z Z 282 Improvisation I 1.5 J A Z Z 382 Improvisation III 1.5 J A Z Z 336 Studio V o c a l Performance III 1.5 J A Z Z 394 S m a l l Ensemble V 1.5 J A Z Z 338 V o c a l Jazz Master Class III 1.5 Large Ensemble 2.0 J A Z Z 370 Jazz Styles 1.5 P P M I 5xx 3J3 Large Ensemble 2.0 P P M I 529 or 545 15.5 Spring Term Performance 3j) *Gen. Elective 15.5 J A Z Z 241 Counterpoint 1.5 J A Z Z 272 A r r a n g i n g II 1.5 Spring Term *Gen. Elective 3.0 3.0 J A Z Z 383 Improvisation rV 1.5 J A Z Z 241 Counterpoint 1.5 J A Z Z 395 S m a l l Ensemble V I 1.5 World Music J A Z Z 283 Improvisation II 1.5 J A Z Z 470 J A Z Z 337 Studio V o c a l Performance I V 1.5 Large Ensemble J A Z Z 339 V o c a l Jazz Master Class rV 1.5 P P M I 6xx J A Z Z 470 World Music 1.5 Large Ensemble 2.0 P P M I 629 or 645 Performance 3S) 15.5 Academic — Jazz Studies 134 1.5 2.0 1Q 15.5 FOURTH YEAR J A Z Z 410 Conducting I Fall Term C o m m e r c i a l Relations i n M u s i c Arranging I V Electives 1.5 1.5 "3.0 J A Z Z 460 J A Z Z 472 Jazz Pedagogy 1.5 JAZZ/MUS. J A Z Z 410 Conducting I 1.5 Large Ensemble 1.0 J A Z Z 460 C o m m e r c i a l Relations 1.5 P M I . 744 Composition 2.0 J A Z Z 494 S m a l l Ensemble V I I 1.5 * * * P M I . 7xx Secondary Requirement LQ 16.0 * G e n . Elective J A Z Z 310 1.5 3.0 J A Z Z / M U S . Electives 1.5 Large Ensemble 2.0 P P M I 7xx 10 *Gen. Elective 15.5 J A Z Z 411 Conducting II 1.5 JAZZ/MUS. Electives 4.5 Spring Term *Gen. Elective Spring Term 3.0 3.0 Large Ensemble J A Z Z 300 20th Century Theory 3.0 P P M I 844 Performance 3.0 J A Z Z 411 Conducting II 1.5 * * * P M I . 8xx Secondary Requirement J A Z Z 495 S m a l l Ensemble V I I I 1.5 LQ 14.0 JAZZ/MUS. Electives 1.5 1.0 Total Credits 123.0 Large Ensemble 2.0 P P M I 8xx 1Q 15.5 * * A r r / C o m p students are expected to complete the 124.5 equivalent o f sixth term P M I . on their principal instru- Total Credits * See A c a d e m i c Course Requirements. ment through completion o f four terms o f secondary * See A c a d e m i c Course Requirements P M I . and a jury at a 600-level concentration or through M A J O R IN A R R A N G I N G / C O M P O S I T I O N THIRD Y E A R completion o f concentration P M I . at the 500 and 600 level O R complete four semesters o f P M I . secondary piano. Fall Term * G e n . Elective 3.0 •••Students wishing to pursue the Arranging/Composi- J A Z Z 370 Jazz Styles 1.5 tion option w i l l replace M U S . 222/223 i n the second year JAZZ Electives 3.0 o f the D i p l o m a program with J A Z Z 240, 172 and J A Z Z 241,272. Large Ensemble 1.0 * * * M U S . 222 M u s i c History: Renaissance to Early Classical 3.0 M A J O R IN G E N E R A L STUDIES P M I . 544 Composition I 2.0 THIRD Y E A R * * P M I . 5xx Secondary Requirement LQ 14.5 Fall Term *Gen. Elective J A Z Z 172 Arranging I 3.0 3.0 J A Z Z 240 F o r m and A n a l y s i s J A Z Z 370 Jazz Styles * * J A Z Z / M U S . Electives 1.5 1.5 4.5 Large Ensemble P M I . 5xx 1.0 2,0 Spring Term *Gen. Elective J A Z Z 300 J A Z Z 372 20th Century Theory A r r a n g i n g III Large Ensemble * * * M U S . 223 3.0 1.5 1.0 M u s i c History: Late 18th, 19th 1.5 and 20th Century 3.0 J A Z Z 470 World Music 1.5 P M I . 644 C o m p o s i t i o n II 2.0 *Gen. Elective * * P M I . 6xx Secondary Requirement LQ 16.0 J A Z Z 241 Counterpoint J A Z Z 272 A r r a n g i n g II 15.0 Spring Term 3.0 1.5 1.5 * * J A Z Z / M U S . Electives 6.0 FOURTH YEAR J A Z Z 470 1.5 Fall Term Large Ensemble 1.0 P M I . 6xx 1Q *Gen. E l e c t i v e J A Z Z 310 Jazz Pedagogy 3.0 1.5 World Music 16.5 Academic — Jazz Studies 135 FOURTH YEAR M U S . 218 Fall Term * * * * M U E D 106 *Gen. Elective 3.0 J A Z Z 310 Jazz Pedagogy J A Z Z 410 Conducting I 1.5 Class Brass M u s i c Curricula 1.5 Instrumental/Choral 3.0 Techniques * * * J A Z Z / M U S . or N o n - M u s i c Electives 3.0 Large Ensemble 1.0 PMI. 7xx 1Q 15.0 * G e n . Elective 2.0 * * * * M U E D 302/303 * * J A Z Z / M U S . Electives Spring Term 1.5 4.0 m PMI. 7 x x 16.5 Spring Term *Gen. Elective 6.0 J A Z Z 219 Class Percussion 1.5 3.0 J A Z Z 300 20th Century Theory 3.0 Conducting II J A Z Z 300 20th Century Theory 3.0 J A Z Z 411 J A Z Z 411 Conducting II 1.5 * * J A Z Z / M U S . Electives 1.5 1.5 * * J A Z Z / M U S . Electives 1.5 Large Ensemble 1.0 * * * J A Z Z / M U S . or N o n - M u s i c Electives 3.0 P M I . 8xx 10 Large Ensemble 1.0 P M I . 8xx 1Q 15.0 Total Credits 124.0 16.5 Total Credits 130.0 Teachable M i n o r It is advisable to complete a m i n o r i n a secondary M A J O R IN G E N E R A L STUDIES - E D U C A T I O N teaching field as this greatly increases employment STREAM opportunities. The number o f credits and prerequisite THIRD Y E A R courses required for different minors varies considerably; students should be sure to consult with the Coordinator Fall Term *Gen. Elective 3.0 and Student A d v i s i n g before registering i n the first term. J A Z Z 172 Arranging I 1.5 To assist i n achieving a teachable minor before gradua- J A Z Z 240 F o r m and A n a l y s i s 1.5 tion, students may substitute w o r k toward this end for the J A Z Z 370 Jazz Styles 1.5 normal m i x o f general electives described under A c a - * * * J A Z Z / M U S . or N o n - M u s i c Electives 3.0 demic Course Requirements. T o graduate without this * * J A Z Z / M U S . Electives 1.5 normal m i x o f academic courses, students must achieve a M U S . 210 1.5 m i n i m u m o f 18 upper level credits i n their minor and six Large Ensemble 1.0 credits o f E n g l i s h within the 30 credits o f general P M I . 5xx 10 electives required o f the education stream. Class W o o d w i n d s 16.5 If necessary to establish prerequisites for a minor, six 6.0 credits o f general electives may be substituted for the required courses M U S . 222 and 223 w h i c h w i l l i n turn be taken in the third year. Spring Term *Gen. E l e c t i v e J A Z Z 241 Counterpoint J A Z Z 272 A r r a n g i n g II 1.5 1.5 *See A c a d e m i c Course Requirements * * * J A Z Z / M U S . or N o n - M u s i c Electives 3.0 M U S . 211 1.5 * * J A Z Z / M U S . Electives: In the General Studies Major, Class W o o d w i n d s 1.5 at least six credits must be numbered 300 level or above Large Ensemble 1.0 to fulfill graduation requirements; i n the Education P M I . 6xx 10 Stream at least two credits must be numbered 300 level or 18.0 above. Note that it may be possible to substitute an upper Jazz 470 World Music level M U E D course for M U E D 106. FOURTH YEAR Fall Term *Gen. Elective 3.0 J A Z Z 310 Jazz Pedagogy 1.5 J A Z Z 410 Conducting I 1.5 Large Ensemble Academic — Jazz Studies 136 1.0 * * * M u s i c or N o n - M u s i c Electives: General Studies program students may fulfill these requirements through any general, Jazz, M u s i c O R M u s i c Education elective acceptable to the program. ****These courses are currently not available at Capilano College, and would have to be taken at U B C . Substitution may occur on advisement by U B C Music Education. Secondary Music Teaching Instrumentalists in the Education Stream who wish to enter secondary music teaching should include at least one year of a vocal ensemble and one year of secondary Private Music Instruction (PMI.) in voice in their programs. Suitable Vocal Ensembles would include the Capilano College Community Choir, Capilano Singers, Jazz Choir, and Jazz Vocal Ensemble. Students whose major is a woodwind instrument may substitute secondary vocal PMI instruction for Class Woodwinds; brass majors may similarly substitute secondary vocal P M I for Class Brass, and percussion majors for Class Percussion. Pianists may substitute secondary voice PMI for the four credits of Class Piano normally required for the degree. may meet their ensemble requirements through the completion of any four ensemble courses. Students enrolled in the four year Jazz Studies Degree Program are required to complete a combination of traditional and jazz ensembles to complete their requirements. Instrumental Performance Ensemble Requirements Two semesters of traditional ensembles: These can be met by enrolment in the Capilano College Community Choir or Capilano Singers, or by participation in another approved community ensemble. Eight semesters of jazz ensemble: Including: Jazz Ensemble I (ENSJ 135), Jazz Choir (ENSJ 105), Instrumental Ensemble (ENSJ 136) and Guitar/Bass Ensemble (ENSJ 220) at the 200 level and above. (Note the Guitar/ Bass Ensemble I/II, while a prerequisite, is not acceptable for large ensemble credit in the degree program). Elementary Teaching Students interested in elementary teaching should be sure to include three credits of laboratory science, three credits of mathematics and three credits of history or geography. Of all general electives completed, six credits should be in Canadian studies. Specific R e q u i r e m e n t s A c a d e m i c Course Requirements •General Education Requirements E N G L 100 or 102 and 103, 104, 105 or 106 6.0 Humanities 6.0 Social Sciences 6.0 Science/Math 3.0 Elective 3^0 24.0 It is expected that all English requirements will be completed before entrance into the third year of the program. Note that the education stream requires 30 credits of general electives. E N S E M B L E REQUIREMENTS A l l large ensembles, regardless of the actual number of weekly hours of attendance required, have an assigned unit value of one credit hour. A semester profile requiring two credit hours of ensemble is met by enrolment in two separate ensembles. Two additional semesters of either Jazz or Traditional ensembles. Piano, guitar and bass performance majors can sometimes substitute other courses to complete their ensemble requirements. This is done through special arrangement with the Coordinator of the program. Percussion students are expected to complete two semesters of traditional ensemble, four semesters of jazz ensemble, and eight semesters of percussion ensemble. Three of these percussion ensembles can replace the normal improvisation requirement (JAZZ 282/283). A r r a n g i n g / C o m p o s i t i o n Ensemble Requirements Two semesters of traditional ensembles, four semesters of jazz ensembles, and two additional semesters of either Jazz or Traditional ensembles. See Major in General Studies Ensemble Requirements. Vocal Performance Ensemble Requirements Two semesters of concert choir: Capilano College Community Choir or the Capilano Singers. ( E N S M 100) Four semesters of jazz choir: Nite Cap or Capital Jazz. (ENSJ 105) Four semesters of Jazz Vocal Ensemble: (ENSJ 306) Two additional semesters of either Jazz or Traditional ensembles. Students terminating in the two year diploma program Academic — Jazz Studies 137 Major in General Studies Ensemble Requirements T w o semesters o f traditional ensembles: These can be met by enrolment i n the Capilano College C o m m u n i t y C h o i r or Capilano Singers, or by participation i n another ENSJ 136, 186,236, 286, (1) (2.0,*) (F,S) 336, 386, 436, 486 Instrumental Ensemble I, II, III, IV, V, VI, VII, VIII (by audition only) Students rehearse i n small " l i k e instrument" ensembles approved ensemble. Four semesters o f jazz ensemble, including Jazz Ensemble I ( E N S J 135), Jazz C h o i r ( E N S J 105) and Guitar/Bass Ensemble ( E N S J 220) at the 200 level or above. under an instructor's supervision i n preparation for a number o f performances. •Performances are a mandatory part o f the course. T w o additional semesters o f ensembles: for instrumentalists these may be Jazz or Traditional ensembles, for ENSJ 140, 190,240,290, vocalists these w i l l be E N S J 305 and 306. 340, 390, 440, 490 Percussionists must also participate i n four semesters o f (1) (4,0,*) (F.S) Percussion Ensemble I, II, III, IV, V, VI, VII, VIII percussion ensemble; three o f these courses can replace A n ensemble comprised exclusively o f percussion J A Z Z 282, 283, Improvisation. instruments o f both definite and indefinite pitch. Students w i l l develop their sight reading and interpretive skills. Course Descriptions •Performances are a mandatory part o f the course. For Music and Music Ensemble course descriptions, (ie. MUS. 120,121,222,223 and ENSM 100,150,200 and 250) see the Music Transfer section of this Prerequisite: Calendar. ENSJ 105,155, 205,255, ENSJ 220, 270, 320, 370 (1) (3,0,*) (F,S) 305, 355, 405, 455 (1) (3,0,0) (F.S) Guitar/Bass Ensemble III. IV, V, VI E N S J 170 or audition A performance ensemble comprised primarily o f bassists and guitarists. Students w i l l develop their sight reading and interpretive skills. Jazz Choir (by audition only) Rehearsal and performance i n one o f Capilano College's ENSJ 306, 356,406, 456 Jazz Choirs. The intent o f the class is to build group Jazz Vocal Ensemble (by audition only) singing abilities i n such areas as phrasing, blending and This course includes performance o f various styles o f a cappella and accompanied vocal ensemble repertoire with an emphasis on jazz literature and small group performance, i.e. one singer per part. intonation. *Performances are a mandatory part o f the course. ENSJ 120.170 (1) (3,0,0) (F.S) (1) (2,0,0) (F,S) Guitar/Bass Ensemble I, II JAZZ 103 Performance i n guitar/bass ensemble for the development The Language of Music o f sight reading and phrasing skills. Emphasis w i l l be on Corequisites: J A Z Z 184 (or M U S . 112) and J A Z Z 114 (3) (4,0,0) (F) single-note reading i n a l l areas o f the neck. Credit from this course is not applicable to the Degree progam. A n examination o f the basics o f tonal music including the study o f the overtone series, intervals, scales, modes, ENSJ 135,185,235, 285, (1) (3,0,*) (F.S) chord symbols, figured bass, roman numeral analysis, 335, 385, 435. 485 melodic inharmonics, phrase structure, diatonic triads and Jazz Ensemble I, II, III, IV, V, VI, VII, VIII (by voice leading. audition only) Participation i n the C a p i l a n o College large Jazz Ensem- JAZZ 105 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Rhythm Section Writing ble for development o f phrasing and sight reading skills. Prerequisite: •Performances are a mandatory part o f the course. JAZZ 103 Students w i l l undertake the study o f score preparation, notation, basic musical terms and articulations, and writing for the rhythm section instruments. Academic — Jazz Studies 138 JAZZ 106 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Traditional Harmony and Composition J A Z Z 103 or equivalent this course. Successful completion does not guarantee JAZZ 107 acceptance into higher level vocal courses. Prerequisite: Corequisite: A study o f traditional principles o f voice leading with harmonic vocabulary extending to the secondary d o m i nant, and b l l aug. 6th and including tonicization, simple modulation and pivot chords. B i n a r y and ternary forms w i l l be introduced. (2,0,0) (S) (D (2,2,0) (F) JAZZ 103 T h i s course is designed for students who wish to learn basic keyboard skills. Reading, improvisation, transposition and harmonization are the skills developed during this course and the three subsequent levels. Theoretical concepts are applied at the keyboard and include diatonic triads and sevenths o f the major key, all major, minor and modal tetrachords. A weekly lab evaluates material covered i n class. (2.0.0) (S) Prerequisite: (3.0) (4,0,0) (F) JAZZ 136 JAZZ 170 A survey of j a z z through styles and stylists from its roots i n A f r i c a to the present. A n introduction to j a z z theory including: chord scales, extended chords, functional analysis o f chord progression, primary and secondary root motion, and analysis and composition o f music i n the style o f j a z z standards and the blues. Class Piano I (1.5) Vocal Master Class II History of Jazz Prerequisite: JAZZ 103 or equivalent Corequisite: JAZZ 106 JAZZ 114 JAZZ 137 A continuation o f J A Z Z 136. JAZZ 107 (1.5) Jazz Theory and Composition I Corequisite: Vocalists who are judged to be at a sufficiently advanced level at their audition may substitute music electives for JAZZ 172 Arranging I (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: JAZZ 103, to be taken with or after J A Z Z 107 and J A Z Z 105. A study o f four-part b l o c k harmonization arranging techniques. JAZZ 184 Sightsinging/EarTraining I Corequisite: (1.5) (2,2,0) (F) JAZZ 103 A u r a l and sight training concentrating on melodic, rhythmic dictation and sightsinging. JAZZ 185 Sightsinging/Ear Training II (1.5) (2,2,0) (S) (1.5) (0,3,0) (F) Students practise on the department's Corequisite: pianos. JAZZ 106 and 107 A continuation o f J A Z Z 184. JAZZ 115 (1) (2.2.0) (S) Class Piano II Prerequisite: J A Z Z 114 Corequisites: JAZZ 106 and 107 A continuation o f J A Z Z 114. In addition, keyboard sequences, arpeggios and major scales are introduced along with easy original repertoire. JAZZ 136 (1.5) (2.0.0) (F) Vocal Master Class I (by audition only) A n introductory course intended to develop the student's JAZZ 194 Small Ensemble I For all instruments, requirements include several hours of rehearsal a week plus a number o f performances. T h e styles studied are varied. Students are expected to develop individual and ensemble performance abilities and a professional attitude to both performance and rehearsal. JAZZ 195 Small Ensemble II solo vocal performance capabilities through exploration o f various popular and j a z z musical styles. Material is prepared for performance with a keyboard accompanist. T h i s class is open to students not majoring i n V o i c e . A continuation o f J A Z Z 194. (1.5) (0,3,0) (S) JAZZ 203 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) JAZZ 237 Jazz T h e o r y & C o m p o s i t i o n II Studio Vocal Performance II Prerequisites: Prerequisite: J A Z Z 106 and 107 or permission o f the instructor. (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) J A Z Z 236 A continuation o f J A Z Z 236. Continued exploration o f chord progression and melody including: analysis o f popular chord progression, m i x e d JAZZ 238 mode chord progression, augmented 6th chords, Vocal Jazz Master Class I (by a u d i t i o n only) tonicization, chord scales/harmonic extensions. JAZZ 204 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: J A Z Z 137 This course is intended to develop the l i v e performance abilities o f the student through the study o f j a z z reper- Jazz T h e o r y & C o m p o s i t i o n III toire. Students w i l l study style and interpretation and Prerequisite: JAZZ 203 perform with some o f Vancouver's top j a z z musicians. Continued exploration o f chord progression and melody including: analysis o f modern j a z z chord progression, JAZZ 239 parallel harmony, 70s j a z z theory o f modal areas, modern Vocal Jazz Master Class II voicing techniques, reharmonization. JAZZ (D 214 Prerequisite: (2,2,0) (F) For students who have taken J A Z Z 115 or have had (1.5) (2,0.0) (F) A continuation o f J A Z Z 238. JAZZ 240 Form a n d Analysis J A Z Z 115 (2,0,0) (S) J A Z Z 238 Class Piano III Prerequisite: (1.5) Prerequisite: JAZZ 106 or M U S . 101 previous keyboard experience. Students are introduced to common idiomatic accompaniment patterns as well as A study o f complete works exhibiting the most signifi- four-part chorale studies, keyboard sequences, minor cant formal designs o f the 18th and 19th centuries, using scales and chords. B a s i c keyboard techniques are a variety o f visual means to clarify the roles o f harmonic, emphasized including relaxation, touch, rotation, weight melodic, and rhythmic structure i n the articulation o f transfer and their musical application i n simple repertoire. musical form. The lab hour is utilized to develop sight reading skills at the keyboard. Emphasis w i l l be on developing the skills necessary to use the piano as a tool i n writing and JAZZ 215 Class Piano IV (D (1.5) (2,0.0) (S) Counterpoint Prerequisite: arranging. Prerequisite: JAZZ 241 JAZZ 240 and J A Z Z 203 A study o f tonal counterpoint emphasizing its use from (2,2,0) (S) late Baroque through the c o m m o n practice period. JAZZ J A Z Z 214 A continuation o f J A Z Z 214 with increased complexity 272 Prerequisites: of repertoire and technique. (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) A r r a n g i n g II J A Z Z 172 and J A Z Z 105 Corequisite: JAZZ 203 JAZZ 236 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) Studio Vocal Performance I (by audition only) Arranging projects for various combinations o f instruments, plus a study o f two and three-part writing. Prerequisite: J A Z Z 137 A course designed to develop the student's studio performance ability through preparation and performance of JAZZ 282 (1.5) (2,2,0) (F) Improvisation I selected solo and ensemble material in the College's Prerequisites: JAZZ 107, 115 and 185 recording studio. A course to teach the basics o f improvisation on chord changes. The first term w i l l be devoted to rhythmic concepts, basic chord-scale relationships and development o f technical exercises for basic chord progressions. Academic 140 — Jazz Studies JAZZ 283 (1.5) (2,2,0) (S) Improvisation II A continuation o f J A Z Z 282. T h i s term w i l l be devoted to analysis o f chord progressions and more advanced chord-scale analysis. A t the end o f this term, students should have the basic theoretical knowledge necessary to analyze and learn to improvise on any "standard" j a z z tune. JAZZ 284 (1.5) (2,2,0) (F) S i g h t s i n g i n g / E a r T r a i n i n g III comparison o f textbooks, recordings, tapes, and materials related to the study o f jazz. JAZZ 336 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) Studio Vocal Performance III Prerequisite: JAZZ 237 A continuation o f J A Z Z 237. Seats may be restricted to vocal majors. JAZZ 337 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) Studio Vocal Performance IV Prerequisite: JAZZ Corequisite: J A Z Z 203 185 Prerequisite: JAZZ 336 A continuation o f J A Z Z 336. A continuation o f J A Z Z 185. JAZZ 338 JAZZ 285 S i g h t s i n g i n g / E a r T r a i n i n g IV (1.5) (2,2.0) (S) Vocal Jazz Master Class III Prerequisite: Prerequisite: JAZZ Corequisite: J A Z Z 204 294 with more emphasis on individual contribution and responsibility. Seats may be restricted to vocal majors. (1.5) (0.3,0) (F) Small Ensemble III Prerequisite: JAZZ 195 JAZZ 295 (1.5) (0,3,0) (S) Small Ensemble IV JAZZ Prerequisite: JAZZ (2,0,0) (S) (1.5) (2.0,0) (F) 338 A continuation o f J A Z Z 338. JAZZ 370 Jazz Styles Prerequisite: JAZZ 170 A follow-up to J A Z Z 170. Detailed study o f the major figures in j a z z from 1940 to the present, such as C h a r l i e Parker, John Coltrane, B i l l Evans. JAZZ 372 A r r a n g i n g III JAZZ 300 (3) (4.0,0) (S) 20th Century T h e o r y JAZZ (1.5) 294 A continuation o f J A Z Z 294. Prerequisites: JAZZ 339 Vocal Jazz Master Class IV A variety o f j a z z styles/eras w i l l be studied, advancing chronologically from "bebop" and "mainstream" standards, through contemporary j a z z o f the 60s and 70s and jazz-rock fusion, to current j a z z styles. Course operation is on two levels o f study; instructional and lab performance. Prerequisite: 239 A continuation o f V o c a l Jazz Master Class II instruction A continuation o f J A Z Z 284. JAZZ JAZZ 284 Prerequisites: (1.5) JAZZ (2,0,0) (S) 204, J A Z Z 272 A study o f vocal writing styles and techniques. T h i s course is not always offered. 240, J A Z Z 204 A survey o f compositional techniques and theoretical principles utilized from 1890 to the present coupled with an examination o f various major composers and masterpieces o f their music. JAZZ 310 JAZZ P e d a g o g y Prerequisite: JAZZ 382 Prerequisite: (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) J A Z Z 204 (1.5) (1,2,0) (F) Improvisation III JAZZ 283 This course contains both a lecture and lab component. Content w i l l include: substitution o f chord scales, tonicization, diminished chord scales, riff blues melodies, analysis and composition o f solos i n various styles. Concepts, methods, and resources; examination and Academic — Jazz Studies 141 JAZZ 383 (1.5) (1,2,0) (S) JAZZ 472 Improvisation IV Arranging IV Prerequisite: J A Z Z 382 Prerequisites: JAZZ 272 A continuation o f J A Z Z 382. Content w i l l include; (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) Corequisite: J A Z Z 204 altered and symmetrical scales, exploration o f the Course content includes writing techniques for large j a z z harmonic resources o f scales, pentatonic and altered ensemble. This course is not always offered . pentatonic scales, 4th chord stacks, polychordal triad relationships, outside playing, the philosophy o f free j a z z . JAZZ 494 (1.5) (0,3,0) (F) Small Ensemble VII (by audition only) (1.5) JAZZ 394 (0,3,1) (F) A j a z z performance ensemble for more advanced players. Small Ensemble V Students w i l l be required to perform i n public several Prerequisite: J A Z Z 295 times during the semester. A t this level the student w i l l receive instruction i n ensemble performance for the recording studio. Students w i l l perform and produce under supervision. JAZZ 495 (1.5) (0.3,0) (S) Small Ensemble VIII A continuation o f J A Z Z 494. (1.5) JAZZ 395 (0,3,1) (S) PPMI (various numbers) Small Ensemble VI (3) (1.5,0,0) (F,S) Concentration Private Music Instruction for Prerequisite: JAZZ 394 Performance Majors A continuation o f J A Z Z 394. A course designed to permit students i n the Performance (1.5) JAZZ 410 (2,0.0) (F) Majors to pursue in-depth study o f his/her o w n music specialty. The course consists o f a series o f one and one- Conducting I half hour lessons or equivalent. Prerequisites: JAZZ 204, 215, 240, 285 PMI. (Various Numbers) A study o f basic conducting techniques. (2) (1,0,0) (F,S) Concentration Private Music Instruction JAZZ 411 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Conducting II Prerequisite: J A Z Z 4 1 0 A course designed to permit students to pursue study o f his/her o w n music specialty. T h e course consists o f a series o f one-hour lessons. A continuation o f Conducting I with emphasis on vocal PMI. (Various Numbers ) and instrumental approaches. Secondary Private Music Instruction JAZZ 460 (1.5) (2.0,0) (F) (1) (.5,0,0) (F.S) T h i s course consists o f a series o f half-hour lessons o n Commercial Relations in Music the student's secondary instrument. A course i n v o l v i n g aspects o f the music industry includ- Note: T o enrol i n any P M I . courses students must ing copyright, contracts, performing rights organizations receive written permission from the program Coordina- and the recording industry. tor. JAZZ 470 (1.5) (2.0,0) (S) PMI. Lab World Music This lab involves attendance at a number o f concerts and A study o f the musics o f the w o r l d outside the realm o f is intended to broaden the musical experience o f students the Western European tradition. by exposing them to performances i n a variety o f j a z z and popular styles. Attendance is mandatory for graduation in the Jazz Studies Program. Academic 142 — Jazz Studies Kinesiology Instructional Faculty Course Descriptions L. ALEXANDER, M.P.E. (UBC), M.Ed. (UBC) M. WALSH, B.P.E., M.P.E. (UBC), Ph.D. (SFU) Introduction t o Kinesiology General Information The Capilano College Department of Kinesiology and Human Kinetics offers first year university courses in kinesiology, designed for students planning on transferring to Simon Fraser University for second year for completion of a major or a degree in the subject. For more information regarding the Kinesiology Program please contact the Pure and Applied Sciences Division, 984-4955. KIN. 142 (4,2,0) (S) (3) An introduction to the range of subject areas encompassed in the discipline of kinesiology, with basic assessment procedures for individual status and performance according to functional anatomy, biomechanics and exercise physiology. KIN. 143 (2.2,0) (F) (3) Exercise M a n a g e m e n t An introduction to exercise management and exercise physiology; conditioning methods, exercise techniques and fitness appraisal. Transfers to the University of British Columbia Human Kinetics Program The UBC Department of Human Kinetics offers four areas of concentration: (1) Exercise Science, (2) Health and Fitness, (3) Physical Education, and (4) Leisure and Sport Management. For information on the Human Kinetics (formerly Physical Education) Program, see Human Kinetics section. Transfers to the University of Victoria The University of Victoria Faculty of Education, School of Physical Education, also accepts transfer of some courses from Capilano College. To determine which courses are transferable, advisors at UVic and/or Capilano College should be consulted. Transfers to Simon Fraser University Kinesiology Program The Kinesiology Program at SFU offers four different areas of concentration: (1) Active Health, (2) Health and Physiological Sciences, (3) Human Factors/Ergonomics, and (4) Human Movement Sciences. To determine which Capilano College courses are transferable to SFU, students should consult the SFU calendar, the B.C. Transfer Guide or the Capilano College Transfer Guide and academic advisors at SFU and/or Capilano College. 0 Academic — Kinesiology 143 Labour Studies C o n t a c t : 984-4954 October and November and the Spring program i n M a r c h Instructional Faculty describing the courses to be offered are issued. The through M a y . E a c h F a l l and Spring special brochures brochures are available by contacting the L a b o u r Studies C . A S K E W , B . A . ( W . Ontario), L L . B . ( U B C ) , M e m b e r Programme at 984-4954. o f the B . C . B a r E . B E A D L E , Cert. (Ins. C c l o f B . C . , Ins. C c l o f Wash) K . B R A I D , B . A . (Mount A l l i s o n U n i v . ) , M . A . ( S F U ) Courses are scheduled in the evening and on selected Fridays, Saturdays and Sundays. T. B Y R N E , M . A . ( U B C ) S. D A V I S , B . A . , L L . B . (Queen's), M e m b e r o f the B . C . Bar Bursary The George N o r t h Chair was established by friends in E. D E C K E R , B . A . (McMaster) memory o f this outstanding member o f the trade union S. D I A M O N D movement. The award is available to assist with registra- G . F I O R T L L O , L L . B . ( U V i c ) , M e m b e r o f the B . C . B a r tion costs for union members who wish to attend courses G . J A M E S O N , B . A . ( U . Winnipeg), L L . B . ( U . M a n i - in the Labour Studies Programme. U n i o n members are toba), L L . M . ( U B C ) , M e m b e r o f the B . C . Bar F. K E N N E D Y first expected to seek sponsorship from their union i f they are eligible, before applying for a Bursary. L . K U E H N , B . A . , M . A . (Reed College) E . L A V A L L E , B . C o m m . , L L . B . ( U B C ) , M . A . (Duke) L . M C G R A D Y , B . A . (Toronto), L L . B . (Man.), M e m b e r o f the B . C . B a r Course Descriptions LSP. 100 (1.5) (F) S. O ' D O N N E L L , B . A . , M . A . ( U B C ) Introduction t o Economics f o r T r a d e Unionists J. P A T T E R S O N , B . A . , M . A . , ( Y o r k ) L L . B . ( U B C ) , A n economics course emphasizing both the simplicity o f M e m b e r o f the B . C . B a r most economic ideas, and the relevance o f economics to J. P R I C E , P h . D . ( U B C ) an understanding o f the way Canadian society operates. D. R O G E R S , Diploma (BCIT) It focuses on the reasons w h y economists disagree about S. R U S H , Q . C . , B . A . ( W . Ontario), L L . B . ( U B C ) , free trade, the role of government i n the economy and the M e m b e r o f the B . C . B a r J. S A Y R E , B . A . ( U . o f Chicago), L L . B . (Toronto), M e m b e r o f the B . C . B a r role o f unions, and isolates the political nature o f most economic arguments. Topics discussed include the workings of the market system, the idea o f competition L . S P E R L I N G , B . A . (Wisconsin) and the reality o f monopoly power, the potential benefits J. S T E E V E S , B . A . , L L . B . ( U B C ) , M e m b e r o f the B . C . and costs of "free trade", and the causes and conse- Bar, M e m b e r o f the Y u k o n B a r ( F a c u l t y o n leave) B . M E R R A L L , (Diploma) L a b o u r College of Canada B . S T R I N G E R , B . A . ( S F U ) , R . N . (Regina), M . S c . (McMaster) quences o f inflation and employment. LSP. 101 (1.5) Labour Economics: Alternatives & O p t i o n s (S) This course builds on the material from L S P . 100 to provide information on alternative economic models including Marxist economic theory. D i s c u s s i o n focuses General Information on the development and nature o f capitalist economics T h e L a b o u r Studies Programme is committed to meeting and the causes o f short and long term economic crises. the special education needs o f B . C . workers, their organizations and the labour movement in general. LSP. 105 (1.5) (F,S) Corporate Financial Statement Analysis C l o s e relations with the labour movement are maintained through the Users' A d v i s o r y Committee w h i c h is open to A general introduction to reading and understanding representatives o f unions who use the program. This financial statements focusing on corporate income hard-working group o f representatives actively engage in statements and balance sheets. There is discussion o f promoting and developing the program. concepts such as the definition o f profit and investment return and how to determine the cost o f employee Courses i n L a b o u r Studies are offered on both a credit and credit-free basis. T h e F a l l program is offered in Academic — Labour Studies 144 benefits. LSP. 109 Legal Research Skills (1.0) (F,S) and administrative framework o f the W o r k e r s ' C o m p e n sation B o a r d and all phases o f claims handling are This course provides students with a general understand- examined. ing o f the fundamental principles o f legal research. required to represent workers with compensation appeals Students are provided with information Students learn the basics o f legal research by doing a with special emphasis on reviewing W . C . B . c l a i m files, series o f specific research problems. The Labour Rela- securing evidence, presenting the evidence by written tions B o a r d library is used by the participants to undertake submissions and at oral hearings. hands-on research assignments. LSP. 117 LSP. 110 (F.S) (1.5) (1.0) (F.S) Introduction to UIC Procedures B.C. L a b o u r Law The Unemployment Insurance A c t is a basic part o f A basic but comprehensive course designed to acquaint Canada's "social safety net". H i g h unemployment makes union members as w e l l as officers and staff with the unemployment insurance more important than ever to essentials o f the provincial labour law. working people. The course covers organizing, unfair labour practices, This course is intended to help union officers and ordi- arbitration, strikes, lockouts and picketing, amongst other topics. nary workers understand how unemployment insurance The sessions include detailed examination o f the Labour Relations C o d e , important L a b o u r Relations Board decisions, as w e l l as court decisions dealing with labour law issues. LSP. 111 The C a n a d a Labour C o d e works. M a n y topics are covered, from the determination of insurable employments to types o f benefits, avoiding trouble with a claim, and termination. The complex appeal system is thoroughly discussed, and students are offered a chance to take part i n a simulated Board o f Referees hearing at the final session. Students become (1.5) (F.S) familiar with the Unemployment Insurance A c t and Regulations, policy manual, umpire's decisions, and other research tools. A broad examination o f the C o d e and decisions which affect unions under federal labour jurisdiction. Introduction o f labour l a w research methods and their application. Emphasis is placed on the policy underlying the code and the creation and effect o f the collective agreement. LSP. 113 (1.5) Public Service Staff Relations A c t (PSSRA) LSP. 118 H u m a n Rights Law (1.0) (F.S) A n examination o f the essential practices and procedures in human rights law focusing on sexual harassment. T h i s (F.S) course offers up-to-date legal information from the provincial and federal jurisdictions. It provides an assessment o f legal protection under the H u m a n Rights A wide examination o f the federal labour laws dealing specifically with the public sector worker and their impact. Emphasis on labour l a w research methods and their application, collective agreements, grievances and back-to-work legislation for "essential" service workers. A c t o f British C o l u m b i a , the Canadian H u m a n Rights Act, and the Canadian Charter o f Rights and Freedoms, as w e l l as collective agreements and institutional policies. The course provides the participant with a thorough understanding o f liability, the process o f filing a c o m plaint, and appropriate remedies i n human rights law. LSP. 115 (1.0) Issues in Occupational Health a n d Safety (F.S) A general background to and overview o f the main social, LSP. 119 (1.0) Civil Rights a n d the W o r k Place (F.S) medical, economic, technical and legal issues facing B . C . Specific c i v i l rights problems arising i n the w o r k place, workers i n the field o f health and safety. Special attention including issues o f political, economic and legal rights o f is given to the W o r k e r s ' Compensation Board. the worker; examination o f legal remedies available to trade unions and the employee to prevent infringement o f LSP. 116 (1.0) (F.S) W o r k e r s ' C o m p e n s a t i o n A c t a n d the W C B c i v i l rights i n the work place; protection o f c i v i l rights under the provincial and federal legislation through The course provides a general understanding o f the contracting and in collective agreements. A problem- W o r k e r s ' Compensation A c t by the W . C . B . The statutory solving format with discussions o f current c i v i l rights Academic — Labour Studies 145 issues, "right-to-work" legislation, race and sex discrimi- to organize, obtain union recognition, bargain collectively nation. and provide decent wages and w o r k i n g conditions. LSP. 120 (1.5) (F,S) LSP. 141 (1.0) (F.S) Politics: U n d e r s t a n d i n g G o v e r n m e n t Telling Y o u r Union's Story: A Course in Practical Bureaucracy History A course w h i c h outlines how government operates i n This is a companion course for the larger course i n various spheres, the impact it makes on the citizen, how Labour History, but it can be taken separately. It is to utilize procedures for redressing grievances that result designed to give some basic research skills, skills that can from bureaucracy, and what channels are open for citizen be applied toward learning the history o f your union - its participation. In addition, the course looks at the c i v i l development, policies, past struggles and victories. It is servant and his/her relationship to other workers. meant to be a practical course: the participants learn how to use resources, how to apply them, and h o w to present LSP. 122 (1.5) (F,S) the results to others. Politics: Labour Policy in C a n a d a LSP. 142 Provides a basic understanding o f the structures and processes o f policy m a k i n g i n Canada with a direct focus on the formation o f L a b o u r P o l i c y . The participant gains (1.5) (F) History of the Labour M o v e m e n t in B.C. The birth and growth o f trade u n i o n i s m i n B . C . Through a specific knowledge o f the structures o f government i n a wide collection o f printed and visual materials partici- Canada, learns the impact federalism has on policy pants analyze the raw and vital struggles between B . C . ' s formation, and becomes familiarized with channels of working people and the industrialists who opposed them. policital input. The major economic and political issues o f the movement are traced; the right to organize, the right to bargain, the LSP. 130 (1.5) (F.S) demand for the nine and eight-hour day, the problems of racism and immigration, the struggle to organize the Sociology o f W o r k industrial, public and clerical sectors, the fight for This course assists i n the understanding of the social women's rights, political expression. context i n w h i c h w o r k occurs. A n attempt to develop tools to understand the various social settings i n which work has been placed is undertaken. The different ways in w h i c h w o r k i n g people have been manipulated by the LSP. 150 (1.0) (F.S) W o m e n in the W o r k Force This course focuses on what w o m e n want to do i n their new social engineers is also studied. union. It encompasses the political realities o f the labour LSP. 131 (1.5) (F.S) movement as it is today, as w e l l as personal and emo- Race a n d Ethnic Relations tional politics within the trade union movement as they The issue o f racism has been used i n the past to weaken exist i n our sexist society. and divide unions. T h i s course w i l l help unionists LSP. 151 (1.0) (F.S) Leadership Skills, Assertiveness a n d A d v o c a c y become sensitive to complexities o f race and ethnic relations; give practical advice on integrating minority workers into the union and develop techniques to deal Attempts not only to provide women with the skills they with biases and prejudice at the work place and in the need to take a leadership role i n their trade union, but also community. Approaches to combatting the disruptive takes a careful l o o k at the way sex role stereotyping effects o f racism w i l l be discussed. inhibits us from developing these skills. T h i s course covers the following areas: W o m e n and Power, Assert- LSP. 140 (1.5) (S) History o f t h e L a b o u r M o v e m e n t in C a n a d a A survey o f the history o f the labour movement i n Canada from the formation o f the w o r k i n g class in the 19th century through to mass industrial unionism. B y looking at specific conflicts a good overview is obtained of the struggles o f the labour movement to gain the right Academic — Labour Studies 146 iveness, A d v o c a c y , Organizing and G r o u p D y n a m i c s . LSP. 155 (1.0) (F.S) Indian Land Claims a n d the Trade Union Movement LSP. 163 Media Workshops (1.5) (F.S) T h e a i m o f this workshop is to gain the skills for single- This course acquaints the participant with the position of tray slide-tape production. O n completion o f the course, native people on the issue o f land claims. A n understand- the learner w i l l be able to script a slide-tape programme; ing o f die implications o f native land claims for the trade prepare and shoot graphics; record, edit and m i x an union movement and the history o f native people i n elementary audio tape; shoot the slides for a slide-tape Canada and British C o l u m b i a is gained. T h i s history is programme; and pulse and playback a slide-tape. studied i n relation to the whole question o f land. LSP. 160 (3.0) M e d i a f o r Trade U n i o n Education a n d Organization (F.S) LSP. 170 (1.5) Communications: Public Speaking a n d Parliamentary Procedures (F.S) A l l the skills and techniques necessary for effective The objective o f this course is to become familiar with communications i n active union involvement. Designed simple m e d i a production skills for use i n the labour to meet the needs o f active unionists and officers, this movement. T h e participant learns how to record and dub course combines principles and practice i n a "learn w h i l e audio material, use an instamatic or 35 m m still camera d o i n g " format. Training i n the following skills areas: for slides, produce a simple slide-audio show, use 1. effective public speaking: including methods o f oral portable video equipment for basic recording, write news communication, effective listening and response, releases, pamphlets, and internal newsletters and edit confidence building, and style development. R o l e audio and video tape. plays aid the participant i n overcoming fears and speech anxiety while m a x i m i z i n g organization, LSP. 161 (1.5) (F.S) W o r k i n g w i t h Mass M e d i a objectives and analysis o f impact. 2. effective meetings: effective chairing, preparation o f T h i s course is designed to acquaint trade unionists with agendas, and building a good "process" with the the native o f print and electronic mass media w i t h a v i e w assistance o f rules o f order. to i m p r o v i n g techniques for relating to the media. Specific topics w h i c h emerge from the classes w i l l be dealt with, typical o f w h i c h might be media ownership and the process o f "newsmaking". LSP. 162 (1.5) (F.S) W o r k i n g Culture a n d History of Labour Arts Since its beginning, Canadian labour has worked to build a cultural life supportive o f the concerns of working people. A t the same time, visual artists, film makers, dramatists, musicians, writers and other cultural workers have identified w i t h the movement for social change embodied i n organized labour. LSP. 180 Stewards' Training (1.5) (F.S) This course is intended to assist stewards and union members i n developing confidence i n their ability to adequately represent their fellow workers at the office or job site as w e l l as provide the m i n i m u m technical skills i n advocacy and contract interpretation. In addition, the course provides a brief overview o f the history o f the North A m e r i c a n Labour M o v e m e n t and its institutions as they have developed. LSP. 181 This course explores the history o f Canadian labour Collective Bargaining (1.5) (F.S) culture, the influence o f various ethnic and international Technical and practical information for the union nego- currents i n creating a r i c h cultural identity and the limits tiator. and possibilities opened by the advent o f mass media. including preparation and development o f proposals; Examples o f f i l m , video, television, song, literature and contract language and costing. Bargaining table advo- visual art are used as focal points for discussion. cacy skills are explored. M a t e r i a l is available for the Includes instruction on the bargaining process specific needs of public and private sector bargaining. A bargaining simulation is held as an integral part o f the course. Academic — Labour Studies 147 LSP. 182 Union Local Administration (1.5) (F.S) This course is designed to provide union activists and LSP. 210 Arbitration (1.5) (F.S) This course, which is open to students who have previ- local officers with basic skills in parliamentary proce- ously completed L S P . 110, 111, 113 or any other Labour dures as w e l l as the administrative duties o f officers and L a w course, is an advanced course dealing with matters committee members i n local unions. T h e course requires such as rules o f evidence, procedures, selection o f considerable student participation to develop debating arbitrators, arbitration powers and a brief history o f and advocacy skills. arbitration. It deals with grievance arbitration arising out of the collective agreement. LSP. 190 Contract Costing (F.S) (1.0) This course evaluates the "numbers game" played at the bargaining table and i n the media around bargaining LSP. 216 (1.0) (F.S) Workers' Compensation Appeals - Intermediate Level issues. It deals with union and employer approaches to This course is open to students who have previously costing the different elements o f bargaining proposals completed L S P . 116 or have experience i n representing and settlements. workers with compensation appeals. The course provides Topics discussed include: • wages and benefits and the concept of total compensation; • the effects o f inflation and design o f C O L A clauses; • sources o f information for monetary negotiations and the uses and limitations o f external comparisons. an understanding o f the W o r k e r s ' Compensation appeals process with special emphasis on policies, procedures and practice by preparing and presenting appeals at the Workers' Compensation R e v i e w B o a r d . Students are provided with practical skills for reviewing medical evidence and requesting medical legal opinions. A key part o f the course is a case study that involves preparation Participants also consider issues such as strategy, the of an appeal and the presentation o f the appeal to a panel public relations aspects o f costing, and the relationship o f of the W o r k e r s ' Compensation R e v i e w B o a r d . costing to pay equity. LSP. 191 (1.0) Introduction to Pension Plans (F.S) This course, useful for Pension Trustees, potential Trustees, union officers and pension plan administrative staff, is a thorough examination o f pension plans and pension issues. T o p i c s developed and discussed include defined benefit and money purchase plans; regulation o f pensions; the l a w o f trusts; investment principles and practices; the design, financing, administration and communication o f pension plans; strategic planning for pensions. LSP. 192 (1.0) (F.S) Introduction to Health 8c Welfare Benefits This course has been developed to provide a working understanding o f the various aspects o f Health & W e l fare/Benefit Plans. T h e f o l l o w i n g topics are incorporated: what is contained i n a Health & Welfare Plan; government involvement; designing a benefit plan, costing components; methods o f financing a benefit plan; benefit plan administration. Academic — Labour Studies 148 LSP. 226 (1.0) (F.S) Advanced Workers' Compensation - Appeal Preparation & Presentation The course is open to students w h o have previously completed L S P . 116, L S P . 216 or have experience in representing workers with compensation at the appeal level. This course provides detailed review o f A d v a n c e d Workers' Compensation Appeals to the Appeals T r i b u n a l (Commissioners) and to the M e d i c a l R e v i e w Panel. Students review appeals procedures and policies for advanced appeals and complete practical skills exercises. Linguistics Instructional Faculty Y . Q u , B . A . (Shandong Teachers' U . ) , M . A . (Beijing F o r e i g n Studies U . ) , P h . D . ( U B C ) Linguistics 100 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Introduction to General Linguistics: Language Structure This course provides a preliminary examination o f the structural properties o f languages in general. It focuses on how sounds are articulated and function (phonics and phonology), and how words and sentences are formed (morphology and syntax). It utilizes examples from a variety o f languages and discusses applications o f these linguistic findings to language learning and teaching. Linguistics 101 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Introduction to General Linguistics: Language Use Prerequisite: Linguistics 100 or permission o f instructor A continuation o f Linguistics 100\ this course focuses on language use and other aspects o f linguistics. It provides an introduction to semantics, pragmatics, historical linguistics, sociolinguistics, language typology, writing systems and first and second language acquisition. Academic — Linguistics 149 Mathematics and Statistics Instructional Faculty A . E . T . B E N T L E Y , B . S c . (Hons.) ( U B C ) , M . A . , P h . D . (Missouri), Coordinator o f Mathematics R . C . B R E W S T E R , B . S c . (Hons.), M . S c . ( U V i c ) , P h . D . (SFU) P. C A R T E R , B . S c . (Hons) (Sheffield) M . S c , P h . D . (UBC) L.F. H A R R I S , B . A . , M . A . , (UBC), Ph.D. (Austral. Nat. U ) R . H A U S C H I L D T , B . S c . (Hons.) (Queen's), M . S c . (UBC) J. J O H N S T O N , B . M a t h (Waterloo), B . E d . (Toronto), M . M a t h (Waterloo) C . M O R G A N , B . S c (Hons.), M . S c , P h . D (Memorial) Although each o f M A T H 105 and 107 is recognized by post secondary institutions as a M a t h 12 equivalent, it is c o m m o n for students even w i t h M a t h 12 completion to take one o f these precalculus courses i n preparation for calculus. B o t h 105 and 107 receive individual transfer credit at S F U and U V i c . A t U B C transfer credit is granted for a combined precalculus ( M A T H 105 or 107) and calculus ( M A T H 108 or 110) package (except those faculties at U B C w h i c h require M a t h 12 for admission). C h e c k the Mathematics Placement Test ( M P T ) section and individual course lisdngs for the prerequisite requirements for each o f M A T H 105 and 107. Based on their M P T results, some students w i l l be allowed to enrol i n M a t h 105 or 107 only i f they enrol i n M a t h 095 concurrently. R . R . R E N N I E , B . S c , M . S c . (Brigham Y o u n g ) , P h . D . (UBC) 3. Calculus I K . V . T O W S O N , B . S c , M . S c (SFU) M A T H 110 is a general purpose first year calculus R . H . V E R N E R , B.Sc. (UBC), M.Sc. (EWSU), B . C . course whereas M A T H 108 is a calculus course Teaching Cert. ( U B C ) A . W A T E R M A N , B.Sc. (UBC), M . S c (SFU), B.C. Teaching Cert. ( U B C ) C . W A T K I S S , B . S c . (Carleton), M . S c , P h . D . (Toronto) specifically designed for students planning to pursue a business or commerce program. C h e c k the Mathematics Placement Test ( M P T ) section and individual course listings for the prerequisite requirements for each o f M A T H 108 and 110. Laboratory Supervisor L Y N N , W . , B . S c . (Carleton), M . A . S c . (Waterloo) 4. Introductory Statistics M A T H 101 is an introductory statistics course designed primarily for non-science students wanting to General Information The Mathematics and Statistics Department offers first and second year university level courses i n mathematics and statistics as well as preparatory courses. Entry Courses 1. Preparatory M A T H 009 is an individualized study course for students needing a basic arithmetic refresher. M A T H 090 and 095 are 1.5 credit courses designed fulfill a science elective requirement. Specific Program Requirements Students should use the f o l l o w i n g three sections as guidelines for selecting math courses at the first year level. Due to the specialized needs o f some programs at the universities, the Mathematics and Statistics Department advises students to consult the university calendar and to seek guidance from a C o l l e g e advisor or math instructor for appropriate course selection. 1. Science, Forestry, Engineering for students needing introductory through intermediate level algebra. It is possible to complete both courses in a single term. The combined M A T H 090/095 is recognized by post secondary institutions as a M a t h 11 equivalent. Students planning to pursue science or science related programs are required to take M A T H 110/111. Engineering students should consult the Engineering section i n the calendar. Students planning to pursue mathematics or statistics at U B C should take i n their 2. Precalculus M A T H 107 is a precalculus course specifically designed for students planning to pursue a business or commerce program, whereas M A T H 105 focusses more on scientific applications. first year: M A T H 110/111 P H Y S 114/115 C H E M 110/111 (or 108/109) C O M P 110/111 E N G L (6 credits) Academic — Mathematics and Statistics 150 2. Arts, Social Science T o fulfill a one year science elective requirement nonscience students typically take M A T H 101/102, although any o f the precalculus/calculus combinations also meet this requirement. Students planning to pursue a psychology program at S F U are required to take M A T H 107 i f they have not completed M a t h 12. 3 . Commerce, Business, Economics Students planning to pursue a commerce, business or T o write the Calculus placement test, students should have at least a " C " grade in M a t h 12. W i t h i n a given year students are not a l l o w e d to rewrite the Calculus or Precalculus M P T . A study guide is available for the M P T w h i c h provides topic coverage and suggested review material as w e l l as a list of the scheduled test dates. Please contact the Registrar's Office or the Pure and A p p l i e d Sciences D i v i s i o n for more information. economics program are required to take M A T H 108 (and M A T H 107 i f the prerequisite requirements for 108 are Graphing Calculator not met; transfer credit w i l l be given for M A T H 107). In The Mathematics and Statistics Department believes that addition M A T H 109 is required for students planning to the graphing calculator greatly enhances mathematics transfer to the commerce program or economics at U B C . instruction and learning. Students enrolling i n M A T H For a detailed description o f commerce courses and 090/095 or any first year course, M A T H 105 or higher, program requirements see the Calendar section titled are required to have a graphing calculator. Specific Commerce. recommendations on make and model w i l l be available during the registration period. University Transfer Credit Except where explicitly noted, a l l math and statistics Course Descriptions courses numbered 101 or higher transfer to S F U , U B C Note: Students are strongly cautioned that normally they and U V i c . F o r details, consult the B . C . Transfer Guide or need at least a " B - " grade i n a prerequisite course (prefer- the C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e Transfer G u i d e available at the ably within the past year) to have a reasonable chance o f A d v i s i n g Centre or C o l l e g e Reception. success at the next course level. Math Placement Test (MPT) M A T H 009 Arithmetic (1) ( 0 3 \ 0 ) (Su,F,S) f Students wanting to enrol in a Precalculus course ( M A T H 105 or 107) or a Calculus I course ( M A T H 108 or 110) A review o f the basic arithmetic operations. Applications must write a mathematics placement test i f either (or to percentage, ratio, proportions, areas and volumes. T h i s both) o f the f o l l o w i n g two conditions apply: is a self-paced course primarily intended for returning students who require a basic math refresher. (a) Their mathematics prerequisite course was completed prior to 1996 for admission into F a l l 1997 courses; prior to 1997 for admission into Spring 1998 and Summer 1998 courses. (b) Their mathematics prerequisite course was completed at a B . C . secondary school (or equivalent) with a final letter grade standing below: * Students are generally required to attend three scheduled hours per week for this course. M A T H 090 (1.5) (4*,0,0) (Su.F.S) Introductory A l g e b r a w i t h Functions Prerequisite: M a t h 11 w i t h at least a " C - " grade or permission of a mathematics instructor. Develops the concepts o f introductory algebra with " C " i n M a t h 12 for admission to M A T H 105 or M A T H 107; " B " i n M a t h 12 for admission to M A T H 108; " A " in M a t h 12, or at least a " B " i n both M a t h 12 and Calculus 12, for admission to M A T H 110. T o write the Precalculus placement test, students should have at least a " C " grade in M a t h 11 or at least a " C - " grade i n M a t h 12. emphasis on the real number system, the algebra o f exponents, and p o l y n o m i a l arithmetic at the elementary level. T h i s course is intended for students w h o require a basic introduction to algebra. * This course meets four hours per week for seven weeks (half a term). Academic — Mathematics and Statistics 151 M A T H 095 (1.5) (4*,0,0)(Su,F,S) N o duplicate credit for M A T H 105/107. Intermediate A l g e b r a w i t h Functions Prerequisite: M A T H 010 or M A T H 090 or B M T H 045 with at least a " C - " grade, or M a t h 11 with at least a " C " grade, or permission o f a Mathematics instructor. Develops the concepts o f intermediate algebra including M A T H 107 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) Precalculus for Business a n d Social Sciences N O T E : This course is not transferable to U B C unless combined with M A T H 108 (for some faculties). polynomials, rational expressions, radical expressions, Prerequisite: quadratic equations and an introduction to logarithms. tion within the past year of: M a t h 12 with at least a " C " M a t h Placement Test ( M P T ) O R comple- This course is intended for students who have already grade; or B M T H 045 with at least a " B " grade; or M A T H completed a basic introduction to algebra. 095 with at least a " C + " grade. * This course meets four hours per week for seven weeks Students who have completed within the past year M a t h (half a term) or two hours per week for the full term. 090 with at least a " B - " grade O R M a t h 095 w i t h a least a " C - " grade are permitted to enrol i n M a t h 107 only i f M A T H 101 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Introduction t o Statistics Prerequisite: they enrol i n M a t h 095 concurrently. The mathematical models/applications i n this course w i l l M a t h 11 or M A T H 010 or M A T H 090 or M A T H 099 or B M T H 045 with at least a " C - " grade, or permission o f the instructor. be mainly business/finance oriented. Linear and quadratic equations and inequalities, absolute value, systems o f linear equations, functions and graphs, A n introduction to the language o f statistics and some inverse functions, mathematical modelling, exponential statistical methods, including random variables and their and logarithm functions, circular and trigonometic distribution; random sampling, normal distribution, functions, right-triangle trigonometry, arithmetic and estimation o f parameters and testing hypotheses. geometric progressions, compound interest and annuities, summation notation, binomial theorem. M A T H 102 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Statistical M e t h o d s Prerequisite: M A T H 101 with at least a " C - " grade. A study o f important statistical methods commonly used in the analysis o f research data, including t-tests and their non-parametric competitors, one and two-way analysis o f variance, chi-square tests and regression analysis. M A T H 105 (3) (4,0,0) (Su,F,S) Precalculus M a t h e m a t i c s N o duplicate credit for M A T H 105/107. M A T H 108 (3) (4,0,0) (Su.F.S) Calculus I for Business a n d Social Sciences Prerequisite: M a t h Placement Test ( M P T ) O R completion within the past year of: M a t h 12 with at least a " B " grade; or M A T H 105 or M A T H 107 or B M T H 046 w i t h at least a " C - " grade. A n introduction to the mathematics o f change; the concepts o f calculus and the application, o f these concepts N O T E : This course is not transferable to U B C except i f to business and the social sciences using a technology- combined with M A T H 110 or 108 (for some faculties). based modelling approach; mathematical models o f data Prerequisite: M a t h Placement Test ( M P T ) O R comple- sets using continuous functions; using the derivative and tion within the past year of: M a t h 12 with at least a " C " integral to investigate change; interpreting and c o m m u n i - grade; B M T H 045 with at least a " B " grade; or M A T H cating results. 095 with at least a " C + " grade. N o duplicate credit w i l l be given for M A T H 108/110. Students who have completed within the past year M a t h 090 with at least a " B - " grade O R M a t h 095 with a least a " C - " grade are permitted to enrol i n M a t h 105 only i f they enrol i n M a t h 095 concurrently. A review o f algebra and a discussion o f functions, M A T H 109 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) Calculus II for Business a n d Social Sciences Prerequisite: M A T H 108 or M A T H 110 with at least a " C - " grade. graphs, mathematical models, trigonometry, logarithms Trigonometric functions, applications o f the definite and exponential functions. Primarily for students who integral, integration techniques. Functions o f several anticipate taking calculus courses or who require a M a t h independent variables, partial derivatives, extrema, 12 equivalent course. Academic — Mathematics and Statistics 152 Lagrange multipliers, multiple integrals, some techniques for solving differential equations, systems o f linear equations and matrix algebra. Prerequisite: N o duplicate credit w i l l be given for M A T H 109/111. M A T H 110 (4.5) (6,0.0) (Su.F.S) Calculus I Prerequisite: M A T H 200 Linear A l g e b r a (3) (4,0,0) (F) M A T H 111 with at least a " C - " grade. A n introduction to systems o f linear equations and matrices, vector spaces and linear transformations, determinants, eigenvalues and eigenvectors, inner product spaces. Theorems and proofs are an important M a t h Placement Test ( M P T ) O R comple- component o f the course. tion within the past year of: M a t h 12 with an " A " grade; or M a t h 12 and Calculus 12 with at least a " B " grade in M A T H 204 each; or M A T H 105 or B M T H 046 with at least a " C - " Probability a n d Statistics for Applications grade. (3) Prerequisite: L i m i t s , continuity, the derivative, rules o f differentiation, implicit differentiation, related rates, curve sketching, optimization, differentials; definite integrals and antidifferentiation; logarithmic and exponential functions. (4,0,0) (F,S)* M A T H 108 or M A T H 110 w i t h at least a " C - " grade or permission o f the instructor. A calculus based introduction to classical and nonparametric techniques for inferences about means, variances and analysis o f variance. The emphasis w i l l be N o duplicate credit w i l l be given for M A T H 108/110. on problem formulation, models, assumptions and This course may be completed by guided self-study format using video and computer based instruction. course participants to appropriate supporting statistical interpretation. Regularly scheduled "labs" w i l l introduce software. M A T H 111 (4.5) (6,0.0) (Su,F,S) * M A T H 204 to be offered i n either F a l l or Spring term. Calculus II Prerequisite: M A T H 110 with at least a " C - " grade. M A T H 205 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Introduction t o Probability a n d Statistics A study o f the anti-derivative; the integral, techniques o f integration, applications o f the integral; polar coordinates, Prerequisite: parametric curves; sequences, infinite series and T a y l o r ' s A calculus based study o f probability, discrete and M A T H 111 with at least a " C - " grade. Theorem. continuous random variables, mathematical expectation, N o duplicate credit w i l l be given for M A T H 109/111. moment generating functions, Central L i m i t Theorem, sampling from normal populations, confidence intervals, M A T H 152 (3) (4,0,1) (S) hypothesis testing. Linear A l g e b r a a n d Differential Equations N O T E : This course is intended for students in the Engineering Program. Corequisite: M A T H 111 A n introduction to systems o f linear equations and matrices, vector spaces and linear transformations, determinants, eigenvalues and eigenvectors, inner product spaces. The theory w i l l be applied to first order linear differential equations, first order linear systems and engineering topics. M A T H 215 (3) Introduction t o Analysis (4,0.0) (F,S)* Prerequisite: M A T H 110 and 111 with at least a " B - " average. A course for students who plan to proceed i n mathematics. L o g i c , sets, functions, limits o f sequences and series; introduction to continuity, the derivative, Riemann Integral. * M A T H 215 to be offered i n the F a l l or Spring when sufficient student demand is evident. The Math Department offers a full second year university transfer program in math. Students planning to take 200 level math should seek advice from math instructors. M A T H 223 (3) (4,0.0) (S) Discrete Mathematics w i t h Applications Prerequisite: A " C - " grade or better i n both C O M P 111 and M A T H 111. A n introduction to the foundation o f discrete mathematics and illustrations o f its practical applications. Theoretical Academic — Mathematics and Statistics 153 topics include logic and proof techniques, set theory, relations and functions, combinatorics and counting principles, graphs and trees. These topics are important in computing science and many other disciplines: applications include graph colouring, correctness and efficiency o f computer algorithms (including recursive algorithms), digital circuits and formal languages. N o duplicate credit w i l l be given for M A T H 2 2 3 / C o m p 223. MATH 230 Calculus III Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (F) M A T H 111 with at least a " C - " grade. Corequisite: M A T H 200 ( i f not already completed) or permission o f instructor. A n a l y t i c a l geometry o f three dimensions; partial differentiation, applications; double and triple integrals; transformations to various coordinate systems. MATH 231 Calculus IV (3) (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: M A T H 230 w i t h at least a " C - " grade. V e c t o r calculus; line and surface integrals; Green's Theorem; vector fields; divergence theorem; Stokes's Theorem; applications. MATH 235 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Introduction to Differential Equations Prerequisite: M A T H 200 and M A T H 230 with at least a " C - " grade. A n introduction to ordinary differential equations; first order equations; higher order linear differential equations; linear systems; power series techniques; Laplace transform method; the phase plane, applications. Academic 154 — Mathematics and Statistics Music Transfer BACHELOR OF MUSIC TRANSFER PROGRAM TWO YEAR DIPLOMA AND TRANSFERABILITY TO THIRD YEAR UNIVERSITY C o n t a c t : Lars Kaario, Coordinator, Office 2 0 I D , Phone Career Opportunities 984-4951, L o c a l 2309. • Private M u s i c Teacher - with the completion o f the two year diploma program Instructional Faculty G . A L C O C K , A . R . C . T . (Toronto) • first two years toward a M u s i c degree leading to a career in M u s i c Education or Performance M . A R M A N I N I , A . R . C . T . (Toronto), B . M u s . , M . M u s . (UBC) University Transfer D. A S T O R , B.A. (UBC) J. B E R A R D U C C I , B . M u s . ( U B C ) , M . A . ( W . Wash.) J. B E R K M A N , B . M u s . (Oberlin), M . M u s . (Juilliard) N . B O H N A , B.Mus., M.Mus. ( U B C ) S. B O S W E L L , A . R . C . M . (Royal College o f M u s i c , London) K . C E R N A U S K A S , D i p . (Salzburg), B . M u s . (Toronto) S. D E N R O C H E , B . M u s . ( U B C ) N . D I N O V O , B.Mus., M.Mus. (UT) L . F A L L S , A . R . C . T . (Toronto), B . M u s . , M . M u s . ( U B C ) J. G E E , B . M u s . , M . A . ( U B C ) P . H O Y , B . M u s . (U.Texas), M . M u s . , D . M u s . ( U S C ) L . K A A R I O , B . M u s . ( U B C ) , M . M u s . (W.Wash.), Capilano College offers the first two years o f a Bachelor of M u s i c Degree. A l l courses in the Bachelor o f M u s i c Transfer Program are transferable to School o f M u s i c at the University o f British C o l u m b i a and to the Faculty o f M u s i c at the University o f Victoria. Students wishing to transfer to the Faculty o f Arts at U B C , S F U , or U V i c with a major in M u s i c should take M U S . 100/101, 112/ 113, 120/121 in their first year, and M U S . 200/201, 212/ 213, 220/221 in their second year. O u r students have also received transfer credit to the following universities: Alberta, Calgary, Dalhousie, Regina, Brandon, Y o r k , Guelph, Western Ontario, M c G i l l and Western W a s h i n g ton. Coordinator L . K A S P R Z A K , M . F . A (Wroclaw) D. M C C O Y , M.Mus. (UBC) Admission Requirements G. M C N A B , B.Mus., M.Mus. ( U B C ) Entering students should have a basic knowledge o f K. M O O R E , B.Mus. (UBC) music rudiments (approximately at the level o f Toronto T. N I C K E L S , B . A . (U.C.L.A.) Conservatory Rudiments II). A . N O D W E L L , B.Mus. (UBC), M.Mus. (UVic) D. O K E , B.Mus. (UBC) D. O V E R G A A R D , B.Mus., M.Mus. (UBC), D . M . A . (USC) G. R A M S B O T T O M S. R E B A N E , D . M . A . (Kentucky) Students entering on piano must be at a grade 10 level (Toronto Conservatory). Piano students w h o require a qualifying term may enrol in other courses. Students entering in composition must have a working knowledge o f diatonic harmony. P. S C H R E I B E R , B . M u s . ( U B C ) Students entering in voice or instruments other than piano D . S P A R K E S , B . M u s . E d . (Toronto) must have a performance level acceptable to the faculty. D. V A N D E R E Y K , B.Mus., M.Mus. ( U B C ) E . W E A N , M . M u s . (New England) Admissions Procedure S. W O O D Y A R D , B . M u s . (Victoria) A l l applicants must: General Information 1. C o m p l y with the general admission requirements o f Capilano C o l l e g e offers four music programs: a two-year Capilano College and the specific admission require- D i p l o m a o f M u s i c from the Bachelor o f M u s i c Transfer ments for A c a d e m i c Studies. Program, a two-year D i p l o m a in Jazz Studies, a fouryear Degree in Jazz Studies and a four-year Degree in 2. Participate in a private interview with the music coordinator or a program instructor. M u s i c Therapy. F o r information on Jazz Studies see section on Jazz Studies. F o r information on the M u s i c 3. Write a theory placement test and take an ear test. Therapy Program see section on M u s i c Therapy. Academic — Music Transfer 155 4. Play an audition on their major instrument: this w i l l E N S M 100 C h o i r - Ensemble I 1.0 consist o f two contrasting pieces, technique, and sight or E N S M 110 Orchestra I reading. M U S . 100 Theory I 3.0 M U S . 112 E a r Training and 1.5 5. W r i t e the Capilano C o l l e g e E D T (English Diagnostic Test) or the Provincial L P I . If y o u received an " A " grade i n E n g l i s h 12 or Literature 12, then y o u are not required to write either. (Creative W r i t i n g 12 does not count as E n g l i s h 12.) Please try to have your E D T or L P I mark before your audition and interview. Sight S i n g i n g I * M U S . 114 Class Piano I 1.0 M U S . 120 History I 3.0 1 M U S . 122 or Arts elective 2 1.0-3.0 2& P M I . l x x Level 14.5-17.5 6. Submit an A p p l i c a t i o n for A d m i s s i o n to Admissions, SECOND TERM Office o f the Registrar, together with official copies of E N G L 103 or 104 or 105 or 106 3.0 transcripts o f all secondary and post-secondary E N S M 150 1.0 education. Early application is advised. or E N S M 160 Orchestra II 7. A l l interviews, auditions and placement tests are held in M a y and August. Auditions w i l l involve the presentation of two contrasting prepared pieces and a demonstration o f the student's C h o i r - EnsembleII M U S . 101 Theory II M U S . 113 Ear Training and Sight S i n g i n g II 1.5 * M U S . 115 Class Piano II 1.0 M U S . 121 History II 1 M U S . 123 or A r t s elective instrumental technique and sightreading ability. 3.0 3.0 2 PMI.2xx Level 1.0-3.0 2J) 14.5-17.5 Registration THIRD T E R M 1. Returning students may pre-register during the month E N G L 200 or 2 1 2 E N S M 200 of A p r i l . 3 3.0 C h o i r - Ensemble m 1.0 or E N S M 210 Orchestra H I 2. N e w students demonstrating sufficient instrumental and/or theoretical accomplishment i n their placement M U S . 200 Theory III M U S . 212 Ear Training and Sight S i n g i n g III 1.5 * M U S . 214 Class Piano III 1.0 M U S . 220 History III test may preregister during M a y and early August to ensure their enrolment. 3. Students may register during in-person registration. 1 M U S . 122 or Arts elective 3.0 3.0 2 2M P M I . 3xx L e v e l Graduation Requirements 1.0-3.0 14.5-17.5 The complete program requirements must be successfully FOURTH TERM completed to receive an Associate i n Arts and Science E N G L 201 or 2 1 3 Diploma. E N S M 250 or 260 Orchestra I V Special Fees and Expenses M U S . 201 Theory I V M U S . 213 Ear Training and Sight S i n g i n g I V 1.5 announced at least one month prior to the beginning o f * M U S . 215 Class Piano I V 1.0 the F a l l term. M U S . 221 History I V M a x i m u m tuition for full-time study for the 1996/97 M U S . 123 or A r t s elective academic year was $1,225 per semester. Included i n this P M I . 4xx Level The fees for Private M u s i c Instruction ( P M I . ) w i l l be 1 m a x i m u m tuition are the costs o f all required Private M u s i c Instruction. 3 3.0 C h o i r - Ensemble I V 1.0 3.0 3.0 2 1.0-3.0 2£ 14.5-17.5 1 N o r m a l l y 58 credits are required to graduate w i t h a D i p l o m a i n M u s i c . However, V o i c e Concentrators are Program Content Credits FIRST T E R M E N G L 100 Academic 156 required to have 61 credits, the three additional credits from the required course L y r i c D i c t i o n M U S . 122 and Composition — Music Transfer 3.0 M U S . 123. This course is offered i n alternating years. 2 T a k i n g Arts electives is strongly recommended. However, a student must have a m i n i m u m G P A of 3.5 in * P S Y C 100 Intro to Psychology or P S Y C 101 Theories o f Behavior 10 order to be allowed into these electives. 3 17.5 In order to graduate, Arts electives may be substituted THIRD T E R M B I O L 104 for E N G L 200, 201 and 212, 213. Other courses w h i c h may be taken as electives with approval o f the Coordinator are Class Strings M U S . 110, M e t h o d o l o g y M U S . 360, 361. 3.0 1.0 M U S . 200 3.0 M U S . 212 111; Class Brass M U S . 218; Class Percussion M U S . 219; Class W o o d w i n d s M U S . 210, 211; and K o d a l y / O r f f Human Biology I E N S M 200 or 210 Theory III Ear Training and Sight Singing in 1.5 * M U S . 214 Class Piano III 1.0 M U S . 220 History III 3.0 Developmental Psychology 10 *If the student is a piano major, then he/she may take a P M I . 3xx L e v e l secondary P M I instead o f Class Piano. P S Y C 204 2.0 17.5 **Students may graduate with 58 or more credits depending on w h i c h options they choose. Guitar students must take Guitar Ensemble through Extension Services. Such students may graduate with 58 credits. BACHELOR OF MUSIC THERAPY COURSE STREAM Students planning on going into the Bachelor o f M u s i c Therapy program in the third year w i l l take the following FOURTH TERM E N S M 250 or 260 1.0 M U S . 201 Theory I V 3.0 M U S . 213 Ear Training and * M U S . 215 Class Piano I V 1.0 M U S . 221 History I V 3.0 Psychology o f A g i n g 10 Sight Singing I V 1.5 P M I . 4xx Level P S Y C 205 2.0 14.5 program for the first two years. * If the student is a Piano Major, then he/she may take a Students completing this program w i l l receive a D i p l o m a in M u s i c secondary P M I instead o f Class Piano. They may then choose to transfer to university ** It is recommended that students take P S Y C 101 to finish a Bachelor o f M u s i c or apply to the Bachelor of during the summer between second and third term. M u s i c Therapy program at Capilano C o l l e g e . For a description o f the M u s i c Therapy Program, see the M u s i c Therapy Program section o f the Calendar. FIRST T E R M E N G L 100 Composition 3.0 E N S M 100 or 110 1.0 Course Descriptions M U S . 100 M U S . 112 Theory I Ear Training and 3.0 For Jazz and Jazz Ensemble ( E N S J ) course descriptions, see the Jazz Studies section o f this Calendar. Sight Singing I 1.5 * M U S . 114 Class Piano I 1.0 M U S . 120 History I 3.0 PMI. l x x Level 1Q 14.5 SECOND TERM E N G L 103, 104, 105, or 106 3.0 E N S M 150 or 160 1.0 Theory II - Harmony 2.0 M U S . 102 Repetoire A n a l y s i s 1.0 M U S . 113 Ear Training and M U S . 101 Sight Singing II 1.5 * M U S . 115 Class Piano II 1.0 M U S . 121 History II 3.0 P M I . 2xx Level 2.0 ENSM 100 Choir I (1.0) (4,0,0) (F) A n exploration o f choral music from the Renaissance to the present. Emphasis w i l l be placed on ensemble, tuning, tone quality, musical phrasing, balance, diction and professional presentation. A varied concert program w i l l be learned and several performances w i l l be given each semester. A n audition is required. ENSM 110 Orchestra I (1.0) (4,0.0) (F) Rehearsal and performance o f concert repertoire. Prospective students must contact the M u s i c Department at least one week before classes commence to arrange for an Academic — Music Transfer 157 audition. Persons w i n n i n g a position through audition MUS. 111 w i l l be a l l o w e d to register. Class Strings II ENSM 150 (1.0) (4,0,0) (S) Choir II (2,0,0) (S) (1.5) (3.0,0) (F) A continuation o f M U S . 110. MUS. 112 Ear Training and Sight Singing I A continuation o f E N S M 100. ENSM 160 (1.5) (1.0) (4,0,0) (S) Corequisite: M U S . 100 Study o f the aural recognition o f intervals, chords, and Orchestra II harmonic movement. The student w i l l learn to: tran- A continuation o f E N S M 110. ENSM 200 scribe melodies and rhythms; sight sing using Solfege (1.0) (4,0,0) (F) Choir III and scale degrees; read rhythms. MUS. 113 ENSM 210 (1.0) (4,0,0) (F) Orchestra III (1.0) (4,0,0) (S) Choir IV Prerequisite: M U S . 112 Corequisite: M U S . 101 MUS. 114 (1) (2,2,0) (F) Class Piano I This course is designed for students who wish to learn A continuation o f E N S M 200. ENSM 260 (3.0,0) (S) A continuation o f M U S . 112. A continuation o f E N S M 160. ENSM 250 (1.5) Ear Training and Sight Singing II A continuation o f E N S M 150. basic keyboard skills. Reading, improvisation, transposi(1.0) (4,0,0) (S) tion and harmonization are the skills developed during this course and the three subsequent levels. Theoretical Orchestra IV concepts are applied at the keyboard and include diatonic A continuation o f E N S M 210. MUS. 100 triads and sevenths o f the major key, all major, m i n o r and (3) (4.0.0) (F) Theory I Corequisite: modal tetrachords. A weekly lab evaluates material covered i n class. Students practise on the department's pianos. M U S . 112 A study o f music from c. 1600 to 1800 with an emphasis on diatonic harmony up to simple modulation. T h e student w i l l learn control o f chord progression and voice leading. MUS. 101 Theory II (3) Prerequisite: M U S . 100 Corequisite: M U S . 113 (4.0.0) (S) (D MUS. 115 (2,2.0) (S) Class Piano II Prerequisite: M U S . 114 A continuation o f M U S . 114. In addition, keyboard sequences, arpeggios and major scales are introduced along with easy original repertoire. MUS. 120 History I (3) (3,0.*) (F) Continued study o f diatonic harmony, to include treat- The study o f music as an acoustical and structural ment o f a l l diatonic triads and sevenths, principles o f phenomenon. T o survey the major monuments o f w o r l d voice leading, and techniques o f contrapuntal expansion. music history i n relation to the function o f music i n a A n a l y s i s o f works i n binary, ternary, sonata and rondo given culture. The a i m w i l l be to introduce music as a forms. global concept, drawing on musics from Eastern and Western musical traditions. MUS. 110 (1.5) Class Strings I A practical study o f the v i o l i n family. Academic — Music Transfer 158 (2,0,0) (F) * Some concert attendance w i l l be required. M U S . 121 History II (3) (3.0,*) (S) M U S . 212 A study o f music history o f the M e d i e v a l and Renais- Prerequisite: M U S . 113 Corequisite: M U S . 200 sance periods. A continuation o f M U S . 113. Prerequisite: (1.5) (3,0.0) (F) (1.5) (3,0,0) (S) Ear Training & Sight Singing III M U S . 120 * Some concert attendance w i l l be required. M U S . 122 (1.5) M U S . 213 (2,0,0) Ear Training a n d Sight Singing IV A n exploration o f the application o f the principles o f Prerequisite: M U S . 212 Corequisite: M U S . 201 diction for singers i n English and German through the A continuation o f M U S . 212. Lyric Diction: English a n d G e r m a n m e d i u m o f the International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA). (D M U S . 214 M U S . 123 (1.5) (2,0,0) Lyric Diction: French a n d Italian (2,2.0) (F) Class Piano III F o r students who have taken M U S . 115 or have had A n exploration o f the application o f the principles of previous keyboard experience. Students are introduced to diction for singers i n French and Italian through the common idiomatic accompaniment patterns as well as m e d i u m o f the International Phonetic Alphabet ( I P A ) . four-part chorale studies, keyboard sequences, minor scales and chords. Basic keyboard techniques are M U S . 200 (3) (4.0,0) (F) emphasized including relaxation, touch, rotation, weight T h e o r y III transfer and their musical application i n simple repertoire. Prerequisite: M U S . 101 Corequisite: M U S . 212 The lab hour is utilized to develop sight reading skills at the keyboard. A study o f advanced tonal procedures: review of non- M U S . 215 chord tones, mixture, seventh chords, applied V and V I I , Class Piano IV (D (2.2,0) (S) diatonic modulation, seventh chords with added dissonance. A detailed study o f compound ternary and rondo A continuation of M U S . 214 with increased complexity forms. Investigation o f the fugue. of repertoire and technique. M U S . 201 (3) (4.0.0) (S) M U S . 218 (1.5) T h e o r y IV Prerequisite: M U S . 200 Corequisite: M U S . 213 A practical study o f the brass family. A study o f chromaticism: the phrygian II, augmented Class Percussion M U S . 219 sixth chords, other chromatic chords, chromatic voiceleading techniques, chromaticism in larger contexts. A detailed study o f sonata, sonata-rondo, and variation forms. M U S . 210 (2,2,0) (F) Class Brass (1.5) (2.0.0) (F) (1.5) (2,2,0) (S) A practical study o f the percussion family. M U S . 220 History III (3,0,*) (F) (3) Prerequisite: M U S . 120 and M U S . 121 Class W o o d w i n d s I A survey o f music history o f the Baroque period and A practical study o f the w o o d w i n d family. Classical period. * Some concert attendance w i l l be required. M U S . 211 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Class W o o d w i n d s II A continuation o f M U S . 210. Academic Music Transfer 159 M U S . 221 History IV (3) (3,0,*) (S) Prerequisite: M U S . 220 PMI. (Various Numbers) (1) Secondary Private Music Instruction (.5,0,0) (F,S) This course consists o f 14 half-hour lessons on the student's secondary instrument. A survey o f music history o f the Romantic period and the 20th century. Note: T o enrol i n any P M I . courses students must get * Some concert attendance w i l l be required. permission from the Coordinator o f their M u s i c Program. M U S . 222 (3) (3,0,*) (F) Music History: Renaissance - Early Classical Prerequisite: M U S . 120, A study o f the music o f the Renaissance period through the early classical period. This course services the Jazz Studies Program. * Some concert attendance w i l l be required. M U S . 223 (3) (3,0,*) (S) Music History: 18th, 19th, a n d 20th Century Prerequisite: M U S . 222 A study o f the music o f the late Classical Period to the present day. This course services the Jazz Studies Program. * Some concert attendance w i l l be required. M U S . 360 (1.5) M e t h o d Studies in Music Education: Kodaly M e t h o d o l o g y (1.5,0,0) (F) This w i l l provide a knowledge o f K o d a l y methodology and the skills necessary to use this teaching method i n a classroom. M U S . 361 (1.5) M e t h o d Studies in Music Education: Orff M e t h o d o l o g y (1.5,0,0) (S) This w i l l provide a knowledge o f O r f f methodology and the skills necessary to use this teaching method in a classroom. PMI. (Various Numbers) (2) (1,0,0) (F,S) Concentration Private Music Instruction A course designed to permit the student to pursue i n depth study o f his/her o w n music specialty. The course consists o l 14 one-hour lessons. Academic 160 — Music Transfer Philosophy that we can no longer be victimized by the rhetoric o f Instructional Faculty everyday life, and can develop our o w n arguments with M . B A T T E R S B Y , B . A . ( N Y U ) , Ph.D. ( U B C ) clarity and confidence. J. D I X O N , B . A . , P h . D . ( U B C ) S. G A R D N E R , B . A . ( M c G I L L ) , B . P h i l . (Oxford), P h . D . (Concordia) S. P E R S K Y , B . A . , M . A . ( U B C ) PHIL 120 (3) Understanding Scientific Reasoning (4,0,0) This course w i l l provide students with an introduction to Y . W E S T W E L L - R O P E R , M . A . , Ed.D. (UBC), D.Phil (Oxford) modern formal logic, and then utilize that s k i l l to explore such topics as the nature and testing o f scientific theories in both the natural and social sciences, the difference University Transfer Credit between causal relations and correlations, and rational A l l Philosophy courses offered at Capilano College have transfer credit at every university in British C o l u m b i a . C r i t i c a l thinking is taught in all philosophy courses. decision making. Attention w i l l be given to both the problem-solving and philosophical aspects o f scientific reasoning. There are no prerequisites, but the course is a natural continuation o f P H I L 110, and w i l l appeal especially to Course Descriptions PHIL 101 (3) Introductory Philosophy: Ethics (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) A n introduction to ethical theory and applied ethics. The course addresses questions such as: What are the origins of conscience? W h y should I be moral? A r e there students who have an interest in either the natural or social sciences. PHIL 140 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Philosophy and Law: Introduction to Canadian Law objective moral values? What is good for human beings? A general introduction to the fundamental principles o f What makes right actions right and wrong actions wrong? jurisprudence and to the basic legal institutions o f Issues o f applied ethics that may be addressed include Canada. In addition to addressing such philosophical capital punishment, abortion, assisted-suicide, c i v i l questions as, "What is a law?", "Is it the case that law is disobedience and environmental responsibility. The what legislatures say it is, or what courts say it is?", and emphasis o f the course varies among instructors. " H o w do you tell whether a law is good or bad?", the course also examines the history and theory o f Canadian PHIL 102 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Introductory Philosophy: Knowledge and Reality A n introduction to the part of philosophy concerned with questions about the ultimate nature o f the world we live in and our knowledge o f it (traditionally called Metaphysics and Epistemology). The issues discussed include: the existence and nature o f G o d , the place o f human beings i n the universe, the nature o f reality, human nature, human knowledge and skepticism, freedom and determinism, the relationship between m i n d and body, and others. The emphasis o f the course varies from instructor to instructor. PHIL 110 Critical Thinking (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) A n introduction to the basic rules o f clear and rational law (including the development o f the Canadian Constitution), the system o f Canadian courts, and the roles o f members o f the legal profession. A s w e l l , consideration is given to the nature o f legal reasoning, the doctrine o f precedent, and principles o f statutory interpretation, and an introduction is provided to the fields o f contract, torts, administrative and family law, as w e l l as to the process o f law reform. PHIL 141 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Philosophy and Law: Introduction to the Criminal Justice System A n introduction to an analysis o f theories o f punishment and rehabilitation through an examination o f the operational practices of the Canadian criminal justice system. In the course o f studying the structure and operations o f thought. T h e student w i l l be taught through extensive the criminal justice system in its various stages from the examples h o w to detect false reasoning, illegitimate moment o f initial police involvement to the correctional appeals to emotions, inconsistencies and contradictions. disposition of convicted offenders, the course focuses on The goal is to develop our logical awareness to the point both theoretical and practical decision making. Theoretical concerns include: individual c i v i l liberties i n relation Academic — Philosophy 161 to police procedures, notions o f evidence, sentencing and clothing morally wrong? D o we have an obligation theory, and current correctional strategies. to the natural environment such as an obligation to The above two courses are modelled on S F U ' s C r i m i n o l - preserve species? What are our obligations to future ogy 131/135 and are intended for both philosophy generations? What is sustainable development? A r e students and those interested in pursuing further studies environmental problems fundamentally personal or are in the field o f criminology. they fundamentally political and social? Open to anyone in first or second year; no prerequisites. PHIL 200 (3) (4,0,0) (F) PHIL 209 Political Philosophy (4,0,0) (3) Biomedical Ethics This course provides an analysis o f the rationale for political institutions and action. Some o f the questions This course w i l l focus on ethical issues that arise i n the considered: A r e we really obliged to obey the law? C a n health sciences, especially i n medicine, but also i n the law be justifiably represented as authoritative, or is biology, psychology and other professions. A m o n g the the real foundation o f l a w in the policeman's holster? topics to be considered are abortion and reproductive Does the state have good reason for i n v o l v i n g itself in technology; euthanasia; paternalism and autonomy; compulsory programs o f education? This is not a study resource allocation; involuntary hospitalization and in the history o f political thought and every effort is made behaviour control. A l l moral problems w i l l be examined to view problems from a contemporary perspective. from both an applied and theoretical point o f v i e w . Open Open to anyone i n first or second year; no prerequisites. to anyone in first or second year; no prerequisites. PHIL 201 PHIL 210 (3) Metaphysics and Epistemology I (3) (4.0,0) (S) Political Philosophy (4,0,0) (F) the ideologies o f liberalism, c o m m u n i s m , meritocracy, Prerequisite: A t least one Philosophy course or permission o f the instructor. conservatism, democratic socialism and anarchism. A n introduction to some o f the traditional problems o f Topics include liberty and equality, power and authority, metaphysics and epistemology. Some o f the questions private rights and the public good, sovereignty, democ- considered are: Does G o d exist? What is the relationship racy and justice. between faith and reason? Does free w i l l exist? Is sense This course examines the values and assumptions behind perception a reliable source o f knowledge? W h a t is the PHIL 207 (3) (4.0,0) nature o f causality? Is materialism true? W h a t is the Business Ethics nature o f mind? What is the relationship between m i n d This course is an introduction to contemporary philo- and body? What is the scientific method? W h i l e this is sophical thinking on ethical issues in business. It covers not a course i n the history o f philosophy, it w i l l cover such topics as the power o f multinational corporations, many o f the classical attempts to answer these questions. bribery and extortion i n international business, the ethics conflict between employee loyalty and moral independ- PHIL 211 (3) Metaphysics a n d Epistemology II ence, and the responsibilities o f corporations and business Prerequisite: of hiring practices, advertising and behaviour control, the professionals. T h e course w i l l also introduce students to a number o f classical ethical theories and theories o f economic justice. Open to anyone i n first or second year; no prerequisites. PHIL 208 (3) (4,0,0) This course deals with ethical and political issues arising from the relationship between humans and their natural surroundings. T y p i c a l questions that w i l l be addressed are: D o animals have rights? Is using animals for food 162 — Philosophy P H I L 210 or permission o f instructor A continuation o f P H I L 210. PHIL 220 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Philosophy in Literature Environmental Ethics Academic (4,0,0) (S) A n examination o f the lively relationship between philosophy and literature. Philosophical theories w i l l be approached and discussed v i a literary work w h i c h either embodies the theories or grounds them i n human experience. Textual sources w i l l range from the classical Greek plays to last month's best seller. Open to anyone i n first or second year; no prerequisites. PHIL 221 (3) (4.0,0) Existentialism in Literature T h i s course is, in spirit, a continuation o f P H I L 220, but it is centred on the Philosophy o f Existentialism in literature. There w i l l be an introductory set o f lectures on Existentialism as a philosophy. Textual sources w i l l range from Dostoyevsky's "Notes from the Underground" to Sartre's "Nausea." O p e n to anyone in first or second year; no prerequisites. PHIL 222 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Philosophy of Culture (Aesthetics) A n introduction to philosophical analysis o f cultural works. T h e course w i l l provide an exploration o f aesthetic theory, examining both traditional works o f art as w e l l as contemporary cultural productions in a variety of media. One o f the objectives o f the course is to make sense o f what a society is "saying" through its popular culture. Open to anyone i n first or second year; no prerequisites. PHIL 240 (3) (4,0,0) Philosophy a n d G e n d e r Relations Founded on a wide range o f philosophical readings, this course w i l l focus on questions such as: What is the good life and its relation to intimacy and family? What is the good person? A r e there different models for different genders? W h a t constitutes a good relationship? H o w important are mutuality, respect, affection, sex, and interdependence to such a relationship? What counts as equality/equity? H o w should the answers to such questions influence our views on such social issues as affirmative action, prostitution and pornography? T h e impact o f " W o m e n ' s Liberation" and the " M e n ' s M o v e m e n t " w i l l be discussed, as w i l l varying suggestions for overcoming the "gender gap". T h i s course should be o f interest to men and women equally; indeed, it is assumed that the quality o f class discussion w i l l be a function o f the degree to w h i c h the perspectives o f both genders are w e l l represented. Open to anyone in first or second year; no prerequisites. Academic — Philosophy 163 Physics Instructional Faculty M . F R E E M A N , B . S c . (Hons.) ( U B C ) , M . S c . ( C a l . Students interested in honours physics should consult physics instructors. Tech.), P h . D . ( U B C ) S. G R E E N S P O O N , B . S c . (Hons.) ( M c G i l l ) , M . S c , P h . D . (Waterloo), Convenor o f Physics J. K O L A C , M . S c . (Charles U , Prague) Course Descriptions PHYS104 (3) (4,2,0) (S) Principles of Physics F . P A R V A Z , B . S c . (Tehran), M . S . D i p . (San Diego State) Laboratory Supervisors a n d Technician D . C I A R N I E L L O , B . S c . ( U B C ) , Laboratory Supervisor, Technician V . M O E N , B . S c . ( S F U ) , Laboratory Supervisor B . S I M S O N , B . S c . ( S F U ) , Laboratory Supervisor Research Associate M . C R E N S H A W , B . S c . (Kansas State), B . A . (Evergreen), Physics Holography Research L a b Prerequisite: N o physics prerequisite. M a t h 12 or B M T H 046 or M A T H 103 or M A T H 105 is required. P H Y S 104 is accepted at B C I T as equivalent to Physics 12. This course serves as an introduction to physics for students with little or no background in the subject. It is intended for students not taking further studies i n science. Topics include mechanics, energy, ray optics and heat. This course is not offered every year. PHYS 108 Basic Physics Prerequisite: (4.5) (6,2,0) (F) M a t h 12 or B M T H 046 or M A T H 103 or General Information M A T H 105. M A T H 110 is a pre- or corequisite. A l l first year physics courses except P H Y S 116 include a The course covers the material o f P H Y S 110, together weekly two hour laboratory period. The cost o f the labs with those topics from high school physics needed by a is included in the course tuition fee except for lab manu- student with no previous background i n physics. A als. student passing this course should be able to enter P H Y S 111 i n the Spring. University Transfer Credit A l l physics courses at Capilano carry transfer credit. F o r details please refer to the B . C . Transfer G u i d e or Capilano College Transfer G u i d e available at the A d v i s ing Centre or C o l l e g e reception. PHYS 110 General Physics I (3) (4,2,0) (F) Prerequisite: Physics 11 or B P H Y 042 or P H Y S 104; M A T H 110 is a pre- or corequisite. Students with Physics 12 planning to transfer to UBC should take PHYS 114 or PHYS 114 and 115, depending on their plans. Consult the UBC calendar for specific program requirements. A survey o f mechanics covering vectors, statics, kinematics, dynamics, energy, momentum, rotation, gravitation, vibration, and special relativity. Physics General Physics II FIRST Y E A R Prerequisite: P H Y S 114/115 (preferred) or 110/111 or 108/111 or 114; and M A T H 110. M A T H 111 is a pre- or C H E M 110/111 or 108/109 corequisite. A n y student w h o has attempted the course M A T H 110/111 within the last year w i l l not be allowed to register without E N G L (six credits) the instructor's permission. Non-science Elective or G e o l o g y , B i o l o g y or Computing Electricity and magnetism, waves, p h y s i c a l optics, sound, and atomic and nuclear physics. PHYS 111 Science (six credits) SECOND Y E A R P H Y S 200/201, 210/211, 218/222 M A T H 200, 230, 2 3 1 , 2 3 5 Elective (six credits) Academic 164 — Physics (3) (4.2,0) (S) A t least a " C - " i n either P H Y S 110 or 108 PHYS 114 (3) (4,2,0) (F,S) PHYS 201 (3) Fundamental Physics I Electricity a n d M a g n e t i s m Prerequisite: Prerequisite: Physics 12 or B P H Y 042 or P H Y S 104; (4,0,0) (S) A t least a " C - " i n P H Y S 200; M A T H 230. M A T H 110 is a pre- or corequisite. M A T H 231 is a pre- or corequisite. A survey o f mechanics covering vectors, kinematics, M A T H 235 is a recommended corequisite. P H Y S 211 dynamics, energy, momentum, rotation, gravitation, must be taken concurrently. vibration, waves and special relativity. The study o f electric and magnetic fields; D C and A C This course, together with P H Y S 115, is particularly circuits; L R , R C , L R C circuits; resonance; M a x w e l l ' s suitable for students going into the physical sciences or Equations, Fourier A n a l y s i s and electromagnetic waves. engineering. PHYS 210 PHYS 115 (3) (4,2,0) (S) F u n d a m e n t a l Physics II Prerequisite: Prerequisite: A t least a " C - " in P H Y S 114 or with the permission o f the instructor. M A T H 111 is a pre- or corequisite. Electricity and magnetism, A C circuits, physical optics, (D (0,3.0) (F) Physics Laboratory I A s for P H Y S 218 w h i c h must be taken concurrently. A weekly three hour lab in mathematical methods, thermodynamics, electrical measurements and mechanics. sound, and atomic and nuclear physics. PHYS 211 PHYS 116 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Fundamental Physics III Note: T h i s course is intended for Engineering Program students transferring to U B C . Prerequisite: (D (0,3,0) (S) Physics Laboratory II Prerequisite: A s for P H Y S 201, w h i c h must be taken concurrently. A weekly three hour lab in electricity and magnetism, A t least a " C - " in P H Y S 114, or with electronics and mechanics. permission o f instructor, P H Y S 108 or 110; M A T H 111 PHYS 218 and P H Y S 115 are corequisites. Statics o f particles, equilibrium o f rigid bodies, rigid (3) (4,0,0) (F) M e t h o d s of M e a s u r e m e n t a n d Analysis body statics and internal forces. Extension o f principles Prerequisite: from P H Y S 114 and application to practical problems. and M A T H 111. M A T H 200 and 230 must be taken Thermometry, thermal properties o f matter, heat. G e o - concurrently, i f not already completed. P H Y S 210 must metrical optics. be taken concurrently. The Physics Department offers a full second-year university transfer program in physics. Students planning to continue in a physics program at university may wish to consult with a physics instructor. Use of computer software to solve numerical problems in physics, including simulations. A p p l i c a t i o n s include drag forces and the driven, damped oscillator. PHYS 222 PHYS 200 Thermal Physics a n d W a v e s Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (F) A t least a " C - " in either P H Y S 111 or 115; and M A T H 111. M A T H 230 must be taken concurrently, if not already completed. A t least a C - in either P H Y S 111 or 115; (3) (4,0,0) (S) Mechanics Prerequisite: A t least a C - i n P H Y S 218; and M A T H 200, 230. M A T H 235 is a recommended corequisite. Newtonian mechanics o f particles and rigid bodies. Topics include rocket propulsion, collisions, central Temperature, heat, the zeroth, first, second and third laws forces, rotating frames o f reference, and rotation o f rigid of thermodynamics, kinetic theory, and a mathematical bodies. treatment o f waves. This course, together with P H Y S 201, 210, 211, 218 and 222 is required for students majoring in physics. Academic — Physics 165 Political Studies Instructional Faculty E . M . L A V A L L E , B . C o m m . , L L . B . ( U B C ) , M . A . (Duke) POL. 102 Comparative G o v e r n m e n t (3) (4.0,0) (F.S) P. M f f i R , B . A . ( S F U ) , M . A . (Toronto) Throughout history, humans have organized themselves C . S Y L V E S T E R , B . A . (Gonzaga), M . A . (Notre Dame) into many different types o f political systems, from tribes D . W I N C H E S T E R , B . A . (Concordia), M . A . ( U B C ) to empires, city-states to nation-states. T h i s course w i l l introduce students to the wide range o f political systems University Transfer Credit that exist throughout the world today, be it A s i a , A f r i c a , Europe, or the Americas. B y studying these systems i n A l l P o l i t i c a l Studies courses at Capilano are transferable detail, students w i l l gain an appreciation for h o w political to S F U , U B C and U V i c . behaviour varies throughout the world, as w e l l as develop a better critical understanding o f their o w n . General Introduction W o m e n and men preparing for careers i n journalism, law, business management, international banking, market research, arbitration, urban and regional planning, the POL. 104 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Canadian G o v e r n m e n t This course introduces students to the formal institutional foreign service, consulting, labour negotiations, interna- structures and processes o f Canadian government and tional development, and education enrol in Political politics. Topics to be explored w i l l include political Studies courses. So too those hoping to bring about culture, the constitution, federalism, Quebec sovereignty change i n their o w n communities i n such areas as health, and Aboriginal self-government and an examination o f education and the environment, choosing politics as their the institutions o f government, political parties and their vocation. That's because Political Studies is concerned impact on the quality o f Canada's parliamentary demo- with power - what it is and who gets it, how it is used and cracy. Regardless o f career goals or preferred disciplines, how it is abused. A l o n g with understanding power and all students w i l l benefit from an exposure to the politics the role it plays locally, nationally, and internationally, of their immediate society. Political Studies students graduate with excellent research skills and effective oral and written communication skills - all very m u c h i n demand in the new global economy. Course Descriptions P O L 100 (3) (4.0.0) (F.S) introduction to Politics a n d G o v e r n m e n t (Formerly POL. 103) This survey course is recommended for both Political Studies majors and those students interested i n discovering how politics affects their lives and how they in turn can affect politics. Students are introduced to the basic concepts o f Political Theory, Comparative Politics, International Relations, Public Policy, and Canadian Government, offering Political Studies majors a firm POL. 110 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) A n Introduction to W e s t e r n Political T h o u g h t - Plato t o H o b b e s (Formerly POL. 100) A n introductory examination o f the tradition o f Western political thought from the Ancient Greeks to the emergence o f the Nation State. The significance and contributions o f Plato, Aristotle, the medieval thinkers, and M a c h i a v e l l i concerning fundamental questions about the relationship between the individual and the state w i l l be explored from an historical and philosophical perspective. This course is o f particular relevance to those in the Humanities - literature, drama, fine arts, philosophy - as the shared themes provide for an interesting comprehensive analysis o f Western C i v i l i z a t i o n . foundation in the methods, approaches and issues inherent i n the discipline. Non-majors w i l l find the course w i l l POL. 111 help them understand the local, national, and interna- Contemporary Ideologies (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) tional political events w h i c h shape their world. (Formerly POL. 101) (This course is required for all students planning to This course explores the historical development o f the transfer into the Political Science Department at S F U . ) commonly recognized ideologies o f the modern era: Liberalism, Conservatism, A n a r c h i s m , M a r x i s m , Fascism and Social Democracy. These underlying political ideas w i l l provide the backdrop for a critical discussion o f the more recent ideological formations such as F e m i n i s m , Academic 166 — Political Studies E c o l o g i s m , Nationalism and the different movements The centre of the political process o f any society is the associated with religious fundamentalism. Students w i l l creation o f public policy. H o w governments arrive at and be encouraged to think critically about the role and select policies from the various competing demands impact o f political ideas in the world i n which they live. POL placed upon them - i n the areas o f health, education, environment, economic development, immigration etc. - 201 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) International Relations is the focus o f this course. Students are introduced to the basic concepts and theories associated with the making o f G l o b a l warming, the debt crisis, child poverty, milita- public policy as w e l l as an analysis o f the processes by rism, human rights violations, c i v i l , regional and global w h i c h policy is defined, addressed and implemented. war - what are the causes o f these international problems and what are the possible solutions? Students who take this course w i l l examine these and many other international issues in detail. In short, International Relations is for those students wishing to explore events - and the explanations for those events - in a global system so m u c h i n flux since the collapse o f the C o l d W a r and the rise o f the global division o f labour. POL. 206 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Scope a n d M e t h o d s o f Political Analysis T h i s course introduces the student to the variety o f approaches and tools available to those studying politics. Students w i l l become familiar with the nature o f and debates inherent to contemporary political studies, as w e l l as the strengths and weaknesses o f the various methods employed by students o f politics. B y developing their POL. 202 (3) (4,0.0) (F) G o v e r n m e n t a n d Politics o f British C o l u m b i a own research project, students w i l l struggle first-hand with the issues central to all types o f social science This course w i l l provide an understanding of the political research: selecting from alternative models o f explana- institutions, dynamics, and socio-economic processes o f tion, attempting to isolate variables, and dealing with the provincial, regional, and municipal governments i n questions o f cause and effect to name but a few. Students B . C . Specifically, it is intended to familiarize students may have the opportunity to develop and work on a with the activities o f political parties and government proto-type political studies journal as w e l l . Not offered institutions in B . C . It is designed to develop students' in 1997/98. skills i n critically analyzing the B . C . political process from several methodological perspectives within the discipline o f political studies. Not offered in 1997/98. POL. 203 International Organizations (3) (4.0.0) (F.S) M o r e and more these days, International Organizations are no longer content with p l a y i n g bit parts on the world stage. B e it the U N in Cambodia, N A T O in the former Y u g o s l a v i a , Greenpeace on the high seas, or the i n creased power o f regional organizations like the European U n i o n , A S E A N , a n d the O A S , International Organizations seem to be challenging the sovereignty o f nationstates at every turn. B u t are International Organizations really taking on a life o f their own? A r e new forms o f organization at the international level (such as International L a w or economic regimes) really taking root? O r is the state-centric system destined to continue as it has since 1648? These are some o f the issues explored in this, the complementary course to International Relations. POL. 204 C a n a d i a n Public Policy Prerequisites: (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) POL. 207 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Selected Issues in C o n t e m p o r a r y Social a n d Political T h e o r y Prerequisite: P O L . 111. T h i s course transfers as a 300 level course at S F U . Current themes and controversies in contemporary social and political thought is the subject of this course. Topics w i l l shift from term to term to reflect either important issues or individual theorist's contributions to contemporary society. Areas of interest might include, for example, the role o f the state in late capitalist societies, the significance o f the Frankfurt School, the contradictions of the welfare state, the current debates in democratic theory, the role and place o f "new" social movements i n contemporary society, an examination o f the meaning o f liberty in complex societies, the renewal o f nationalism, the place o f religion (Islamic fundamentalism), the persistence o f violence i n c i v i l society. Alternatively, or in conjunction with these themes, students w i l l develop a thorough analysis o f a particular theorist: for example, Arendt, Gramsci, Marcuse, Foucault, Habermas, Offe, W i l l i a m s , G o r z and M e l u c c i to name a few. P O L . 100 or 104 recommended. Academic — Political Studies 167 Psychology PSYC 201 Instructional Faculty (3) (4.0.0) (F.S) G r o u p Dynamics P. A V E R Y , B . A . ( Y o r k ) , M . E d . (Toronto) E . B O Y L E , B . A . ( U . Chicago) M . A . , P h . D . ( U B C ) Prerequisite: E . E C C L E S , B . A . (Hons.), M . A . ( U B C ) A study of the behaviour o f people i n primary and R . H A W R Y L K O , B . A . (Hunter), M . A . ( S F U ) secondary groups. This course provides an intellectual M . M A C N E I L L , B . A . (Alta.), M . A . (Manitoba), P h . D . and experiential approach to small group theory and (Calgary) P S Y C 100 and 101 allows the student to practice constructive interpersonal S. M O E , B . A . , M . A . ( M e x i c o ) skills in a supportive, small group setting. R . S N O W , B . A . (Hons.) M . A . , P h . D . ( S F U ) J. W A T E R S , B . A . M . A . , P h . D . ( S F U ) C. Z A S K O W , B . A . (UBC), M . A . , Ph.D. (SFU) PSYC 203 History of Psychology Prerequisite: University Transfer Credit (3) (4,0.0) (S) P S Y C 100; P S Y C 101 recommended. This course w i l l examine the development o f psychologi- A l l Psychology courses at Capilano transfer to S F U , cal thought to gain a critical understanding o f contempo- U B C , and U V i c . rary psychology. Issues w i l l range from the mind-body problem, and the nature o f science, to an analysis o f historical and contemporary schools in psychology. Course Descriptions (3) PSYC 100 (4,0.0) (F.S) Introduction t o Psychology PSYC 204 Developmental Psychology A course designed to introduce the beginning psychology Prerequisite: student to some o f the major concepts and approaches necessary to an understanding o f human behaviour from a psychological perspective. Learning, development, and other selected issues are included. PSYC 101 Theories o f Behaviour Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) P S Y C 100; P S Y C 101 recommended. A study o f the c h i l d ' s development from infancy to adolescence, including the development o f social behaviour, personality, language and cognitive processes. observations. PSYC 205 (3) of the basic areas o f psychology (when combined with P S Y C 100), before proceeding to an in-depth study o f particular areas. Course content w i l l cover research methodology and the remainder o f introductory topics not addressed i n P S Y C 100. Prerequisite: P S Y C 100 and 101 A course dealing with the psychological development o f the individual from early adulthood to death, with emphasis on intellectual and personality changes, and the social context of aging. A s w e l l as being exposed to basic research i n the area, students w i l l be encouraged to (3) (4.0,0) (F.S) Social Psychology P S Y C 100; P S Y C 101 is recommended. develop an empathic understanding o f the aging process through such means as community projects. (3) PSYC 206 A study o f the dynamics and effects o f social influences Adolescent Psychology on individual human behaviour. T h e course looks at such Prerequisite: topics as attitudes and attitude changes, social beliefs, roles, conformity, group processes, prejudice, interpersonal attraction and psychological effects o f the physical environment. (4,0,0) (F) The Psychology of A g i n g A course for those students who desire a complete survey Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (S) Students w i l l be encouraged to do research projects and P S Y C 100 PSYC 200 (3) (4.0,0) (F) P S Y C 100 and 101 This course examines the biological, cognitive and social transitions o f adolescence and h o w they affect such developmental areas as identity, autonomy, intimacy, sexuality and achievement. A s w e l l as being exposed to basic research i n the area, students w i l l be encouraged to explore their o w n identity development through group research. Academic 168 — Psychology PSYC 212 (3) Research M e t h o d s in Psychology (4,0,0) (F) PSYC 225 Biopsychology of Behaviour (3) (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: P S Y C 100 and 101 Prerequisite: P S C H 100 and 101 A course for students w h o intend to major i n one o f the This course w i l l expand on material introduced i n social sciences; psychology majors should take this introductory psychology dealing with the biological basis course and its sequel, P S Y C 213. T h i s course w i l l of behaviour. Students w i l l examine functions o f the introduce the student to current research methods in nervous system, as w e l l as studying brain anatomy and major areas o f psychology. Students should understand brain chemistry i n relation to both normal and pathologi- the principles o f research methodology, and be able to cal behaviour. A s w e l l , students w i l l discuss mind-body evaluate, design and conduct research in psychology. issues and develop an understanding o f broader ethical and other issues i n neuroscience. PSYC 213 (3) Statistical M e t h o d s in Psychology (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: M a t h 12 or equivalent, P S Y C 100, 101 and 212. PSYC 230 Cognitive Psychology (3) (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: P S Y C 100; P S Y C 101 recommended. A continuation o f P S Y C 212 for psychology majors. This course w i l l address many o f the issues relating to the T h i s course deals with descriptive and inferential statis- thinking processes. Research into memory, problem tics as applied in psychology. These w i l l be considered as solving, creativity and artificial intelligence w i l l be they are used in psychological research. examined, as well as experiments i n social cognition and cognition across the lifespan. PSYC 220 T h e o r y of Personality (3) (4,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: P S Y C 100; P S Y C 101 recommended. W M S T 110 W o m e n a n d Psychology (3) (4,0,0) T h i s course w i l l examine theories o f personality from A psychological examination o f the construction o f Freud and Feminist revisions to Humanistic approaches, gender-roles, their development i n c h i l d h o o d and mainte- including an Eastern tradition. Included w i l l be a consid- nance in adulthood. The course w i l l examine current eration o f the historical/cultural development o f the research in biology, socialization, personality and mental theory, what the theory says about the development, health and w i l l include issues o f current interest such as structure and dynamics o f personality and examples o f sexuality, aging, violence against women, gender rela- empirical research. tions and the workplace. PSYC 222 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) A b n o r m a l Psychology Prerequisite: P S Y C 100 and 101. A study o f the various models and perspectives for v i e w i n g patterns and treatment of abnormal behaviour. Included w i l l be an examination o f the research as to h o w the medical model, behaviouristic school, humanistic school, psychoanalytic school, cognitive school and biological school view normal and abnormal behaviour. This course w i l l also focus on the historical and contemporary approaches to treatment. Academic — Psychology 169 Sociology major approaches to understanding society (structural Instructional Faculty functionalism, conflict theory and symbolic G . B A I L E Y , B . S c . ( M c G i l l ) , P h . D . (Oregon) N . G A Y L E , B . A . ( Y o r k ) , M . A . (Western), P h . D . ( U B C ) interactionism) and employ these approaches to analyze events of current interest. C . H A T H A W A Y , B . A . ( S . U . N . Y . ) , M . A . (Wash U . , B o t h S O C . 100 and 101 are required for students intend- Mo.) ing to major in Sociology at S F U or U B C . R. I S O L A , B . A . , M . A . ( S F U ) A . R O J A S , M . A . , Ph.D. (York) M . S P E I E R , B . A . ( N e w Y o r k ) , M . A . , P h . D . (Berkeley) SOC. 200 Canadian Society Prerequisite: General Information (3) (4.0,0) (F) S O C . 100 or 101, or permission o f the instructor. A l l courses i n S o c i o l o g y are geared to help the student comprehend personal and global events i n a relevant and meaningful way. S o c i o l o g y should thus help the student A n introduction to the study o f Canadian society and culture, including an analysis o f the major Canadian in his/her endeavour to cope with our increasingly institutions studied on a national basis, with special complex society. A major i n S o c i o l o g y leads to work i n emphasis on the dynamics o f change i n a multicultural, the following areas: social work, teaching, probation complex society. work, criminology, industrial sociology, communications, media, government research and related areas. SOC. 201 British Columbia Society Prerequisite: University Transfer Credit (3) (4,0,0) (S) S O C . 100 or 101, or permission o f the instructor. A l l S o c i o l o g y courses at Capilano transfer to S F U , U B C and U V i c . A l l 200 level courses w i l l provide the Simon Fraser transfer student with assigned credit toward second-year courses. The U B C transfer student w i l l be provided with unassigned credit towards a major. (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) The course systematically covers major topics and issues of concern to anyone w h o wishes to begin to understand and come to terms with the modern w o r l d i n a personally and sociologically relevant way. The basic theme o f the course is that we are, to a greater extent than generally imagined, produced, structured and run by the "social machine". T h i s "social machine" comprises institutions such as the family, religion, class system, mass media, education as w e l l as rules, customs, laws, etc. T h i s course looks at h o w we are influenced by this "machine" and i n turn h o w we react to that influence. B o t h S O C . 100 and 101 are required for students intending to major i n S o c i o l o g y at S F U or U B C . SOC. 101 (3) Concepts of Theories of Society (4,0,0) (F.S) W i t h current social conditions i n m i n d , this course analyses the general development o f sociological thought in the 19th and 20th centuries. W e w i l l look at three Academic 170 — Sociology Canadian society with special emphasis on B r i t i s h C o l u m b i a . Close attention w i l l be given to social movements and economics, historical and cultural developments which have shaped British C o l u m b i a from a frontier into a modern industrial society. Course Descriptions SOC. 100 Social Structures A continued sociological approach to the dynamics of SOC. 210 Current Social Issues Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (S) S O C . 100 or 101, or permission o f the instructor. A study o f social concerns and cultural problems c o m mon to current conditions i n the 20th century i n our society and i n global perspectives. Classical sociological concepts w i l l be used to examine current social issues i n a global framework o f political, economic, and cultural analysis, such as mass violence, the economics o f the arms race, the sociology o f war and peace, social inequality, etc. Current issues are placed i n the context o f the student's daily world, as it is happening now — this should develop the student's sociological imagination. This course can be taken by itself, or as a complement to Sociology of the T h i r d W o r l d . SOC. 211 (3) Sociology of the Third World Prerequisite: instructor. (4,0,0) (F) S O C . 100 or 101, or permission o f the A study o f the major theories o f development and under development, social and cultural responses to under development, and the inter-relationship o f social institutions i n and between the "developed" and "under developed" societies. T h i s course w i l l provide students with an opportunity to better understand the social, economic and political causes and effects o f under development. B o t h sociological and "non-sociological" literature on the meaning and effects o f "under development" w i l l be considered. T h i s course may be taken by itself or as a complement to S O C . 210, Current S o c i a l Issues. SOC. 222 Sociology of the Arts Prerequisite: instructor. (3) (4,0,0) (F) S O C . 100 or 101, or permission o f the A sociological study o f art and artists i n western and nonwestern societies. The course w i l l relate the various art forms (painting, music, literature) to the social context in w h i c h they exist and to their social production; hence it w i l l develop an understanding o f the inter-relationships between ideas (aesthetic codes), social institutions, cultural politics and political economy. T h i s course is particularly recommended as a complement to S O C . 101 or 223. SOC. 223 Media and Society Prerequisite: instructor. (3) (4,0,0) (S) S O C . 100 or 101, or permission o f the A n intensive study o f the relationship between a society's communication systems as media and its technological, economic and political base, its ideology, its behaviour patterns and its cultural life. This w i l l encompass current forms o f television, radio, magazines, a l l forms o f advertisement, news production and the movies. This course is particularly recommended as a complement to S O C . 222 or 100. Academic — Sociology 171 Spanish Instructional Faculty Course Descriptions C. F U R S T E N W A L D , B . A . ( U . N . A . M . Mexico), M . B . A . SPAN 100 ( C i t y U n i v . , Seattle) (3) (4,1.75,0) (F) Beginning Spanish I E. PEREIRA, B.A. (UBC), M . A .(UBC) This is a beginners' course w h i c h offers a comprehensive Instructional Associates introduction to the Spanish language. Emphasis is placed J. G A C I N A , B . A . ( S F U ) , P . D . P . ( S F U ) K . M A T T S O N , B . A . ( S F U ) , Licenciatura (Barcelona) on grammar and the development o f the students' speaking, understanding and writing skills. SPAN 101 (3) (4,1.75,0) (S) General Information Beginning Spanish II S P A N 100/101 courses consist o f four hours o f instruc- Prerequisite: S P A N 100, Grade 10 Spanish completed, tion per week, including one hour o f Hispanic culture or permission from instructor. studies. There is also one and 3/4 hours o f conversational/ lab practice. S P A N 200/201 courses include four hours of instruction per week, plus one and 3/4 hours o f conversational practice. Native speakers o f Spanish are n o t allowed i n first year A continuation o f the work o f S P A N 100, this course should be taken, whenever possible, i n the term following S P A N 100. Recommended also for those who are considering taking S P A N 200 at a later date and need review work. courses. If they wish to take second year courses i n Spanish, they must consult with the Spanish instructor first. University rules governing such students differ within departments, but the Language Department has correspondence dealing with matters relevant to credit transfer and point o f entry. In order to avoid any misunderstandings, such students are invited to discuss these problems with the Department prior to enrolment. SPAN 130 A p p l i e d Business Spanish (3,1.0) (1.5) This course introduces students to the basic structures o f Spanish with an emphasis on Hispanic culture, on developing conversational skills with a focus on special vocabulary: eg. business, tourism, etc. C o l l e g e C r e d i t Only. Students with a competence i n the language beyond the level of the course i n w h i c h they are registered w i l l be SPAN 200 required to withdraw. Students who are not sure o f their Intermediate Spanish I (3) (4,1.75,0) (F) language level should contact an instructor. Prerequisite: University Transfer Credit A l l Spanish courses at Capilano transfer to S F U , U B C S P A N 100/101, Grade 12 Spanish c o m - pleted with a m i n i m u m o f a " C " grade, or permission o f instructor. A review of Spanish grammar with special emphasis on and U V i c . problematic areas normally encountered by students o f SFU: the language. T h e reading, writing and oral fluency o f Students who w i s h to proceed to S F U and to pursue further courses i n Spanish are reminded o f the the student w i l l be improved through translations, present equivalency standards. Elective credit w i l l be compositions and extensive conversation practice. A l s o , given at S F U for a l l C a p i l a n o College Spanish courses. the student w i l l be introduced to Hispanic Literature. Exemption from and placement i n higher courses are Classes w i l l be conducted i n the Spanish language only. determined by the results o f a placement test or other assessment procedure. A s a result o f the placement test, SPAN 201 area credit may be granted w h i c h w o u l d count toward a Intermediate Spanish II major i n Spanish. Courses w h i c h do not qualify toward a major w i l l be awarded elective credit only. UBC: A t U B C , present equivalent standards equate (3) (4,1.75,0) (S) Prerequisite: S P A N 200 with a m i n i m u m o f a " C " grade, or permission from the instructor. A continuation o f the work o f S P A N 200. T h i s course S P A N 100 and 101 w i t h S P A N 100; S P A N 200 and 201 should be taken, wherever possible, i n the term f o l l o w i n g with S P A N 200. T h e student who plans to major i n S P A N 200. Spanish may enter U B C ' s Spanish program when the student completes the C a p i l a n o courses. Academic — Spanish 172 Instructional Faculty J. P L A C Z E K , B.A. (Windsor), M . A . Linguistics j[UBC), Ph.D. South East Asian Studies (UBC) P. P L A C Z E K , Language Associate, B.A. (Thammasat University) Bangkok Students with a competence in the language beyond the level of the course in which they are registered will be required to withdraw. Students who are not sure of their language level should contact an instructor. Course Descriptions THA1100 Beginning Thai I (3) (4,1.75,0) (F) This course provides instruction and practice both in beginning language and in the cultural background which is so necessary to place the examples into meaningful contexts. The international phonetic alphabet is used to avoid confusion of sounds. The basic vocabulary and sentence structures are covered, and social routines and common idioms are stressed as well. Students have time to practise all structures introduced, and are encouraged to initiate their own conversations. At the end of the course students have better than survivallevel fluency, and use only Thai for basic classroom routines. They are ready to learn to write. THA1101 Beginnning Thai II Prerequisite: (3) (4,1.75,0) (S) T H A I 100 or equivalent This course reviews the basic material of T H A I 100, and introduces the script. Students learn how to write the words they already know. More complex structures are introduced, along with more idioms, common expressions, and exceptions to basic rules. Classes are conducted almost all in Thai, except for occasional detailed historical or technical explanations. At the end of the course students know how to respond to typical situations in Thai and to elicit basic everyday information from Thais. They can read simple Thai passages and the basic road signs and are at a level of reading and writing equivalent to Thai grade four students. Note: Other Thai courses are listed under the Asia Pacific Management Co-operative Program section in this Calendar. Theatre Contact: V i s u a l and Performing Arts Office at 984-4911 dramaturgy, as w e l l as performance. Y o u w i l l be able to transfer to a university and pursue a further, more Instructional Faculty specialized degree i n theatre, or apply your theatre skills to further study in Arts, or Education faculties. Graduates S.. A T K I N S , B A . , M . F . A . ( S F U ) are also eligible to apply for a place i n the Advanced P. C O N N E L L , B . A . , M . A . , P h D ( U B C ) Certificate in Theatre. T. F O R R E S T , B . F . A . ( B . C . O . U . ) D. M O O R E , B.F.A. (UVic), M . A . ( W W U ) B. M U R D O C H , B.F.A. (UVic), M . F . A . ( U B C ) D. PRICE, B.A. (SFU) M.F.A. (UBC) S. S W A N , D i p l o m a A r t s A d m i n (Confederation College) a) Part-time Non-diploma Part-time students are encouraged to register i n the courses and to participate i n department productions. Y o u w i l l be included i n the same classes as full-time program students. Seats available to part-time students General Information are listed i n the timetable. T h e goal is to foster literacy i n The Theatre Department offers a program o f studies the arts o f theatre. leading to a two-year d i p l o m a and a one-year A d v a n c e d Certificate. Theatre has openings i n some o f its courses b) Diploma Studies for part-time study. Some seats are available for part-time study leading to Facilities comprehensive training i n theatre as full time students, the Theatre D i p l o m a . The goal is to provide the same Performance classes are held i n the Arbutus Studio adjacent to the B i r c h Performance Theatre. Opening i n but spread over a longer period o f time. University Transfer Credit 1997, the new performance theatre w i l l house the Department's season o f plays. T h e theatre is complete with a D i p l o m a courses transfer to universities and university- rehearsal hall, changing rooms, costume and technical colleges. Please consult the B . C . Transfer G u i d e for the workshops, a fly-tower and a 361 seat house. most recent transfer information. Students may have to audition for placement i n other programs and should Students i n Theatre enjoy exceptional access to these facilities and assist i n running the theatres i n a hands-on, consult with the specific institution regarding these requirements. educational experience. Productions Admission and Registration Procedures E a c h year C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e Theatre produces a season o f A l l students must meet the general admission require- full length plays i n the B i r c h Theatre and shorter plays in ments o f Capilano College. Prospective full-time and the Arbutus Studio. Auditions are open to A d v a n c e d part-time D i p l o m a students must contact the V i s u a l and Certificate and D i p l o m a Program students, the college Performing Arts Office by the end o f A p r i l to set up an community, alumni, and members o f the community at audition/interview time (late applicants w i l l be consid- large. These productions also offer students practical ered i f space permits). experience i n technical theatre and design, as w e l l as 1. Students must submit the results o f the Language exposure to guest directors and designers. A l l participants Proficiency Index Test or the C o l l e g e ' s E n g l i s h register i n the theatre practicum, or another theatre course. Diagnostic Test (See calendar under E n g l i s h ) to register i n an English course. A . DIPLOMA IN THEATRE Mission and Goals T h e Theatre D i p l o m a Program provides a two-year, comprehensive training i n theatre. Its goal is to provide experience i n a broad range o f theatre specialties, in a preprofessional program. U p o n graduation you w i l l have successfully participated i n acting and other studio courses, technical theatre, theatre history, criticism and Academic — Theatre 174 2. Students applying for first year w i l l be asked to submit a letter outlining why they want to study theatre and an interim transcript showing h i g h school courses and marks. A letter o f recommendation from a theatre professional or instructor is an optional submission. 3. Students wishing to enter the second year directly, and those applying to study for the Diploma part-time, w i l l be assessed for admittance on an i n d i v i d u a l basis, subject to the availability o f places i n the program and successful audition/interview. 4. Part-time, non-diploma students may register i n any Theatre Department course with seats available during T H T R 255 Elective A c a d e m i c registration. Diploma Program Curriculum Theatre Production S k i l l s II and one Non-theatre elective (students are advised to take electives w h i c h fulfil transfer requirements) o r : T H T R 210 A c t i n g for F i l m and T e l e v i s i o n 60 credits, including E n g l i s h 100 and one other English course T H T R 240 Performing A r t s Management I T H T R 241 Performing Arts Management II FIRST T E R M T H T R 299 Practicum II (may be taken as elective or to replace T H T R 200, 201, 250, 251, 252, T H T R 100 Acting I T H T R 120 Elements o f Theatre I T H T R 150 Intro to Production & Design I Composition Special Fees Elective Non-theatre elective (students are advised to take electives w h i c h fulfil transfer requirements) o r : Technical Theatre Theati classes are assessed a lab fee o f $30 each. T H T R 199 Practicum I (may be taken as elective or to replace T H T R 101 or 151. A p p r o v a l required) E N G L 100 SECOND TERM T H T R 101 A c t i n g II T H T R 121 Elements o f Theatre II T H T R 151 Intro to Production & D e s i g n II ENGL Contemporary Literature Elective Non-theatre elective (students are advised to take electives w h i c h fulfil transfer 253, 254, 255. A p p r o v a l required) Some courses are non-base funded. Consult the timetable. Course Descriptions THTR 100 (3) (2,4,0) (F) Acting I A n introduction to a methodical approach to script, and the basic skills necessary to perform and stage contemporary monologues and scenes. THTR 101 Acting I (3) (2,4,0) (S) requirements) o r : T H T R 199 Practicum I (may be taken as elective or to replace T H T R 101 or 151. A p p r o v a l required) THIRD A N D FOURTH TERMS Develops skills i n non-scripted theatre. Areas o f exploration include improvisation, mask work, and playmaking. Y o u w i l l perform self-created work i n class. THTR120 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Elements o f Theatre I M i n i m u m 27 credits i n Theatre plus 3 credits of electives. R e q u i r e d courses: T H T R 200 A c t i n g III T H T R 201 A c t i n g TV T H T R 205 Bodywork T H T R 207 V o c a l Communication T H T R 220 Conceptual Approaches to Theatre I T H T R 221 Conceptual Approaches to Theatre II T H T R 260 A n a l y s i s for Directing and Design plus t w o courses selected from: T H T R 250 Senior Production Responsibilities I T H T R 251 Senior Production Responsibilities II T H T R 252 A d v a n c e d L i g h t i n g & Sound I T H T R 253 A d v a n c e d L i g h t i n g & Sound II T H T R 254 Theatre Production S k i l l s I A n introduction to play study and the history o f theatre from its ritual beginnings to the 17th Century. Lectures, seminars, play reading, and theatre attendance are part of this course. T H T R 120 is normally taken w i t h E N G L 100 i n a combined seminar. ™ T R 121 Elements of Theatre II (3) (4,0,0) (S) Plays in the context o f the history o f theatre from the Restoration to the beginnings o f modern theatre w i l l be studied i n lectures, seminars, play reading and theatre attendance. Academic — Theatre 175 THTR 150 (3) (2.4,0) (F) THTR 210 (3) (2.4,0)(F & or S) Production & Design I A c t i n g for Film a n d Television A n introduction to the basic elements o f technical theatre prerequisite: T H T R 100 or permission o f instructor and theatre design. T o p i c s include stage management, A n introduction to the acting techniques and technical scenic carpentry, theatre lighting, and scenic design. skills needed to perform for the camera. THTR151 (3) (2,4,0) (S) THTR 220 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Production & Design II Conceptual A p p r o a c h e s I A continuation o f T H T R 150. The topics include proper- prerequisite: T H T R 120 or 121 or a 100 level E n g l i s h ties, sound, costumes, scenic painting, and makeup. course THTR 199 (1-6) (F & S) A n in-depth study o f a specific theatre topic w h i c h w i l l be set each term by the Department. T h i s is a thematic, Practicum I rather than a chronological, approach to the study o f prerequisite: approval o f the Department plays and theatre. B o t h theoretical and practical class Students receive credit for intensive practical work on methods may be used. productions. The nature o f the work and the amount o f (3) (4,0,0) (S) credit w i l l be determined by the Department in consulta- THTR 221 tion w i t h the student. A l l w h o are cast i n a department Conceptual A p p r o a c h e s II production or who are assigned to a production crew prerequisite: T H T R 120 or 121 or a 100 level E n g l i s h must register in this course. course THTR 200 (3) (2,4,0) (F) The same format as T H T R 220. T h i s course studies a different topic. A c t i n g III prerequisite: T H T R 100 or permission o f the instructor THTR 240 A n intermediate scene study course focusing on text Performing Arts M a n a g e m e n t I analysis and the performance o f scenes and very short A n introduction to the skills and organizational systems one-act plays. (3) (2,0,4) (F) necessary to run a performing arts organization. A major emphasis w i l l be company and season marketing strate- THTR 201 (3) (2,4.0) (S) A c t i n g IV prerequisite: T H T R 200 or permission o f instructor THTR 241 A scene study course w h i c h explores style i n classical Performing Arts M a n a g e m e n t II and contemporary plays . Scene study w i l l emphasize A continuation o f T H T R 240 with an emphasis on acting styles in groups o f representative plays. Topics, Resource Development. (3) (2,0,4) (S) set by the Department, w i l l vary each term. THTR 250 THTR 205 (3) (2,4.0) (F) Bodywork (3) (2,4,0) (F) Senior Production Responsibilities I Introduction to the duties o f senior production personnel A course i n movement techniques. Y o u w i l l focus on including the Technical Director, Stage Manager, Stage body awareness, alignment, strength, flexibility and Carpenter, Head Electrician, Head Wardrobe, H e a d coordination. Sound, Head o f Flys, and H e a d o f Properties. THTR 207 (3) (2,4,0) (S) THTR 251 (3) (2,4,0) Vocal C o m m u n i c a t i o n I Senior Production Responsibilities II A course i n voice production and oral interpretation A continuation o f T H T R 250. designed to free the speaking voice and develop expressive communication. Academic — Theatre 176 (S) THTR 252 (3) (2,4,0) A d v a n c e d Lighting & S o u n d I (F) Teaches the advanced skills required to design and run the lighting and sound for both simple and complex shows. THTR 253 (3) (2,4,0) A d v a n c e d Lighting & S o u n d II run their o w n theatre company, o r to find employment i n the performing arts. Studies are concentrated i n the evenings and on weekends, permitting students the option to work part-time w h i l e they study. T h e certificate can be completed i n two semesters or students may opt for part-time studies. (S) Admission Full-Time Studies A continuation o f T H T R 252. Students w i l l be selected on the basis o f resume and at least one letter o f recommendation from a theatre profes- THTR 254 T h e a t r e Production Skills I (3) (2,4,0) (F) sional or instructor, an interview and: • Performance: audition Teaches the preproduction skills necessary to mount a • Directing: a written proposal outlining objectives theatrical production. Specific skills include Scenic • • Production: a written proposal outlining objectives Design: a portfolio Carpentry, Scenic Painting, Costuming, and Properties (acquisition and building). T H T R 255 T h e a t r e Production Skills II (3) (2,4,0) (S) Contact the V i s u a l and Performing A r t s Office by the end of A p r i l (for September) or the end o f October (for January) to arrange audition/interview. A continuation o f T H T R 254. Admission Part-Time Studies THTR 299 Practicum I (1-6) (F & S) The A d v a n c e d Certificate Program can be taken i n modules w h i c h permit part-time study. T h i s is particu- prerequisite: T H T R 199 and approval o f the Department Students receive credit for intensive practical work on productions. The nature o f the work and the amount o f credit w i l l be determined by the Department in consultation w i t h the student. A l l who are cast i n a department larly suitable for theatre educators who w i s h to upgrade their skills. T h i s option is subject to the availability o f places in the program and successful audition/interview. Enquiries and applications are accepted at any time though the year. production or who are assigned to a production crew, and w h o have 3 credits i n T H T R 199, must register i n this Advanced Certificate in Theatre Curriculum course. B. THE ADVANCED CERTIFICATE IN THEATRE (ACT) This unique certificate program bridges theatre training and professional theatre practice. A C T is open to students who have completed the 30 Theatre credits. ( Y o u may have to take additional courses i f there are educational deficiencies i n your area of specialty.) Y o u w i l l concentrate on one o f four specialized areas: performance, production, scenography or direction. Y o u w i l l receive instruction through 1) a series o f master classes conducted by faculty and guest artists. C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e Theatre D i p l o m a , equivalent studies at 2) involvement i n the B i r c h Theatre season. another institution, or who have equivalent experience. 3) the Advanced Certificate i n Theatre season, w h i c h is T h e purpose o f A C T is to create a small theatre company chosen and mounted by A C T students. comprised entirely o f students and to give each o f them practical experience i n a specialized area o f theatre. In a FIRST T E R M mentored situation w i t h faculty and renowned guest artists, a m i x o f performance, directing, production and design specialists w i l l be chosen to produce theatre in the studio and the 361-seat B i r c h Theatre. T H T R 360 Directed Studies i n Theatre I 15 credits SECOND TERM U p o n completion of the A d v a n c e d Certificate in Theatre, students w i l l have T H T R 361 Directed Studies Theatre II 15 credits the skills necessary either to create their own work and Academic — Theatre 177 Master Classes PART-TIME OPTION T H T R 362-a Production I 5 credits Prestigious guest artist and directors w i l l offer master T H T R 362-b Master Class I 5 credits classes each term. Some places i n the classes are re- T H T R 362-c Production II 5 credits served for part-time, evening and weekend study. T H T R 363-a Production III 5 credits T H T R 363-b Master Class II 5 credits On-Stage, Workshops in Design and Technical T H T R 363-c Production I V 5 credits Theatre Experienced designers and technical theatre practioners Course Descriptions THTR 360 Directed Studies in Theatre I w i l l offer classes i n production and design. (15) (4,0,32) (S.F) Behind the Scenes, the "observe-to-learn" series This intensive course is designed to meet the needs o f A select number o f places w i l l be reserved for those who students w i t h several years o f post-secondary training/ want to observe, first-hand, professional directors and experience i n theatre. Y o u w i l l concentrate on one o f the designers at work. Special privileges such as observation four specialized areas o f performance, production, of rehearsals, design and production meetings, and scenography or direction. Y o u w i l l receive instruction question-and-answer sessions with the director/designer through 1) a series o f master classes conducted by faculty are granted to these special interest students. and guest artists, 2) involvement i n the B i r c h Theatre Behind the Scenes opportunities, such as observation o f season, and 3) the A d v a n c e d Certificate i n Theatre ( A C T ) instructional pedagogy, can be arranged on an individual season, w h i c h is chosen and mounted by A C T students. basis. THTR 361 D. THE ADVANCED CERTIFICATE IN (15) (4,0,32) (S.F) Other Directed Studies in Theatre II PERFORMING ARTS MANAGEMENT A continuation o f T H T R 360; or This program w i l l offer courses i n the organizational and part-time modules o f these courses ( T H T R 362 a, b, c and business skills needed to run a performing arts organiza- T H T R 363 a, b, c) tion. Please contact the V i s u a l and Performing A r t s office for up-to-date information about courses and the Fees Fees for 1997-98 are estimated at $1,250 per term for full-time study or $500 per part-time course. C. ADVANCED OPTION COURSES In addition to the unique Advanced Certificate in Theatre, the Theatre Department w i l l make the regular studies and expertise o f the Department available to the community by offering workshops and master classes i n short, accessible formats. T h e inaugural offerings are listed below. T h e community w i l l be informed o f additional offerings by brochures and local advertising. A l l enquiries should be directed to the V i s u a l and Performing Arts Office at 984-4911. Academic — Theatre 178 scheduled launch o f this program. W o m e n ' s Instructional Faculty M . D E N I K E , B . A . (Hons.) ( S F U ) , M . A . ( U B C ) , P h . D . (York) Studies W M S T 106 (3) C o n t e m p o r a r y A m e r i c a n W o m e n Writers (4,0.0) A discussion-oriented literature course intended to broaden and intensify the student's awareness o f and W o m e n ' s Studies offerings are taught by faculty who have experience in the field relevant to their courses. Those faculty not appointed i n the W o m e n ' s Studies Department itself are seconded from disciplines relevant to W o m e n ' s Studies. o f the 1980s. A l t h o u g h the focus w i l l be on plays, stories, University Transfer Credit those biographical matters and issues o f critical status appreciation o f contemporary and recent important American women authors. There w i l l be brief consideration o f 19th and early 20th century works, but the focus w i l l be on works published since W W I I , including works novels, and poetry, there w i l l be some exploration o f Students w h o w i s h to pursue further courses in W o m e n ' s Studies are advised that U B C , S F U and U V i c have that mark the rise o f w o m e n ' s writings from a sub-genre to full status acceptance by the best critics today. programs i n W o m e n ' s Studies. W M S T 110 W o m e n a n d Psychology Course Descriptions (3) (4,0,0) A psychological examination o f the construction o f W M S T 100 (3) Introduction t o W o m e n ' s Studies (4,0,0) gender-roles, their development in childhood and maintenance in adulthood. The course w i l l examine current This course w i l l examine the status and role of women in research in biology, socialization, personality and mental Canadian Society. Topics w i l l include the impact o f health, and w i l l include issues o f current interest such as W o m e n ' s Studies on traditional academic disciplines; the sexuality, aging, violence against women, gender rela- nature and origins o f patriarchy; women and work; tions and the workplace. reproductive rights, pornography and sexuality. It w i l l investigate issues o f power centering around race, class W M S T 113 and sexuality. It w i l l trace the development of sex role W o m e n in Politics divisions i n the family and other social institutions; T h i s introductory course i n W o m e n ' s Studies w i l l examine women's political participation in the political process from a multidisciplinary feminist format. The course w i l l focus on Canadian examples and encourage students to examine the difficulties that affect women i n particular. Students w i l l be encouraged to research possible solutions to increasing women's political participation. examine the influence o f education, media and art on the development o f w o m e n ' s social and legal status. W M S T 102 Political E c o n o m y of W o m e n (3) (4.0,0) T h e history and nature o f women's work i n Canada from pre-industrial time until today. T o p i c s w i l l include domestic labour and capitalism, women's work in the home and exclusion o f household production in the calculation o f gross national product, public policy and national accounts, inequality i n the labour market. Issues of current interest w i l l be discussed, including the comparable worth movement, the impact o f free trade on w o m e n ' s employment and economic analysis o f the childcare industry. (3) W M S T 122 W o m e n in A n t h r o p o l o g y (3) (4,0.0) (4,0,0) The anthropological perspective applied to women i n different cultures o f the world: their role i n economic, political, religious, kinship, and expressive systems; exploration o f the work o f women anthropologists and the effect o f theory on understanding women; women's experience in cultures o f the world. W M S T 104 (3) W o m e n Writers a n d Feminist Criticism (4,0,0) A discussion-oriented course intended to broaden the students' awareness of, and appreciation for, literature produced by women writers with emphasis on contemporary writers. It w i l l also introduce students to current feminist literary theory. W M S T 130 (3) (4,0.0) W o m e n a n d Art This course surveys the history o f women's involvement in Western art. The position o f women i n the visual arts and art history w i l l be discussed and the methodological issues involved in reclaiming the history o f women artists Academic — Women's Studies 179 explored. W o m e n ' s role as producers o f art w i l l be considered from A n t i q u i t y to the 20th century and the social, cultural and economic background o f each period w i l l be examined in order to understand the conditions under w h i c h these artists worked. The image o f women in art w i l l be looked at to reveal the underlying ideologies of each period. Students taking W M S T 130 w i l l not receive duplicate credit for A H I S 109. W M S T 140 (3) (4,0,0) W o m e n , Science and T e c h n o l o g y This course w i l l provide an insight into the role that science and technology play in our society and their impact on the lives o f women. Topics w i l l include an historical review o f the role women have played in the development o f science, investigation o f the reasons for the traditionally l o w participation o f women i n scientific and technical fields, the relationship between science and gender and discussion sessions on a variety o f topics such as ecofeminism, ecology and the environment, reproductive technologies, sociobiology, information technology. W M S T 210 (3) (4,0,0) Feminism and Philosophy This course w i l l conduct a historical survey o f the roles that women or 'femininity' play within various traditional philosphical writings. It w i l l explore the ideas of contemporary feminist theory and philosophy, examining the topics, criticisms and questions w h i c h men and women have addressed about traditional western thought. W M S T 220 (3) (4.0,0) W o m e n and the Past: A n Historical Survey A survey o f the lives o f women from the Ancient W o r l d to 20th century N o r t h A m e r i c a . A n uncovering o f women's participation in and contribution to the making of history. Private lives as well as public and political activities w i l l be studied. The course w i l l examine reasons behind the extent to w h i c h women have been "hidden from history." Academic 180 — Women's Studies I* Career/Vocational Capilano College offers a variety of employment-related programs. The programs offered are under constant review to make certain that students are taught the latest techniques and skills. Advisory committees, composed of employers, review and recommend content of all programs. Programs Practicums For some practicums students may be required to have a Criminal Records check. Co-operative Education Admission is limited and applicants are considered on the criteria established for each program area. In general, Grade 12 standing is required for students applying to two year Diploma Programs, although others may be admitted on the basis of their experience and abilities. Due to the timely nature of these programs, requirements and profiles may change. Co-operative education integrates a period of classroom learning with periods of work experience to enable students to apply their knowledge and skills. Students alternate periods of full-time study with periods of paid employment in business, industry, government and nonprofit organizations. The goal is to develop high calibre graduates, better able to assume productive jobs. Contact the individual departments for current information Student Course and Work Load Employment opportunities for graduates are excellent; however, the College does not guarantee jobs for its graduates. Full-time programs are designed so that successful completion is a full-time task. Students are advised not to undertake other activities that require large time commitments, including employment, while undertaking full-time studies. Transfer to and from Other Institutions Course Description Code There is agreement among all public B.C. Colleges to accept each other's credits upon transfer, if applicable, to a program given at the admitting college, and given suitable equivalency. Capilano College reserves the right to review individual course credits. On the right hand side of each course number there is a series of code letters and numbers, for example: Transfer credits are granted to students ON ADMISSION for acceptable work done at other institutions. Students wishing transfer credit should present suitable documentation to the Registrar's office for consideration. Full information on transfer of specific courses is available from the Admissions Advisor, Counsellors and in the Division. The number in brackets following the course number — (3.0) indicates the number of credits for the course. Graduate Employment Admission Dates Enrolment in some programs may be curtailed due to space and equipment limitations. Consequently, those students who contemplate entrance are encouraged to apply early. Applicants may be required to have an interview with the Program Coordinator prior to admission. INF0143 (3.0) (3,0,1) (S) Research M e t h o d s in the Electronic A g e The second set of parentheses includes the lecture, lab and other hours for the course. For INFO 143 there will be three lecture hours, no lab hours, and one other hour per week. The third set of parentheses indicates the term in which the class is usually offered. Example: F-Fall, S-Spring, SU-Summer. INFO 143 is offered in the Spring term. Please check the timetable to confirm the term offered as this may change after the calendar is printed. The nominal length of a term is 16 weeks. Please see the Academic schedule in this Calendar for thefirstand last days of classes and for the dates of the examination period. Unsuccessful applicants who wish to be considered for the next year must re-apply. Career/Vocational—General Information 183 Applied Business Technology Contact: 984-4959 Students enrolled in the A p p l i e d Business Technology D i v i s i o n may choose from the following programs: INSTRUCTIONAL FACULTY N . B A W A , B . B . A . . (SFU), L L . B (McGill) D . B L A N E Y , I.D. ( U B C ) , C.P.S. D . C L A R K , L a b Supervisor J. C L A R K , R . N . (Regina G e n . Hosp.), Teaching D i p . ( U n i v . o f Sask.) M . C R A G G , B . A . L a w (Durham), Teaching Cert. ( U B C ) C . C R A M , B . A . , M . A . , Prof. Teaching Certificate, (U. ofT.) L . C R O W E , B . S c . ( U o f Conn.) M . B . A . ( N . Eastern Univ.) • A c c o u n t i n g Assistant Program • A c c o u n t i n g Support Program • Administrative Assistant Program • Business Fundamentals Program • Legal Secretarial Program • M e d i c a l Office Assistant Program • Office Assistant E S L Program Career Opportunities The goal of the Applied Business Technology D i v i s i o n is to provide our students with marketable skills. W e achieve S. F R E U N D , I . D . ( U B C ) , L e g a l Assistant Certificate this goal by maintaining an ongoing relationship with the M . G I O V A N N E T T I - S E W A R D , B . S . A . (St. F . X . ) , B . E d . business community through the placement o f all our ( M t . St. Vincent), T E S L students in practicums ranging from two to four weeks. S. G R E E N A W A Y , B . C o m . ( U B C ) , C A . Students have the opportunity to practice their skills in a C . G R I E V E S , B . E d . , Sec. ( U B C ) business environment before leaving the program to seek S. H O R N , I.D. ( U B C ) employment. Each year, an average of 85% o f our students L . JEST, I.D. ( U B C ) , M . E d . (SFU) are employed in their area of expertise. S. L I V I N G S T O N E , R . N . , M . A . M . S . (London, Eng.) D . P H I L L I P S , L G A S Cert., M . A . ( S F U ) A . S E D K Y , B . A . , M . A . , P h . D . ( A i n s Shams, C a i r o ) Why the Department of Applied Business Technology at Capilano College? B . S M I T H , B . A . , Prof. Teaching Cert. ( U B C ) W. TTLLEY, B.Ed. (UBC), M . A . (SFU) • K. V I C K A R S , B.Ed., Lic.Acct. (UBC), C.G.A. G . W A U G H , B . A . (Reading), M . A . ( U B C ) , Standard • A . W H I T E , Instructor/Lab Supervisor Career Training: administrative assistant, accounting assistant, medical office assistant and legal secretary Teaching Credentials ( U K ) , B . C . Registered Psychologist Quality Education: small classes, personalized instruction, and professional instructors • • F l e x i b i l i t y : day, part-time or full-time L o w Cost: our professional training courses are competitive with other institutions on the L o w e r Support Staff Faye Ulker, Receptionist W e n d y Weberg, D i v i s i o n a l Assistant Mainland • N e w Technology: microcomputer training in fullyequipped microcomputer labs. The Department of A p p l i e d Business Technology coordinates and delivers five different programs to General Information Students i n the A p p l i e d Business Technology D i v i s i o n receive practical, job-related training for a wide range o f students with varying levels o f skills. These programs provide you with a comprehensive education in preparation for employment in business. administrative and entry level accounting positions. The programs are designed to prepare students with market- Applications for Admission able skills that meet industry standards. O u r four, six and A l l applications for admission must be submitted to 10-month programs provide students with a high level o f Admissions, Office of the Registrar, together w i t h official competency i n computer applications, communication transcripts and other pertinent documents. skills, basic accounting procedures, and office adminis- w i l l be based on an information meeting, personal tration. Courses are delivered i n lecture and skills interview, and a skill-based assessment. Students demonstration formats stressing the importance o f entering these programs should be able to perform and production and accuracy for today's j o b market. A l l o f complete course work, assignments, and tests w h i c h meet our faculty have considerable experience i n business and changing industry standards. are continually upgrading their skills to meet the demands o f the new technology. Career/Vocational — Applied Business Technology 184 Admission Articulation with Secondary Schools Program Content C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e has articulation agreements i n place FIRST T E R M with a number o f secondary schools i n Vancouver, North Vancouver, West Vancouver, Sunshine Coast and H o w e Sound. These agreements enable students to receive college credit for specific courses completed in secondary O T E C 111 Business E n g l i s h I 3.0 O T E C 115 Business Systems and Procedures 3.0 O T E C 117 A c c o u n t i n g Procedures I 3.0 O T E C 146 Microcomputer Applications I 6J} school. Special Fees and Expenses Costs o f tuition, textbooks and supplies change regularly. Contact the office at 984-4959 for up-to-date information. 15.0 NB: Students must achieve a minimum ofaB grade in the final exam of OTEC 117 to continue in this program. SECOND TERM O T E C 140 Administrative Procedures O T E C 149 Microcomputer M a t h and O T E C 212 Business E n g l i s h II o r ACCOUNTING ASSISTANT PROGRAM This program is presently under review and the detailed listing of courses and course content may be changed by the time the program is offered in September 1997. Business Applications 1.5 3.0 O T E C 211 Business W r i t i n g 3.0 O T E C 217 A c c o u n t i n g Procedures II 3.0 O T E C 218 Accounting-Comprehensive Project 1.5 O T E C 252 Organizational Behaviour Career Opportunities 10 15.0 The A c c o u n t i n g Assistant Program provides students with an understanding o f both manual and computer THIRD T E R M accounting systems and the ability to apply this k n o w l - O T E C 219 Microcomputer A c c o u n t i n g 4.5 edge to business situations. Students w i l l also be intro- O T E C 300 Directed W o r k Experience 15 duced to other computer applications and general office procedures. Certificate R e q u i r e m e n t s : 6.0 36.0 Graduates are finding employment as accounting assistants, accounts receivable and accounts payable and fullcharge accountants for small and medium sized firms. In addition, graduates o f this program may ladder into the Business Administration Program to take more advanced financial courses, leading towards a degree and/or a professional accounting designation. The Program The A c c o u n t i n g Assistant Program is a full-time, tenmonth program offered from September to June. This program provides students with training i n accounting, general office procedures, and computer applications. A two-week work practicum is included in this training program. ACCOUNTING SUPPORT PROGRAM This program is presently under review and the detailed listing of courses and course content may be changed by the time the program is offered in September 1997. Career Opportunities The graduates o f the A c c o u n t i n g Support Program are finding employment as accounting clerks, bookkeepers, general office assistants, and accounting assistants. The Program The A c c o u n t Support Program is a full-time, six-month program offered from January to June. T h i s program Admission Requirements provides training in E n g l i s h grammar and composition skills, administrative procedures, manual and computer • C o m p l e t i o n o f Grade 12 or equivalent or mature student status accounting, and computer applications. The A c c o u n t i n g Support Program also includes a two-week supervised practicum. Career/Vocational —Applied Business Technology 185 Graduates are finding employment as accounting assistants, accounts receivable and accounts payable and fullcharge accountants for small and medium sized firms. In addition, graduates of this program may ladder into the Business Administration Program to take more advanced financial courses, leading towards a degree and/or a professional accounting designation. The Program Admission Requirements The Administrative Assistant Program is a full-time, tenmonth program offered from September to June. This program provides students with training in English grammar and composition skills, interpersonal skills, computer applications and much more. A valuable component of the training that students in this program receive is a two-week practicum in a business organization. • Completion of Grade 12 or equivalent or mature student status Admission Requirements Program Content • Completion of Grade 12 or equivalent or mature student status FIRST TERM Business English and OTEC 113 Communications Business Records and OTEC 116 Procedures Accounting Procedures I OTEC 117 Word Processing Procedures OTEC 123 Accounting Procedures II OTEC 217 Introductory Microcomputer OTEC 245 Applications Program Content 4.5 4.5 FIRST TERM Credit OTEC 111 Business English I 3.0 OTEC 115 Business Systems and Procedures 3.0 OTEC 117 Accounting Procedures I 3.0 OTEC 146 Microcomputer Applicadons I 6J) 3.0 15.0 3.0 3.0 NB: 15 19.5 OTEC 218 OTEC 300 3.0 Accounting Comprehensive Project 1.5 Directed Work Experience I L5_ 6.0 Total Program Credits: program. SECOND TERM OTEC 147 OTEC 148 OTEC 211 OTEC 235 OTEC 252 OTEC 300 Microcomputer Applications II Administrative Applications Business Writing Document Transcription Organizational Behaviour Directed Work Experience 25.5 ADMINISTRATIVE ASSISTANT PROGRAM This program is presently under review and the detailed Career Opportunities The Administrative Assistant in today's modern office provides a high level of technological and administrative support to management. Graduates of this program are finding employment in a wide range of technological support positions including administrative and executive assistants, office managers, and computer applications trainers. Career/Vocational — Applied Business Technology 186 4.5 3.0 3.0 1.5 3.0 L5_ 16.5 THIRD TERM OTEC 233 Document Design OTEC 234 Introduction to Networks or INFO 166 Applied Telecommunications listing of courses and course content may be changed by the time the program is offered in September 1997. permis- sion from the program convenor to be able to continue in the SECOND TERM Computerized Accounting OTEC 215 Accounting Procedures II OTEC 217 (continued fromfirstterm) Students who do not achieve a minimum of a C in OTEC 111 and OTEC 146 must receive written 3.0 1.5 4.5 Certificate Requirements: 36.0 BUSINESS F U N D A M E N T A L S PROGRAM This program is presently under review and the detailed listing of courses and course content may be changed by the time the program is offered in September 1997. The Program The Business Fundamentals Program is a four-month Admission Requirements E S L students who wish to take this program must have a personal interview with the program convenor and must meet these admission criteria: • Completion o f Grade 12 or equivalent or mature student status. • M i n i m u m o f advanced E n g l i s h language skills as demonstrated by S L E P Test results. • Competent conversational English. program that may be taken on a full-time or part-time basis during the fall or spring semester. The Business Fundamentals Program has been designed for students who require basic business skills training or who need to FIRST T E R M upgrade their skills. M a n y students take this program as E S L . 052 E S L : L o w e r A d v a n c e d Conversation E S L . 057 E S L : A d v a n c e d Reading and V o c a b u l a r y O T E C 113 Business E n g l i s h and Communications 4.5 E l i g i b l e students w i l l attend an information meeting O T E C 115 Business Systems and Procedures 3.0* and personal interview. O T E C 117* A c c o u n t i n g Procedures I 3.0* a stepping stone to a more advanced program o f studies. for Business Admission Requirements • for Business C o m p l e t i o n o f Grade 12 or equivalent or mature student status • 3.0 3.0 (optional) O T E C 146 Program Profile M i c r o c o m p u t e r Applications I 6.0 16.5/ O T E C 111 Business E n g l i s h I or O T E C 113 O T E C 115 Business E n g l i s h & Communications 3.0 Business Systems & Procedures 3.0 SECOND TERM O T E C 117 A c c o u n t i n g Procedures I E S L . 062 O T E C 146 Microcomputer Applications I or O T E C 123 W o r d Processing Procedures and O T E C 147 O T E C 245 Introductory Microcomputer O T E C 150 Administrative and Business Procedures O T E C 211 Business W r i t i n g or O T E C 212 Business E n g l i s h II O T E C 251 Interpersonal S k i l l s 1.5 O T E C 300 Directed W o r k Experience 15 *22.5 3.0 Applications &0 Certificate Requirements 15.0 OFFICE ASSISTANT ESL PROGRAM E S L : Upper A d v a n c e d Conversation for Business 3.0 Microcomputer Applications II 4.5 3.0 3.0 16.5 Career Opportunities Graduates are finding employment in entry-level posi- THIRD T E R M tions w h i c h include general office assistants, reception- Practicum- continuation o f O T E C 300 - Directed W o r k Experience ists, accounts payable and receivable clerks. Certificate Requirements 33.0/ The Program T h e Office Assistant E S L Program is a full-time, ninemonth program offered from September to M a y . T h i s *39.0 NB: OTEC 115 and OTEC 117 are optional and increase total credit hours.. program provides students with training i n general office skills, computer applications and E n g l i s h grammar and composition skills. Students are required to complete a work practicum as part o f their training program. Career/Vocational — Applied Business Technology 187 OTEC 140 Course Descriptions OTEC 111 (3) (4,0,0) (F) (1.5) (2,0,0) (S.Su) Administrative Procedures Business English I This course w i l l introduce the student to basic office The course w i l l review the fundamental principles o f business office. Topics include records management, grammar, spelling, and punctuation. M e m o writing w i l l time management, and office management procedures. administrative procedures associated w i t h the modern be covered. OTEC 112 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) OTEC 146 (6) (8.2,0) (F) Microcomputer Applications I Language Skill Development This course w i l l train students i n the theory and practical This course w i l l train students to apply the correct applications o f a word processing software program and a techniques o f written communications to their proofread- database program. This course w i l l also build keyboard- ing, verifying, and editing. ing speed and accuracy skills. OTEC 113 (4.5) (6,0,0) (S) Business English and Communications OTEC 147 (4.5) (6,2,0) (S) Microcomputer Applications II This course w i l l train students i n grammar, spelling, Prerequisites: O T E C 146 or equivalent punctuation, correct w o r d usage, proofreading skills and Students w i l l become proficient i n the use o f a w o r d business writing. processing windows program. Students w i l l also be OTEC 115 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) introduced to spreadsheet programs for both D O S and window environments. This course w i l l introduce Business Systems and Procedures students to technological developments and advances i n This course w i l l review basic math skills and train office automation. students to correctly compute and accurately maintain business records. OTEC 116 (3) (4,0,0) (S) OTEC 148 Administrative Applications (3) (4,0.0) (S) Students w i l l apply their knowledge o f records control, Business Records and Procedures time management, and other administrative procedures to This course w i l l review basic math skills annd introduce students to business and administrative records and procedures. office simulations. T h i s course w i l l provide reinforcement o f procedures used in w o r d processing by producing complex documents w h i c h require formatting, computer OTEC 117 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Accounting Procedures I OTEC 149 This course introduces students to the theory o f accounting and to tasks performed in the basic accounting cycle. Emphasis is placed on correct analysis, accuracy, and thoroughness as w e l l as on independent decision making. OTEC 123 software operations, and language s k i l l decisions. (4.5) (6,2,0) (S) Word Processing Procedures (3) (4.0.0) (S) Microcomputer Math and Business Applications The students w i l l review the math functions related to spreadsheets. In addition, the students w i l l become proficient users o f spreadsheets i n both D O S and w i n d o w environments. Students w i l l also receive an overview o f technological advances i n office automation. This course w i l l instruct students in the theory and OTEC 150 practical applications o f a w o r d processing program. Administrative and Business Procedures This course w i l l also build keyboarding speed and accuracy skills. (3) (4,0.0) (S) This course w i l l introduce students to the basic office administrative procedures associated with the modern business office. The students w i l l develop the skills to correctly compute and accurately maintain business records. Career/Vocational 188 — Applied Business Technology O T E C 211 Business W r i t i n g (3) (4.0.0) (S) Prerequisite: O T E C 111 or equivalent O T E C 233 Document Design (3) (4,2,0) (Su) Prerequisites: O T E C 146 and O T E C 147 or equivalents This course utilizes the computer to improve the student's Students w i l l use the graphics capabilities o f desktop quality o f grammar, spelling, and word usage, and to publishing to enhance the appearance o f letterheads, develop and/or improve composition skills. reports, tables, brochures, news releases, etc. O T E C 212 (3) (4.0.0) (S) Business English II Prerequisite: O T E C 111 or equivalent T h i s course utilizes the computer to assist students in O T E C 234 Introduction t o N e t w o r k s (3) (4,2,0) (Su) Prerequisites: O T E C 146 and 147 or O T E C 146 and 149, or equivalents developing/improving their letter and memo writing Students w i l l learn how a network operates, how to skills. Emphasis w i l l be placed on sentence and para- research information from bulletin boards, and some graph structure and composition skills. basic troubleshooting techniques. O T E C 215 Computerized Accounting (3) (4,0,0) (Su) OTEC 235 Document Transcription (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Prerequisite: O T E C 117 or equivalent Prerequisites: O T E C 111 and O T E C 146 or equivalents This course is designed to instruct the student in the use The development o f transcription skills to produce of the accounting application program, A C C P A C , for mailable correspondence using microcomputers. Spell- entering, storing and retrieving records, and producing ing, punctuation, and grammar w i l l be reviewed. standard financial reports. (4,4,0) (S.Su) O T E C 245 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Introductory M i c r o c o m p u t e r Applications Prerequisite: O T E C 117 with a m i n i m u m o f a " B " grade or permission o f the instructor. Students w i l l learn to use spreadsheets for specialized office procedures including the creation o f forms, reports, and spreadsheets. O T E C 217 A c c o u n t i n g Procedures II (3) This course is a continuation o f O T E C 117 with emphasis on accounting systems and procedures. Business simulations are used extensively throughout the course. O T E C 218 (1.5) (2,2.0) (S.Su) A c c o u n t i n g - C o m p r e h e n s i v e Project Students w i l l continue the study o f the accounting fundamentals begun in O T E C 117 and 217. Emphasis w i l l be placed on the application o f these fundamentals to a comprehensive simulated business situation representative o f those encountered in business. O T E C 251 Interpersonal Skills (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) This course w i l l provide students with an understanding of interpersonal communication techniques that can positively influence j o b performance. Students w i l l practice in-person and telephone responding, customer service and issue resolution skills in a supportive environment. O T E C 252 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Organizational Behaviour O T E C 219 Microcomputer Accounting (4.5) (6.0,0) (Su) Prerequisite: O T E C 117 or equivalent A hands-on course to develop proficiency in the use of A C C P A C for completing accounting procedures, including accounts receivable, accounts payable, payroll, This course w i l l provide students with an understanding of interpersonal communication techniques that can positively influence performance on the j o b . T h i s course w i l l also identify the positive administrative and supervisory skills that program graduates w i l l need as they wish to assume additional career responsibility in the future. general ledger, and inventory control. Career/Vocational — Applied Business Technology 189 OTEC 300 Directed Work Experience I (1.5) (2,0,70) (S.Su) This course involves both lectures on job search techniques and resume preparation. In addition, at least a thirty-hour work practicum must be completed in an industry placement related to the student's program of study. LEGAL SECRETARIAL PROGRAM Contact: 984-4959 Career Opportunities The exacting field of law offers excellent career opportunities for students graduating as legal secretaries. This very specialized program provides intense training in traditional secretarial skills as well as legal procedural courses including: Civil litigation, wills and probate, corporate law, conveyancing and mortgaging, family and legal office procedures. Upon completion of the program, students find employment in specialized, as well as general, law offices. Many graduates of the Legal Secretarial Program proceed to the Part Time Legal Assistant Certificate Program. The Legal Assistant Program requires Option students to have two-years' work experience as a legal secretary prior to enrolling in the first course. Legal Secretarial Program graduates are required to have one year of work experience as a legal secretary. This allows them to further their education i n the evening while earning a salary and gaining valuable experience i n the legal support field. The Program This nine-month vocational program covers five main areas of law providing a fundamental understanding of the legal system in B.C. Students are trained in legal terminology and procedural rules. They will review relevant legislation, and acquire necessary skills in the formatting and handling of legal documents. Shorthand, typing, legal office procedures, hands-on computer technology and a two-week legal office work practicum are included in the curriculum. A Capilano College certificate is granted upon successful completion of the program. Admission Procedures Students are admitted to the program twice a year, in September and January. Applications for Admission may be submitted at any time to Admissions, Office of the Registrar, together with official transcripts and any other pertinent documents. To ensure your name is on the list for the Information Meetings held twice a year, call the Department of Applied Business Technology at 984-4959. Interested applicants are invited to attend an information meeting. A n evaluation of keyboarding speed and English language proficiency will be conducted at this time. During the meeting, an appointment for a personal interview may be arranged. During your interview, you will have an opportunity to ask further questions, and discuss your qualifications and career goals. Your test results will be reviewed with you at this time. The objective of the personal interview is to assist in selecting applicants who will be most suited to the career of Legal Secretary. Admission Requirements • Completion of Grade 12 or equivalent or mature student status. • English language proficiency as demonstrated by the Business English Competency test results. • Keyboarding at 45 wpm. Please submit the following material prior to or during the pre-admission interview: (a) A resume describing your education, skills, and work experience. (b) Transcripts from all educational institutions you have attended (c) A letter of recommendation from a former employer or teacher. Special Fees and Expenses In addition to registration and tuition fees, students can expect to spend approximately $1,100.00 on textbooks and supplies. Program Content FIRST T E R M Credits L G S T 108 Family Law Procedures 1.5 L G S T 109 Basic Litigation 3.0 L G S T 116 Introduction to the Legal System 1.5 Career/Vocational — Applied Business Technology 190 L G S T 123 L e g a l Document Processing on the M i c r o c o m p u t e r 3.75 L G S T 124 Organizational Behaviour 3.0 C M N S 159 Communications for L e g a l LGST 112 (3) (4,0,0) (S,Su) Basic Conveyance and Mortgage Procedures This course covers the contract o f purchase and sale, L a n d Title A c t requirements for registration o f title i n Secretaries 10 15.75 B . C . , search procedures, preparation o f primary and secondary documents and forms i n v o l v e d i n conveying title and registering charges. Emphasis w i l l be on prepar- SECOND TERM ing documents acceptable to the L a n d Title Office, such L G S T 110 Corporate Procedures L G S T 112 Basic Conveyance & Mortgage 3.0 conveyance. Procedures 3.0 L G S T 114 W i l l s & Probate Procedures 1.5 L G S T 117 L e g a l Office Procedures 1.5 L G S T 119 L G S T 122 Practicum 1.5 3.0 L e g a l M a c h i n e Transcription and S k i l l Development 5.25 18.75 (2,0,0) (F,S) tion A c t . Students w i l l prepare the necessary documents to obtain Letters Probate i n the Supreme C o u r t o f B . C . and be familiar with documentation required for issuance of Letters o f Administration. LGST 116 (1.5) Introduction to the Legal System THIRD T E R M L G S T 119 LGST 114 (1.5) Wills and Probate Procedures A n examination of the W i l l s A c t , and Estate A d m i n i s t r a - Computer Applications in the L e g a l Office L G S T 130 as transfers, mortgages, and related forms for a residential Practicum (continued) (2,0,0) (F,S) This course acquaints students with a w o r k i n g knowledge 34.5 Total Program Credits: of the Canadian and B . C . Court System, ethics o f the legal profession and the rules o f the L a w Society relating to trust accounts, with added emphasis on legal vocabu- Course Descriptions LGST 108 Family Law Procedures lary. (1.5) (2,0,0) (F,S) Introduction to the procedures, rules and legislation applicable to divorce and family law litigation. LGST 109 Basic Litigation (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Introduction to court procedures i n the Supreme Court o f B . C . The course w i l l cover procedures i n pre-trial preparation, the preparation o f documents, the use o f precedents i n the Supreme Court. LGST 110 Corporate Procedures (3) (4.0.0) (F,S) A n examination o f the B . C . Companies A c t and the various documents that a legal secretary must be familiar with i n order to incorporate a company and attend to routine filings and resolutions. Records Office requirements, annual proceedings, preparing share certificates and registration, etc., w i l l also be covered. LGST 117 Legal Office Procedures (1.5) (2,0,0) (S,Su) A course to prepare legal secretarial students for positions in law offices. Instruction i n time keeping, diary systems, use o f law library, ethical responsibilities, filing, and other procedures particular to the profession. Emphasis w i l l be placed on the structure o f a law office, the differences between large and small offices, and the office procedures unique to the practice o f law. LGST 119 Practicum (1.5)(2,0,60) (S.Su) W o r k experience i n v o l v i n g 24 lecture hours and at least 60 hours o f related office experience i n the legal field. A l s o covered is the resume, j o b application, cover letter and interview. LGST 122 (3) (4,2,0) (S,Su) Computer Applications in the Legal Office The student w i l l learn to identify the components o f office automation. The student w i l l also require a practical knowledge and an understanding o f basic spreadsheet and data base concepts. Career/Vocational — Applied Business Technology 191 LGST 123 (3.75) (5,2,0) (F,S) Legal D o c u m e n t Processing o n the • • Microcomputer Preparation, assisting and follow up o f patient for medical examinations U s i n g WordPerfect software on an I B M compatible • through advanced w o r d processing concepts. Proficiency • • (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Organizational Behaviour Financial record keeping and computerized medical billing working with the program w i l l be acquired through the production o f various legal documents. Specimen collection and basic office diagnostic procedures microcomputer, the student w i l l be introduced to basic LGST 124 Aseptic techniques A two-week work practicum in the medical field Admission Requirements Applicants must meet the f o l l o w i n g admission require- This course looks at the effects o f individual and group ments: behaviour in organizations. Topics include leader • behaviour and power, motivation, attitude development, Completion o f Grade 12 or equivalent or mature student status perception, work stress and conflict. Students w i l l also • 35 w p m keyboarding speed learn how to apply communication, problem solving and • Personal interview conflict resolution skills toward an organization's overall • Aptitude for w o r k i n g in a medical setting effectiveness. • Appropriate English conversation and writing skills • St. John's Standard First A i d Certificate LGST 130 (5.25)(7,2,0) (S,Su) Legal M a c h i n e Transcription a n d Skill Development A l l Applications for A d m i s s i o n must be submitted to Admissions, Office o f the Registrar, together w i t h official transcripts and other pertinent documents. After a review o f basic transcription skills, students w i l l develop skills in transcribing legal materials. S k i l l building wili continue through the use o f remedial drills, power drills and short and sustained timed writings. Special Fees a n d E x p e n s e s In addition to tuition and registration fees, students can expect to spend approximately $1,000.00 on textbooks MEDICAL OFFICE ASSISTANT PROGRAM Contact: 984-4959 and supplies. Program Content Career Opportunities FIRST T E R M Credits The health care industry is one o f the largest industries in C M N S 110 M O A . 100 Standard E n g l i s h Usage M e d i c a l Document Processing I 3.0 Canada, and the M e d i c a l Office Assistant is a recognized member o f the modern medical team. Graduates o f this program have the specialized training required to work in a number o f medical settings: receptionist or medical assistant in an office or clinic, or i n a hospital as an admitting clerk or department stenographer. 3.0 M O A . 105 M e d i c a l Administrative Procedures I 3.0 M O A . 107 M O A . 109 C l i n i c a l Procedures I 1.5 Anatomy & Related P h y s i o l o g y and Pathology I 3.0 M O A . 111 M e d i c a l Terminology I 3.0 M O A . 121 M e d i c a l Document Processing II 15 18.0 The Program this M e d i c a l Office Assistant program offers pre-service, SECOND TERM M O A . 102 includes. • M e d i c a l terminology and anatomy and physiology • • • Pharmacology M e d i c a l ethics M e d i c a l transcription • M e d i c a l records management Career/Vocational — Applied Business Technology 192 Keyboarding S k i l l & Speed Development 1.5 M O A . 103 M e d i c a l M a c h i n e Transcription 3.0 M O A . 106 M e d i c a l Administrative Procedures II 0.75 C l i n i c a l Procedures II and specialized education for prospective students w h i c h M O A . 108 M O A . 110 Pharmacology 1.5 Anatomy & Related Physiology and Pathology II 3.0 M O A . 112 Medical Terminology II M O A . 115 Directed Work Experience M O A . 122 Computers in Health Care 3.0 1.5 learn how to use and maintain medical office equipment. There is a mandatory lab component. LI Total Program Credits: 15.75 MOA. 33.75 Clinical Procedures II a n d Pharmacology 108 Prerequisite: Course Descriptions MOA. 100 (3) (4,2,0) (F) (1.5) (2,.4,0)(S) M O A . 107 Continuation of M O A . 107. There is a mandatory lab component. M e d i c a l D o c u m e n t Processing I Prerequisite: MOA. Keyboarding speed of 35 wpm Keyboarding skill development and introduction to M S Word 6.0; basic to advanced applications. MOA. 102 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) K e y b o a r d i n g Skill a n d Speed D e v e l o p m e n t Remedial drills, power drills, short and sustained timed writings to increase speed and accuracy in medical keyboarding. MOA. 103 (3) M O A . 100& 105 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Students will learn office procedures specific to the medical office including time management, medical ethics, appointments, patient record, filing, reception skills, and medical billing. M O A . 106 (0.75) Medical Administrative Procedures II (2,0,0) (S) Continuation of M O A . 105. Students will be able to perform financial recordkeeping specific to the medical office. (1.5) (2,4.0) (F) Clinical Procedures I Prerequisite: (3) (4,0,0) (S) M O A . 109 MOA. 111 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Medical T e r m i n o l o g y I Introduction to Greek and Latin prefixes, suffixes, roots, and combining forms common to medical terminology. Students will aquire the necessary skills to define, pronounce and correctly spell medical terms. M O A . 112 (3) (4,0,0) (3) Medical T e r m i n o l o g y II Prerequisite: MOA. I l l Continuation, reinforcement of terminology in M O A 111. M O A . 105 M O A . 107 M O A . 110 A n a t o m y a n d Related Physiology a n d Pathology II A continuation of M O A . 109. 111 Medical Administrative Procedures I Prerequisite: (4,0,0) (F) A study of structure, function and interrelationships of the organic systems of the body. Common medical disorders, operative procedures and related terminology will be studied in conjunction with the systems. Prerequisite: Practice in transcribing medical consultation letters and hospital reports from dictation equipment. This course entails a mandatory two-hour lab. MOA. (3) (4,2,0) (S) M e d i c a l M a c h i n e Transcription Prerequisite: 109 A n a t o m y a n d Related Physiology a n d Pathology I St. John's Standard First A i d Certificate M O A . 115 Directed W o r k Experience (1.5) (2,0,54) (S) Following successful completion of term two, a medical office/clinic or hospital work practicum is arranged for the student. Before the work placement, the student will be required to attend career preparation lectures which will include practice sessions for the employment interview. Students will learn about clinical procedures pertinent to the doctor's office and the hospital setting. The course includes general information about physical and mental health; medications and health products. Students will Career/Vocational—Applied Business Technology 193 MOA. 121 (1.5) Medical Document Processing II (2,2,0) (F) Prerequisite: M O A . 100 A d v a n c e d w o r d processing applications are used i n a medical environment. MOA. 122 (1.5) (2.0.0) (S) Computers in Health Care Prerequisite: M O A . 105, M O A . 100 Students w i l l be introduced to the use o f computers i n the medical office. Students w i l l acquire skills using a microcomputer to gather patient demographic data, set up appointments, process claims for submission to M S P , process remittance reports and accounts receivable. Career/Vocational — Applied Business Technology 194 Applied Information Technology Contact: 984-1727 E-mail: infotec@hubcap.mlnet.com Instructional Faculty M . A N D E R S O N , Dip. Emily Carr College of Art & Design M . B A T T E R S B Y , B . A . (NYU), PH.D. (UBC) V . B U S C H , Dip. Infotec (Capilano) B . C A L V E R T , B . A . (Sask) S. K A R M A L I C. KTLIAN, B . A . (Columbia), M . A . (SFU) M . L ' H E U R E U X , B . A . (Concordia), Dip. Infotec (Capilano) A . L O R E K , B . A . , M . L . S . (McGill) C. M A N U E L , B . A . (Guelph), B.Ed. (Laurentian) D. R A N K I N , B.F.A. (SFU) L . S A V A G E , B.A., Dip.Ed. (McGill), M.Ed. (Alberta) D. T A I T L . W U , Dip. Commercial Mus. (Capilano) Convenors: Lawrence Wu (Program Convenor), Doug Tait (Convenor) Lab Supervisors: Lawrence Wu/David Rankin/ Matt Anderson Staff: Cathy Cole, 984-1727 Admission Requirements • Grade 12 graduation or equivalent with English 12 • College entrance level English • Computer literacy and a modest keyboarding rate • Personal interview Note: Applications for Admission, together with official transcripts and other pertinent documents must be submitted to Admissions, Office of the Registrar. Special Fees and Expenses • Personal computer system capable of performing tasks required in this program. (See program brochure for further information) • Texts, software, disks • Modem • BBS online fees Important Note This is a general view of the Infotec program. While we have made every effort to describe courses and requirements accurately as of Fall 1997, we work in a rapidly changing field; new releases in hardware and software may require changes in course content, credit and scheduling, and required equipment. General Information During the last decade, our society and economy have rapidly become information- and communication-based. Within business, industry, and government the capability to effectively deal with information has become an important factor in maintaining a competitive edge. As we approach the 21st century, it becomes increasingly obvious that individuals will need to control their own access to information. The use of microcomputers and nework systems has become an integral part of the new wave of western development. The Infotech program will identify issues facing the new communicators and will train students in the skills to acquire, select, organize and communicate that information using the latest in interactive computer technology and telecommunications. Through an intensive hands-on immersion into the world of electronic communications, students will become capable handlers of the technology, with advanced research and critical thinking skills, and increased sophistication in interactive computer communications. DIPLOMA PROGRAM The Diploma Program is a 10-month, full-time program with a class limit of 20 students. Please contact the Infotec Department for application details and program information. Diploma Program Profile First Term—Foundation Credits September 2 - December 19,1997 C M N S 125 Communication Theory C M N S 145 Computer Writing G R P H 141 Graphics II INFO 143 Research Methods in the Electronic Age INFO 151 Interactive Communications I INFO 166 Applied Telecommunications INFO 167 Systems, Tools, Utilities PHIL 170 Critical Thinking I November, December C M N S 145 Computer Writing G R P H 142 Graphics ID INFO 143 Research Methods in the Electronic Age Career/Vocational — Applied 1.5 3.0 1.5 3.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 Infotec 195 I N F O 145 Internet T o o l s and Techniques 1.5 C M N S 145 I N F O 150 Contemporary Issues I 1.5 Computer Writing I N F O 156 Technical Support: Foundation 1.5 I N F O 161 Project Management 1.5 M D I A 142 Computer M a n a g e d Learning (3.0) (3,0,0) (F) The microcomputer's efficient text-editing and revision abilities make it a powerful tool for writers. In this course, students learn to develop a clear, effective writing and Training 1.5 style and to progress from editing exercises to producing an extensive document intended for the computer screen Second Term —Exploration (especially for online publication), print, or other January 5 - April 24,1998 workplace applications. G R P H 140 Graphics I 1.5 I N F O 148 T i m e - B a s e d Data Integration EE 1.5 GRPH 140 I N F O 155 Interactive Communications II 1.5 Graphics I I N F O 171 A p p l i e d Production Management 1.5 I N F O 172 Technical Support: Concentration 3.0 I N F O 177 Professional Development 4.5 I N F O 180 Computer Mediated Communications 3.0 M U S . 090 D i g i t i z e d Sound I 1.5 (1.5) (S) Enhancement o f visual literacy through the development of generic graphics skills and abilities. Students develop a critical awareness o f different presentation formats, learn to make an effective visual analysis, and develop facility in solving graphic problems within the computer environment. The focus is on the graphical aspects i n the March, April G R P H 143 A d v a n c e d Graphics I V I N F O 148 T i m e - B a s e d Data Integration 0.75 design o f the user interface and the production o f effective b/w graphics for the design o f an interactive multimedia project. (continued) I N F O 158 Interactive Communications III 1.5 I N F O 160 Marketing 1.5 I N F O 171 A p p l i e d Production Management (continued) Technical Support: Concentration Further investigation of basic graphic skills introduced i n I N F O 172 graphics for interactive multimedia using colour, objects I N F O 177 (continued) Professional Development (continued) I N F O 191 C D - R O M Mastering GRPH 141 (F) Graphics I. In addition, students learn to produce and paths. Introduction to layout for print publication. 0.75 GRPH 142 Graphics III Third Term—Professional Development April 27-June 19,1998 I N F O 173 I N F O 177 I N F O 182 M D I A 141 (1.5) Graphics II Technical Support: Augmentation 1.5 Professional Development (continued) Cross Platform Development 1.5 Computer Presentation 1.5 (1.5) (F) In addition to layout for print publication, students extend graphic exploration to focus on "time" as a design element i n interactive multimedia. Sequential presentations are coupled with the basic rules learned from Graphics I and II. Students learn to produce graphics for use with M a c r o m i n d Director. (Nine credits awarded for pre/postgraduate work or GRPH 143 experience) A d v a n c e d Graphics IV (.75) Course Descriptions logical and aesthetic skills. A u g m e n t i n g the graphics (S) Graphics production requires a combination o f technodesign skills developed so far, the student is introduced to C M N S 125 (1.5) (F) Communication Theory advanced graphics production techniques and tools i n this workshop-based course. A brief survey o f principles underlying communication: interpersonal, print, radio, film and television, w i t h application o f those principles to the digital media. INF0143 (3.0) (3,0,0) (F) Research M e t h o d s in the Electronic A g e A s information technology increases i n efficiency, the Career/Vocational 196 — Applied Infotec quantity o f information generated multiplies. A s a result, the ability to find, assess, and retrieve useful information becomes increasingly essential to productivity. This is introduced and applied. Students design, produce, test effective use o f electronic information sources such as and revise projects using the authoring tool M a c r o m i n d C D - R O M s , online library catalogues, commercial and government databases, in addition to conventional print sources i n libraries. (3,0,0) (F) on the Internet. (SU) (1.5) includes an overview o f marketing theory, application o f the theory into j o b market evaluation, preparation o f a personal marketing plan, and a selling skills workshop. INFO 148 (1.5) Time-Based Data Integration II (3,0,0) (S) Data capture, compression, assembly and editing tech- INF0161 Project Management (1.5) (F) This course teaches skills necessary to manage and niques and the issue of synchronization are part o f this produce interactive communications projects. course. Students consider management issues such as administration, pre- (1.5) (F) A study o f cultural, ethical, political, economic and aesthetic issues arising with the increasing use o f comput ers, as w e l l as the impact o f new information systems on Students survey print and electronic media to research current comment on these issues; synthesize and analyze their findings; and present their work in both written and spoken forms. INFO 151 Interactive Communications I INFO 160 Marketing yourself and your ideas to the business community. It knowledge and experience with browsing and publishing human understanding and society Director in this course. This course focuses on the basic principles o f marketing T h i s course w i l l provide students with the necessary INFO 150 Contemporary Issues I (S) A continuation o f I N F O 155, the concept o f Beta testing course explores methods o f research necessary for the INF0145 (1.5) Internet Tools and Techniques INFO 158 (1.5) Interactive Communications III (1.5) (F) T h i s course first examines the concept o f interactive communications - the active involvement o f a human mind with a computer - and the history of developments in the field to date. User interface design forms the basis for a model designed by each student. INF0155 (1.5) Interactive Communications II (S) This project-based course expands on concepts covered in I N F O 151 and expands to include critical evaluation collaboration and team building. INFO 166 (1.5) Applied Telecommunications (F) This course provides an introduction to the basics o f modems, communications software, telecommunications protocols, the use o f electronic m a i l and bulletin board systems. INFO 167 Systems, Tools, Utilities (1.5) (F) This course familiarizes students with the design, structure and operation o f the Macintosh computer system software, the basic concepts and use o f local area networks, and related peripheral equipment. Students w i l l examine system-related utility programs and begin an introduction to data integration. INFO 171 (1.5) Applied Production Management (3.0,0) (S) This course w i l l allow the students to apply the project management skills they learned in I N F O 161 to inte- techniques for interactive communications products. INF0156 (1.5) Technical Support: Foundation production and production planning, copyright clearance, grated projects they undertake i n the Spring term. The (F) students w i l l receive the benefit o f an instructor's expert experience, guidance and supervision throughout the planning and production o f these projects. T h i s is an introduction to programming concepts. Students learn about components i n programming and the approaches to structured programming using these components. Career/Vocational — Applied Infotec 197 INF0172 (3.0) (S) Technical Support: Concentration multimedia and file translation methods. Projects from the Macintosh environment w i l l be transferred to the The focus o f this course is in developing expertise in the primary interactive multimedia authoring tool chosen for the Program; currently, M a c r o m i n d Director is our choice. In addition to concentrating on the specifics o f equivalent W i n d o w s environment. INFO 191 C D - R O M Mastering (0.75) (6,0,0) (S) this development tool, concepts i n structured program- This course is designed to provide the student with the m i n g from I N F O 156 w i l l be applied i n support o f technical skills and knowledge to produce compact disc projects from I N F O 155/158. masters. INF0173 (1.5) (SU) M D I A 141-01 (1-5) (SU) Technical Support: A u g m e n t a t i o n C o m p u t e r Presentation After developing expertise i n a primary multimedia This course explores the related planning, design, and development tool, students w i l l be given the opportunity implementation skills needed for effective desktop to expand their repertoire o f development tools. The presentation. Students learn to design and b u i l d an focus is on the efficient application o f authoring k n o w - outline, determine what hardware and software applica- ledge from one environment to a different environment. tions w i l l best realize the design, interrelate graphics with Authorware is currently our choice o f development tool support text, structure and deliver the final presentation. for courseware and computer-based training. B u i l d i n g on structure programming concepts gained i n I N F O 156 and M D I A 142 the expertise i n Director developed in I N F O 172), C o m p u t e r M a n a g e d Learning a n d T r a i n i n g (1.5) students turn their focus on Authorware. This course examines the concepts underlying the (F) learning process and how the computer can be used to INFO 177 (4.5) (3,0,0) (S.SU) Professional D e v e l o p m e n t enhance this process. The instructional design process w i l l be examined and w i l l provide a platform for the This course prepares the student for work i n the field o f investigation and application o f a process to plan, information technology by establishing professional produce, implement, and evaluate computer-delivered contacts, cultivating a professional work ethic, and learning and training strategies. developing a professional portfolio for presentation to the M U S . 090 Digitized S o u n d public. INF0180 (3,0,0) (S) Computer Mediated Communications This course is designed to introduce the student to the various aspects and issues o f computer mediated c o m m u nications. It w i l l enable the student to understand (1.5) (S) A u d i o is an important component i n computer-based multimedia. In addition to the fundamental concepts o f digital audio, students learn the techniques for digitizing and editing sound samples for use i n interactive m u l t i media presentations. collaborative work i n the w o r l d of telecomputing, experience a variety o f planned computer mediated PHIL 170 systems and l i n k to other computer networks (via Internet Critical Thinking I and Telnet). Basic concepts o f critical thinking and argumentation - (1.5) (F) students examine the concepts o f argument, premise, INF0182 (1.5) (SU) Cross-Platform D e v e l o p m e n t in using these concepts. This course focuses on the transfer o f multimedia projects from one computer platform to another. Topics include design and production consideration for cross-platform media integration, with comparisons between the M a c i n tosh and I B M - P C compatibles. Students w i l l evaluate the Microsoft W i n d o w s user interface, Windows-based Career/Vocational 198 — Applied conclusion, and argument structure and develop facility Infotec Business Administration C o n t a c t : 984-4960, F a x : 984-1734 G . W A U G H , B . A . , M . A . - Reading, ( U B C ) Department C h a i r : J . D . Loblaw R. W E I Z E L , B P E . , B . C o m m . ( U of M ) , M B A Instructional Faculty J. W I L S O N , B . C o m m . , C A . ( U B C ) (McMaster), C M A D. B A S H A M , D.M.A.T.P. R . B E L L , B . A . ( W L U ) , D i p . E d . (Ont. C . E . ) , C G A D. B R O W N E , B.A., M . A . (UBC) R. W I L S O N , B.Comm. ( U B C ) H . B. Y A C K N E S S , B.Comm., M . B . A . , C A . (SFU) Support Staff J.S. B R O W N L E E - B A K E R , B B A ( S F U ) , M B A ( A s i a Pacific International Institute) B . C A M P B E L L , (Seneca), C N I Carmen Orton, D i v . Assistant Sharon M i l e t i c , Receptionist A . W . C A R T E R , B . S c , M . B . A . ( U of A , City U ) , C N A G . F A N E , D i p . Tech., B . S c , M . B . A . , C . M . A . ( B C I T , CityU., UBC) D. G O O D W I N , M . B . A . F . G R U E N , B . M g t . E n g . , M . A . S c . ( R P I , Waterloo) C . H I L L , B . A . (Santa Clara) P. H O L D E N , B . A . , L . L . B . , M . B . A . ( U B C , U . o f Ottawa, General Information T h e Department o f Business Administration at Capilano College stresses a balanced combination o f classroom learning and hands-on business education. A l l o f our faculty have first hand business experience and remain active in their specialties. UBC) S. I B A R A K I , ISP, C N I , C N E , M S S B , B E T A T E A M , W e continually review and update our programs accord- N E T e a m , DpSc (CIPS, N O V E L L , M I C R O S O F T , ing to market needs so that our graduates have the skills IBM, OUC) employers demand. A recent review o f our programs by W . I N G L I S , B . A . , D i p . M k t g . ( U B C , U . Montreal) our A d v i s o r y Board, graduates, students and faculty l e d W . I N K S T E R , C . G . A . , (Canada), A C S M (Capilano), C N I us to accentuate our training i n problem-solving, written C. K I L I A N , B.A., M . A . (SFU) and verbal business presentations, and team work. T h i s J.D. L O B L A W , B . A . ( U of T) R . L O N G W O R T H , B . S c , M . E d . (Concordia, St. M i c h a e l s ) I.S.P. J.. M A Y , B . C o m m . ( U B C ) C A gives our graduates an edge i n today's h i g h l y competitive job market, and gives them the expertise to succeed i n the workplace o f the future. Our graduates proceed to occupations such as: R. M C B L A N E , B.Ed., M . E d . (Uof A ) C. M C K I E , B.Comm., M . B . A . , P.T.C. ( U B C , City Univ.) L. M I C H A E L S , B . S c , B.Ed., M.Ed. ( U of A ) L.E. MILNER, M.B.A., C G A B . M O S E L E Y , B . A . , M . B . A . (Univ. of Cal) R.C. N I C H O L S , B.Comm., C . M . A . ( U of A ) R . O ' C O N N O R , B . A d m i n . (Ryerson), I.S.P. D . O ' L E A R Y , B . A . E d . (Memorial), D i p . A d u l t E d . (Alberta), M . E d . ( U B C ) J. P E N D Y G R A S S E , B . S c , Teacher's Cert. (N.Dakota) J. S A R R E A L , B . S c , M . S c , P h . D . , A C S M , ( U . o f Philippines, U . o f Florida, N . C a r o l i n a U . , Capilano) • Entrepreneur • Operations Manager • Computer Programmer • Network Administrator • Accountant • Production Manager • Store Manager/Owner • Promotion Manager • Systems A n a l y s t • Sales Representative/Sales Manager • L e n d i n g Officer D. S A U E R , B.A., M . B . A . (SFU, U B C ) • Research Coordinator G. SIMON, B . S c ,M.Sc. (UBC) • Financial A n a l y s t M . SPENCE, B.Sc, L.L.B • Financial Planner M . T A Y L O R , B . S c . ( U of A ) • Event Producer L . T E E T Z E L , B . C o m m . ( U B C ) , M P A (Queens) • A d v e r t i s i n g A c c o u n t Manager M . V A N H O R N , B . E d . ( U o f A ) , A C S M (Capilano) In the past, many o f our graduates have developed careers A . H . V I C K , B.Comm. (UBC) with large corporations such as General Foods, Chevron, K . V I C K A R S , B . E d . , L i e Acct. ( U B C ) , C G A . I. C . B . C , B B D O Advertising, The Future Shop, Labatt A . W A T S O N , B . A . ( U of C), A I B C , M . B . A . (Asia Pacific International Institute) Breweries, Brights W i n e s , B . C . T e l , and B . C . H y d r o . The entrepreneurial skills gained i n the program have also led many graduates to administrative jobs i n smaller firms. Career/Vocational — Business Administration 199 These include M i n e r v a Technologies, Seanix Technology University Inc., Western System Controls, Sierra Consulting and A block transfer agreement o f sixty credits exists, for many other small and medium sized businesses. students who have completed the Business A d m i n i s t r a tion diploma program, with the f o l l o w i n g universities: Admission Requirements R o y a l Roads University, U N B C , University o f • Grade 12 or equivalent with preference given to a Lethbridge. F o r further information contact R i c h a r d m i n i m u m o f C + in E n g l i s h 12 and C in A c a d e m i c M a t h 11 or Longworth in the Business Administration department. Business Aministration Department Offerings • Mature student status with successful completion o f testing in E n g l i s h and M a t h skills. • Submission o f the Capilano College A p p l i c a t i o n for BBA Degree A d m i s s i o n , together with official transcripts to Co-op and Advanced Diplomas General Business and Accelerated Diplomas Certificates Admissions, Office o f the Registrar. • Students currently enrolled in Grade 12 w i l l be considered on the basis o f interim grades. Additional program admission requirements are found in Level 4 30 credits Level 3 30 credits 30 credits Level 2 30 credits 30 credits 30 credits Level 1 30 credits 30 credits 30 credits 120 credits 90 credits 60 credits the specific program descriptions Program Flexibility Whether you choose part-time or full-time studies i n Business Administration, y o u w i l l always accumulate credits toward a certificate, diploma or degree. W e have designed our programs to suit your needs as well as the needs o f employers. The flexibility of our programs Accounting Accounting Computing Computing General Mgt. General Mgt. Int'l Business Int'l Business Martketing Marketing allows y o u to start with Capilano, build your own educational package today and continue to learn with us in the future. T h i s "laddering" concept proves your 30 cr. Retail Mkting. Co-op Cert. 24 cr. Advanced Eve. Cert. 18 cr. Evening Cert. CONCENTRATIONS education can be adapted to fit your changing environ- 18 cr. Local Govt. Admin. Cert. ment and those o f industry. The Business Administration Department at Capilano offers a variety o f programs from a Bachelor of Business Transferability Administration ( B B A ) degree, to C o - o p and A d v a n c e d Students who have already completed degrees or taken Diplomas, to General Business and Accelerated D i p l o - other university or college courses may apply to have mas, to numerous certificates. M a n y courses are transfer- those credits transferred towards the Business A d m i n i s - able from one credential to another, making it easier for tration programs at Capilano C o l l e g e . T o ensure a smooth students to advance to higher levels more easily. transition, please provide the Office o f the Registrar with transcripts and course outlines when you apply. A student must complete at least 50 percent o f the program require- Articulations Agreements ments at Capilano College. Secondary The Business Administration department has formalized dual credit agreements in Accounting and Marketing with (PLA) Prior Learning Assessment the following secondary school districts: Burnaby, The Business Administration Department is committed to Coquitlam, North Vancouver, Sunshine Coast, V a n c o u - the recognition o f prior learning. Prior L e a r n i n g Assessment ( P L A ) recognizes demonstrated learning for credits w h i c h have been acquired through life or work experiences. Presently, the Department recognizes P L A for all ver and West Vancouver. F o r further information contact you high school counselor or R i c h a r d Longworth at Capilano C o l l e g e . Career/Vocational 200 — Business Administration first-year courses. F o r further information contact the English Requirement P L A Coordinator at Capilano College. A l l Business Administration d i p l o m a students must Professionalism at Capilano complete the E n g l i s h 100 course to graduate. T o be eligible for E n g l i s h 100 y o u must have an ' A ' i n E n g l i s h O u r graduates have achieved an excellent reputation 12 or attain a suitable mark i n the Language Proficiency based on professional performance and positive attitude. Index ( L P I ) or college administered E n g l i s h Diagnostic O u r classes stress the importance o f maintaining that Test ( E D T ) . It is preferred that y o u take the E n g l i s h 100 reputation. A s future leaders and business administrators, course in the F I R S T T E R M or prior to completing your students must be prepared to model appropriate profes- first year as it is a general prerequisite for all second level sional behaviour while engaged in College and College- courses. related activities. T h i s is the type o f behaviour expected from a paid, professional manager or leader. Business Administration Dept. Contact System F o r additional information please call the Department o f Business Administration: (604) 984-4960. Address your correspondence to: T h e Department o f Business Administration Capilano College 2055 Purcell W a y Accounting/Finance Designations M a n y o f the courses offered i n the D i p l o m a and Degree programs are transferable to the Chartered Accountant ( C A ) , Certified General Accountant ( C G A ) , and Certified Management Accountant ( C M A ) accreditation programs. See information included with specific course descriptions and the B C C A T Transfer G u i d e . T h i s guide is accessible on the Internet—http://www.islandnet.com/ becat/ N o r t h Vancouver, B . C . V 7 J 3 H 5 Fax: (604)984-1734 E - m a i l : busadmin@capcollege.bc.ca Internet Website: http://www.capcollege.bc.ca/dept/badm BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION BBA DEGREE (BUSINESS MANAGEMENT) Capilano College business d i p l o m a graduates have the option o f pursuing the Open University o f B . C . ' s B a c h - Program Information W e offer the following choices of business programs, w h i c h are described in detail in this order: elor o f Business Administration ( B B A ) degree. Graduates may be eligible for a transfer o f up to 60 credits toward the B B A degree. In addition, most 300 level courses transfer to Open University for upper level credit. • Bachelor o f Business Administration ( B B A ) degree (four year) • B u s . A d m i n . Cooperative Education D i p l o m a Program (three year) • B u s . A d m i n . A d v a n c e d D i p l o m a (three year) • Business C o m p u t i n g C o - o p D i p l o m a (three year) The block transfer is available to recent graduates. Students w h o graduated prior to 1990 w i l l have their programs individually reviewed and may need to take additional courses to make up for any deficiencies i n the block transfer. Students may also have to make up some courses i f they received exemptions i n the Capilano College program. • Accelerated B u s . A d m i n . D i p l o m a (one year) T o be eligible for the full block transfer o f 60 credits toward the Bachelor o f Business Adminstration, graduates must meet the following requirements: • Professional A c c o u n t i n g Transfer Package • an appropriate C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e business d i p l o m a • B u s . A d m i n . D i p l o m a (two year) • Retail M a r k e t i n g C o - o p Certificate • E v e n i n g Certificate Programs • L o c a l G o v . A d m i n . Prof. Certificate • International Business Program • N e t w o r k Specialist Certificate • a m i n i m u m G P A o f 2.67 (70%) • a m i n i m u m grade o f 6 0 % for courses i n introductory economics and statistics • completion o f specific course requirements within the diploma program • completion o f the d i p l o m a program within the last seven years. Career/Vocational — Business Administration 201 D i p l o m a holders with an overall G P A o f less than 2.67 or The College who have graduated seven or more years ago may also • Gains valuable input from business, industry and apply to the O p e n University for entry into the degree government that is used to maintain program excel- completion program. These students may receive a lence. reduced block transfer. Degree completion requirements may be met by taking How are students selected for the Co-op Diploma Program? approved business courses at Capilano College, univer- Selection o f students for the C o - o p D i p l o m a Program i n sity transfer courses at C a p i l a n o College, and/or courses Accounting, Management or M a r k e t i n g is based on: offered by the Open University. A l l transfer credit is subject to the Open U n i v e r s i t y ' s transfer credit guide- 1. C o m p l e t i o n o f a m i n i m u m o f first year general business (30 credits). Courses completed at other lines. institutions may be acceptable. For more information, contact the Open Learning A g e n cy's Education A c c e s s Services at (604) 431-3300 or 1800-663-9711. 2. A m i n i m u m cumulative grade point average o f 2.67 calculated on Business Administration program courses. 3. References from two Business Administration instruc- BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION CO-OPERATIVE EDUCATION DIPLOMA PROGRAM tors. 4. A n interview with the C o - o p Education Placement Officer. What is Co-operative Education? Selection is competitive and space i n the C o - o p Program Co-operative (Co-op) Education is a program that is limited. integrates classroom study with related on-the-job work experience. On-campus study alternates with periods o f paid w o r k experience. The first w o r k term takes place What is the Co-op time pattern? during the M a y - t o - A u g u s t term; the second term from The C o - o p D i p l o m a Program takes 24 months to c o m - January to A p r i l . plete. It commences i n September and includes two w o r k Cooperative programs include A c c o u n t i n g , Business Computing, General Management, Marketing and Retail terms and four academic terms. T h e table shows the sequence o f study and w o r k periods. Academic Term 1 Academic Term 2 Work Term 1 Sept-Dec (4 mos.) Jan-Apr (4 mos.) May-Aug What are the benefits of Co-op Education? Academic Term 3 Work Term 2 C o - o p education is a three-way partnership among Sep-Dec (4 mos.) J a n - A p r (4 mos.) Marketing. (4 mos.) Academic Term 4 May-June (2 mos.) students, employers and the College, with benefits for each partner. W h a t happens after a student is admitted to the Co-op The Student Diploma Program? • Gains up to eight months o f valuable work experience. Students admitted to the C o - o p D i p l o m a Program i n • Earns a salary to help with educational costs. September w i l l be eligible to participate i n a w o r k • Is exposed to different jobs integrating classroom placement the following summer ( M a y to August). Prior study to registering in a work term, students must: • with on-the-job experience. Develops a network o f contacts to enhance future 1. Attend the pre-employment seminar series offered by employment possibilities. the C o - o p Education office. The Employer 2. Maintain a m i n i m u m o f 2.67 G P A . • 3. Have completed 60 credits i n the Business A d m i n i s - Gains a highly motivated employee with good general and specialized skills. • tration Program including the following prerequisites: Is able to evaluate a co-op student as a potential current and responsive i n today's constantly changing Accounting Option Marketing Option General Management Option market place. B F I N 249 B M K T 161 B F I N 244 employee. • Provides input to the College, helping it to keep Career/Vocational 202 — Business Administration BFIN 341 BFIN 342 BMKT 261 BMKT 263 Obtaining a co-op work placement is a joint effort by the students and the Co-op Education office. Admission to the Co-op diploma program does not guarantee work placement. Every effort is made to secure placements for eligible Co-op students. What else must be done to become eligible for the Co-op diploma? To assure timely completion of the requirements for the Co-op diploma, students will follow the course sequence outlined in the Co-op Diploma Planning Guide, available from the Co-op Education Office. Upon completion of the Business Administration Co-op option, students are eligible to receive a Business Administration Diploma in their option area (Accounting, Management or Marketing) with Co-op designation. How to Apply BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION — ADVANCED DIPLOMA Students wanting more concentrated business knowledge may complete the Advanced Business Diploma. You will establish your area of specialization and gain specific training pertinent to management practices in General Management, Accounting, Marketing or International Business. An Advanced Diploma requires 30 credits in addition to a Business Administration Diploma. To obtain an Advanced Diploma you must complete the courses identified below and an appropriate number of electives for a total of 30 credits. Electives offered in this program can be any business course or any course required to complete the Bachelor's Degree (B.B.A.) If you plan to earn a Business Administration Degree at Capilano, you should carefully choose your electives to fit the Degree requirements. Contact the appropriate degree completion convenor in the Business Administration Department. Students apply to the co-op program after completion of thefirst30 credits of the Business Administration Program. Courses required for all Advanced Diplomas Interested students should pick up an application kit at the Business Adminstration Co-op Education Office located in Cedar Building rooms 311 and 342. BADM 304 Business Policy IBUS 344 Communication, Culture and International Business For more information or to request an application kit contact: Business Administration Department Co-op Education Office Cedar Building, Office 311 or 342 Capilano College 2055 Purcell Way North Vancouver, B.C. V7J 3H5 Dave O'Leary, Co-op Coordinator Tel: (604) 984-1735 Fax (604) 984-1734 E-mail: doleary@capcollege.bc.ca Jillian Feist, Co-op Assistant Tel: (604) 983-7557 Fax: (604) 984-1734 E-mail: jfeist@capcollege.bc.ca Internet: http://www.capcollege.bc.ca/dept/badm/co-op/ Credits 3.0 6.0 General Management Advanced Diploma BFIN 244 Managerial Accounting BADM 302 Human Resource Management BADM 301 Operations Management Plus two approved electives Plus three additional electives Credits 3.0 3.0 3.0 6.0 m 24.0 Advanced Accounting Diploma Required: BFIN 142 Financial Accounting I Credits 3.0 Plus any six of the following courses, at least four of which must be taken in Year 3: BFIN BFIN BFIN BFIN BFIN BFIN 341 Cost Accounting I 342 Cost Accounting II 346 Financial Accounting II 347 Financial Accounting III 249 Accounting Microcomputer Applications 350 Advanced Financial Management Career/Vocational 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 — Business Administration 203 BFIN 351 Taxation Plus one elective 3.0 two options, and state what the options are. If y o u 3.0 have successfully completed all courses, your d i p l o m a w i l l then read: "Business Administration A d v a n c e d Advanced Marketing Diploma Credits D i p l o m a " . B o t h options y o u have completed w i l l be listed immediately below. In addition, your permanent Required: B M K T 261 Advertising 3.0 student record and transcript w i l l bear this informa- B M K T 263 Professional Selling Skills 3.0 tion. B M K T 360 M a r k e t i n g Research 3J) 2. Complete an A d v a n c e d D i p l o m a . A t a subsequent 9.0 time, you decide to complete the additional courses (minimum 15 credits) i n another option. Y o u c o m - Plus any three o f the following courses: plete these courses, then submit your Request for B M K T 362 Events M a r k e t i n g & Management 3.0 Evaluation together with your original d i p l o m a . Y o u r B M K T 364 Consumer Behaviour 3.0 diploma w i l l then be reissued to read: "Business B M K T 365 M a r k e t i n g Strategies & Administration A d v a n c e d D i p l o m a " . T h e options Decision Making 3.0 completed w i l l be listed immediately below, for B M K T 367 Promotion Strategy & A n a l y s i s 3.0 example: " A c c o u n t i n g and M a r k e t i n g Options." IBUS International Trade and Marketing 3.0 * Y o u must complete at least 15 additional credits for the 6.0 second option. 357 Plus two electives Note: A t least four o f the six marketing courses must be BUSINESS COMPUTING CO-OPERATIVE DIPLOMA PROGRAM (BCOP) taken in the year three. A d v a n c e d I n t e r n a t i o n a l Business D i p l o m a Capilano C o l l e g e Business students who have a Capilano Business dipoma (60 credits) or equivalent can qualify for the A d v a n c e d D i p l o m a in International Business by completing the f o l l o w i n g courses: Credits 1.5 I B U S 266 Directed Studies International Finance I B U S 321 I B U S 334 International Business C o m m u n i c a t i o n , Culture and I B U S 340 practicums with an innovative curriculum that follows the first year o f the regular Business D i p l o m a program. Job placements for qualifying students are full-time for a four-month term and are made through arrangements Required I B U S 220 This three-year program combines cooperative workplace 1.5 3.0 International Business 3.0 International Trade L a w 3.0 between the College and employers. Students, i n their second and third years, work closely w i t h an advisor to gain the best possible placement. U p o n completion o f their four academic terms and two work terms, graduates receive a Business D i p l o m a w i t h C o - o p designation. Career Opportunities International Marketing I B U S 357 International Trade Opportunities I B U S 399 A c a d e m i c elective 3.0 3.0 W i t h the comprehensive training provided, graduates w i l l 3.0 computer network administrators, and computer user A c a d e m i c elective 3.0 support. Business elective 3.0 Business elective 3.0 30.0 secure positions as system analysts, programmers, Contact Person: D a v e O'Leary, C o - o p Coordinator Tel: (604) 984-1735 Program Content A Second Option For Advanced Diplomas Y o u may complete a second option for any Advanced Business Administration D i p l o m a in the following ways: 1. Complete the C o r e courses required for all advanced diplomas, plus all the courses required as requisites for both options requested*. Indicate on your Request for Evaluation F o r m , that you wish to be evaluated for Career/Vocational 204 — Business Administration Prerequisite: First Y e a r Business Administration D i p l o m a Program or equivalent T E R M 1— F A L L B C O P 131 Introduction to Programming & Programming L o g i c BCOP 171 Credits 3.0 The Developmental T o o l s o f Information Systems 3.0 B C O P 204 B C O P 205 B C O P 215 Business C o m p u t i n g III A p p l i e d Statistics for Business Network I 3.0 3.0 1Q faculty hold full or part-time positions i n their area o f specialty. Class sizes are approximately 36 students, and the faculty are in direct contact with all their students. A 15.0 full-time course load provides a m i n i m u m o f 20 instruc- * P l u s a series o f n o n - c r e d i t s e m i n a r s on e m p l o y m e n t orientation. tional hours weekly. W e suggest at least 4 0 hours weekly o f outside studies and preparation time. T h e first year has a c o m m o n curriculum. In the second T E R M 2 — SPRING BCOP BCOP 214 305 year, students may concentrate on a particular area o f Business C o m p u t i n g I V N e t w o r k II 3.0 specialization that w i l l allow them to continue their 3.0 studies beyond the two-year diploma. T h i s includes the BCOP 231 Data Management 3.0 option to obtain a business degree (Bachelor o f Business CMPT 184 V i s u a l Basic 3.0 Administration, [ B . B . A . ] ) at C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e through CMPT 189 Introduction to a T h i r d the Open University o f B r i t i s h C o l u m b i a . Generation Language 1Q 15.0 TERM 3 —SUMMER B A D M 299 C o - o p Placement I 1Q 3.0 TERM 4 — FALL BCOP 206 A c c o u n t i n g for Managers 3.0 BCOP BCOP 304 306 Business C o m p u t i n g V C + + Levell 3.0 CMPT 230 Operating Systems 3.0 Systems Implementation 1Q C M P T 289 3.0 15.0 60 credit block transfer toward undergraduate degrees at the following universities; U N B C , R o y a l Roads, University o f Lethbridge and more. Contact the department for more detailed information. FIRST Y E A R — F A L L B A D M 101 Management B A D M 106 B C P T 121 BFIN 141 ENGL TERM 5-SPRING B A D M 399 D i p l o m a graduates may also be eligible to obtain up to a C o - o p Placement II 3.0 Organizational Behaviour 3.0 Business C o m p u t i n g I Accounting* 3.0 3.0 100 Composition 3.0 10 15.0 3.0 FIRST Y E A R — SPRING B A D M 102 Quantitative Methods 3.0 TERM 6 - SUMMER B A D M 304 Business P o l i c y BCOP 325 N e t w o r k III 3.0 B A D M 107 B C P T 122 BCOP 326 C + + LevelII 10 BMKT 9.0 C M N S 220 Total P r o g r a m Credits Credits 90.0 In the dynamic w o r l d o f computing, nothing is static! A s a result, we are constantly improving and updating the Business C o m p u t i n g C o - o p P r o g r a m in a balanced manner. W e strive to blend the mainstream o f information processing with the leading edge of the emerging technologies. Therefore, the components o f the program and the details o f the courses are subject to adjustment. 161 3.0 Business L a w I* 3.0 Business C o m p u t i n g II Marketing 3.0 3.0 A d v a n c e d Business W r i t i n g & Editing 3.0 15.0 *Note 1: Students planning to concentrate their studies in accounting may take B F I N 142 F i n a n c i a l A c c o u n t i n g I in place o f B A D M 107 Business L a w I i n the spring term. Business L a w ( B A D M 107) w i l l then be taken i n the second year . Students not planning to take B F I N 142 may take Marketing in the first term and A c c o u n t i n g i n the second term. N o t e 2*: A l l future incoming students w i l l require both DIPLOMA PROGRAMS — TWO YEAR — FULL-TIME STUDIES (60 CREDITS) E n g l i s h 100 and B A D M 101 Management as general prerequisites for a l l second level courses within the Business Administration Department. Students graduating w i t h a Capilano C o l l e g e D i p l o m a w i l l have the skills and knowledge required to be effective managers. Courses are taught by instructors with practical, up-to-date business knowledge. M a n y o f the Career/Vocational — Business Administration 205 Credits SECOND YEAR B A D M 201 Business Systems business) be university transfer courses from C a p i l a n o . Business Statistics 3.0 Students should consider courses in Geography, Economics, 241 Finance F o r Managers 111 M i c r o E c o n o m i c s 3.0 Sociology or any language other than E n g l i s h 100; 3.0 however, most non-business courses at or above the 100 Business Elective 3.0 level w i l l be acceptable. Students should check with a Business E l e c t i v e 3.0 coordinator to be sure. O n l y courses that carry transfer Business E l e c t i v e 3.0 credit to the Open University o f B . C . , as indicated i n the Business Elective 3.0 B . C . Transfer Guide, should be chosen. Students are General E l e c t i v e (non- business) 3.0 reminded that the Open University o f B . C . w i l l only grant General Elective (non-•business) 3.0 a block transfer o f up to 60 credits for the Business 30.0 Administration D i p l o m a toward the B B A degree, so B A D M 210 BFIN ECON W e strongly recommend that the two general electives (non- 3.0 choosing the right electives is important. 60.0 Total Diploma Credits Calculus is a requirement in the Bachelor o f Business Administration ( B . B . A . ) degree, therefore y o u may wish Concentrate Your Studies With Business Electives to take M A T H 107 Pre-Calculus for Business and Social Sciences as a general elective i n your second year, i f you T h e C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e Business D i p l o m a allows you to have not obtained at least a " C " grade i n M A T H 12. choose courses that interest you. S i x o f the 10 second- Students must maintain a m i n i m u m 2.0 G P A to continue year courses are electives. Y o u can use the electives to their studies from term to term. Those who fail to meet concentrate your studies, focus on career goals or the m i n i m u m level may be required to withdraw for at broaden your education. N o other two-year business least one term before reapplying to the program. diploma program gives y o u so much flexibility i n designing your education. Y o u can use the Business electives to commence specialization in any o f these management areas: ACCELERATED BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION DIPLOMA PROGRAMS • Accounting • Computing • General Management • Finance training for mature students. Students have the opportu- • Marketing • International Business nity to gain a clear understanding o f business principles The following is a partial list o f Business elective courses. Students planning to continue their studies beyond the two-year D i p l o m a should consult a coordinator to ensure they choose the appropriate electives. and to refine and add to the on-the-job experience they These 12-month programs are designed to offer business Credits 3.0 B A D M 301 B A D M 302 Operations Management H u m a n Resource Management B A D M 303 Industrial Relations 3.0 B A D M 304 Business P o l i c y Business C o m p u t i n g Presentation 3.0 BCPT 221 BFIN BFIN Graphics 142 Financial A c c o u n t i n g I 341 Cost A c c o u n t i n g I BFIN 351 BFIN 342 BFIN BMKT 350 261 3.0 3.0 A unique feature of the Accelerated Business A d m i n i s t r a tion D i p l o m a is the credit given for work experience. F o r a diploma, students must attain 60 credits, o f w h i c h nine P L A credits are assigned for a m i n i m u m w o r k experience of seven years. The remaining 51 credits are earned from satisfactory completion o f Business Administration courses. Students who do not have the m i n i m u m work experience are required to take additional courses so that they graduate with 60 credits. 3.0 T o allow for the particular educational needs o f students 3.0 who may have diverse w o r k i n g backgrounds, certain Taxation 3.0 courses offered by the Department may be substituted for Cost A c c o u n t i n g II A d v a n c e d Financial Management 3.0 others in the Second and T h i r d T e r m . T h e Coordinator's 3.0 3.0 approval must be obtained. B M K T 263 Advertising Professional Selling Skills BMKT 360 M a r k e t i n g Research 3.0 IBUS 321 International Business 3.0 Career/Vocational 206 have previously acquired. — Business 3.0 Administration Admission Requirements FALL • Grade 12 or equivalent or mature student status. BADM 107 Business L a w 3.0 BFIN 241 Finance for Managers 3.0 BFIN 341 Cost A c c o u n t i n g I 346 Financial A c c o u n t i n g II 161 Marketing • M i n i m u m o f seven years business experience i n industry, government or private business or an undergraduate degree and three years o f experience. BFIN BMKT • Personal interview conducted February to m i d - A p r i l with final acceptance based on the applicant's work experience, maturity and aptitude for the program. • A personal resumed Credits 3.0 3.0 3.0 Business Elective 3.0 SPRING B A D M 210 Business Statisdcs BFIN 342 Cost A c c o u n t i n g II • Submit the Capilano College A p p l i c a t i o n for A d m i s - BFIN sion together w i t h official transcripts and resume to BFIN 3.0 3.0 347 Financial A c c o u n t i n g III 350 A d v a n c e d Financial Management 2 Business Electives* A d m i s s i o n s , Office o f the Registrar. 6.0 Plus applicable P L A credits or equivalent 6J3 Total credit hours 60.0 ACCELERATED GENERAL MANAGEMENT S U M M E R (Classes start M a y 12) Credits BADM 102 Quantitative Methods (July/Aug) 3.0 BCPT 121 Business Computing I (May/June) 3.0 BCPT 122 Business Computing II (July/Aug) 3.0 BFIN 141 A c c o u n t i n g (May/June) 3.0 BMKT 161 M a r k e t i n g (May/June) 3.0 FALL BADM 107 Business L a w I B A D M 210 Business Statistics BFIN 241 Finance for Managers 3.0 BMKT 3.0 263 Professional Selling Skills 2 Business Electives at the 200 or 300 level 3.0 3.0 6.0 SPRING BADM 302 H u m a n Resource Management B A D M 304 Business P o l i c y BFIN 244 Management A c c o u n t i n g IBUS 334 Communication, Culture and International Business 2 Business Electives at the 200 or 300 level Plus applicable P L A credits or equivalent Total credit hours ACCELERATED MARKETING MANAGEMENT S U M M E R (Classes start M a y 12) (May/June) B C P T 121 Business Computing I B F I N 141 B A D M 102 B A D M 201 Quantitative Methods Business Systems 3.0 3.0 3.0 Business C o m p u t i n g II FALL B A D M 107 Business L a w I 3.0 B M K T 261 Advertising 3.0 B M K T 263 Professional Selling S k i l l s Marketing Research 3.0 3.0 B M K T 365 3.0 3.0 Marketing Strategies and D e c i s i o n Making 1 Business Elective at the 200 or 300 level 6.0 9JJ 60.0 Credits 3.0 3.0 121 Business C o m p u t i n g I 3.0 BFIN 141 Accounting 3.0 BFIN 142 F i n a n c i a l Accounting I 3.0 A d v a n c e d Business W r i t i n g and Editing 3.0 B C P T 122 B M K T 360 BCPT •CMNS220 3.0 Accounting Marketing (July/August) B A D M 102 Quantitative Methods 3.0 3.0 SPRING B A D M 304 Business P o l i c y 3.0 B F I N 241 Finance for Managers 3.0 B M K T 364 Consumer Behaviour 3.0 B M K T 367 Promotion Strategy & A n a l y s i s 1 Business E l e c t i v e * 3.0 I B U S 334 Communication, Culture and ACCELERATED ACCOUNTING MANAGEMENT S U M M E R (Classes start M a y 12) Credits B M K T 161 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 International Business Plus applicable P L A credits or equivalent T o t a l credit h o u r s 3.0 3.0 60.0 * A n y appropriate Business Administration course o f 3 credits. 3.0 * Please see convenor i f a signature is required. Career/Vocational — Business Administration 207 ACCELERATED COMPUTER SYSTEMS PROFESSIONAL ACCOUNTING TRANSFER MANAGEMENT (ACSM) PACKAGE Capilano C o l l e g e offers a 10-month program leading to a D i p l o m a i n Computer Systems Management. The This package of courses is designed to m a x i m i z e transfer credit to professional accounting associations: Certified program is offered i n two-month segments to enable you to concentrate intensely over a shorter period o f time. This program begins in January every year. General Accountants ( C G A ) , Certified Management Accountants Society o f B . C . ( C M A ) , and Chartered Accountants ( C A ) . A l l certified courses are taught by our N o v e l l and Student's wanting to maximize their transfer credit in the Microsoft certified instructors - Capilano College is the shortest possible time w o u l d select courses from those only college or university certified by both N o v e l l and recommended below. Microsoft in Western Canada. W e are also accredited by C I P S - the Canadian Information Processing Society. Students w i l l not receive a d i p l o m a or certificate without taking further courses. C a l l the Business Administration Department for a brochure and details. Appointments for interviews are SUMMER (Classes start May 12) conducted throughout the year. B A D M 102 Quantitative Methods BFIN 141 Accounting B F I N 142 Financial A c c o u n t i n g I 3.0 Business Systems Business C o m p u t i n g I 3.0 See our Website for current information: http://www.capcollege.bc.ca/dept/badm B A D M 201 BCPT Program Content T E R M 1 — Jan./Feb. BMKT 160 CMPT 152 CMPT 155 CMPT 180 Credits 3.0 Marketing Structured Programming 3.0 Quantitative Methods for Managers 3.0 3.0 M i c r o c o m p u t e r Applications I T E R M II — Mar./April CMPT 153 Object Oriented Programming I CMPT 182 Introduction to Systems CMPT 191 A c c o u n t i n g for Managers I CMPT 222 M i c r o c o m p u t e r Applications II T E R M m- - May/June BCOP 215 N e t w o r k I BCOP 231 Data Management CMPT 184 V i s u a l B a s i c 223 M i c r o c o m p u t e r Applications III CPT C M N S 220 Advanced Business W r i t i n g and Editing* 3.0 3.0 3.0 FALL B A D M 107 Business L a w I 3.0 B F I N 341 Cost A c c o u n t i n g I 3.0 B F I N 346 Financial A c c o u n t i n g II 3.0 12.0 B F I N 241 Finance for Managers 3.0 1.5 SPRING 3.0 B F I N 342 3.0 3.0 B F I N 347 10.5 B A D M 210 Cost A c c o u n t i n g II Financial A c c o u n t i n g III Advanced Financial Management Business Statistics 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 B F I N 350 These offerings are subject to change. 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 12.0 T E R M I V - - July/Aug. BCOP 305 N e t w o r k II CMPT 154 Object Oriented Programming II CMPT 224 M i c r o Applications I V CMPT 230 Operating Systems 121 3.0 3.0 3.0 * Please see convenor i f signature is required. RETAIL MARKETING CO-OP PROGRAM Contact Persons: Charlene H i l l , 984-1721 D o u g L o b l a w , 983-7555 General Information 3.0 3.0 1. After one year o f successfully completing the course 12.0 requirements o f this program a student can obtain a Retail Marketing C o - o p Certificate. T E R M V - SeptyOct. BCOP 325 Network III CMPT 276 Projects in Industry-Practicum CMPT 289 Systems Implementation 3.0 1.5 2. U p o n successful completion o f the one-year C o - o p 3.0 to the Business Administration D i p l o m a Program. Plus applicable PLA credits or equivalent 6£ Students are encouraged to go on to complete the Total Credit Hours 54.0 D i p l o m a requirements. Career/Vocational 208 — Business Administration Certificate program seven courses w i l l be transferable 3. A student who completes a Business Administration Program Content D i p l o m a with a m i n i m u m G P A o f 2.67 (70%) may be FIRST Y E A R — F A L L eligible for a transfer o f up to 60 credits toward the B A D M 101 Management 3.0 Open University's Bachelor of Business A d m i n i s t r a - BCPT CMNS 121 152 Business C o m p u t i n g I Report W r i t i n g 3.0 RMCP RMCP 164 172 Creative Retail Strategies Retail Technology tion Degree ( B B A ) . Students wishing to complete their degree requirements may do so through Capilano C o l l e g e and the O U . F o r more information on the O U degree program please refer to the complete description i n the C o l l e g e calendar. Credits 3.0 3.0 Store Management I Instructional Credits 10 15.0 This exciting Retail M a r k e t i n g C o - o p program offers something for everyone, including the opportunity to earn your tuition and more while you study the practical w o r l d o f Retail Marketing. N o t e : The students w i l l be given 12 hours o f preemployment seminars prior to their co-op work experience period. Career Opportunities C O - O P P L A C E M E N T — December-January R M C P 190 F a l l C o - o p W o r k Placement M a n a g i n g your o w n business FIRST Y E A R — SPRING 3.0 Store Manager—independent or chain B M K T 161 Marketing 3.0 Department Manager B M K T 263 Professional Selling Skills 3.0 Wholesale Sales Representative RMCP 154 Creative A d v e r t i s i n g Production 1.5 Manufacturer's Sales Representative RMCP 157 Event Management 1.5 Manufacturer's A g e n t RMCP 173 Retail Finance/Store Management U 3.0 Fashion Promotion Consultant RMCP 181 Strategic Retail B u y i n g M a r k e t i n g Research-Field Operator Instructional Credits 15.0 A d v e r t i s i n g Manager Total Instructional Credits 30.0 B u y e r and Central B u y e r Total Co-op W o r k Credits 3.0 3J) Sales Manager V i s u a l Presentation Specialist Sales Promotion Manager Sales Representative Consumer Products M a r k e t i n g Assistant Retail or D e s i g n Consultant Admission Requirements • Grade 12 or equivalent with preference given to applicants w i t h a m i n i m u m o f C + in English 12 and C in M a t h 11, or • Mature student status • A n interview may be required EVENING CERTIFICATE PROGRAMS The courses in these programs, beginning i n September and January each year, w i l l teach the student basic managerial skills that are o f practical value i n a wide variety o f jobs. Classes are conducted by Department faculty and industry specialists and offered M o n d a y to Thursday evenings. Those enrolled i n the programs may take the courses at their chosen pace. A number o f credit courses from both the full-time D i p l o m a Programs and the part-time Certificate Programs are offered evenings during the Spring and F a l l terms. • Canadian citizenship or landed immigrant status BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION CERTIFICATE • Submission o f the Capilano College Application for A Certificate i n Business Administration w i l l be awarded A d m i s s i o n together with official transcripts to A d m i s sions, Office o f the Registrar. after successful completion of the two required courses and a choice of any four additional three-credit courses chosen from the Business Administration evening or daytime offerings. Substitution may be allowed at the discretion o f the evening program coordinator. Career/Vocational — Business Administration 209 REQUIRED B A D M 101 OPTIONAL 3.0 B A D M 101 Management 3.0 B A D M 103 Supervisory Skills 3.0 3.0 B A D M 106 Organizational Behaviour 3.0 3.0 B A D M 107 Business L a w I 3.0 BMKT 161 Marketing 3.0 BFIN 141 Accounting 3.0 142 Financial A c c o u n t i n g I 3.0 or B A D M 108 Introduction to Business B M K T 161 M a r k e t i n g OPTIONAL BADM BADM BADM BADM 102 Quantitative Methods I 103 Supervisory Skills 3.0 BFIN 3.0 Other courses are offered by the Business Administration 106 Organizational Behaviour 107 Business L a w I 3.0 Department. Business Systems 3.0 B A D M 201 3.0 B A D M 210 Business Statistics B A D M 307 Business L a w II B A D M 268 Entrepreneurship/Small Bus. 3.0 Management 3.0 3.0 LOCAL GOVERNMENT ADMINISTRATION PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATE T h i s program is designed w i t h and for professionals 3.0 BFIN 121 Business C o m p u t i n g I 122 Business C o m p u t i n g II 141 A c c o u n t i n g BFIN 142 Financial A c c o u n t i n g I 3.0 BCPT BCPT Credits Credits Management 3.0 3.0 currently employed by Municipalities, R e g i o n a l Districts, Improvement Districts, or supporting agencies i n British Columbia. The purpose o f the program is to provide opportunities for participants to gain increased knowledge o f the Or other courses offered by the Business Administration political and organizational realities o f local governments Department. in B . C . as w i l l as identifying opportunities for change A D V A N C E D BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION CERTIFICATE be more effective managers, leaders and change agents as within these systems. It is expected that participants w i l l a result o f their involvement i n the program. A second or advanced certificate w i l l be awarded following successful completion o f an additional four threecredit courses. These must be chosen from the Business Administration evening or daytime offerings. The Education Committee o f the M u n i c i p a l Officers' Association o f British C o l u m b i a and the P r o v i n c i a l B o a r d of Examiners has sanctioned several courses o f study offered through the College and University systems i n Note: A student must attain a 2.0 G P A or better to British C o l u m b i a w h i c h , when supplemented by work qualify for either certificate. experience in B . C . local government w i l l lead to P r o v i n cial Certification. BUSINESS C O M P U T I N G CERTIFICATE The four courses described below are recognized by the A Certificate i n Business C o m p u t i n g w i l l be awarded M . O . A . and B o a r d o f Examiners as being transferable for after successful completion o f the four required courses credit toward the Intermediate Certificate in Municipal and a choice o f any two additional three-credit courses Administration. (For more details about the B o a r d o f chosen from the Business Administration evening or E x a m i n e r s ' / M . O . A . Certificate Programs, contact L i l l i a n daytime offerings. Whittier, Executive Director, M u n i c i p a l Officers' A s s o ciation, V i c t o r i a at 604-383-7032.) REQUIRED Credits B A D M 201 Business Systems* 3.0 BCPT 121 Business C o m p u t i n g I 3.0 BCPT 122 Business C o m p u t i n g II 3.0 BCPT 221 Business C o m p u t i n g Presentation Graphics 3.0 this course. N o t all courses w i l l be offered each year. 210 — Business (Local Government Administration, L o c a l Government Services, L o c a l Government L a w , and M u n i c i p a l Finance in British C o l u m b i a ) , plus two other courses, successful * Please contact the convenor for possible substitute for Career/Vocational O n completion o f the following four P A D M courses Administration candidates w i l l be eligible to receive a Capilano College Professional Certificate in Local Government Administration. Contact L i n n Teetzel, 984-4960, local 2340. COURSES P A D M 200 Credits L o c a l Government Administration 3.0 P A D M 201 L o c a l Government Service 3.0 P A D M 202 M u n i c i p a l Finance in Contact: A n n e Watson (604) 984-4960, L o c a l 2341 Fax: (604) 984-4993; Attention S. M i l e t i c British C o l u m b i a P A D M 203 NETWORK SPECIALIST CERTIFICATE PROGRAM 3.0 E - m a i l : smiletic@capcollege.bc.ca M u n i c i p a l L a w in British C o l u m b i a 3.0 A n all new-program designed for computer professionals T w o B A D M , A c a d e m i c or other courses approved by the Department. 6.0 18.0 who need essential cross-platform networking skills. A l l certified courses are taught by our N o v e l l and Microsoft certified instructors. C a p i l a n o C o l l e g e is the INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS PROGRAM only college or university certified by both N o v e l l and R e c o g n i z i n g that world trade has assumed a position o f Microsoft in Western Canada. W e are also accredited by major importance in the global community, the Business C I P S - the Canadian Information Processing Society. Department has developed an International Business program that w i l l provide students with a professional Planned start date is September 1997 level o f competence in the international arena. T h i s program w i l l provide students with the knowledge, cultural awareness and business skills required to do business i n the ever growing Pacific R i m countries. T w o levels o f this program are available. F o r Capilano C o l l e g e Business Administration D i p l o m a graduates, COURSES Microsoft W i n d o w s 95/97 N o v e l l 4.1 x IntranetWare System Credits 3.0 Administration 3.0 N o v e l l 4.1 x Design and Implementation 3.0 Business as detailed previously under the A d v a n c e d Microsoft W i n d o w s N T 4 C l i e n t 3.0 D i p l o m a heading. Microsoft W i n d o w s N T 4 Server 3.0 For graduates o f other colleges or universities, we offer a Networking T C P / I P & W e b Server Installation 10 there is a new A d v a n c e d D i p l o m a in International Certificate i n International Business upon completion of the following two-term program. A number of the I B U S courses are transferable to the Bachelor o f Business Administration ( B B A ) degree completion program. Contact the convenor for details. 18.0 One course w i l l be offered every two months on Friday afternoon and Saturdays - a total o f 56 full hours o f lecture and lab for each course. The f o l l o w i n g courses are required to qualify for the COURSE DESCRIPTIONS Certificate in International Business: IBUS IBUS IBUS 220 266 IBUS 321 334 IBUS 340 IBUS IBUS Directed Studies International Finance International Business Credits 1.5 1.5 3.0 Communication, Culture and International Business International Trade L a w 3.0 3.0 357 International M a r k e t i n g 3.0 399 International Trade Opportunities 3.0 B A D M 268 Entrepreneurship/Small Business BADM 101 Management (3) (3,0,1) (F.S) Students study modern management practices, current events, ethics and problem solving. In addition, students w i l l study and practice effective public speaking. The course instructors w i l l facilitate discussion and integrate topics through the use o f contemporary business issues. BADM 102 Quantitative Methods (3) (3,0,1) (F,S,Su) Management 3.0 This course provides a strong foundation i n the math- Finance for Managers 3.0 ematics o f finance and business. T h e student w i l l utilize Business elective 3.0 standard financial models in analysis, problem solving, Business elective ^ 0 BFIN Total: 241 30.0 and decision-making. Computer spreadsheet applications are utilized. Requirements: 1. Acceptance into a Business Administration full-time Career/Vocational — Business Administration 211 program or a m i n i m u m C + in M a t h 11 or equivalent. 2. A w o r k i n g knowledge o f computer spreadsheets. B A D M 201 Prerequisite: B A D M 103 (3) (3) (3,0,1) (F.S) Business Systems B C P T 121 with m i n i m u m C grade. (3,0,1) (F.S) Students w i l l be required to apply the concepts and Supervisory Skills theories learned i n their first year courses to solve Study o f human elements in organizations, with emphasis integrated business problems i n a logical and literate on group behaviour. Concepts in persuasion, guidance manner. The importance o f accurate, dependable, and understanding o f the individual within the group. management information for problem solving w i l l be Applications o f human relations management, i.e. illustrated through case study analysis and a major group leadership, power, authority, group dynamics, formal and project. informal organization, communications, conflict and the B A D M 210 introduction o f change. (3) (3,0.1) (F.S) Business Statistics B A D M 106 (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) This course provides a strong foundation i n basic busi- Organizational Behaviour ness statistics emphasizing analysis and decision-making The objective o f this course is to allow the student to in the face o f certainty and uncertainty. develop the necessary skills and conceptual tools to both applications of descriptive, inferential, and bivariate understand and deal effectively with human behaviour in models are utilized. Spreadsheet organizations. These skills are of at least two kinds: 1. interpersonal, that is, relating more effectively with B A D M 268 (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) Entrepreneurship/Small Business M a n a g e m e n t other individuals and groups, and 2. analytical, to be able to perceive and understand Skills needed in problem solving and researching the situations accurately, and make effective decisions small business environment w i l l be learned and applied. based on this understanding. Business owners, managers and w o u l d be decision makers are encouraged to take this course. T h e instructor B A D M 107 (3) (3,0,1) (F.S) Business L a w I and guest lecturers from the business community w i l l lead students through detailed aspects o f business from Students w i l l be introduced to the components o f the finance to human relations. The production o f the Canadian legal system, and w i l l examine the effect o f business plan w i l l be discussed and part o f a plan w i l l be both c o m m o n and statute law on business relationships. written. A study o f the basic principles o f commercial law w i l l (Su) provide the foundation for a detailed examination o f B A D M 299* Contract L a w , i n c l u d i n g the sale o f goods, consumer C o - o p W o r k Experience I protection legislation, and employment and labour law, as The first co-op work experience is designed to provide w e l l as an examination o f tort law, company and partner- students with a 4-month full time work term i n business, ship law, and creditor remedies. (3) industry or government. The main thrust o f this course is the opportunity to put into practise the major aspects o f B A D M 108 (3) (3.0,1) Introduction t o Business the students' business education. Special emphasis w i l l be placed on assessing the attitude and work ethic o f the This course w i l l explain the five key tasks in managing "co-oping" student. Students w i l l be encouraged to an enterprise: Planning, A c q u i s i t i o n o f Resources, network in the industry and to participate i n professional Organization, A c t i v a t i o n and Control. In addition, the key organizations. organizational functions of Marketing, Production, * B A D M 299 can be accepted as a lower level general Finance and Personnel are covered. The course is business elective i n D i p l o m a programs only. essentially an overview o f the theoretical framework o f the task o f management. Career/Vocational 212 — Business Administration B A D M 301 Operations Management Prerequisite: (3) (3.0,1) (F.S) A second l a w course w i l l examine the effect o f both common and statute law on business relationships. A B A D M 210 with m i n i m u m C grade. O f special interest to generalist managers and operators o f small businesses, this one term course familiarizes the student with the principles, practices and functions o f production-operations management, using modern decision-making aids. Foundation skills in production and control (inventory, quality and cost control) are examined using computing devices and procedures. B A D M 302 (3) H u m a n Resource M a n a g e m e n t (3,0,1) (F,S) review of the basic principles o f commercial l a w w i l l lead to the examination o f more complex contractual relationships such as agency, insurance, bailment, real property, commercial tenancy, legal devices for securing credit including mortgages, and bankruptcy. Other topics include competition law, management and operation o f a corporation and intellectual property. B A D M 399 C o - O p W o r k Experience II (3) (S) Prerequisite: B A D M 299 The second co-op work experience is designed to provide Prerequisite: 45 credits T h i s course provides the student with a basic, functional understanding o f current personnel/human resourcemanagement concepts and applications in developing small and larger business. Special emphasis w i l l be placed on the concept o f personnel management being the responsibility o f A L L management, not just the Personnel Department. students with a 4-month full time work term in business, industry or government. T h e m a i n thrust o f this course is the opportunity to put into practise the major aspects o f the students' business education. Special emphasis w i l l be placed on assessing the attitude and work ethic o f the "co-oping" student. Students w i l l be encouraged to network in the industry and to participate i n professional organizations. B A D M 303 (3) (3,0,1) (F.S) Industrial Relations BCOP 131 Prerequisite: 45 credits Introduction t o Programming a n d P r o g r a m m i n g Logic (3) (3,0,1) (F) T h i s course deals with the management o f employment relations as conducted through collective bargaining. Practical problems are examined in the light of public policy negotiating processes and dispute resolution. B A D M 304 Business Policy (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) Prequisite: 75 credits T h e student gains a basic understanding o f the concepts, purposes, and procedures o f business policy, and an integrated v i e w o f the strategic management o f business enterprise. Participating i n a practical business simulation game is a major component of the course. For accelerated, A d v a n c e d D i p l o m a and Open University (pending) students only. B A D M 307 BCOP 171 (3) (3,0,1) (S) The Developmental Tools o f Information Systems A traditional look at the systems o f development process. M o d e l l i n g and charting w i l l be included. The tools and methodology applied by the systems analyst w i l l be studied. T h e course covers the system life cycle, system flow charting, Data F l o w Diagrams, P E R T / C P M Networks. BCOP 204 (3) (3,0,1) (F.S) Business L a w II Prerequisite: This is the foundation course for all programming skills developed by the program. Design techniques using hierarchy charts, flowchart, and pseudo code w i l l be studied. T h e course w i l l use a computer language to demonstrate the structured programming skills necessary for good programming. Business L a w I, or an introductory college (3) (3.0,1) (F) Business C o m p u t i n g III Prerequisite: B C P T 122 with m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission o f the instructor. or university course in commercial or contract law, or by This course extends the students knowledge o f O/S batch permission o f the instructor. files to configure the modern P C for best performance. Career/Vocational — Business Administration 213 graphic presentations and desktop publishing i n the BCOP 303 (3) (3,0,1) (F) Information Systems & Client Server Architecture W i n d o w s environment. Prerequisite: The course also provides more in depth instruction on B C O P 171 with m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission of the instructor. BCOP 205 (3) (3,0,1) (F) A n introduction to client-server architecture and software A p p l i e d Statistics f o r Business using a systems approach. Prerequisite: Acceptance into the full time Business Computing C o - o p Program or a m i n i m u m C + in M a t h 11 or equivalent. A w o r k i n g knowledge o f W i n d o w s . BCOP 304 Business C o m p u t i n g V This course provides a strong foundation in business Prerequisite: statistical models and techniques emphasizing analysis permission o f the instructor. and decision making i n the face of certainty and uncertainty. Data A n a l y s i s software ( S P S S ) is utilized for applications o f descriptive, inferential, bivariate and multiple regression models. BCOP 206 Accounting for Managers Prerequisite: (3,0.1) (F) Study o f managerial and financial information requirements and controls necessary to support specific decisions w i t h an emphasis on budgeting, forecasting, controlling and decision making. (3) (3,0,1) (F) Network II B C O P 215 with m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission o f the instructor. tion for the daily tasks o f network administration. Topics include: client setup and maintenance, user maintenance, server maintenance, the file system, establishing systems security, printing set-up, E - m a i l and backup. T h e successful student may apply their knowledge towards (3) (3,0.1) (S) Business C o m p u t i n g IV Prerequisite: problems using advanced development tools. A computer industry certified course providing a founda- permission o f the instructor. BCOP 214 Development o f solutions to mission critical business Prerequisite: B F I N 141 with m i n i m u m ' C grade or (3,0,1) (F) B C O P 214 with m i n i m u m ' C grade or BCOP 305 (3) (3) B C O P 204 with m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission o f the instructor. the optional certification exam. BCOP 306 C ++ Level I Prerequisite: (3) (3,0,1) (F) B C O P 131, C M P T 184, B C O P 214 with Students w i l l develop applications for database management using the programming features of the D B M S . minimum 'C grade or permission of the instructor. BCOP 215 C++. (3) (3,0,1) (S) Network I BCOP 325 Prerequisite: B C O P 131 and B C O P 2 0 4 with a m i n i m u m ' C grade o r permission o f the instructor. A n introduction to the field o f data communications and networking, covering networking hardware/operating system concepts, modem, W A N , and L A N standards and protocols, with server installation. (3.0,1) (S) ' C grade o r permission o f the instructor. The structure, design and control of hierarchical, network and relational databases. Emphasis is on modeling tools as applied to business case studies. 214 Prerequisite: B C O P 215 or B C O P 305 with m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission o f the instructor. A N o v e l l Certified course providing a foundation for the daily tasks o f network administration using Netware 4.x. directory services setup and maintenance, user maintesystems security, and print setup. After the course, the C M P T 182 or B C O P 121 with m i n i m u m — Business (3,0.1) (Su) nance, server maintenance, the file system, establishing Data M a n a g e m e n t Career/Vocational (3) Network III Topics include: client setup and maintenance, global (3) BCOP 231 Prerequisite: A n introduction to object-oriented programming using Administration student may write the optional 4.x C N A exam for their Certified N o v e l l Administrator designation. BCOP 326 (3) (3,0,1) (Su) C + + Level II Prerequisite: This course is designed to prepare the student for courses in Managerial A c c o u n t i n g and Financial Management. B C O P 306 with m i n i m u m ' C grade or BFIN 142 permission o f the instructor. (3) (3.0,1) (S) Financial A c c o u n t i n g I C o n t i n u i n g introduction in the design and use o f objectoriented programming principles using C + +. See B A D M 299 a n d B A D M 399 for BCOP C o - o p W o r k Placement. Prerequisite: B S M G 178 with at least a C - grade, B F I N 141 with at least a C - grade or O T E C 217 with at least a C + grade. Students w i l l apply generally accepted accounting BCPT 121 (formerly B S M G 180) (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) principles to the establishment and maintenance o f accounting systems, including the preparation, analysis Business C o m p u t i n g I and interpretation o f financial statements. ( C . G . A . , Prerequisite: None C . M . A . , and C A . transferable). A n introduction to the use o f microcomputers in business. This course provides hands-on experience with word processing, data management and graphic user interface BFIN 241 Finance for M a n a g e r s (3) software. A l s o , it looks at the operating system and its Prerequisite: functions. Students w i l l examine the uses o f computers m u m C - grade in both courses. (3.0,1) (F.S) B F I N 141 and B A D M 102 with a m i n i - today and the selection process for acquiring hardware In this practical financial management course students and software. study financial management techniques. They apply this BCPT 122 (formerly B S M G 222) Business C o m p u t i n g II (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) knowledge to business decisions. T o p i c s i n this course include: evaluating business performance, financial institutions and markets, valuation o f financial assets, Prerequisite: B C P T I 2 l with a m i n i m u m C - grade, or by permission o f the instructor. finance. Contemporary financial issues are discussed This course is a continuation of B C P T 121, providing throughout this course. obtaining financing, managing assets and international further uses of microcomputers in business. Students w i l l receive hands-on experience with spreadsheets and BFIN 244 presentation graphics and graphical user interface soft- Management Accounting ware. Prerequisite: BCPT 221 (3) (3.0,1) (F.S) Business C o m p u t i n g Presentation Graphics Prerequisite: B C P T 122, Business Computing II (C grade or better) This course is an introductipn to sophisticated presentation, graphics and desktop publishing software, and related hardware, for the purpose of producing high quality business presentations and advertising materials on a personal computer. BFIN 141 Accounting (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) (3) (3.0.1) (F) B F I N 141 with a m i n i m u m C - grade. This course introduces students to the specialized area o f Management Accounting. It provides an overview o f controls affected internally by management using the tools o f budgets, costing and analysis. Planning for an organization w i l l be examined from both the capital and operations perspectives. BFIN 249 (3) (3,0,1) (S) Accounting M i c r o c o m p u t e r Applications Prerequisite: B F I N 142 with a m i n i m u m C - grade. Students w i l l complete microcomputer accounting implementation projects using A C C P A C accounting software. They w i l l be expected to demonstrate their This course is an introduction to financial concepts and understanding o f the practical constraints o f internal business principles. Students w i l l record business control in the A C C P A C environment. Systems covered transactions and create financial statements. A l s o they w i l l include general ledger, A / R and A / P (inventory w i l l be exposed to a broad range o f topics including legal optional). compliance, asset management and financial statement analysis. Career/Vocational — Business Administration 215 BFIN 341 (3) (3,0,2) (F) Prerequisite: BFIN 350 (3) (3,0,1) (S) A d v a n c e d Financial M a n a g e m e n t Cost A c c o u n t i n g I Prerequisite: B F I N 142 with a m i n i m u m C - grade. A study o f organizational decision making and planning B F I N 142 and B F I N 241 with a m i n i m u m C - grade. The content of this course concentrates on the develop- using accounting tools. T o p i c s include the nature o f accounting controls, c o m m o n control methods, measures ment o f analytical and conceptual skills for financial of management performance, and the role o f the manage- decision-making. The course places emphasis on capital ment cost accountant. ( C . G . A . , C . M . A . , and C A . asset pricing models, capital budgeting and capital Transferable with B F I N 342) structures. ( C . G . A . , C . M . A . and C A . Transferable with B F I N 241) BFIN 342 (3,0,1) (S) (3) BFIN 351 Cost A c c o u n t i n g II Prerequisite: (3) (3.0,1) (S) Taxation B F I N 341 w i t h a m i n i m u m C - g r a d e . Prerequisite: A more in-depth study o f subjects covered in Cost B F I N 142 with a m i n i m u m C - grade. Accounting I. Cost determination for manufacturing This course familiarizes the student with the Canadian operations, planning and cost control systems, perform- income tax system as it applies to corporations, share- ance evaluation methods, and strategic decision-making holders, and unincorporated businesses, so that the methods. ( C . G . A . , C . M . A . and C A . Transferable with student can identify potential tax problem areas, complete B F I N 341) the basic compliance forms, and appreciate its impact on some business decisions. (Transferable to C . M . A . and BFIN 344 (3) (3,0,1) (S) CA.) Personal Investment M a n a g e m e n t Prerequisite: B M K T 160 B F I N 241. (3) (3.0,1) (S) Marketing A central theme o f this course is investors using securities A n overview of marketing as applied to computer and to increase personal wealth. This is accomplished by related markets and products. Students w i l l participate in studying such topics as: types o f securities, security class discussions related to product planning, research, markets, modem portfolio theory, active asset manage- promotion and distribution systems. E a c h student w i l l ment, balancing risk and return, and security valuation make a sales presentation to the class. techniques. BFIN 346 Financial A c c o u n t i n g II Prerequisite: BFIN (3) (3,0.1) (F) 142 with a m i n i m u m C - g r a d e . This course studies the theories underlying financial statement presentations, and is a logical continuation and reinforcement o f the material covered in B F I N 142. The course encompasses the study o f Financial A c c o u n t i n g at the intermediate level. ( C . G . A . , C . M . A . and C A . Transferable with B F I N 347) BFIN 347 (3) (3,0.1) (S) B F I N 346 with a m i n i m u m C - grade. A sequel to B F I N 346 w h i c h examines current developments i n financial accounting and their effects on financial statement presentation. ( C . G . A . , C . M . A . and C A . Transferable w i t h B F I N 346) Transferable to S F U . 216 (3,0,1) (F.S) This course covers the full spectrum o f Canadian marketing o f consumer products and services i n c l u d i n g : M a r k e t segmentation, consumer behaviour, products, packaging, distribution and promotion. Students w i l l analyze case problems and prepare a report about "real-life" product or service from a consumer point o f view. marketing topics w i l l assist in the learning experience. Financial A c c o u n t i n g III Career/Vocational (3) Videos, guest speakers and in-class discussion about Transferable to S F U . Prerequisite: B M K T 161 Marketing — Business Administration B M K T 261 Advertising Prerequisite: (3) (3,0,1) (F) B M K T 364 (3.0,1) (S) (3) Consumer Behaviour B M K T 161. Prerequisite: B M K T 161, B M K T 360. T h i s course w i l l examine the Canadian and A m e r i c a n Today, as never before, studying the behaviour o f advertising industry from both micro and macro perspec- consumers is paramount for anyone pursuing a business tives. It w i l l enable the student to grasp the basic theo- career, especially in the marketing area. A blend o f both retical and practical approaches to advertising and concepts and applications from the field o f consumer provide an insight into the various aspects o f advertising behaviour w i l l form the basis o f this course. Students history, creativity, communication systems, media should find this subject very interesting and motivational choice, and other functions. This is not a course on when applied to several aspects of business management designing, creating, and preparing specific types o f including marketing research, creative advertising, team advertising, but is meant to serve as an overview o f what building and environmental marketing. Research advertising is and how it relates to other marketing projects, case discussions and problem solving w i l l be concepts and operations. stressed i n both individual and team activities. B M K T 263 Professional Selling Skills (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) basics, including effective listening, probing, problem finding and solving, and creativity w i l l be covered. Specific techniques o f professional selling including prospecting, qualifying and contracting prospects. The course w i l l also explore, in depth, the organization and management o f sales activities. Prerequisite: B M K T 161. This course w i l l explore in greater depth the concepts o f values and lifestyles, product development, service marketing, positioning, strategic planning, tactical promotion, international marketing and marketing notfor-profit organizations. The focus w i l l be on analyzing (3) (3.0,1) (F) making skills and applying "hands-on" tactical solutions for results. Guest lecturers, projects and special field trips w i l l be used to enhance the classroom components. B M K T 161 and B A D M 210. A n introductory course indicating how to make the most B M K T 366 out o f marketing research. Through practical applications Professional Sales a n d M a n a g e m e n t of a research project, students w i l l learn the elements o f Prerequisite: research design, basic methods o f collecting data, analysis and reporting. Applications of Canadian and A m e r i c a n research w i l l be studied. B M K T 362 (3) Event M a r k e t i n g a n d Management Prerequisite: (3,0,1) (F) marketing problems, developing strategic decision- M a r k e t i n g Research Prerequisites: (3) Marketing Strategies a n d Decision M a k i n g A n introduction to professional selling. Communication B M K T 360 B M K T 365 (3,0,1) (S) B M K T 161. (3) (3,0,1) (F) B M K T 263. This course w i l l cover two main topics, advanced professional selling techniques and sales force management. Students w i l l develop and practise their selling skills i n class and on a real-life sales project. The tools and systems o f sales management w i l l also be explored to prepare the individual for the human resource factor related to that type o f position. The trend i n business today is lo extend marketing dollars duce students to the skills and concepts necessary to B M K T 367 (3) Promotion Strategy a n d Analysis create, finance, and manage a special event. Students Prerequisite: into the area o f event marketing. This course w i l l intro- w i l l be expected to demonstrate an understanding o f how to choose and develop a specific event, demonstrate a knowledge o f specific budget elements and their relationship to revenue generating, develop an understanding o f event marketing and understand the administrative structure and skills necessary to manage a special event. (3,0,1) (S) B M K T 360 and B M K T 261. This is a course dealing with the development o f an advertising campaign ( C A P - A D S ) . Students w i l l study campaign strategy including how it is planned and organized i n cooperation with the production, marketing, sales and finance departments as w e l l as the use o f outside agencies. Some time w i l l be spent w i t h advertising research as a pre and post control factor. Career/Vocational — Business Administration 217 C M P T 152 (3) (3,0,1) (F) C M P T 184 (3) (3,0,1) (Su) Structured P r o g r a m m i n g Visual Basic Introduction to logic and program design. This course Prerequisite: concentrates on planning, designing and charting pro- mum grams for business related problems. The main part o f Application of object oriented visual development the course is theory based with some hands-on practical techniques to produce W i n d o w s applications. A l s o a work i n the latter weeks using a modern programming foundation o f the W i n d o w s programming tools. C M P T 152 and C M P T 180 w i t h a m i n i - ' C grade or permission o f the instructor. language. C M P T 189 C M P T 153 (3) (3,0,1) (S) (3) (3,0,1) (S) Intro t o a Third Generation L a n g u a g e Object O r i e n t e d P r o g r a m m i n g I Prerequisite: Prerequisite: C M P T 152 with a m i n i m u m ' C grade or B C O P 131 or C M P T 152 with m i n i m u m C grade. permission o f the instructor. Organization and writing of programs, program structure A n introduction to object oriented programming using V i s u a l Basic. students w i l l learn h o w to handle I/O for disk and reports. C M P T 154 (3) (3,0,1) (Su) Object O r i e n t e d P r o g r a m m i n g II Prerequisite: and language, test editing and compilation. Further, C M P T 153 with a m i n i m u m ' C grade or Emphasis w i l l be placed on developing typical business programs. C M P T 191 (3) (3.0,1) (S) permission o f the instructor. Accounting f o r M a n a g e r s I Continuation o f object-oriented programming and design Develops an understanding o f the elements o f the ac- using C + +. counting cycle. Introduces basic accounting concepts and procedures as a basis for financial decisions. Emphasis C M P T 155 (3) (3,0,1) (S) Quantitative M e t h o d s f o r M a n a g e r s Prerequisite: w i l l be placed on accounting information, systems and control. Acceptance into the full-time program or C M P T 222 permission o f the instructor. (3) (3,0,1) (S) Microcomputer Applications II A survey o f the basic quantitative tools used to a i d decision m a k i n g . Financial and statistical concepts, methods and applications w i l l be examined. Prerequisite: C M P T 180 with a m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission o f the instructor. Provides a basic understanding o f microcomputer C M P T 180 (3) (3,0.1) (S) concepts, hardware and software selection criteria, and M i c r o c o m p u t e r Applications I system and application software. Provides hands-on Provides an orientation to microcomputers in business; experience with W i n d o w s , spreadsheets, presentation including word processing, communicating with operat- graphics and data base management. ing systems and spreadsheets. C M P T 223 (3) C M P T 182 (3.0,1) (S) (3) (3,0,1) (Su) Microcomputer Applications III Introduction t o Systems Prerequisite: C M P T 222 with a m i n i m u m ' C grade or Provides a basic understanding of systems concepts and permission of the instructor. development o f specific skills: form design, coding, flow A n introduction to x B A S E concepts, databases, and charting, life-cycle phases and related written communi- D B M S programming. cation. Career/Vocational 218 — Business Administration C M P T 224 (1.5) M i c r o c o m p u t e r Applications IV Prerequisite: (3,0,1) (F) C M P T 223 with a m i n i m u m ' C grade or IBUS 334 (3) (3,0,1) (F,S) C o m m u n i c a t i o n , Culture a n d International Business permission o f the instructor. The objective o f this course is to increase the student's T h i s course covers the application o f graphics and cross-cultural awareness in business settings. It looks at desktop publishing development techniques in the how different cultures negotiate and regard contracts, production o f presentations in a W i n d o w s and web pages interpret commitments and deal with suppliers and environment. A solid foundation in computer hardware consumers. and trouble shooting techniques is also included. IBUS 340 C M P T 230 (3.0,1) (F) (3) (3) (3,0,0) International Trade Law O p e r a t i n g Systems Prerequisite: B A D M 107 Prerequisite: International trade conventions and agreements, the legal C M P T 184, C M P T 223 with a m i n i m u m ' C grade or permission o f the instructor. processes o f importing and exporting, and the challenge Comprehensive knowledge of the widely used operating of dealing with conflicting domestic laws between systems: U N I X , M S - D O S and W i n d o w s - N T . Some countries w i l l be studied. emphasis on file structures and recovery from hardware/ software errors as well as the operating system's Job IBUS 357 (3) (3.0,1) (S) International M a r k e t i n g Control Language and web server installation. Prerequisite: I B U S 321 C M P T 276 (1.5) Projects in Industry - Practicum (1.5,0,.5)(F) This course is an in-depth study o f marketing internationally. It assumes the student understands uncontrollable W o r k experience with host companies for the purpose o f variables in a foreign market (as covered in I B U S 321) applying knowledge to complete an industry-oriented and goes directly into the controllable variables and the project. management of marketing programs. C M P T 289 Systems Implementation Prerequisite: (3) (3,0,1) (F) IBUS 266 (1.5) (S) International Finance C M P T 293 with a minimum ' C grade or This course begins by reviewing basic accounting and permission of the instructor. financial analysis, then progresses to gaining an under- A project based course where students implement an online computer system applying analysis and design concepts from the System Development Life C y c l e . standing of international finance. Students w i l l also learn about foreign exchange, trade finance, foreign securities, and foreign collections. Pricing in the international forum as well as risk management w i l l be discussed. IBUS 220 (1.5) (1.5,0,.5)(S) Directed Studies Students w i l l be given the opportunity to research an IBUS 399 (3) International Trade Opportunities (F) offshore company and, while working directly with the This course w i l l be delivered as a seminar series, and is instructor, prepare and present their paper to a faculty designed to provide students with a broad perspective o f committee. the trade opportunities available and the strategies required to be successful in the world markets. IBUS 321 (3) (3,0,1) (F) International Business Industry leaders as well as government experts w i l l discuss topics which are relevant to the Canadian busi- T h i s course w i l l be a blend of lectures, case studies and ness people. Case studies w i l l be used to apply the discussions o f current events affecting business. Students concepts covered in the lectures. w i l l learn the terminology of international business and the process managers go through in "internationalizing" their business, including how uncontrollable elements o f international markets can impact business. Career/Vocational — Business Administration 219 PADM 200 (3) Local Government Administration (3,0.1) (S) PADM 203 (3) Municipal Law in British Columbia (3,0,1) (F) Prerequisite: Current employment in a Municipality, Prerequisite: Indian Government, Regional District, Improvement Indian Government, Regional District, Improvement District or Supporting A g e n c y , as well as P A D M 200 and District or Supporting A g e n c y , as well as P A D M 200 and P A D M 201, or permission o f the instructor. P A D M 201, or permission o f the instructor. This course w i l l include discussion o f the structures and This course focuses on legal principles pertaining to administration o f local governments, as well as current municipal government, with particular emphasis on its issues in local governance. Topics include: the history status, functions, and legal powers and constraints. It w i l l and purposes o f local government; how local govern- also introduce the principles of administrative law, how ments are organized and administered, their powers and legislation is created, and the powers and duties o f limitations; sources o f finance and methods o f assessment administrative agencies.Retail M a r k e t i n g Course D e - and taxation; issues of sustainability; relations with scriptions Current employment in a M u n i c i p a l i t y , aboriginal governments, and issues of public participation such as interest group l o b b y i n g and public consultation. PADM 201 Local Government Services (3) (3.0.1) (F) Retail Marketing Course Descriptions RMCP 154 (1.5) (3,0,1) (S) Creative Advertising Production This course w i l l give the students an understanding o f Prerequisite: Current employment in a M u n i c i p a l i t y , Indian Government, Regional District, Improvement District or Supporting A g e n c y , as well as P A D M 200 and retail advertising production as applied to business cards, newspapers, magazines and related promotion media from the standpoint o f the creator, buyer, and the printer. P A D M 201, or permission o f the instructor. provide to their citizens in British C o l u m b i a . Services to RMCP 157 Event Management be discussed include: Public W o r k s , Protective Services The emphasis in this course w i l l be to learn how to including Fire and Police, Regulatory Services, Water promote and produce a major event such as a trade or and Sewer Services, Refuse Collection and Solid Waste fashion show. Special Event Management w i l l involve disposal, Recreation and Cultural Services, Environmen- the planning, execution and promotion. This course w i l l examine the services that municipalities (1.5) (3,0,1) (S) tal Protection Services, Health Services and Social and Welfare Services. R M C P 164 PADM 202 Municipal Finance in B.C. (3.0,1) (S) (3) (3) (3.0,1) (F) Creative Retail Strategies This course is the creative component in the Retail Marketing Program. Students w i l l learn visual market- Prerequisite: Current employment in a Municipality, ing, colour and design, retail store design, and a full Indian Government, Regional District. Improvement range o f merchandising skills. They w i l l relate product District or Supporting A g e n c y , as well as P A D M 200 and and placement within a store environment and learn to P A D M 201, or permission o f the instructor. develop comprehensive display strategies. This course w i l l examine the practices and issues o f discussion o f the M u n i c i p a l A c t as it pertains to Financial RMCP 172 (3) (3,0,1) (F) Retail Technology/Store Management I Administration; the role o f provincial government in Retail Technology is the introductory segment to Store Financial Administration, the role o f the provincial Management I. This course provides the student w i t h a government i n Financial Administration, the role o f the working knowledge o f cash register systems and point o f M u n i c i p a l Finance Authority; the Finance Function at the sale terminals as w e l l as the latest in Interac Technology. M u n i c i p a l Finance in B r i t i s h C o l u m b i a and w i l l include M u n i c i p a l / R e g i o n a l levels; A c c o u n t i n g and Financial controls i n M u n i c i p a l i t i e s and Regional Districts; The Financial Planning Process including Short T e r m Budgets and L o n g T e r m Financial Planning; Financing Options; General Accounting/Treasury Functions; Assessment, Taxation, C o l l e c t i o n . Career/Vocational 220 Store Management I is a practical application to Retail Marketing. Students w i l l be entirely responsible for operating the student store. The students act as Store Managers. They w i l l do B u y i n g , Display, Promotion, Accounting, Scheduling and all those managerial skills involved in operating a successful retail store. — Business Administration RMCP 173 (3) Retail Finance/Store Management II Prerequisite: (3,0,1) (S) R M C P 172 A continuation o f Store Management I. This extension o f the Store Management course exposes the student to daily systems analysis, banking procedures, monthly accounting practices and money management in a practical setting. The students w i l l be responsible for making financial decisions as w e l l as B u y i n g and Promotional decisions for the student store. RMCP 181 Strategic Retail Buying (3) (3,0,1) (S) This course teaches the students to access their target and primary markets and to develop a strategy to enable them to be successful Retail Buyers. The Retail B u y i n g component involves teaching the student to buy for Department Stores, C h a i n Stores, Regional C h a i n Operations, and Independent Retail Stores. What to B u y , W h e n to B u y , F r o m W h o m to B u y , and H o w M u c h to B u y w i l l all be covered in this course. RMCP 190 (3) Fall Co-op Work Placement (Dec, Jan.) (F) Students w i l l gain direct practical work experience through a paid co-op placement with an employer that is part o f our Retail Registry. During December and January the student w i l l work some 200 hours i n a business related to their preferred area of retailing, merchandising or marketing. A faculty member w i l l oversee this three credit course and both employers and the co-op employees w i l l complete written reports. Students w i l l return to their full-time studies at the end o f the co-op placement. Career/Vocational — Business Administration 221 Commercial Animation Admission Requirements and Procedures C o n t a c t : 983-7516 E - m a i l : toons@capcollege.bc.ca 1. A n Application for A d m i s s i o n must be submitted, together with official transcripts o f all secondary and TWO-YEAR DIPLOMA IN COMMERCIAL ANIMATION post-secondary courses to A d m i s s i o n s , Office o f the Instructional Faculty 2. Requisites D . B R E R E T O N , D i p . F i l m A n i m a t i o n ( E m i l y CanCollege o f A r t & Design) Registrar. • 18 years o f age • Grade 12 completion or equivalent • J. D E L A N E Y , Head o f L a y o u t & Design, Delaney & Portfolio submission. Excellent drawing skills and a diversity o f styles should be demonstrated in the Friends Cartoon Productions, portfolio. M . G H O R E I S H I , D i p . Animation/Television • Attendance at a scheduled interview. A p p l i c a n t s w i l l (Algonquin), Instructor's Cert. (Iran), Theatre Stage be contacted in A p r i l or M a y and, i f places remain Design (Iran) available, in August. Interviews are conducted until D . P E R R O , D i p . F i l m A n i m a t i o n ( E m i l y Carr College o f the class is filled. A r t & Design), Cert. Teacher Development Program Admission is based on general ability, interest i n C o m - (Ontario) B . R E I D , B . A . (Alta.), A d v a n c e d Theatre (Banff Centre) mercial Animation, noteworthy experience, previous work, education, and commitment to the C o m m e r c i a l Animation Program. In the past ten years, animation has exploded onto motion picture and television screens around the world. There has been an increasing demand for skilled animation artists caused by the continued success o f both limited » Information Meetings Information meetings w i l l be held between September animation television series and major film productions. and A p r i l . Please contact the department at 983-7516 for C o m m e r c i a l animation companies i n British C o l u m b i a dates and times. have been approached by both A m e r i c a n and European animation producers to provide services and/or coproduce animation projects. The only limitation on the industry to respond to these opportunities has been the shortage o f commercially-trained animators. The Program Special Fees and Expenses Students may expect to pay approximately $4,000 for tuition, fees, materials and textbooks during the two-year program. Graduation Requirements The C o m m e r c i a l A n i m a t i o n Program prepares students for employment i n the animation industry, specifically in the area o f classical (character) animation. This intense program focuses on drawing skills and studio procedures in the production o f animated commercials, television In order to graduate from the C o m m e r c i a l A n i m a t i o n Program, the student must successfully complete all the component courses. series, computer game design and feature films. The Professional Standards program works closely with producers o f traditional and A l l C o m m e r c i a l A n i m a t i o n students are required to computer animation, establishing and evolving the adhere to high standards o f academic performance and curriculum to meet the industry's need for skilled anima- professional behaviour. tors and animation designers. N e w students are admitted each September i n a class o f 22. Part-Time Evening Courses For students interested in an introduction to animation as a career, or for upgrading their drawing and design skills, non-credit, part-time evening courses are offered. Please contact Continuing Education, 984-4901 for details. Career/Vocational 111 — Commercial Animation Program Content w i l l learn to accurately draw what they see. H u m a n proportions and the human form i n action w i l l be studied. FIRST T E R M Q u i c k gesture drawing w i l l be practised intensively to Credits A N I M 111 Animation Drawing I 6.0 A N I M 112 A n i m a t i o n Design I 2.25 A N I M 113 L i f e D r a w i n g for A n i m a t i o n I 3.0 A N I M 114 History o f Character A n i m a t i o n 2.25 C M N S 115 Communications 10 16.5 ings that communicate weight, structure and feeling. A N I M 114 (2.25) History of Character A n i m a t i o n (3,0,0) (F) This course w i l l cover the development o f character animation from W i n s o r M c C a y to the present. Emphasis SECOND TERM A N I M 121 build on the student's ability to create simple line draw- A n i m a t i o n D r a w i n g II 6.0 A N I M 122 A n i m a t i o n Design II 1.5 A N I M 123 L i f e D r a w i n g for A n i m a t i o n II 3.0 A N I M 126 L a y o u t Design I 1.5 M D I A 120 F i l m Studies for A n i m a t i o n 15 13.5 THIRD T E R M w i l l be on the Disney, Fleischer, Warner Brothers, M G M and U . P . A . studios o f the 1930's and 4 0 ' s and w i l l include major developments and the work o f important directors. Current trends i n animation w i l l be discussed. A N I M 121 (6) (8.0,0) (S) A n i m a t i o n D r a w i n g II A N I M 231 A n i m a t i o n D r a w i n g III 3.0 Students w i l l learn h o w to animate more complex A N I M 232 Storyboard Design 3.0 movement o f more diverse characters. A n i m a t i o n timing A N I M 233 L i f e D r a w i n g for A n i m a t i o n III 3.0 is emphasized. Special effects animation w i l l be taught. A N I M 234 Computer A n i m a t i o n 3.0 A c t i n g i n animation and animating to prerecorded A N I M 236 L a y o u t Design II 10 dialogue w i l l be introduced. 15.0 A N I M 241 Animation Drawing I V 3.0 A N I M 122 A n i m a t i o n Design II A N I M 242 M a j o r Projects 3.0 Students w i l l gain more practical experience i n the posing A N I M 243 L i f e D r a w i n g for A n i m a t i o n I V 3.0 of animation and w i l l work with a wider range of charac- A N I M 244 A n i m a t i o n Practicum 3.0 ters. B r i n g i n g out the character's emotions w i l l be A N I M 245 C o l o u r and M e d i a 1Q practised. In this course, the student w i l l learn to create a 15.0 full design package for an animated production. FOURTH TERM (1.5) 60.0 D i p l o m a Requirement A N I M 123 A N I M 111 (2,0,0) (S) (6) (8,0,0) (F) Animation Drawing I A n introduction to creating animated movement. Basic animation timing skills, animation principles and procedures used to produce character animation w i l l be introduced. (3) (4.0,0) (S) Life Drawing for A n i m a t i o n II Students w i l l build on the skills learned i n A N I M 113 and they w i l l increase their ability to accurately render the human form i n movement. Structure and anatomy o f humans w i l l be emphasized. A n i m a l anatomy and movement w i l l be studied. A n i m a t i o n Design I A N I M 126 Layout Design I Students w i l l learn design skills as they relate to commer- Students w i l l be introduced to the skills o f animation cial animation. Strong posing, drawing "on model", and background design. T h e animation camera stand and its character design w i l l be introduced. Perspective drawing functions w i l l be demonstrated. Design and composition w i l l be reviewed. skills w i l l be introduced and perspective drawing w i l l be A N I M 113 detailed layouts. A N I M 112 (2.25) (3,0,0) (F) (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) developed further i n order to produce complex and (3) (4,0,0) (F) Life D r a w i n g For A n i m a t i o n I This course w i l l demonstrate the importance o f life drawing i n the creation o f animated movement. Students Career/Vocational — Commercial Animation 223 A N I M 231 (3) (4,0,0) (F) A n i m a t i o n D r a w i n g III A N I M 241 A n i m a t i o n Drawing IV (3) (4,0,0) (S) A n i m a t i n g characters that act is the focus o f this course. This course w i l l focus on the production of students' demo Dialogue breakdown and animating to dialogue w i l l tapes meant to showcase their animation skills. Students continue to be emphasized. A n i m a t i o n involving several w i l l be focused on "feature-quality" key animation involv- characters i n the same scene w i l l be covered and students ing a variety of characters and actions. Character and w i l l work with more complex and realistic character personality in animation w i l l be emphasized. designs. A N I M 242 A N I M 232 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Storyboard Design (3) (4,0,0) (S) Major Projects In this course, students w i l l be allowed to concentrate Students w i l l be taught to create storyboards that c o m m u - their efforts on a specific career such as layout artist, nicate film narratives effectively. In this class, students computer animator, character designer or key animator. w i l l be expected to design animation sequences to be W o r k i n g one-on-one with an instructor, students w i l l produced i n the fourth term, eventually becoming a major design and produce their o w n projects i n order to achieve part o f their demo tape. success i n their specific fields i n the industry. A N I M 233 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Life D r a w i n g For A n i m a t i o n III A N I M 243 (3) Life D r a w i n g For A n i m a t i o n IV (4,0,0) (S) Students w i l l continue to improve their life drawing M o v e m e n t and sequential drawing studies w i l l be skills while w o r k i n g primarily with sequential studies. emphasized. The main objective o f this course w i l l be to The ability to accurately depict emotion and mood, make use o f the skills and techniques learned i n previous particularly o f the face, eyes and hands w i l l be the main life drawing classes to create a diverse range o f excellent objective o f this course. Practise i n the use o f foreshort- portfolio pieces tailored to the expectations o f the ening and tone w i l l be included. animation industry. A N I M 234 (3) (4.0,0) (S) A N I M 244 (3) (4,0.0) (S) Computer Animation A n i m a t i o n Practicum Students w i l l be introduced to computer generated animation. The students w i l l use traditional animation and design skills acquired i n the first two terms o f the program to create quality computer animation using 3 D software. This course w i l l provide students with a strong foundation o f computer animation skills enabling them, i f they wish, to begin to focus on a career i n computer animation. Students achieving a specific grade point average or higher w i l l be allowed to participate i n a two week practicum experience. The practicum may be at a local animation studio or computer animation house. A N I M 245 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Colour A n d M e d i a Basic colour theory w i l l be taught using a variety o f painting materials and techniques used i n the animation A N I M 236 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Layout Design II animation background painters and w i l l create finished This course w i l l further develop the student's layout design skills, enabling them to produce finished animation layouts o f h i g h quality. Technical skills concerning camera moves w i l l be included and students w i l l work to industry standards. A c t u a l layout tests from major animation studios w i l l be part o f the curriculum. Career/Vocational 224 industry. Students w i l l learn the specific skills required o f — Commercial Animation backgrounds from original layout designs. Communications C o n t a c t P e r s o n : Leslie Savage, Coordinator, Office L B 141. Phone: 986-1911, local 2515. must be admitted to the C o l l e g e before registration can be completed. E - m a i l : lsavage@capcollege.bc.ca Instructional Faculty BUSINESS COMMUNICATIONS CERTIFICATE PROGRAMS (BCCP) C . K I L I A N , B . A . (Columbia), M . A . ( S F U ) B . R E I D , B . A . (Alberta) The C M N S Department offers Basic and A d v a n c e d L . S A V A G E , B . A . ( M c G i l l ) , D i p . E d . , M . E d . (Alberta) Certificates in Business Communications. W h i l e the A . S E D K Y , B . A . , M . A . , P h . D . ( A i n Shams, Cairo) program is open to everyone, many B C C P students are G . W A U G H , B . A . (Reading), M . A . ( U B C ) , Standard likely to be w o r k i n g i n the business w o r l d and therefore Teaching Credentials ( U K ) , B . C . Registered Psychologist free only for part-time study. A c c o r d i n g l y , courses w i l l normally run in the evenings. Students may take them in W. V A N L U V E N , B.A., M.F.A. (UBC) any order and may take as long as they require (within M . W I T T M A N , B . A . (Toronto), M . A . ( U B C ) reason) to complete a certificate. T h e Communications ( C M N S ) Department provides Students qualify for the Basic Certificate by completing four required courses and one optional course. Required courses w i l l be: training in writing and speech for students in Career/ V o c a t i o n a l programs as well as those w i s h i n g to apply specific skills to the world o f work. In addition to C M N S 145: Computer On-line W r i t i n g courses i n E n g l i s h basics, C M N S also offers courses in C M N S 170: Public Speaking business and technical writing, public speaking, and C M N S 220: A d v a n c e d Business W r i t i n g and Editing freelance writing. C M N S 250: Technical W r i t i n g Career Opportunities For the A d v a n c e d Certificate, students must also take I N F O 166 (Applied Telecommunications), plus any two optional courses. In an information-based economy, good communication skills are a vital asset in any career. M a n y career program Optional courses w i l l include the following: C M N S courses offer components on effective job search C M N S 110: Standard English Usage techniques, including resume writing and interviewing. C M N S 111: Administrative W r i t i n g Courses for freelance writers equip students with the ( C M N S 110 and 111 are usually offered as daytime basic skills needed to market their work to magazines, newspapers and book publishers. Admission Requirements Students wishing to enrol in a specialized career program C M N S course must meet the admission standards o f that particular program. In some cases students may wish to take the C M N S component before enrolling in the rest o f the program. S u c h students w i l l require permission of the coordinators o f both C M N S and the career program in question. Students w i s h i n g to enrol in "open" sections o f C M N S , such as those offered in the evening, must meet general College admission standards. Applications for A d m i s s i o n to individual programs which courses.) C M N S 190: Magazine A r t i c l e W r i d n g Students wishing to enrol in the Certificate Program should submit a portfolio o f written w o r k i n an interview with C M N S faculty. Persons who have already taken some courses in the B C C P program, or closely similar courses at other institutions, may ask to apply their previous credits to the program. Where circumstances warrant, students may negotiate with the C M N S Department to apply credit from other College courses to the Certificate program. F o r example, a student who has completed the C M N S component o f a College career program may request application o f credit for that course or courses towards the Certificate. Special Fees and Expenses contain communications courses must be submitted to A d m i s s i o n s , Office o f the Registrar, with that program specified. Applicants who wish to enrol only in the "open" communications courses must also submit an A p p l i c a t i o n for A d m i s s i o n . Specify the program as Career — Communications courses only. A l l applicants Most C M N S classes require no special fees; for online courses, students must purchase an account with an Internet service provider specified by the instructor. Consult the coordinator i f you have any questions about such fees i n your course. Career/Vocational — Communications 225 C M N S 145 Course Descriptions N o t e : Consult the coordinator for the current C M N S courses and the details o f their content and requirements. (3) (3,1,0) (F,S) C o m p u t e r Writing Writing, editing and revising technical and non-technical information for the computer medium. Attention to C M N S 110 (3) (3.1,0) (F,S) concise style, logical organization and the limitations o f the computer screen. Standard English U s a g e A course in grammar, spelling, punctuation, and diction. Students also gain experience i n proofreading, correcting C M N S 152 (F.S) (3) Report Writing and revising short written assignments. W r i t i n g for the workplace: letters, memorandums, and C M N S 111 (3.0.1) (S) (3) reports. R e v i e w of English basics i n the context o f business writing. Administrative W r i t i n g Intended for writers w h o work in corporate communications or administration, this course covers the basics o f C M N S 153 memorandums, internal reports, evaluations, briefs, and Communications a n d the Arts proposals. Some attention to online communications, and Prerequisite: strong emphasis on developing a clear writing style. (3) (3,1,0) (S) C M N S 120 or proven E n g l i s h skills. The use o f language in combination with graphic and other arts. Attention to job-search strategies suitable for C M N S 115 Communications f o r A n i m a t i o n (3) (3,1,0) (F) artists and craftspersons. W r i t i n g assignments include an article on some aspect o f art w h i c h the student w i l l Students w i l l be taught various communications skills submit for publication. A spoken presentation may be necessary for success i n the animation industry. Content required. w i l l include presentation, writing and research skills, and script writing for animation. C M N S 154 (3) (3.1,0) (S) Communications in Recreation a n d T o u r i s m C M N S 120 (3) (3,1,0) (F.S) W r i t i n g and speech related to Outdoor Recreation and Effective W r i t i n g a n d Speech Tourism Management: reports, memorandums, press A course emphasizing structure and style in spoken and releases, article briefs and proposals. A spoken presenta- written communication, with some review o f English tion may be required. basics as w e l l . B y writing and editing short essays, students develop a writing style both concise and precise. C M N S 125 (1.5) C M N S 156 (3) Advanced Media Communications (3,1,0) (S) (3,1.0) (F) A continuation o f C M N S 130 with emphasis on inter- Communication Theory viewing techniques i n applied situations. T h e course also A survey o f principles influencing interpersonal c o m m u - deals with public speaking and group leadership tech- nication as well as mass media: print, f i l m , video, and niques. audio. Exploration o f communication theory as it applies to digital media. C M N S 159 (3) (3,1,0) (F,S) Communications for the Legal Secretary C M N S 130 (3) (3,1,0) (F.S) Introductory M e d i a C o m m u n i c a t i o n s A n introduction to writing and speaking for M e d i a Strong emphasis on E n g l i s h basics (grammar, spelling, punctuation, correct usage), proofreading skills, and business writing. Resources students. C M N S 170 (3) (3,1,0) (F) Public Speaking Researching, organizing and presenting different kinds o f speeches. Attention to voice training, nonverbal c o m m u nication, and public speaking i n various contexts. Career/Vocational 226 — Communications C M N S 179 Legal C o m m u n i c a t i o n s (3) (3,1,0) (S) For students i n the Legal Assistant Program, C M N S 179 emphasizes clear legal usage and style, as well as business writing formats in law. Some attention as well to the markets, development o f a detailed outline, and production of a proposal including a query letter, outline, and sample chapters for submission to an appropriate publisher. Students should discuss their plans w i t h the instructor before registering. fine points o f E n g l i s h basics. C M N S 190 M a g a z i n e Article Writing (3) (3,1,0) (F.S) Researching and writing articles for publication i n news media and magazines. A n a l y s i s o f magazine readership, C M N S 354 (3) (3,1,0) (F.S) A d v a n c e d Communications Skills a n d Resources for Tourism M a n a g e m e n t Prerequisites: C M N S 154 or its equivalent, plus computer literacy and Internet access. techniques o f researching and interviewing, the current Intended for students registered in the B C O U T o u r i s m market for articles and development o f an effective prose Management degree program, C M N S 354 is delivered i n style. Students w i l l write three articles in suitable format a modular format, and is aimed at developing advanced and submit them for publication in established periodi- skills in written and verbal communications, including cals. technical writing, presentation skills, and information technology applications. C M N S 220 (3) (3,1,0) (F.S) A d v a n c e d Business Writing a n d Editing Prerequisite: Successful completion o f E N G 100. Researching, organizing, writing and editing extensive business documents: reports, proposals, memorandums, press releases. Particular attention to clear style and logical organization. C M N S 250 Technical W r i t i n g (3) (3.1.0) (F.S) T h e basic techniques o f technical writing for students from business or technical backgrounds: extended definition, process, procedure, description and summary. Intensive w o r k i n descriptive writing and vocabulary usage; examination o f actual technical reports; study o f the role o f technical writers in corporate settings. C M N S 280 (3) M a r k e t i n g Commercial Fiction (3,1,0) (F,S) Preparing short stories and novels i n commercial genres such as mysteries, romances, thrillers and science fiction. Discussion o f the market for such fiction in Canada and the U . S . Students w i l l submit three assignments (such as three short stories or a novel synopsis and two chapters) i n marketable form. Students should discuss their plans w i t h the instructor before registering. C M N S 290 (3) M a r k e t i n g a Non-Fiction Book (3,1,0) (F,S) Planning, organizing, researching and writing a publishable non-fiction book. Survey o f potential Career/Vocational — Communications 227 Early C h i l d h o o d Care a n d Contact: Education Special Needs Certificate 984-4960 F o l l o w i n g successful completion o f the Early C h i l d h o o d Instructional Faculty Care and Education Certificate program and the Special R. A N N E , B . S c . ( C o l u m b i a Pacific), D i p . E . C . E . Needs program, the student is awarded a Special Needs (Ryerson) A . C A R R , M . A . ( S F U ) , D i p . E d . (London) Certificate from Capilano C o l l e g e . J. C L A R K , R . N . (Regina General Hospital), Teaching Diploma Program D i p . (Sask.) S. L O W , B . A . (Alta), E . C . E . (Langara) J. M O S E S , B . A . , B . S . W . ( M c M a s t e r ) , M . E d . ( U B C ) , A diploma in Early C h i l d h o o d Care and Education is E . C . E . Cert. M . R A W S T H O R N E , B.H.E., M.Ed. (UBC), R.D.N. Education Certificate and both the Infant & Toddler and L J . R E N N I E B . S c , D i p . E . C . E . (Brigham Y o u n g ) Coordinator granted by Capilano College to students w h o have successfully completed the Early C h i l d h o o d Care and Special Needs Certificates. The Early C h i l d h o o d Care and Education Certificate and successful completion o f the required 500 hours w o r k O u r society is recognizing the importance o f the early experience enables students to register as an Early years in children's development. There is an increasing Childhood Educator in British C o l u m b i a by applying to need in communities for child care services, and for the Manager of Early C h i l d h o o d Programs at the C o m - trained staff who can ensure that all children's interests munity Care Facility Branch. Certificates in Infant & and needs are met in a variety o f programs. The Early Toddler Education and Special Needs Education may C h i l d h o o d Care and Education program prepares students also be acquired through the C C F B . to work in various settings, including preschools and daycare centres. Admission Requirements Enrolment in the Early C h i l d h o o d Care and Education Support Staff Certificate programs is limited to 25 students. Sharon M i l e t i c , A r l e n e M i l l e r , Diane M i l l s Applicants must be at least 19 years o f age, be a high — Receptionists Judith Weiss — D i v i s i o n a l Assistant school graduate, have college-level writing and academic skills and have 40 hours experience as an employee or volunteer in a licensed early childhood setting w i t h i n the Career Opportunities last two years. A commitment to young children and Graduates o f the programs have found rewarding careers working in licensed preschool and daycare centres, in schools as Special Education Teaching Assistants, as C o m m u n i t y Care L i c e n s i n g Officers, i n management positions in childcare organizations and as consultants. The placement record for our graduates is excellent. their families and evidence o f interpersonal and life skills are also essential. Applicants should be aware that a criminal record check is now required by practicum placements and employers. Due to the intensity o f the full-time program, it is recommended that applicants have at least one year o f college or university experience. Programs In preparation for applying to the program, prospective Early C h i l d h o o d Care a n d Education Certificate students may choose to take some o f the f o l l o w i n g courses: E N G L 100, A N T H 121, A H I S 100, B I O L 104, This is awarded to students who successfully complete P H I L 101, P S Y C 100, 101, S O C . 100, 101, W M S T 100. the full-time or part-time program at the North V a n c o u ver Campus or the part-time programs at the Sechelt or Application Procedure Squamish Regional Centres. 1. Complete and submit an A p p l i c a t i o n for A d m i s s i o n directly to A d m i s s i o n s , Office o f the Registrar, Infant & T o d d l e r Certificate together with official transcripts for secondary and F o l l o w i n g successful completion o f the Early C h i l d h o o d post-secondary education. Care and Education Certificate program and the Infant & Toddler program, the student is awarded an Infant & 2. Attend the Information M e e t i n g on M a r c h 4, 1998, Toddler Certificate from Capilano College. Career/Vocational 228 — Early Childhood 7:00 pm, R o o m C E 1 4 1 (Cedar B u i l d i n g ) . After the Care and Education Information Meeting, you will schedule a group interview time. Courses are presented in a manner which promotes active participation through demonstrations, oral reports, group projects, role play and discussions. 3. At the interview, you must submit a resume, three letters of reference, and complete a writing assignment. Program Content Campus North Vancouver 4 . A Reading Assessment will be required. Full-time Upon Acceptance Submit a completed medical report on a form provided by the college, plus evidence of absence of active tuberculosis. Admission Requirements to the Second Term Continuation into the second term of the programs is dependent upon the demonstration of satisfactory interpersonal, academic and teaching/guiding skills. "C-" is the minimum acceptable grade in all courses. Practicum grades must be "C" or higher. Special Fees and Expenses The student can expect to spend approximately $1000 on books and supplies. Additional costs will be incurred for a First Aid course and transportation to practicums. EARLY CHILDHOOD CARE A N D EDUCATION CERTIFICATE PROGRAMS The North Vancouver Campus offers both a full-time 10 month program and a part-time program which may be completed within two years. Sechelt and Squamish Regional Centres offer part-time programs. These programs are based on the "Competencies in Early Childhood Education," and are approved by the Community Care Facilities Branch of the Ministry of Health. The foundation of the E.C.C.E. programs is the study of development from birth to adolescence. The history and current philosophies of early childhood education are examined. An interrelated series of courses focus on the care and education of young children from an anti-bias perspective. Students also study program planning, curriculum content, health and nutrition, interpersonal skills and family-centre relationships. Theory and practice are closely related throughout the program. Students have practical experience in three practicum centres under the guidance of qualified Early Childhood Educators. In practicum centres students adhere to the Early Childhood Educators of B.C.'s Code of Ethics. FALL TERM Credits/Lab EDUC 155 Human Growth and Dev. I 4.5 EDUC 170 Interpersonal Skills 1.5 EDUC 171 Caring and Learning Environments 1.5 EDUC 172 Guiding Young Children I 1.5 EDUC 173 Curriculum Development I 1.5 4 EDUC 175 Observing and Recording 1.5 EDUC 176 Applied Theory-Practicum I 1Q 15.0 SPRING TERM CMNS 111 Administrative Writing EDUC 220 Health, Safety & Nutrition EDUC 254 Theoretical Perspectives EDUC 272 Guiding Young Children n EDUC 273 Curriculum Development II EDUC 276 Applied Theory—Practicum II 3.0 1.5 3.0 1.5 1.5 4J1 14.5 4 4 4 SUMMER TERM EDUC 270 Intro, to Working with Families 1.5 EDUC 271 Intro, to Centre Organization 1.5 EDUC 273 Curriculum Development II *CIP EDUC 275 HumanGrowthandDev.il 1.5 EDUC 277 Applied Theory—Practicum III 4JJ 8.5 Program Content — North Vancouver Campus Part-time — First Year FALL TERM—1997 Credits/Lab EDUC 155 Human Growth and Dev. I 4.5 EDUC 170 Interpersonal Skills 1.5 EDUC 171 Caring & Learning Environments 1.5 SPRING TERM—1998 EDUC 155 Human Growth and Dev. I EDUC 172 Guiding Young Children I EDUC 173 Curriculum Development I SUMMER TERM—1998 EDUC 173 Curriculum Development I EDUC 177 Observing and Recording/ Applied Theory I—Practicum I *CIP 1.5 1.5 4 *CIP 4.5 * CIP Course in Progress Career/Vocational — Early Childhood Care and Education 229 Each program consists o f seven courses including two Part-time — Second Year Credits/Lab practicums. Courses are scheduled i n the late afternoon C M N S 155 Communications for E C C E 3.0 and evening. Practicums are scheduled on an individual E D U C 220 Health, Safety and Nutrition 1.5 basis to meet students' needs. E D U C 272 Guiding Y o u n g Children 1.5 Courses i n these programs are scheduled on a two-year E D U C 276 A p p l i e d Theory — Practicum II 4.0 rotation. Students may begin at any time i n the sequence. FALL TERM—1997 There are three core courses w h i c h are part o f both SPRING TERM—1998 E D U C 254 Theoretical Perspectives 3.0 E D U C 270 Intro, to W o r k i n g with Families 1.5 E D U C 273 C u r r i c u l u m Development II 1.5 E D U C 275 HumanGrowthandDev.il 1.5 SUMMER TERM—1998 E D U C 271 Intro, to Centre Organization 1.5 E D U C 273 programs. INFANT & TODDLER CERTIFICATE 4 PROGRAM Program Content C u r r i c u l u m Development II E D U C 277 A p p l i e d Theory—Practicum III Credits FIRST T E R M *CIP E D U C 350* A d v a n c e d C h i l d Development 4.0 2.0 (Fall '98) E D U C 351* F a m i l y , School & C o m m u n i t y Program Content — Squamish (Fall '97) F a l l offerings complete the Certification program se- Physical Care & Safety (Fall '98) 1.5 E D U C 356 Infant/Toddler P r a c d c u m 1.5 E D U C 357 Infant/Toddler Practicum quence. FALL TERM—1997 C M N S 155 B a s i c Communications E D U C 277 A p p l i e d Theory—Practicum III 3.0 4.0 2.0 E D U C 355 L5 8.5 6 SECOND TERM E D U C 352* Centre Operations (Spring '99) 2.0 E D U C 353 Program Planning ( S p r i n g ' 9 8 ) 1.5 Courses i n this part-time program are scheduled on a E D U C 356 Infant/Toddler P r a c d c u m 1.5 three year rotation. Students may begin at any time i n the E D U C 357 Infant/Toddler Practicum L5 6.5 Program Content — Sechelt sequence w i t h the approval o f the coordinator. FALL TERM—1997 E D U C 254 Theoretical Perspectives E D U C 270 Intro, to W o r k i n g w i t h Families E D U C 271 Intro, to Centre Organization SPECIAL NEEDS CERTIFICATE P R O G R A M 3.0 1.5 1.5 Program Content FIRST T E R M SPRING TERM—1998 E D U C 171 C a r i n g and Learning Environments 1.5 E D U C 262 Credits Special Education (Fall'79) E D U C 177 Observing and Recording/ A p p l i e d Theory I 4.5 E D U C 276 A p p l i e d Theory II 4.0 E D U C 277 A p p l i e d Theory H I 4.0 (Fall '98) 6 6 (Fall '97) SPECIAL NEEDS CERTIFICATE PROGRAM These evening part-time programs are for the student who process o f completing the required 500 hours work Special Needs Practicum 1.5 E D U C 359 Special Needs Practicum L5 SECOND TERM E D U C 352* Centre Operations ( S p r i n g ' 9 9 ) E D U C 354 Program Planning for Special 2.0 Needs (Spring '98) 1.5 E D U C 358 Special Needs Practicum 1.5 E D U C 359 Special Needs Practicum L5 6.5 experience. 230 — Early Childhood Care and 2.0 E D U C 358 9.0 PROGRAM is certified as an Early C h i l d h o o d Educator or is i n the 2.0 E D U C 351* F a m i l y , School & C o m m u n i t y INFANT & TODDLER CERTIFICATE Career/Vocational 2.0 E D U C 350* A d v a n c e d C h i l d Development Education These courses apply to b o t h the Infant/Toddler and Special Needs Certificates. E D U C 175 Course Descriptions C M N S 111 Administrative Writing (3) (3,0.0) (S) Writing effectively in a modern organization. Attention to memorandums, correspondence, policy development, research and evaluation reports, briefs, proposals, and planning documents. Emphasis is on clear, concise style and use of Standard English. E D U C 155 (4.5) Human Growth and Development I (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) O b s e r v i n g a n d Recording (6,0.0) (F) Course material spans the period from conception through the preschool years and examines physical, cognitive, language, and social-emotional growth and development. An introductory study of theories, principles of development, and child study techniques is included. A course which develops skill in objectively observing and recording the behaviour of young children. Weekly supervised observations form the major part of the course. Different kinds of observational techniques are explored. The uses of teacher observations are examined. E D U C 176 (3) (2.0,6) (F) A p p l i e d Theory—Practicum I This introductory practicum is arranged by the college. It provides the student with opportunities to observe young children and, at a beginning level, to plan, implement and evaluate activities under the supervision of a qualified sponsor teacher. Weekly seminar discussions help students integrate theory and practice. E D U C 177 (4.5) (S) Observing a n d R e c o r d i n g / A p p l i e d T h e o r y — Practicum I (Part-time programs only) E D U C 170 (1.5) (15.0,0) (F) Interpersonal Skills An introductory course in which students focus on the development of self awareness and increased understanding of others. Students will learn basic communication concepts and practice skills which contribute to effective interpersonal relationships. E D U C 171 (1.5) Caring a n d Learning Environments (15,0,0) (F) This course introduces the student to various programs for young children. The role of the Early Childhood Educator, learning environments and the value of play are examined. E D U C 172 (1.5) (15,0,0) (F) The student will develop skill in observing, recording and documenting the behaviour of young children. Based on observations, the student will begin to interpret behaviours and develop program strategies. E D U C 220 (3) (2,0,0) (S) Health, Safety a n d Nutrition o f Y o u n g Children Through the use of lecture, videos and assignments, the student will be able to recognize the common signs and symptoms of childhood illness and plan health care appropriate to a centre setting, recognizing situations requiring emergency care; understand the role of healthy eating as it relates to normal child development within the context of the preschooler's daily life and environment; and follow valid nutrition guidelines for their own optimum health. G u i d i n g Y o u n g Children I This course develops a theoretical framework of guidance principles and techniques which support children's optimal development. E D U C 173 (1.5) (2,4,0) (F) E D U C 254 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Theoretical Perspectives This course provides an introduction to the history and philosophy of E.C.C.E. Major contemporary issues are examined. International childcare is discussed. Curriculum D e v e l o p m e n t I Based on the philosophy that play provides the foundation for children's growth and development, this experiential workshop course focuses on learning environments, curriculum planning and teaching strategies. E D U C 270 (1.5) (2,0.0) (S) Introduction t o W o r k i n g w i t h Families This course is designed to develop a beginning understanding of an effective relationship between the Early Childhood Educator and the child's family. Community resources will be researched. Career/Vocational — Early Childhood Care and Education 231 E D U C 271 (1.5) the program. The student w i l l be involved in all aspects (2,0,0) (S) of providing quality care and education for young Introduction t o Centre O r g a n i z a t i o n children. A n introductory look at some o f the administrative aspects o f operating a centre for young children. T h i s E D U C 290 course assumes a knowledge o f curriculum and daily (4) (F, S) Directed Independent Studies program planning, and identifies necessary functions relating indirectly to children; e.g., handling finances, Directed independent studies i n content and/or practicum hiring staff, leadership and management, cleaning and areas o f E C C E . T o be identified according to student's maintenance, policies and procedures, etc. Provincial need for Provincial Certification. legislation regulating c h i l d care is examined. Steps to opening a centre w i l l also be discussed. E D U C 272 INFANT & TODDLER CERTIFICATE (1.5) PROGRAM (2,0,0) (S) FALL T E R M G u i d i n g Y o u n g Children II This course w i l l extend the student's repertoire of E D U C 351 guidance/teaching techniques. T h e focus is on respond- Family, School a n d C o m m u n i t y ing to the needs o f the individual child, on promoting a The teacher/family/community partnership w i l l be positive self concept and on fostering prosocial behav- examined with the focus being on families with infants, iour. toddlers and children who need extra support. E D U C 273 (1.5) (2,4,0) (S) E D U C 356 (2) (2.5,0,0) (F) (1.5) (F) Curriculum D e v e l o p m e n t II Infant a n d T o d d l e r Practicum The student w i l l acquire further knowledge, experience Through work experience i n an infant/toddler centre the and s k i l l i n planning, implementing and evaluating student learns and practises how to protect, support and learning environments for groups o f children. enrich the lives o f young children. E D U C 275 (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) E D U C 357 (1.5) (F) H u m a n G r o w t h a n d D e v e l o p m e n t II Infant a n d Toddler Practicum This course reviews the major theories o f human devel- This practicum focuses on w o r k i n g with parents and the opment and changes that occur during middle childhood evaluation o f a quality program. These broader aspects and adolescence i n the areas o f physical, social-emotional of group care are central to the provision o f quality care and cognitive development. for infants and toddlers. E D U C 276 A p p l i e d Theory—Practicum II SPECIAL NEEDS CERTIFICATE P R O G R A M This is, generally, a five week, full-time practicum. If FALL T E R M taken, however, on a part-time basis, the same number o f E D U C 262 (2) (2.5,0,0) (F) hours are required. W o r k i n g with a qualified Early Introduction t o Special Needs C h i l d h o o d Educator students extend their competencies Students w i l l develop an awareness o f the early c h i l d - in program planning and evaluation. W e e k l y seminar hood educator's role and responsibility i n preparing a discussions focus on integrating theory and practice. safe and healthy environment that meets the needs o f children requiring extra support. T h e course w i l l examine E D U C 277 A p p l i e d T h e o r y - Practicum III the history and current perspectives on inclusion and family centred approaches. T h i s is, generally, a five week, full-time practicum. If taken, however, on a part-time basis, the same number of hours are required. In this practicum, students integrate and consolidate knowledge and skills gained throughout Career/Vocational 232 — Early Childhood Care and Education E D U C 358 (1.5) (F) Special N e e d s Practicum Under the guidance of a qualified Special Needs Early Childhood Educator the student practises how to program activides which include children who need extra support. Education 359 (1.5) (F) Special Needs Practicum This practicum focuses on working with parents and the evaluation of a quality program. Students refine their skills of inclusive programming for groups of children. SPRING T E R M Education 354 (1.5) Program Planning f o r Special Needs (2,0,0) (S) This course will examine strategies for collaborating with parents, adapting programs, implementing individual intervention goals and helping children to communicate with one another. Education 358 (1.5) (S) (1.5) (S) Special Needs Practicum See Fall Term. Education 359 Special Needs Practicum See Fall Term. Career/Vocational — Early Childhood Care and Education 233 Fisheries Science Sechelt Campus Contact: Dave Bates 987-1535 or 885-9310 FISH CULTURE TECHNICIAN CERTIFICATE FSCI 140 FSCI 141 Course Descriptions — DISTANCE LEARNING FORMAT FSCI100 Instructional Faculty Salmonid Biology D. J. BATES, Dip. Tech. (BCIT), B.Sc, M.Sc. (SFU), R.P.Bio. E. J. FIELD, B.Sc. (UVic), PhD (UQld) Career Opportunities Graduates of the program may find challenging careers with either the private or public fish culture sector. This includes the commercial aquaculture industry, government contracts withfisheriesagencies, and consulting firms. A Fish Culture Technician, while working under the supervision of a manager, is responsible for the well being of intensively reared salmonids. Course content examines the life histories, habitat and biology of these animals. FSC1101 Fish Culture I The Fish Culture Technician Program is available in distance learning format only. Students may register in one or more courses. Upon completion the student is awarded the Fish Culture Technician Certificate. The distance learning program has been designed for individuals who are currently working or seeking employment in the fish culture field who wish to upgrade their academic credentials. Individualized programs may be available. Admission Requirements ProspecUve applicants should inquire by telephone or by writing to the Sechelt campus. An information package and application will then be forwarded. Program Content 234 (3) An introduction to the theory and techniques used in the fresh water culture of salmon and trout. Course content covers collection, incubation and rearing of salmonids. The major emphasis is on hatchery production of salmonids for commercial aquaculture and enhancement purposes. (3) Fish Culture II The Program Credits 3 Salmonid Biology 3 Fish Culture I 3 Fish Culture II 3 Water Quality Salmonid Nutrition, Feeding & Growth 3 Fish Health 3 Computers in Fisheries 3 Career/Vocational (3) An introductory course in the basic biology of the salmonid. FSC1102 FSCI 100 FSCI101 FSCI102 FSCI 103 FSCI 105 FSCI 106 FSCI 120 3 3 27 Field Practicum I Field Practicum II — Fisheries Science A continuation of FSCI 101. This course examines the intensive culture of salmonids reared in the marine environment. Content includes an introduction to the marine environment, smolt transport, salt water adaptation, cage culture and harvesting and processing. FSC1103 Water Quality (3) An introduction to water quality with respect to intensive salmonid culture. Course content examines water quality parameters that impact on fish production and methods for measuring these parameters. FSCI 105 (3) Salmonid Nutrition, Feeding a n d G r o w t h An introductory course in the applied aspects of salmonid nutrition. Course content includes nutritional requirements of cultured salmonids, feed formulation and manufacture, feeding methods and strategies, biology of growth and growth estimation. FSCI 106 (3) Fish Health An introduction to the science of fish health. This course examines the pathogens that frequently infect cultured salmonids. Course content examines the various groups of pathogens and methods used to prevent, minimize the impact or treat these pathogens. quality, insect and fish populations. Streamside planting methods are also covered. FSCI 120 Workshops are scheduled throughout the province as demand arises. (3) C o m p u t e r s in Fisheries A n introduction to the personal computer and associated software. Course content introduces the student to word Course Description processing, spreadsheets and databases using the inte- FSC1150 grated software program Microsoft Office. Streamkeeper W o r k s h o p FSC1140 (3) Methods used to survey, map and assess streams, based (3) on M o d u l e s 1, 2, 3, 4, 7 and 11 o f "The Stream-keepers Field Practicum I Handbook" (Dept. of Fisheries and Oceans). C o m p l e t i o n Practicums involve the student working for two 10-day periods at a fish culture facility. The student w i l l be involved in the daily activities o f these facilities working with fish culture staff. FSCI 141 of a comprehensive take-home assignment is required for credit. A certificate o f completion is offered. (3) Field Practicum II Practicums involve the student working for two 10-day periods at a fish culture facility. The student w i l l be involved in the daily activities o f these facilities working with fish culture staff. POST-BACCALAUREATE IN FISHERIES SCIENCE A post degree program i n the applied aspects o f fisheries management is currently under development. Courses available for future credit towards the post degree program or undergraduate academic transfer to Simon Fraser University include: F S C I 200 B i o l o g y o f Salmonids (3) F S C I 210 Intensive Salmonid Culture (3) STREAMKEEPERS TRAINING PROGRAM The Streamkeepers Program helps citizens protect and preserve freshwater habitats. Development pressures from our expanding populations threaten these environments. The Streamkeepers Program encourages good watershed practices through productive, hands-on involvement. C o m m u n i t y stewardship is essential for long-term protection o f our environment. W o r k s h o p s provide intensive training in methods used to survey and map streams, as well as to make assessments of stream health based on habitat complexity, water Career/Vocational — Fisheries Science 235 Health and H u m a n Services RESIDENT CARE ATTENDANT PROGRAM Contact: Sechelt. Applications are considered in October for the January program, and i n M a r c h or A p r i l for the A u g u s t program. 984-4960 Graduates o f the program may transfer some R C A Support Staff: courses to the L . P . N , program. R C A graduates can enter Sharon M i l e t i c , A r l e n e M i l l e r , Diane M i l l s , Receptionists the Licensed Practical Nurse Program using the A c e s s Program, which is available at some colleges. Judith W e i s s , D i v i s i o n a l Assistant Admission Requirements FIVE-MONTH CERTIFICATE PROGRAM 1. Grade 10 or equivalent, with grade 12 preferred. Instructional Faculty Students may be asked to complete a reading compre- T. A D L E R , B . A . (Toronto), M . S . W . ( U B C ) hension test. S. E N G E L B E R T , B . A . , R . N . 2. Applicants are required to attend an information B. ESTEY, R.N. meeting and have a student/instructor interview prior B. M I L L E R , R.N. to acceptance into the program. M . R A W S T H O R N E , M . E d . ( U B C ) , R . D . N . , Coordinator 3. Applicants must be at least 19 years o f age and have a K. T A Y L O R , R.N. genuine desire to work with elderly people and their families i n the health field. T w o written references are Career Opportunities required. The number o f elderly people i n our community is increasing, and there is an ever-growing demand for qualified men and w o m e n to w o r k full-time or part-time in this field o f health care. 4. Applicants need good physical and mental health, and are required to complete a medical report on a form provided by the College, plus evidence o f absence o f active tuberculosis. Graduates o f this full-time program are qualified to work w i t h residents i n various continuing care settings, including extended care facilities, intermediate care facilities and H o m e Support Agencies. The potential for employment is excellent. Employers may require a C r i m i n a l Record check. 5. Applications for A d m i s s i o n must be submitted directly to Admissions, Office o f the Registrar, together with official transcripts o f secondary and post-secondary education. Graduation Requirements Attendance: The Resident Care Attendant courses are The Program intensive; regular attendance is mandatory. Capilano C o l l e g e offers a full-time certificate program recognized throughout B r i t i s h C o l u m b i a . T h i s program is designed to provide students with the opportunity to qualify to work with continuing care clients in many Graduation requires a valid standard First A i d Certificate w h i c h includes C . P . R . The student is responsible for obtaining this and presenting it to the coordinator before the first day o f classes. The St. John's Emergency L e v e l different settings. Safety Oriented First A i d Certificate or any higher level The program integrates health care theory with practice, is acceptable. teaching students the basics in physical care with a focus on the spiritual and emotional well-being o f the resident. Practicum experiences take place i n a variety o f interme- Students must obtain a B - (2.67 G P A ) , w i t h completion of all courses in the program. diate care and extended care facilities. A l l students who are interested i n the R C A program must attend an Fees and Expenses information meeting and have an interview with an R C A T h e fees are in accordance with the C o l l e g e Calendar. instructor. The student can expect to spend approximately $200 on T w o programs are offered each year from August to books and supplies. Additional costs w i l l be incurred for January, and January to June. In the 97/98 academic a First A i d course, transportation for practicums, and for year, the August '97 program w i l l be offered in N o r t h a C r i m i n a l Record Check. Vancouver, the January '98 program w i l l be offered i n Career/Vocational 236 — Health and Human Services Program Content FIRST T E R M Credits R C A P 100 Health: Lifestyle and Choices R C A P 101 Health and Healing: Concepts for 1.5 RCAP 111 (7.0) (2,4,14) (F.S) Applied Theory: Lab Practicum and Clinical in Resident Care This practical course offers students the opportunity to Practice 3.0 acquire the basic personal and clinical skills required by R C A P i 02 Human Relations: Interpersonal 1.5 the resident care attendant in intermediate and extended Communications care facilities. Students spend one day a week in the R C A P 110 Work Role Concepts in Resident Care 1.0 College health lab learning the practical skills needed to R C A P 111 R C A P 112 work with continuing care residents. The first part of the Applied Theory: Lab and Clinical course is a series of field trips designed to increase Practicum in Resident Care 7.0 Special Needs in Resident Care 3jQ students' awareness of community facilities. In the 17.0 second part of the course, the students spend two weeks SECOND TERM in an intermediate care facility. In the last part of the R C A P 113 4/j course, the students spend two days a week in an ex- 21.0 tended care unit placement, supervised by a clinical Applied Theory: Clinical Practice Total Program Credits instructor. Assignments are integrated with the lab instruction and course work. Course Descriptions RCAP 100 (1.5) Health: Lifestyle and Choices (2,0,1) (F.S) This course provides an introduction to the concept of health and the concepts of a health enhancing lifestyle. Students will reflect on their own experience of health, challenges and resources that may effect their lifestyle choices, and consequently, their health. RCAP 101 (3.0) (4,0.2) (F.S) Health and Healing: Concepts for Practice This course provides the opportunity to develop a theoretical framework for practice. Students will examine the significant philosophical beliefs and theoretical understandings of competent practice. RCAP 102 (1.5) (2.0.1) (F.S) Human Relations: Interpersonal Communications This course focuses on the development of self awareness and increased understanding of others. Students will explore basic communication concepts and practical skills, which contribute to effective interpersonal relationships. RCAP 110 (1.0) (2,0,1) (F,S) Work Role Concepts in Resident Care This course introduces students to the health care system and the role and responsibilities of the resident care A l l practicum and clinical placements are arranged by the college. RCAP 112 (3.0) Special Needs in Resident Care (2,0,1) (F.S) This course builds upon content in the other R C A courses, to help students to explore concepts and approaches which apply to the care of residents experiencing changes in mental functioning. RCAP 113 (4.0) (0,35,0) (S.Su*) Applied Theory: Clinical Practice in Resident Care This four-week practical course provides an opportunity to apply the caring philosophy with older adults in an intermediate and/or extended care facility. Select, supervised experiences will emphasize the applicadon and integration of knowledge and skills learned in other courses. The final two weeks of the course provide an opportunity for the student to become better prepared to take on the role of the Resident Care Attendant. Opportunities will be provided for the learner to gain increased self confidence in the work setting and to become socialized as a member of the health care team. *(Su) = Summer attendant within the health care system. Career/Vocational — Health and Human Services 237 PERSONAL CARE ATTENDANT WORKING homes, recreation programs, health care centres, and FOR PERSONS WITH DISABILITIES schools. Program Contact: 984-4960 The objective o f the program is to provide the basic skills Support Staff: and knowledge required for a career i n the Health and H u m a n Services field. T h i s full-time, eight-month A r l e n e M i l l e r , Diane M i l l s , Receptionists certificate program integrates health care theory with Judith Weiss, D i v i s i o n a l Assistant practice. Practicum experiences take place i n a variety o f EIGHT-MONTH CERTIFICATE PROGRAM community health care settings. Instructional Faculty Graduates receive the following certificates: L . C U T H B E R T S O N , B.H.Sc.(O.T.) (McMaster), 2. H o m e Support Attendant 1. Personal Care Attendant M.Ed.(Brock), Reg. O.T. (BC) 3. F o o d Safe M . D A Y A N , B . S . R . ( U B C ) , Registered Physiotherapist 4. W H M I S J. G I B B S , R . P . N . , R . S . W . , Coordinator 5. Special Education/Teacher Assistant M . R A W S T H O R N E , M.Ed. (UBC), R.D.N. Students must take one additional strategies course and complete a project or practicum to receive a S E T A Career Opportunities Certificate. In response to the trend for people with disabilities to live in the community rather than i n an institution, the P C A D program includes the core courses o f the Resident Personal Care Attendant Program prepares students to Care Attendant and H o m e Support Attendant Programs. work with clients o f all ages i n a variety o f community settings. Students are trained to give client-directed Admission Requirements personal assistance i n order that the individual may achieve the fullest possible participation i n society. Services offered by the graduate Personal Care Attendant differ from the traditional medically-modeled services i n • services are directed towards enhancing an individu- 3. Applicants must be at least 19 years o f age and have a services are oriented towards promoting maximum al's present strengths and enabling the development o f further strengths. • hension test. independence for the client i n a l l aspects o f life. service goals are defined by the service user, not the service provider or medical personnel. • Students may be asked to complete a reading compre- 2. Applicants are required to attend an information meeting and have a student/instructor interview prior to acceptance into the program. Interviews are held i n A p r i l . Further interviews may be held i f spaces i n the program are available. many ways: • 1. Grade 10 or equivalent, with Grade 12 preferred. genuine desire to work with disabled people i n the Health and Human Services field. T w o references are services may be provided i n a variety o f settings. Because graduates must be prepared to work effectively within the full continuum o f available settings, the Personal Care Attendant Program prepares students to assist persons with disabilities i n a broad range o f activities o f daily l i v i n g . The Personal Care Attendant Program ensures that students acquire knowledge and master skills necessary to deal with the functional, required. 4. Applicants need good physical and mental health, and are required to complete a m e d i c a l report on a form provided by the College, plus evidence o f the absence o f active tuberculosis. Some practicum placements require a C r i m i n a l Record C h e c k . 5. Students need a valid standard First A i d Certificate emotional, social and medical implications o f physical which includes C . P . R . throughout the course. T h e disabilities. student is responsible for obtaining this and presenting Graduates o f the program find employment in many areas it to the coordinator before the first day o f classes. o f the health field including: group homes, private The St. John's Emergency L e v e l Safety Oriented First A i d Certificate or any higher level is acceptable. Career/Vocational 238 — Health and Human Services 6. A p p l i c a t i o n s for A d m i s s i o n must be submitted Course Descriptions directly to A d m i s s i o n s , Office o f the Registrar, together with official transcripts for all secondary and post-secondary educatioon. HSA. 110 (1.5) W o r k Role Concepts in H o m e S u p p o r t (2,0,1) (S) T h i s course provides an introduction to community care, the home support industry and the role o f the H o m e Graduation Requirements Support Worker. The course also offers home manage- Attendance: T h e Personal Care Attendant Program ment skills needed for beginning home support practice. courses are intensive; regular attendance is mandatory. Students must obtain a m i n i m u m B - average (2 .67 G P A ) with completion of all courses in the program. Fees and Expenses The fees are in accordance with the College Calendar for a 30 credit program. The student can expect to spend approximately $200 on books and supplies. A d d i t i o n a l costs w i l l be incurred for a First A i d course, transporta- HSA. 112 (1.5) Special Needs in H o m e Support (2,0,1) (S) This course builds upon other course materials to provide an introduction to the basic concepts and approaches involved in the care o f clients experiencing changes in mental functioning. The course also explores the role o f the H o m e Support Attendant in special needs family situations. tion for practicums, and for a C r i m i n a l Record Check. P C A D 013 (3.0) (4,0,2) (F) Introduction to Physical Disabilities Concepts Program Content This course enables students to understand the theoretical FIRST T E R M RCAP Credits 100 Health: Lifestyles and Choices R C A P 102 1.5 H u m a n Relations: Interpersonal ages. The procedures include the principles o f body Communications R C A P 101 basis for the procedures needed by the Personal Care Attendant working with physically disabled clients o f all 1.5 Health and Healing: Concepts for mechanics, medical asepsis, disabling conditions and their functional limitations. B o t h course content and Practice 3.0 assignments are integrated with lab and practicum Intro to Physical Disabilities 3.0 placements in P C A D 019 and P C A D 039. R C A P 014 Ethics and Values in Health Care 1.5 P C A D 019 A p p l i e d Theory: Practicum I 1.5 P C A D 022 H u m a n Relations II 1.5 R C A P 013 P C A D 049 A p p l i e d Theory: L a b for Personal Assistants m Total 15.5 H S A . 110 W o r k R o l e Concepts in H o m e Support 1.5 H S A . 112 Special Needs in H o m e Support 1.5 P C A D 023 G r o w t h and Development 1.5 P C A D 024 A d v a n c e d Physical Disability Concepts 3.0 P C A D 029 A p p l i e d Theory: Practicum U 6.0 P C A D 059 A p p l i e d Theory: L a b for Personal SECOND TERM Assistants II 1.0 Term Total Program Total 14.5 30.0 PCAD 014 (1.5) Ethics and Values in Health Care (2,0,1) (F) In this course the student w i l l develop the knowledge and skills required to fill the role o f a Personal Care Attendant in a professional, ethical and caring manner to ensure that people with disabilities are valued. This course assists facilitators to respect differences, demonstrate effective communication skills and articulate the principles o f normalization, and integration. P C A D 019 A p p l i e d Theory - Practicum I (1.5) (0,4,11) (F) The first part o f the practicum course is a series of field trips designed to increase the student's awareness o f community resources. In the second part o f the course students spend two weeks in a practicum placement arranged by the College. A clinical instructor visits and observes the student w o r k i n g in the practicum setting. Assignments are integrated w i t h the lab instruction and course work in P C A D 013. Career/Vocational — Health and Human Services 239 P C A D 022 (1.5) (2,0,1) (F) This is the second course in human relations, in which the student continues to develop knowledge and skills related to the needs o f clients with disabilities. Students w i l l explore behaviour, learning strategies, (1.5) cally disabled clients on practicum placements. RCAP 100 (1.5) (2,0,1) (F) Health: Lifestyles a n d Choices gentle teaching, I E P / I P P and community integration. P C A D 023 practice, and gain feedback on their skills. The purpose of the lab is to prepare students for w o r k i n g with physi- H u m a n Relations II (2,0,1) (S) Growth and Development This course provides an introduction to the concept o f health and the concepts o f a health enhancing lifestyle. Students w i l l reflect on their o w n experience o f health, challenges and resources that may effect their lifestyle choices, and consequently, their health. T h i s course is designed to introduce students to the major changes which occur in normal and abnormal develop- RCAP 101 ment. T h e learner w i l l identify basic developmental Health a n d Healing: Concepts for Practice human needs, disabling conditions and techniques to empower people with mental handicaps and cognitive disorders. (3.0) (4,0.2) (F) This course provides the opportunity to develop a theoretical framework for practice. Students w i l l examine the significant philosophical beliefs and theoretical Course content includes role o f the family, sexuality, understandings o f competent practice. abuse and resources for support. RCAP 102 P C A D 024 (3.0) (4,0,2) (S) A d v a n c e d Physical Disabilities Concepts (1.5) (2,0,1) (F) H u m a n Relations: Interpersonal C o m m u n i c a t i o n s This course focuses on the development o f self awareness This is a continuation o f P C A D 013. Students learn the and increased understanding o f others. Students w i l l theoretical basis o f advanced procedures essential to the explore basic communication concepts and practical role o f the Personal Care Attendant. The course content skills, which contribute to effective interpersonal rela- is also integrated with k b and practicum placements in tionships. P C A D 029 and P C A D 039. P C A D 029 (6.0) (0,35,0) (S) Part-time Courses Part-time courses are available. A p p l i e d T h e o r y : Practicum II The student spends seven weeks in three different practicum settings arranged by the College. A clinical Prior Learning instructor visits and observes the student while on Credit may be granted for prior learning. practicum. Assignments are integrated with lab instruction and course w o r k in P C A D 024 A N D 059. P C A D 049 (2.0) (0,4,2) (F) A p p l i e d T h e o r y : Lab f o r Personal Assistants I This course exposes students through simulations and paper problems/case histories to the functional limitation of medical and physical conditions that may be encountered w o r k i n g as a personal atttendant. Students demonstrate and practice skills needed to work with clients who have a physical disability. P C A D 059 (1.0) (0,4,2) (S) A p p l i e d T h e o r y : Lab f o r Personal Assistants II This course enables students to integrate and apply the knowledge and skills o f a personal attendant w o r k i n g with physically disabled clients. Students demonstrate, Career/Vocational — Health and Human Services 240 H O M E SUPPORT A T T E N D A N T PROGRAM Admission Requirements Contact: 984-4960 1. Grade 10 or equivalent. Students may be asked to complete a reading comprehension test. Some Support Staff: Sharon M i l e t i c , A r l e n e M i l l e r , Diane M i l l s , Receptionists Judith Weiss, D i v i s i o n a l Assistant practicum placements require a criminal record check. 2. Applicants are required to attend an information meeting and have a student/instructor interview prior to acceptance into the program. FOUR-MONTH CERTIFICATE PROGRAM Instructional Faculty T. A D L E R , B . A . (Toronto), M . S . W . ( U B C ) H. BREWSTER, R.N. B. ESTEY, R.N. M . D A Y A N , B . S . R . ( U B C ) , Registered Physiotherapist B. M I L L E R , R.N. 3. Applicants must be at least 19 years o f age and have a genuine desire to work w i t h elderly people and their families in the health field. T w o references are required. 4. Applicants need good physical and mental health, and are required to complete a medical report on a form provided by the College, plus evidence o f absence o f active tuberculosis. 5. Applications for A d m i s s i o n must be submitted M . R A W S T H O R N E , M . E d . ( U B C ) , R D N , Co-ordinator directly to, Admissions, Office o f the Registrar, together with official transcripts. Career Opportunities T h e H o m e Support Attendant Program is designed to Program Content provide students w i t h opportunities to develop the basic knowledge, skills and attitudes necessary to provide Credits H S A . 110 W o r k Role Concepts i n H o m e Support H S A . 111 A p p l i e d Theory: L a b for H o m e assistance to individuals and families in the community. T h e environment i n w h i c h the H o m e Support Attendant functions is usually the client's home; however, the 1.5 Support 3.0 graduate may be required to provide assistance to clients/ H S A . 112 Special Needs i n H o m e Support 1.5 families i n a variety o f community settings. H S A . 113 A p p l i e d Theory: Practicum for Graduates are prepared to function collaboratively as H o m e Support Attendants 6.0 members o f a multi-disciplinary community support R C A P 100 Health & Lifestyle & Choices 1.5 team. Graduates work as front-line care providers under R C A P 101 Health & Healing: Concepts for Practice 3.0 R C A P 102 H u m a n Relations 15 Total Program Credits: 18.0 the direction and supervision o f a health professional. U p o n completion o f the program, graduates are eligible for employment as a H o m e Support Attendant with a community H o m e Support A g e n c y . W i t h additional training and experience, the graduate may be able to assume other responsibilities appropriate to the job role. Course Descriptions The Program HSA. 110 (1.5) Work Role Concepts in Home Support (2,0,1) A t the present time, the college does not offer an on- This course provides an introduction to community care, going, full-time program. However, i f community the home support industry and the role o f the H o m e demand is appropriate, the Home Support Program may Support Worker. The course also offers home manage- be offered on a full-time or part-time basis. ment skills needed for beginning home support practice. Capilano C o l l e g e offers a Certificate Program recognized throughout B r i t i s h C o l u m b i a . HSA. 111 (3.0) (0,4,14) Healing: Personal Care Skills for Home Support This practical course offers the opportunity to acquire basic assistance skills following the Personal Assistance Guidelines section 1 and section 2. Career/Vocational — Health and Human Services 241 HSA. 112 (1.5) (2,0,1) Special Needs in H o m e Support This course builds upon other course materials to provide an introduction to the basic concepts and approaches involved i n the care o f clients experiencing changes in mental functioning. T h e course also explores the role o f the H o m e Support Attendant in special needs family situations. HSA. 113 (6.0) (0,54,0) Practical Experience This practice course provides an opportunity to apply the caring philosophy with individuals and families at various stages o f the life cycle. Experience may be obtained in community and institutional settings with an emphasis on the application and integration o f knowledge and skills learned in other courses. RCAP 100 (1.5) (2,0,1) (F) Health: Lifestyle a n d Choices This course provides an introduction to the concept o f health and the concepts o f a health enhancing lifestyle. Students w i l l reflect on their o w n experience o f health, challenges and resources that may effect their lifestyle choices, and consequently, their health. RCAP 101 (3.0) (4,0,2) (F) Health a n d Healings: Concepts for Practice This course provides the opportunity to develop a theoretical framework for practice. Students w i l l examine the significant philosophical beliefs and theoretical understandings o f competent practice. RCAP 102 (1.5) (2.0,1) (F) H u m a n Relations: Interpersonal C o m m u n i c a t i o n s This course focuses on the development o f self awareness and increased understanding o f others. Students w i l l explore basic communication concepts and practical skills, w h i c h contribute to effective interpersonal relationships. Career/Vocational — Health and Human Services 242 Landscape Horticulture Contact: 984-4947 O N E Y E A R CERTIFICATE P R O G R A M Instructional Faculty L. KOSKITALO, B.Sc. (U. of M.), Ph.D. (UBC) R. WELSH, Dip. Landscape Tech. (B.C.l.T.) L. SCOTT, Cert. Landscape Horticulture Support Staff: Judith Weiss, Divisional Assistant Lab Supervisor: L. Scott Career Opportunities Graduates of the Applied Landscape Horticulture program find employment in many areas of horticulture including: municipal parks, golf courses, residential and commercial landscape installation and/or maintenance; garden centre sales, nursery and greenhouse operations. The Program The objective of the Landscape Horticulture program is to provide individuals with the basic skills and knowledge prerequisite to beginning a career in landscape gardening and landscape-related industries. This full-time eight-month certificate program integrates horticultural theory with practice; the first term emphasizing theory and the second term practical applications. Due to the popular nature of the program, and its limited enrolment, prospective students are advised to contact the Horticulture department by late April to arrange to attend an early-May INFORMATION MEETING. Student/ instructor interviews can be arranged at the conclusion of this meeting. Admission Requirements 1. Grade 10 completion with Grade 12 preferred. Students without proficiency in basic mathematics and English may be required to take an upgrading course. 2. Attendance at an interview. Interviews are held in mid-May. Further interviews may be held in midAugust, if spaces in the program are available. Applicants unable to attend an interview may contact the program coordinator to make alternative arrangements. 3. 19 years of age. 4. A genuine interest in and desire for commencing or continuing a career in horticulture. 5. Reasonable health and physical condition. 6. Successful applicants will demonstrate evidence of development of interpersonal skills and emotional health. Special Fees a n d E x p e n s e s In addition to the program tuition, students will incur further expenses of approximately $1400 for books, personal work gear and equipment, certification fees, field trip, conference and membership fees. Graduation Requirements Due to the intense nature of the program, regular fulltime attendance is crucial. Students are expected to attend and participate in all classes and program activities. Students with poor attendance may be required to withdraw. Participation in allfieldtrips, including the three-day orientation field trip, is compulsory. Students must attain a minimum cumulative G.P.A. of 2.0, pass all courses, must possess a valid B.C. pesticide dispenser or acceptable applicator certificate, and attain a minimum 60% standing in plant materials, to successfully complete the program. Program Content FIRST TERM Credits Labs HORT 101 Introductory Horticulture 5.0 6 HORT 102 Plant Materials I 5.0 0 HORT 103 Growing Media & Fertilizers 2.0 1 HORT 105 Plant Production 2.0 1 HORT 107 P & T Gardens Practicum 0.0 0 HORT 115 Basic Landscape Drafting 15 3 15.5 11 SECOND TERM HORT 106 Landscape Irrigation & Drainage HORT 109 Plant Materials II HORT 110 Turfgrass Managemet HORT 108 Landscape Design HORT 111 Business Practices HORT 112 Landscape Installation & Maintenance HORT 114 P & T Gardens Practicum 2.0 4.0 3.0 1.5 1.0 1 0 1 3 1 5.0 6 Of) 0 16.5 12 Course Descriptions HORT 101 (5) (6,6,0) (F) Introductory Horticulture This course details commercial horticulture in B.C., covers basic plant science theory, deals with work site safety and develops basic horticultural skills including the use and proper care of hand tools, power equipment, day to day greenhouse operations, planting and watering Career/Vocational — Landscape Horticulture 243 techniques. Students participate in a three-day orientation HORT 109 field trip near the beginning o f this course. Students also Plant Materials II participate in a W C B certified survival first aid practicum. HORT 102 (5) (6.0,0) (F) A n introduction to woody and herbaceous ornamentals including deciduous trees and shrubs, conifers, broadleaf evergreens, bulbs, and ground covers. This course emphasizes identification, landscape values and requirements o f the plant materials studied. (2) (3,1,0) (F) HORT 110 Turfgrass M a n a g e m e n t (3) (4.5,1,0) (S) A n introductory turfgrass course dealing with the selection of grasses for turfs, turfgrass installation, and maintenance (includes fertilization, irrigation, m o v i n g , cultivation, pest control practices) for residential and HORT 111 (1) (1.0,1,0) (S) Business Practices This course is designed to provide students with the media science knowledge necessary for the production and maintenance o f plants i n the greenhouse, nursery and landscape. Deals with business establishment, business organizations, business operations, landscape estimating, quotations and contracts. Job search, j o b applications, resumes and interviews are also discussed. (2) (3.1.0) (F) Plant Production T o acquaint students with greenhouse and nursery production systems and methods. Topics w i l l include: plant propagation, greenhouse production and nursery stock production. Students w i l l successfully produce a number o f specific greenhouse and nursery crops. HORT 106 A continuation o f H O R T 102 with the emphasis on large area turfs. G r o w i n g M e d i a a n d Fertilizers HORT 105 (4.5.0,0) (S) conifers, broadleaf evergreens, annuals and perennials. Plant Materials I HORT 103 (4) (2) (3,1,0) (S) Landscape Irrigation a n d Drainage HORT 112 (5.0) (5,6,0) (S) Landscape Installation a n d M a i n t e n a n c e A largely applied course covering plant installation and common landscape maintenance practices. Landscape installation topics include: site preparation, use o f aggregates, and construction of walks, steps, retaining walls, fences, trellises, and use of paving materials. Maintenance topics include: pruning, planting and transplanting, pest management, mulches, and methods of fertilization. Students write the B . C . Ministry o f Environment General This course is designed to familiarize the student with the Dispenser and Landscape Applicator pesticide certification basics o f turf and drip irrigation systems as well as basic examinations. The majority o f the course time is spent on landscape drainage systems. Students learn how to field installation and maintenance work. install, operate and maintain landscape irrigation systems. HORT 114 HORT 107 (0) (0,0,2) (F) Park a n d Tilford G a r d e n s Practicum (0) (0,0.2) (S) Park a n d Tilford Gardens Practicum A continuation o f H O R T 107. This is an optional landscape maintenance work experience at Park and T i l f o r d Gardens. The objectives o f the practicum are to develop a professional work ethic, to master basic gardening skills and to learn to complete tasks effectively and i n a timely manner. HORT 108 (1.5) (1.5) (1.5.3.0) (F) Course topics include: drafting skills and equipment, site measurement and evaluation, plan reading, graphic (1.5,3,0) (S) Landscape Design A highly practical introductory course in design theory and practices; plan reading and revisions; and basic design skills. Course materials are presented by means o f lectures, visuals, projects and specific practicum labs. Career/Vocational — Landscape Horticulture 244 HORT 115 Basic Landscape Drafting presentation and introductory quantity take-offs. Legal Contact: 984-4959 Instructional Faculty Assistant 2. The Legal Assistant Certificate Program. This evening program is designed for people who are presently working in a law office with at least two years' legal L . B A K E R , B . A . ( U B C ) , L L . B . ( U B C ) Teaching Cert. secretarial or paralegal experience. (SFU) N . B A W A , B . B . A . (SFU), L L . B . (McGill)) R. B R U N , B . A . ( U B C ) , L L B . ( U B C ) D . C O C H R A N , B . A . L L . B . ( U B C ) , Cert. E d . , M . A . E d . (SFU) V. C O C H R A N , LL.B. (UBC) M . C R A G G , B . A . L a w (Durham), Teaching Cert. ( U B C ) TWO YEAR LEGAL ASSISTANT DIPLOMA Upon completion o f the two year program, students must complete a six month practicum under the supervision o f a lawyer. Students are paid during this practicum by their employer. W. E N W R I G H T , B.F.A. M . F . A . (UBC), L L . B . (McGill) J. F A I R L I E , B . M u s . L L . B . ( U B C ) A t the end o f a successful practicum, the student is S. G R E E N A W A Y , B . C o m . ( U B C ) , C A . eligible for graduation. L . H A R R I S , B . A . Hon. English ( U B C ) , L . L . B . ( U B C ) C. M A T T H E W S , B . A . (UBC), L G A S Diploma D . P H I L L I P S , L G A S Certificate, M . A . Liberal Studies ( S F U ) , Co-ordinator Faculty work closely with students and with the legal community to assist i n obtaining successful practicum placements. Faculty maintain close contacts with the legal c o m m u nity, and several faculty members are practising lawyers. M . S P E N C E , B.Sc. L L . B . ( U B C ) A s w e l l , support is provided by an external A d v i s o r y D . T H O M S O N , B . S c , L L . B . (Queens) Committee, which provides information on recent G . W A U G H , B . A . (Reading), M . A . ( U B C ) , Standard developments in the legal community, and offers advice Teaching Credentials ( U K ) , B . C . Registered on topics ranging from curriculum changes to grad Psychologist placements. Support Staff Members of the A d v i s o r y Committee include representa- W . W E B E R G , D i v i s i o n a l Assistant Canadian Bar Association, private law firms, a govern- F . U L K E R , Receptionist ment agency, and crown corporations. Career Opportunities Admissions Requirements A legal assistant, while working under the supervision o f The successful applicant to the L e g a l Assistant Program a lawyer, is capable o f originating work and making should have: decisions. T h i s person has knowledge o f both procedural and substantive law. Some examples o f work functions tives from the L a w Society o f British C o l u m b i a , the 1. two years post-secondary university transfer elective or equivalent prior learning experience, are: interviewing clients; drafting pleadings, wills, probate, conveyancing and corporate documents; legal research; file management; assisting in trial preparation. Graduates o f the program w i l l find challenging careers working as legal assistants in law offices, government agencies, and corporate legal departments. The program has been i n operation since 1976 and has a 9 0 % placement rate. (This figure may fluctuate for any one graduating class depending on the economy.) 2. work experience in an office setting (highly recommended), 3. good working knowledge o f computers. Applications, together with official post-secondary transcripts must be submitted to A d m i s s i o n s , Office o f the Registrar. Incomplete applications w i l l not be processed. Prospective applicants may apply by telephoning 9837594. Names w i l l be recorded and applicants w i l l receive Programs There are two legal assistant programs offered at Capilano C o l l e g e . 1. The L e g a l Assistant D i p l o m a Program. This is a two the formal admission procedure outline. Information meetings may also be held. Coordinators w i l l then review all applications for the 36 seats available i n the program. Applicants who meet the program requirements w i l l be invited to have a personal interview. year full-time program designed for people without current legal experience. Career/Vocational — Legal Assistant 245 Academic Standards LEGAL ASSISTANT CERTIFICATE PROGRAM The Legal Assistant program requires students to maintain a cumulative 3.0 grade point average over the four terms. In addition, any student whose grade point average falls below 2.0 will not be permitted to continue in the This is a part-time evening program designed for students with at least two years legal secretarial or paralegal experience who are presently working in a law office. program. To be eligible to go out on practicums, students Those without a legal background or the two years must maintain a cumulative 3.0 G P A . experience may be admitted to a particular course only Special Fees and Expenses responsibility to initiate the contact with the Coordinator after consultation with the Coordinator. It is the student's prior to registration. The student can expect to spend approximately $1000.00 per year on books and photocopying expenses. Since Acceptance into a particular course does not mean a student has been accepted into the program as a whole. regular use of a law library is necessary for research purposes, students should include necessary transportation expenses. The Legal Assistant Certificate Program courses usually start in September, although occasionally they may also start in January. Contact the Legal Assistant Program area at 983-7594 for registration deadline information. Two Year Legal Assistant Diploma Program Content FIRST T E R M Credits L G A S 150 Intro, to Study of Law 3.0 L G A S 152 Litigation Procedures I 3.0 L G A S 170 Legal Research 3.0 L G A S 176 Legal Office Procedures 3.0 L G A S 252 Torts I 3J) 15.0 SECOND T E R M L G A S 151 Intro, to Evidence L G A S 164 Litigation Procedures IV 1.5 L G A S 180 Contracts I 3.0 L G A S 254 Torts II 3.0 L G A S 256 Family Law 3.0 C M N S 179 Legal Communications 3.0 3J) 16.5 The requirements for the certificate must be completed within five years of commencing the courses. The fiveyear period may be extended for one year in exceptional circumstances. Certificate Requirements In order to attain the Legal Assistant Certificate students must successfully complete 30 credits. These credits must be chosen from substantive Legal Assistant Courses. Legal Assistant Certificate Program Content * Courses marked with an asterisk are required courses and must be taken before a student is eligible to receive a certificate. L G A S 155 Conveyancing Procedures 1.5 + Students wishing to enter the program must first take L G A S 150 and then L G A S 170 before they will be L G A S 157 Wills & Probate Procedures 3.0 admitted to any course except L G A S 151. L G A S 179 Legal Interviewing 3.0 L G A S 181 Contracts II 3.0 L G A S 255 Real Property 3.0 L G A S 264 Insurance Law I THIRD T E R M 1Q 16.5 Courses Intro, to Study of Law *+ L G A S 151 Evidence *+ L G A S 170 Legal Research L G A S 172/174 Legal Drafting I & II FOURTH T E R M L G A S 153 Basic Corporate Procedures 1.5 L G A S 172 Legal Drafting 1 3.0 L G A S 182 Creditors'Remedies 3.0 L G A S 253 Company Law 3.0 L G A S 262 Litigation Procedures III 3.0 L G A S 265 Insurance Law II 3J) 16.5 L G A S 199 Practicum 3.0 Diploma Requirement: Career/Vocational 246 — Legal 67.5 Assistant Credits *+ L G A S 150 L G A S 179 * Legal Interviewing L G A S 180/181 Contracts I & II L G A S 182 Creditors' Remedies L G A S 252/254 Torts I & II L G A S 253 L G A S 255 L G A S 256 Company Law Real Property Family Law L G A S 264/265 Insurance I & 11 L G A S 268 Criminal Law L G A S 271 Administrative Law 3 3 3 3/3 3 3/3 3 3/3 3 3 3 3/3 3 3 LGAS 156 Transfer Credits Transfer credits w i l l not automatically be given for courses taken at other institutions. Students w i l l be required to demonstrate current knowledge before course exemption w i l l be granted. Requests for transfer credit (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Introduction to Evidence This course is an introduction to the law o f evidence including relevancy, materiality, admissibility, opinion evidence, etc. must be submitted on the "Request for Transfer Credit" form and submitted to the Office of the Registrar. LGAS 157 (3) (4.0,0) (S) Wills a n d Probate Procedures Course Descriptions A n examination o f the W i l l s A c t , the Estate Administra- Please see program content to determine which courses apply to the program i n w h i c h y o u are interested. LGAS 150 (3) (4,0,0) (F) the necessary documents to obtain Letters Probate and Letters of Administration. Students w i l l also learn how to deal with assets after Letters Probate or Administration have been obtained. Introduction t o the Study of Law Introduction to legal concepts and legal reasoning. The course w i l l cover the historical development o f legal institutions and the principles of c o m m o n law and equity, the interpretation of statutes, and an analysis of the LGAS 164 Litigation Procedures IV Prerequisite: (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) L G A S 152 A n introduction to Alternate Dispute Resolution, practice system; its strengths and weaknesses. and procedure in the S m a l l C l a i m s Court, use o f the Transferable to S F U . LGAS 151 tion A c t , and W i l l s Variation A c t . Students w i l l prepare Freedom o f Information and Privacy A c t as a tool for (3) (4.0,0) (S) discovery, and Chambers practice and procedures in the Evidence Supreme Court o f British C o l u m b i a . A n introduction to the law of evidence. A l t h o u g h some LGAS 170 Legal Research statutes w i l l be considered, emphasis w i l l be on case law and current developments in the law. (3) (4,0,0) (F,S,Su) Provides the student with the techniques and methodolTransferable to S F U . ogy of legal research and w i l l include functions such as reading briefs and legal documents; using encyclopedia, LGAS 152 (3) (4.0,0) (F) Litigation Procedures I decisions. Introduction to procedures in the courts of B . C . The course w i l l cover basic procedures in pre-trial preparation of documents, and the use o f precedents in litigation. LGAS 153 annotated reports, law reviews, case comments; locating (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) Basic Corporate Procedures A n examination o f the B . C . Company A c t and the C . B . C . A . and the various documents required to incorpo- LGAS 172 Legal Drafting I (3) (4,0.0) (F) Course work includes drafting o f agreements, statements of claim and defences, letters and memos, and a study o f the rules o f statutory interpretation. Emphasis w i l l be placed on developing different writing styles, rather than obtaining a detailed knowledge o f specific areas o f law. rate a company and attend to routine filings and resolutions. Differences between reporting and non-reporting LGAS 174 companies w i l l be studied. Legal Drafting II Prerequisite: LGAS 155 (1.5) (3) (4.0,0) (S) L G A S 172 (2,0,0) (S) C o n v e y a n c i n g Procedures A continuation of the work begun i n L G A S 172; students w i l l draft more complex documentation. Introduce students to basic conveyancing procedures in B . C . , including the role of the conveyancing assistant, the structure o f a real estate sale, the system o f registration in B . C . , and basic procedures when acting for a purchaser and/or vendor. Career/Vocational — Legal Assistant 247 LGAS 176 (3) (4,0,0) (F) LGAS 252 (4.0,0) (F) (3) Legal Office Procedures Torts I Practical information about the organization of legal A n introductory study of torts. Principal topic to be studied is the law o f negligence. offices. Instruction i n timekeeping, filing and communications systems, use o f data processing equipment i n l a w offices, ethical responsibility o f legal assistants and legal LGAS 253 terminology w i l l be covered. Company Law LGAS 179 (3) (4,0,0) (F) Legal Interviewing (4,0,0) (F) (3) The law relating to business associations. A n examination o f rights and duties o f officers, directors, and shareholders, as well as an analysis o f provincial securi- This course w i l l give an understanding of the role o f the ties practice. legal assistant and o f the process o f legal interviewing. Students w i l l acquire skills i n conducting various types o f LGAS 254 interviews. Torts II LGAS 180 (3) (4,0,0) (F.S) (4.0,0) (S) (3) Prerequisite: L G A S 252 This is a continuation of L G A S 252. Recovery o f pure Contracts I economic loss, nuisance, liability o f statutory authorities, The objective o f this course is to give the students a intentional torts and other areas are studied. general understanding o f the fundamental principles o f contract law, including offer and acceptance, certainty, LGAS 255 intention, consideration, and privity. Real Property LGAS 181 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) (3) (4,0.0) (S) A review of the common law relating to real property as modified by legislation w i l l be studied i n this course Contracts II using the case analysis method. Prerequisite: L G A S 180 This course is a continuation o f L G A S 180. Topics LGAS 256 include misrepresentation, interpretation, mistake, duress, Family Law and remedies. L a w and the family: marriage and its dissolution; rights and duties o f spouses and parents; custody; access, guardianship, and adoption. LGAS182 Creditors' Remedies (3) (4,0,0) (F) Discussion o f the principles, practice and information gathering procedures necessary to realize on judgments. The case method w i l l be used and students are expected to be familiar with the documentation used in the above process. LGAS 199 LGAS 257 (3) (3) (4,0,0) (S) (4,0,0) (F.S.Su) Wills and Estates This course w i l l cover substantive law issues that arise i n a wills and estates practice. Important practice issues w i l l also be covered, as well as a review o f applicable legislation. (3) (2.0,0) (F.S.Su) Career Practicum LGAS 262 Prerequisite: 3.0 Cumulative G P A Litigation Procedures III This includes the work portion o f the Career Practicum Prerequisites: L G A S 152 and 162 w h i c h consists o f six months i n a l a w firm. It also This course covers divorce, F a m i l y Relations A c t , and includes classroom seminars and instructor/student small claims procedures. consultations. Students w i l l be assisted by the instructor in finding a practicum, but it is the student's responsibility to obtain a practicum position. This practicum must be commenced within two years o f completing the L e g a l Assistant course requirements. Career/Vocational 248 — Legal Assistant (3) (4,0.0) (S) L G A S 264 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Insurance L a w I A n overview o f Canadian Insurance l a w including structure o f the industry, insurable interest, valuation, subrogation, contribution and indemnity and duty to disclose. L G A S 265 (3) (4,0,0) (S) Insurance L a w II Continuation o f L G A S 264 covering agents' duties and responsibilities; form and formation o f the insurance contract; cover, including exceptions to cover; the claims process; I . C . B . C . insurance issues. LGAS 268 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Criminal L a w Substantive elements o f selected criminal offenses and consideration o f various defences. The effect o f the Charter of Rights on rights o f the accused w i l l be also studied. Transferable to S F U . LGAS 271 (3) (4,0,0) (F,S) Administrative L a w The l a w relating to administrative tribunals in Canada. The rules o f natural justice and fairness w i l l be examined as w e l l as j u d i c i a l review o f decisions and administrative tribunals. Emphasis w i l l be on provincial administrative tribunals and the effect o f the Charter in this area. Career/Vocational — Legal Assistant Media Resources C o n t a c t : 984-4940 and community media, there is an increasing readiness to use new techniques to foster learning, growth, and social Instructional Faculty interaction. Capilano College's M e d i a Resources Pro- J . V . B I Z Z O C C H I , B . A . (Michigan), Teaching Cert. (Sec.) ( M i c h i g a n ) , V i d e o Production (Banff Centre) The core of the program is production training. Students B . D O D D , A . A . S . D i p . (Capilano) G. M c A R T H U R , M . Ed. (UBC) gram prepares students for work and leadership i n this growing media resources field. , P. K E L L I N G T O N , F i l m Studies ( U B C ) , A . A . S . M e d i a Spec. Cert. (Capilano) A . K L A V E R , A . A . S . D i p . (Capilano) are taught standards o f excellence and effectiveness in all forms o f educational production work. B a s i c technical skills are taught i n all media areas, and a large number o f projects are completed by students during their training. B . R E I D , B . A . (Alta.), A d v a n c e d Theatre (Banff Centre) In this way students are prepared for a wide range o f S. R O G E R S , B A A . (Ryerson) practical work possibilities, rather than simply a profi- M . T A Y L O R , D i p . M e d i a Resources (Capilano) ciency in theory. K . W A T T , B . A . (Trent) The program teaches students more than the necessary J. W E S T E N D O R P , B . F . A . ( U B C ) Support Staff technical skills. Students learn the critical process o f how to work a production through from concept to completion. This involves understanding learning theory and Anne Gilbert, B . A . ( S F U ) Program Assistant instructional design as well as understanding the particu- A l a n H o v d e n , Program Assistant lar advantages o f each medium. Technical Staff B r y a n Christie Cam Willams In recent years there has been an increasing awareness o f the importance o f the media in communications, industry and education. Consequently there is a growing market for personnel with the appropriate training and attitude for work i n these fields. Career Opportunities In 27 years o f operation, the M e d i a Resources Program has graduated over 450 students. The majority o f these graduates are employed as producers, directors, editors, writers, camera and audio operators, production assistants and equipment managers in video, film, audio, photography, multi-image and multi-media production formats. They work for educational institutions and private A major skill that the M e d i a Resources Program emphasizes is that o f working effectively i n groups. Students i n this program w i l l have worked in a large number o f production groups in a variety o f production formats by the time they graduate. T h e program's instructional design reflects its practical goals. Workshop methods, hands-on training and field trips are used throughout the program. The College's training facilities are w e l l equipped. They include a photography studio and lab, an audio recording studio, a television studio, computer workstations and audiovisual production equipment that students can access through the Department's equipment check out facility. The M e d i a Resources Program consists o f four terms o f study. N e w students are admitted each September in a class o f 28. companies as w e l l as non-profit organizations. In Admission Requirements addition, a number o f graduates have set up their own 1. 18 years o f age. independent production companies. 2. Grade 12 graduation or equivalent or mature student status. The Program 3. Applicants may wish to take M D I A 065 prior to F I L M , P H O T O G R A P H Y , V I D E O , A U D I O and C O M P U T E R S are vital components o f the media m i x used in all levels o f educational and instructional communication. offered by the Extension Program such as The M e d i a Resources Program is a two-year program filmmaking, training students for current and developing applications of media technologies. In areas o f education, commercial Career/Vocational — Media Resources 250 applying to the program. They may also consider taking one of several media-related non-credit courses photography or video production. 4. Attendance at an information meeting held from November through A p r i l . 5. Applications for A d m i s s i o n must be submitted to Admissions, Office o f the Registrar, together with official transcripts o f all secondary and post-secondary education. 6. Applicants w i l l be contacted for an interview in the January through M a y period, and i f places are available, i n August. 7. Interviews are conducted until the class is filled. 8. A d m i s s i o n is based on general ability, noteworthy M D I A 182 Advanced A u d i o Production 3 M D I A 185 Advanced Photography 3 M D I A 186 Computers in M e d i a P r o d . 3 3 M D I A 200 Intermediate V i d e o I 3 6 M D I A 202 Intermediate V i d e o II Applicants selected for interviews w i l l be notified o f their admission status in writing. 3 3 21 18 THIRD T E R M M D I A 231 Digital V i d e o Post - Production M D I A 260 A / V and Multi-Image Production 3 3 M D I A 271 3 6 M D I A 272 Educational T . V . Systems V i d e o Technology II M D I A 294 Educational M e d i a experience, previous work, education, interest in and commitment to the M e d i a Resources Program. Applications M D I A 300 3 1.5 1.5 Advanced V i d e o Production Special Fees and Expenses 18 Students may expect to pay approximately $6,000 for tuition, fees, materials and textbooks during the two-year program. Graduation Requirements In order to graduate from the M e d i a Resources Program, the student must successfully complete all the component courses. Department Guidelines). 3 12 FOURTH TERM C M N S 156 Career Preparation for M e d i a Resources Students 3 M D I A 263 Production Resources 1.5 6 M D I A 303 M e d i a Specialist in Education and Training 3 6 M D I A 304 Educational M e d i a M D I A 299 Applications: Computers Major Projects Professional Standards A l l M e d i a Resources students are required to adhere to high standards o f academic performance and professional behaviour (as described in the booklet Media Resources 6 Total 3 L5_ 0 12 12 72 PART-TIME COURSES M D I A 065 M e d i a Studies 60 Credits/LabHours 3 Program Content Credits / L a b Hours FIRST T E R M C M N S 130 Intro, to M e d i a Communications 3 M D I A 100 Intro, to V i d e o Production 3 M D I A 156 Computers in M e d i a : Intro 3 MDIA 100 (3) Introduction to Video Production Basic A u d i o Production 3 6 M D I A 183 Photographic Production 3 6 M D I A 190 Instructional Design 1.5 0 M D I A 195 Special Applications: Photography 3 0 M D I A 250 Documentary Scriptwriting L5_ 0 21 15 SECOND TERM Intro, to A n i m a t i o n M D I A 172 V i d e o Technology I 1.5 M D I A 173 E d . M e d i a Applications: A u d i o 1.5 (3,0,0) (F) 3 M D I A 181 M D I A 150 Course Descriptions This course concentrates on the basic skills i n v o l v e d in video production with an emphasis on camera techniques and visual sequencing. MDIA 150 Introduction to Animation (3) (3,0,0) (S) A n introduction to the theory and application o f animation techniques. Computer animation is the primary medium in this course. 3 Career/Vocational — Media Resources 251 M D I A 156 (3) (3,0,0) (F) MDIA 186 (3) (3,3,0) (S) Computers in M e d i a : Introduction Computers in M e d i a Production Basic computer skills in word processing and introductory training in graphics and desktop publishing applications as they relate to media production. An introduction to the use of computers in pre-production to increase productivity. Emphasis is placed on computer application in graphics, budgeting, storyboarding and planning for the media. M D I A 172 (1.5) (1.5,0,0) (S) Video Technology I M D I A 190 A n introduction to video systems, including a history of video technology, components of a complete video system, and a comparison of different formats. Instructional Design MDIA 173 (3) Educational M e d i a Applications: (3,0,0) (S) Audio An introduction to the fundamental principles of sound generation and reproduction, and to the terminology, hardware, and systems related to audio components. Applications of audio technology, equipment maintenance, and critical analysis of product specifications are given special emphasis. MDIA 181 (3) A n introduction to basic production techniques; components include interviewing, scripting, dubbing, editing, mixing, and packaging. The course also covers the operation of microphones, tape recorders and dub/mix facilities. (3) (1.5,0,5) (F) An introduction to the fundamentals of instructional design as applied in the production of educational media packages. Topics will include systems theory, objectives, audience analysis, evaluation, curriculum, learning activities, and resources. MDIA 195 (3) (3,0,0) (F) Special Applications: P h o t o g r a p h y An introduction to the areas of darkroom maintenance, photographic chemistry, print finishing, small and medium format copy camera, and relevant copying materials used in a variety of media applications. (3,6,0) (F) Basic A u d i o Production M D I A 182 (1.5) (3,0,0) (S) M D I A 200 Intermediate V i d e o I (3) (3,6,0) (S) This course is designed to build on the basics of video recording and sequencing taught in M D I A 100. Students will focus on lighting, audio recording and editing for single camera productions. Workshops and exercises will form a major part of this course as well as a final production which students will produce in production groups. A d v a n c e d A u d i o Production MDIA 202 (3) (3,3.0) (S) The application of production techniques in a variety of situations, including multi-track recording and mixing, documentaries, location recording, radio plays, film and video soundtracks and music recording, often using the department's sound production studio. In this course students will learn the fundamentals of developing, writing, and presenting material suitable for basic video documentary productions. MDIA 183 MDIA 231 (3) (3,6,0) (F) Intermediate V i d e o II (3) (3,0,0) (S) T h e o r y a n d Applications of Photographic Digital V i d e o Post Production Production This course provides the student with a hands on introduction to digital image manipulation for commercial video production. The Avid non linear editing system will be the main vehicle for teaching digital editing and effects. A n introduction to the photographic base relative to audiovisual production, including the camera and its controls, darkroom techniques, photosensitive materials and their control, and visual reproduction. M D I A 185 Advanced Photography (3) (3,6.0) (S) The application of photographic techniques, with emphasis on combining shot sequences to tell a story, as well as editing, layout, presentation, and basic studio operation. Career/Vocational 252 — Media Resources M D I A 250 Documentary Scriptwriting (1.5) (1.5,0,0) (F) An overview of the production planning process with an emphasis on the roles of scripts, concepts, treatments and storyboards in documentary production. M D I A 260 (3) A / V a n d Multi-Image Production (3,3,0) (F) A n introduction to the production o f instructional slide/ tape programs. Includes operation o f slide/tape equipment, production o f transparencies, sound track and design considerations, and the integration o f sound and MDIA 300 A d v a n c e d V i d e o Production (6) (6,3,0) (F) This advanced production course develops students' basic production skills (taught in M D I A 100, 200 & 202) to a level suitable to produce for cablecast, broadcast and instructional and corporate settings. visuals. M D I A 263 (1.5) (1.5,6,0) (S) M D I A 303 (3) (3,6,0) (S) The M e d i a Specialist in Education a n d Training Production Resources A course concerned with the uses o f media for motivaThe comparative study of media technical systems and tion, information transmission, emotive learning, and their operation; evaluation o f various resources available self-awareness. A field practicum course exploring the in the L o w e r M a i n l a n d ; design and/or modification of relationship o f the media specialist to education i n systems for media production and delivery; and interface general and the role o f the media generalist i n educational o f different types o f systems. and instructional communication. M D I A 271 (3) Educational Television Systems (3,6,0) (F) MDIA 304 (3) (3,0,0) (S) Educational M e d i a Applications: C o m p u t e r s T h i s course assumes background in basic portable video A theoretical and hands-on introduction to the use o f tape equipment and operations covered in M D I A 200 and computers in education. Includes producing and evaluat- 202 and is designed to develop the students' ability to ing computer-assisted instruction packages and compu- effectively use multi-camera studio setups for the produc- ter-assisted video instruction. tion o f educational programs. These programs are o f a quality suitable for cablecast or broadcast on the K n o w l edge Network. Optional Courses The Department w i l l offer a limited number o f courses M D I A 272 V i d e o T e c h n o l o g y II (1.5) (1.5,0,0) (F) bers who are not enrolled i n the full-time program. These This course assumes the background i n M D I A 172. It is an advanced technical course concerned with those technical aspects o f studio and field video production that are important to the video producer. This course considers the design, planning, costing, utilization and evaluation o f audio-visual and multiimage production. G i v e n i n conjunction with M D I A 260. (1.5) courses may be credit or non-credit courses. The noncredit courses are skills upgrading courses i n f i l m / television that are given through the College's Extension D i v i s i o n . Please see the Extension Programs brochure for details. MDIA 294 (1.5) (1.5,0,0) (F) Educational M e d i a Applications: A / V a n d MultiImage Production M D I A 299 M a j o r Projects that are open to college students and community mem- M e d i a 065 (3) (3,0,0) (F) M e d i a Studies A n introductory analysis and historical overview o f media, especially film, c o m b i n i n g aesthetic concepts, production techniques, and theoretical foundations. See discussion on M e d i a Resources admission requirements. (1.5,0,0) (S) Students w i l l w o r k i n production groups to produce programs for outside clients. Students are responsible for all aspects o f these productions from contact to completion. Career/Vocational — Media Resources 253 Music Therapy C o n t a c t : 984-4951 therapy is increasingly identified by health care professionals as an effective catalyst for client motivation, Instructional Faculty P. A V E R Y , B . A . ( Y o r k ) , M . E d . (Toronto), Registered Psychologist stimulation and communication. Career Opportunities J. B E C K O W , B . M u s . ( U C L A ) , D i p . M . T . , M T A Graduates o f the program work w i t h all age groups, with J. B R O D E U R , B . M u s . (Vincent d'Indy) M . A . , P h . D . a wide range o f physiological, cognitive and emotional (P.U.) M T A disorders, in a variety o f clinical settings or i n private K . B U R K E , B . A . (Antioch), D i p . M . T . (Capilano), M T A practice. They are trained to work as part o f a health care R. G U R R team. M . H O W A R D , B.M.T. (OUBC), M T A C . K E N N Y , B . A . ( L o y o l a ) , M . A . ( U B C ) , P h . D . (Fielding Institute), M T A , C M T N . M C M A S T E R , B . A . ( U B C ) , D i p . M . T . (Nordoff & Robbins), M T A E. M O F F I T T , B.Mus. (McGill) M . A . (CPU), Dip. Music Therapy (Capilano), M T A K. NICHOLSON, B.M.T. (OUBC) M . R A W S T H O R N E , M.Ed. (UBC), R.D.N. The Program The M u s i c Therapy Program at Capilano offers the 3rd and 4th years leading to the Bachelor o f M u s i c Therapy granted by the British C o l u m b i a Open U n i v e r s i t y . T h i s degree program is designed so that students may enter third year with a variety o f backgrounds: music, general arts, education, or nursing etc. A l l four years may be completed at Capilano College. J. W A T E R S , B . A . , M . A . ( S F U ) , P h . D . ( S F U ) W. WATTS, B.M.T. (OUBC) This program provides students w i t h the opportunity to S. W I L L I A M S , B . M u s . (Toronto), M . C . A . T . gain knowledge and develop competencies i n such areas (Hahnemann) M T A , C M T , Program Coordinator as music therapy and practice; c l i n i c a l disorders; assessment, planning and intervention; improvisation and music Support Staff T i m Coffey, Stores C l e r k Dorothy H o l m e s , Receptionist of many eras and cultures; interpersonal skills and group dynamics; basic research, and documentation. The program blends academic and experiential course John M c M u r r a y , Stores C l e r k work. Students deepen their experience o f music, C a r o l M c Q u a r r i e , Secretary creative expression and the role o f the arts. They are encouraged to explore their values, beliefs, feelings and MUSIC THERAPY PROGRAM communication patterns, to increase their effectiveness i n C o n t a c t P e r s o n : Stephen W i l l i a m s , Program each o f the four terms, i n w h i c h they are given increasing Coordinator, F i r B l d g , R o o m 2 0 1 C , Phone: (604) 984- responsibility to design, implement and evaluate their 4951, e-mail: mtherapy@capcollege.bc.ca own treatment programs, under c l i n i c a l supervision. the field. They have field work i n a different setting for This course work fulfills the educational requirements for BACHELOR OF MUSIC THERAPY - BRITISH COLUMBIA OPEN UNIVERSITY Graduates o f the Capilano C o l l e g e M u s i c Therapy program receive a Bachelor o f M u s i c Therapy from the British C o l u m b i a Open University o f the Open Learning Agency. M u s i c therapists use the creative process inherent in musical participation to assist individuals and groups to improve their mental, physical and emotional functioning. M u s i c therapists work w i t h deep emotions in special therapeutic programs, run exercise and dance programs, lead choirs, instrumental ensembles and music appreciation groups as they contribute to therapeutic goals. M u s i c Career/Vocational — Music Therapy 254 professional accreditation by the Canadian A s s o c i a t i o n for M u s i c Therapy. A supervised internship is also required before graduation, to fulfill the accreditation requirement for c l i n i c a l work. Continuance in the M u s i c Therapy program w i l l be contingent upon an adequate level o f personal, academic and clinical skills as jointly evaluated each semester by the M u s i c Therapy faculty. M u s i c therapy is a helping profession in w h i c h M u s i c Therapists work w i t h clients who are in a state o f disability. In the therapist/client relationship, there is an assumption that the therapist is i n a well enough state o f health and well-being to mediate client difficulties with an appropriate clinical approach. In other words, the therapist must function in clinically * A b n o r m a l Psychology is offered within the M u s i c Therapy Program. suitable ways, be emotionally stable and able to respond generally vis-a-vis the client's needs. The therapist is the helper. The role of the M u s i c Therapy Program, in addition to student education, is to safeguard the standards o f practice o f the professional music therapy community through monitoring student readiness to work with members o f the community-at-large who are at risk because o f disability, disease, cultural and social deprivation, and otherwise disadvantaged. Graduation Requirements To obtain the Bachelor o f M u s i c Therapy degree candidates must fulfill the admission requirements to third year, complete the 71.5 credits i n the courses outlined below as well as the post basic requirements o f the ninecredit internship. Safety o f clients is essential. Admission Requirements to the Third Year Program Content FIRST T E R M Credits M . T . 320 Improvisation I 1.5 N . B . F o r admission requirements to the first year, consult M . T . 330 Basic Clinical Skills 3.0 the entrance requirements to the M u s i c Department. A n M . T . 350 The Influence o f M u s i c 3.0 interview w i l l also be required with the M u s i c Therapy M . T . 360 M u s i c Therapy I 3.0 3.0 faculty, however acceptance to the first year does not M . T . 364 D i s a b l i n g Conditions o f A d u l t h o o d guarantee acceptance to the third year. M . T . 380 Interpersonal Skills for M . T . 1.5 A l l students entering the t h i r d year o f the M u s i c Therapy P M I . 100 Concentration Instrument 2.0 Program must: PMI. Secondary Instrument LQ 18.0 1. C o m p l y with the general college entrance requirements (see A d m i s s i o n and Readmission section o f this SECOND TERM calendar) and submit an A p p l i c a t i o n for A d m i s s i o n to M . T . 361 M u s i c Therapy II 3.0 A d m i s s i o n s , Office o f the Registrar, together with M . T . 370 Disabling Conditions o f C h i l d h o o d 3.0 ' official copies o f all secondary and post-secondary M . T . 391 Practicum I 6.0 education ( i f not already on file with the college). M . T . 420 Improvisation II - Guitar 1.0 2. Participate in an interview with members of the M u s i c P M I . 200 Concentration Instrument 2.0 Therapy faculty. Interviews are held in M a y . 3. Play an audition on his/her concentration instrument, PMI. Secondary Instrument 1.0 P S Y C 222 A b n o r m a l Psychology IQ 19.0 demonstrating technique, repertoire, and musical sensitivity in two contrasting pieces at an advanced level o f proficiency. 4. Have completed one full year at the university level o f M u s i c Theory, Ear Training and Sight singing. 5. H a v e successfully completed at least two years at the university level, including at least six credits of E n g l i s h , six credits of M u s i c History, twelve credits o f psychology *, (including Introductory Psychology, THIRD T E R M M . T . 340 M i d i Synthesizer Technology 1.5 M . T . 450 M . T . 460 The Influence o f M u s i c II M u s i c Therapy III 1.5 3.0 M . T . 490 P M I . 300 Practicum II Concentration Instrument 6.0 2.0 PMI. P S Y C 201 Secondary Instrument Group D y n a m i c s 1.0 3J} 18.0 Developmental Psychology and Psychology Elective), three credits o f H u m a n B i o l o g y , three credits of Orff FOURTH TERM M . T . 451 M u s i c & the Creative Arts 1.5 M . T . 461 M u s i c Therapy I V 3.0 7. H a v e some experience with people w i t h special needs. M . T . 462 Principles o f Research 3.0 8. B e able to demonstrate a high level o f maturity, M . T . 480 Improvisation III 1.5 M . T . 491 Practicum III 6.0 P M I . 400 Concentration Instrument 2.0 PMI. Secondary Instrument and K o d a l y Methodology. 6. H a v e completed nine elective credits. integrity, a clinical suitability and readiness to train as a therapist. 9. H a v e basic guitar and keyboard skills at the level o f 1.0 18.0 University Class Piano. 10. H a v e word processing skills. Total Career/Vocational 73.0 — Music Therapy 255 M.T. 340 Post Basic Program Requirements (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) M i d i Synthesis T e c h n o l o g y M . T . 510 Internship (compulsory upon 9.0 completion o f all above courses) A n introduction to the use o f m i d i technology for the therapeutic setting. Some Music Therapy Practicum Placements M.T. 350 CHILDREN The Influence of Music North Vancouver School Board A study o f the physical and psychological impact o f Children's Hospital music, and its components for music therapy. A study o f U B C B o b B e r w i c k Preschool healing and music in various cultures. PSYCHIATRY M.T. 360 R i v e r v i e w Hospital (3) (3) (3,0,0) (F) (4,0.0) (F) Music Therapy I Westside C o m m u n i t y Care T e a m This course presents the development o f music as GERIATRICS therapy, the clientele groups and their needs, and the U B C Extended Care potential o f music as a therapeutic medium. Y a l e t o w n House M.T. 361 Lion's Gate Hospital Music Therapy II St. Paul's Hospital This course presents three music therapy styles with a focus on theory, analysis, and practice. Included are C O M M U N I T Y SETTING Developmental M u s i c Therapy, Nordoff/Robbins i m - Club Metro provisational style, and the use o f M u s i c Therapy i n i n patient psychotherapy. Burnaby Parks and Recreation M.T. 364 Course Descriptions PMI. (Various Numbers) (3) (4.0.0) (S) PALLIATIVE CARE (3) (3,0,0) (F) Disabling Conditions o f A d u l t h o o d (2) (1,0,0) (F.S) A n introduction to anatomy and physiology, normal and Concentration Private Music Instruction A course designed to permit the student to pursue i n depth study o f his/her o w n music specialty. The course consists of a series o f one-hour lessons. abnormal, and practical elements o f standard treatment. PMI. (Various Numbers) A basic introduction to abnormal c h i l d development and (1) (.5,0,0) (F,S) This course consists o f a series o f half-hour lessons on the student's secondary instrument. permission from the coordinator o f their M u s i c Program. (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) Improvisation I M.T. 380 (1.5) (1.5.0.0) (F) Communication and observation exercises to increase awareness of ingrained skills and habits, and to introduce new alternatives. M.T. 391 A n experiential study o f free and structured improvisation forms for groups and solo work. (3) (3.0.3) (F) A n introduction to the basic concepts o f observation, assessment and goal setting, including six weeks o f introductory field work and in-class observations. Career/Vocational — Music Therapy (6) (2.0.6) (S) Practicum II F i e l d work, in w h i c h students design, lead and document Basic Clinical Skills 256 (4,0.0) (S) Interpersonal Skills f o r Music Therapists Note: T o enrol i n any P M I courses students must get M.T. 330 (3) Disabling Conditions of C h i l d h o o d some major intervention approaches. Secondary Private M u s i c Instruction M.T. 320 M.T. 370 music therapy sessions, i n consultation w i t h staff supervision. W e e k l y seminars examine practicum issues. M.T. 420 (1.0) (1.5,0,0) (S) post Basic P r o g r a m C o u r s e Descriptions M.T. 510 (9) I m p r o v i s a t i o n II - G u i t a r G r o u p leading using guitar improvisation, plus exploring current popular styles and idioms. M.T. 450 (1.5) (2.0,0) (F) Internship 1,000 hours o f clinical field work, including monthly seminars. The Influence of M u s i c II A continuation o f lecture and experiential exposure to the influence o f music in conjunction with the expressive arts. M.T. 451 M u s i c a n d t h e Creative A r t s (1.5) (2,0,0) (S) A n experiential exposure to leading creative arts activities w h i c h can be used in conjunction with music: eg. dance, visual arts, poetry. M.T. 460 Music Therapy (3) (4,0,0) (F) III A continuation o f the presentation.of music therapy styles, for psychiatry, palliative care, music education and in healing, including the work of Helen Bonny and M a r y Priestley. Assessment and treatment planning w i l l be covered in depth. M.T. 461 M u s i c T h e r a p y IV (3) (3,0,0) (S) T h i s course focuses on professional attitudes, skills, and awareness. Students learn job hunting skills, and practise leading workshops. M.T. 462 Principles of Research (3) (3,0.0) (S) A n introduction to elementary research designs and basic statistical procedures. M.T. 480 (1.5) (1.0.0) (S) (6) (2.0,6) (F) I m p r o v i s a t i o n III A continuation o f Improvisation II. M.T. 490 Practicum III F i e l d work and weekly seminars. (Refer to M . T . 391.) M.T. 491 Practicum IV (6) (2.0.6) (S) F i e l d work and weekly seminars. (Refer to M . T . 391.). Career/Vocational — Music Therapy 257 Outdoor Recreation M a n a g e m e n t Bachelor of Tourism Management: offered in consortium with the Open University This new applied degree w i l l be piloted in February 1997, utilizing a combination o f evening and weekend classroom time and on-line instruction. The degree is i n tended to provide advanced management and entrepreneurial skills for persons w o r k i n g in the tourism, outdoor shoreline, and mountain back country, the C o l l e g e is ideally suited for the challenging two-year program. The Outdoor Recreation Department is relaxed and informal; however, we set and maintain high academic and outdoor leadership performance standards. Students w i l l appreciate the individual attention C o l l e g e faculty are able to provide. recreation and hospitality industries who need to upgrade their skills and knowledge beyond the diploma level and Career Opportunities gain higher level credentials for professional advance- The well-established Outdoor Recreation Management ment. T h e curriculum was developed with full industry program provides excellent training for a wide range of participation and is open to graduates o f two-year careers in federal and provincial parks, resorts, social d i p l o m a programs in T o u r i s m , Outdoor Recreation, and service agencies, adventure tourism, and environmental Hospitality. education. Careful practicum placements and an increas- Contact B r i a n W h i t e , C o n v e n o r for the Bachelor o f ing variety of career opportunities ensure that graduates T o u r i s m Management Degree, for further information. readily find employment in the field. C o n t a c t : D i v i s i o n a l Assistant; or the coordinators listed * below, phone 984-4960. The Program The curriculum includes several trips into B . C . ' s wilder- Instructional Faculty * D . B A S H A M , D . M . A . T . P . Coordinator * C . B O N I F A C E , C o n v e n o r Outdoor Recreation, B . S c , P . G . C . E . (Birmingham), M . S c ( S F U ) T. B R A A K S M A , Wilderness Leadership Cert. (Cap. Col.) B. C A M P B E L L , G.N.I. C . F I S H E R , D i p . Outdoor R e c . M g m t . (Cap. C o l . ) S. F I S H E R , D i p . Outdoor R e c . M g m t . (Cap. C o l . ) G . G J E R D A L E N , B . A . ( S F U ) , A P M C P (Capilano College) J. H A T C H A R D , D i p . Outdoor R e c . M g m t . , Wilderness Leadership Cert. (Capilano) C . K I L I A N , B . A . (Columbia), M . A . ( S F U ) R . M c B L A N E , B . E d . , M . E d . ( U . o f Alberta) J. R O U S E , S . M . A . T . P . , B . S c . ( M t . A l l i s o n U . ) , Tourism M g m t . (Cert. C a p . C o l . ) B. W H I T E , D.M.A.T.P., B.A., M . A . (SFU) ness areas, including backpacking experiences in the Coast Mountains, and West Coast environmental and cultural studies. Our program has earned an excellent reputation for its top-quality management and technical skills and employment contacts. Over the past two decades, we have expanded our network o f practicum placements, keeping us in touch with the latest developments and providing access to career prospects. A d m i s s i o n Requirements • Grade 12 graduation or equivalent or mature student status • Personal interview • Attendance at Orientation M e e t i n g • Orientation meetings and interviews are scheduled in the spring. Phone the department for dates and times. • Applicants must be at least 19 years o f age at the date of entry into the program, should have good reading and writing skills, have previous relevant outdoor TWO YEAR OUTDOOR RECREATION MANAGEMENT DIPLOMA experience, and must be physically and psychologically prepared for the challenges o f the program and B . C . ' s "super natural" environment is ideal for outdoor the demands of the industry. Students applying for recreation, and with the g r o w i n g tourism business and admission should be aware that attitude, field perform- increase in leisure time for most people, the demand for ance and participation are taken into account i n the departmental evaluation process. qualified, well-trained managers in the field of outdoor recreation is expanding rapidly. Nestled on the forested slope o f the N o r t h Shore mountains, close to Whitewater rivers, wilderness lakes, ocean Career/Vocational — Outdoor Recreation 258 • Prior to admission, a doctor's certificate o f health w i l l be required. A l l students need to be w e l l equipped with outdoor gear and must be prepared to pay additional costs for field trips. Admission Procedure Course Descriptions T h e A p p l i c a t i o n for A d m i s s i o n must be submitted to REC. 143 (3) (3,0) (F) A d m i s s i o n s , Office o f the Registrar, together with official O u t d o o r Recreation Delivery Systems transcripts and other pertinent documents. A n introduction to various outdoor recreation delivery Please bring the following documentation to your systems i n British C o l u m b i a , the past and present issues interview: influencing and affecting their direction, and their career • A t least two letters o f reference opportunities. The course w i l l examine the inter-relationships o f the various delevery systems, including the role 1 • A resume of past experiences of government. Program Content REC. 144 Credits/Lab hours FIRST T E R M C M N S 154 Communications in Recreation 3.0 R E C . 143 3.0 Outdoor Rec. Delivery Systems (3) (3,3) (S) O u t d o o r Recreation Program Planning Topics w i l l include: philosophy o f programming, concepts o f planning, community interests inventory, the R E C . 152 Environmental Stewardship 3.0 3.0 R E C . 156 Intro, to Environmental Studies 3.0 3.0 R E C . 157 A p p l i e d F i e l d Skills 3.0 R E C . 163 Wilderness First A i d I 3.0 R E C . 169 Landscape Interpretation 3.0 T O U R 139 Computer Applications relationship o f programming to customer service. REC. 151 The O u t d o o r Environment (3) (3,3) (S) Weather and climate and the impact o f weather on outdoor recreation activities. M o u n t a i n weather and in Recreation personal forecasting w i l l be examined using field work. 3_J) 24.0 6.0 SECOND TERM REC. 152 Environmental Stewardship I (3) (3,3) (F) R E C . 144 Outdoor Rec. Program Planning 3.0 3.0 R E C . 151 T h e Outdoor Environment 3.0 3.0 R E C . 153 Leisure Issues 3.0 professional in environmental stewardship. Topics 3.0 include: conservation issues, environmental ethics, policy T o u r i s m : A n Industry Perspective 3.0 and planning and sustainability. T h e course w i l l include Selective S k i l l s field work. B M K T 162 S m a l l B u s . M g m t . I T O U R 111 A n examination o f the role of the outdoor recreation no credit 15.0 6.0 REC.153 THIRD T E R M R E C . 178 (3) (3.0) (S) Leisure Issues H u m a n Relations in Recreation 3.0 T O U R 233 Cross Cultural Issues 3.0 R E C . 252 Environmental Stewardship II 3.0 3.0 aging, special needs and leisure, cultural variations i n T O U R 120 Adventure & E c o - T o u r i s m 3.0 3.0 leisure, leisure-related social problems, lifestyle-based B M K T 164 S m a l l B u s . M g m t . II Selective S k i l l s W o r k and leisure i n the human life c y c l e , adolescence, 3.0 no credit variation in work and leisure, factors i n lifestyle choice, consumerism and outdoor recreation, sociological 15.0 6.0 perspectives on present and future trends. 9.0 REC. 156 (3) Introduction t o Environmental Studies FOURTH TERM R E C . 255 Outdoor Recreation Practicum 9.0 (3.3) (F) A n introduction to ecological principles and their applica- Total 63.0 18.0 tion to environmental issues. L o c a l ecosystems and their indicator species w i l l be examined through field work. REC. 157 A p p l i e d Field Skills (3) (3,0) (F) Develops skills, knowledge and attitudes i n overland travel, outdoor l i v i n g , navigation and trip planning i n a temperate climate. Career/Vocational — Outdoor Recreation 259 REC. 169 (3) (3,0) (F) issues, protecting resource areas, eco-tourism issues, land Landscape Interpretation Interpretation o f mountain environments, local geology and landforms. T h e course w i l l include field work. REC. 178 area and activity management, resource management (3) (3,0) (F) use planning, and product opportunities. T O U R 139 (3) (3.0,0) (F) C o m p u t e r Applications in Recreation This course introduces students to computer application H u m a n Relations in Recreation This course focuses on leadership, motivation, c o m m u n i cations and group dynamics. It also deals with human resource development i n c l u d i n g employee recruitment, in a M S W i n d o w s environment. Students w i l l learn h o w to create professionsl documents, spreadsheets, presentations and to access the internet. selection, training and development, and performance T O U R 233 appraisal. (3) (3,0,) (F) Cross Cultural Issues REC. 252 (3) (3,3) (F) This course deals with the cultural aspects o f providing/ Environmental S t e w a r d s h i p II delivering outdoor recreation activities to both interna- A n examination of environmental stewardship concepts tional clients coming to Canada and Canadian clients and issues, and the development o f nature interpretation going off-shore. A component w h i c h deals specifically skills. T h i s course w i l l include a field trip. with First Nations cultures is also included. REC. 255 (9) (9,0,0) (S) O u t d o o r Recreation Practicum In addition to acquiring practical knowledge about culture in general, participants research and present information on a variety of specific cultures, w i t h the link The practicum is designed to integrate classroom theory between cultural knowledge/skills and the success o f with w o r k i n g experience in the field. Students w i l l Outdoor Recreation activities being stressed. arrange with the faculty liaison person to spend three and one-half months i n an acceptable agency placement and B M K T 162 w i l l be responsible to a specific agency supervisor. Small Business M a n a g e m e n t I Students w i l l be provided with terms of reference for the practicum experience. Student work performance and potential w i l l be evaluated by the faculty liaison person and agency supervisor, and students w i l l make a major presentation to the department at the conclusion o f the practicum. (3) (3.0,0) (S) A n introduction to marketing and market research. These foundation topics w i l l provide a base upon w h i c h students w i l l develop knowledge and skills related to operating a business of their o w n . B M K T 164 (3) (3.0) (F) Small Business M a n a g e m e n t II T O U R 111 (3.0) (3.0,0) (S) This course w i l l allow the student to develop a business Tourism: A n Industry Perspective plan utilizing workshops in specific areas o f sound A n introduction to the tourism industry and its role in the economy, including the scale, impact and major sectors of the tourism industry, tourism products in B . C . , devel- business planning. U p o n completion o f this course the student w i l l have a plan ready for submission to financial advisors. opment potential, language and terminology used i n the industry and tourism industry structure and organization. Students w i l l learn key legal issues in the industry, and w i l l identify educational and professional career path opportunities i n various industry sectors i n the province. T O U R 120 (3) (3,3) (S) impact of the industry, selling and adventure tourism, identifying markets, packaging, legal liability, organization and structure o f the industry, government's role i n 260 D u r i n g their time in the outdoor recreation management program students have the opportunity to pursue two skills activities i n their particular areas o f interest. These selective skills help provide our graduates with work in industries. Adventure tourism products w i l l be examined; economic — Outdoor (no credit) the outdoor recreation, adventure travel and eco-tourism A d v e n t u r e a n d Eco-Tourism Career/Vocational Selective skills Recreation Tourism M a n a g e m e n t C o n t a c t : Jonathan Rouse or D o n Basham, Coordinators Phone: 984-4960 or F a x : 984-1761 Co-op BACHELOR OF TOURISM MANAGEMENT DEGREE: offered in consortium with the Open University. Instructional Faculty T h i s new applied degree commenced in February 1997, D . B A S H A M , Coordinator, D M A T P utilizing a combination o f evening and weekend class- B. C A M P B E L L , G N I room time and on-line instruction. The degree is i n - G. F A N E , B . S c , M . B . A . , R.I.A. tended to provide advanced management and entrepre- W . I N G L I S , B . A . Dip. Marketing neurial skills for persons w o r k i n g in the tourism, outdoor C . K I L I A N , B . A . (Col.), M . A . ( S F U ) recreation and hospitality industries w h o need to upgrade R. M c B L A N E , B . E d . , M . E d . (Alberta) their skills and knowledge beyond the diploma level and J. P E N D Y G R A S S E , B . S c , Teacher's Cert. (Manitoba), gain higher level credentials for professional advance- T o u r . M g m t . Cert. (Capilano), D M A T P J. R O U S E , B . S c . ( M t . A . ) , Tour. M g m t . Cert., (Capilano College), S M A T P , Coordinator V . T I M M O N S , Sr. Cert. Hospitality and Tourism ment. The curriculum was developed with full industry participation and is open to graduates o f two-year diploma programs in T o u r i s m , Outdoor Recreation, and Hospitality. Administration ( B . C . l . T . ) , B . A . S. S T A N G E R , B P E ( U B C ) , D i p . H u m a n Resources (BCIT) B . W H I T E , B . A . , M . A . (SFU), D M A T P TOURISM MANAGEMENT CO-OP DIPLOMA PROGRAM Contact Brian White, Convenor for the Bachelor o f Tourism Management degree, for further information; phone 984-4960 or Fax 984-1761. Admission Requirements • Completion o f Grade 12 or equivalent or mature student status. Capilano College's accelerated Tourism Management C o - • Applicants should be high school graduates, at least 18 op program is on the leading edge o f tourism education. years old with good reading and writing skills, and some Our mission is to train students in the management skills work experience. Previous post-secondary education is a necessary for the successful operation of travel genera- definite asset. Phone the T o u r i s m Department for dates o f tors, including resorts, adventure tourism, attractions, the information meetings and follow-up interviews. conferences, and special events. Marketing, research and entrepreneurial skills in tourism business are also emphasized. Recognition o f our curriculum by the Pacific R i m Institute o f T o u r i s m provides access to industry certification. Intensive technical skills courses, contact with the industry, and a four and a half month supervised co-op work term encourages a professional attitude to the industry. The program's pragmatic business approach combined w i t h creative teaching promises a rewarding educational investment for students. Admission Procedure Applications for admission must be submitted to A d m i s sions, Office o f the Registrar, together with official transcripts and any other pertinent documents. Please bring the following documentation to your interview: • A t least two letters of reference • A resume o f past experiences Program Content Capilano C o l l e g e Tourism Management offers top quality faculty, a beautiful campus, and an exciting learning environment. Term 1 (January to April) C M N S 154 sional in the field, give us a call! 3.0 and T o u r i s m If y o u are actively considering a career in tourism and think y o u have what it takes to be successful as a profes- Credits Communications in Recreation T O U R 100 T o u r i s m C o - o p Preparation 1.5 T O U R 111 Tourism: A n Industry Perspective 3.0 T O U R 112 Tourism Marketing 3.0 T O U R 114 Organizational Behaviour in Tourism 3.0 T O U R 131 Tourism Product Development T O U R 139 Computer Applications in T o u r i s m I 3^0 3.0 Total 19.5 Career/Vocational — Tourism 261 T O U R 112 T e r m 2 ( M a y to S e p t e m b e r ) T O U R 130 T o t a l 10.5 Co-op Work Term (3.0) (3.0,1) (S) Tourism Marketing The objectives o f this course are to examine the existing T e r m 3 (September to D e c e m b e r ) T O U R 116 Financial Planning i n T o u r i s m I T O U R 118 Special Events as T o u r i s m 3.0 tourism marketing system in Canada; to develop the student's understanding o f Canadian tourism marketing Generators 3.0 and the basics o f consumer marketing; and to enable the T O U R 120 Adventure and E c o - T o u r i s m 3.0 students to relate to current aspects o f tourism business T O U R 123 T o u r i s m Advertising 3.0 and how they affect Canadian tourism marketing. T O U R 127 T o u r i s m Resource and C o m m u n i t y 3.0 T O U R 113 Planning T O U R 239 A d v a n c e d Computer Applications i n 3X) Tourism T o t a l 18.0 (3.0,1) (S) H u m a n resource issues, job analysis, recruitment, interviewing, orientation, training and development, performance management, legislation, and labour- T e r m 4 ( J a n u a r y to M a r c h ) T O U R 113 (3.0) H u m a n Resource M a n a g e m e n t in T o u r i s m management relations. H u m a n Resource Management in Tourism 3.0 T O U R 125 Financial Planning in Tourism II 3.0 T O U R 231 T o u r i s m Research and Consultancy 3.0 T O U R 232 International T o u r i s m Individual behaviour, interpersonal communication skills, P o l i c y and Planning 3.0 decision-making, group dynamics and team building, Cross Cultural T o u r i s m 3J) service management, conflict resolution, negotiation, and T O U R 233 T o t a l 15.0 T O U R 114 (3.0) (3.0,1) (S) Organizational Behaviour in T o u r i s m giving performance feedback. P r o g r a m T o t a l 63.0 T O U R 116 Course Descriptions C M N S 154 (3.0) (3.0,1) (F) Financial Planning in T o u r i s m I (3.0) (3,1,0) (S) C o m m u n i c a t i o n s in Recreation & Tourism Financial control methods, inventory control, labour costs and controls, employee scheduling, payroll, loss prevention, reporting, accounting applications, financial state- W r i t i n g and speech related to Outdoor Recreation and ments, cash/credit transactions, basic financial planning. T o u r i s m Management: reports, memorandums, press releases, article briefs and proposals. A spoken presenta- T O U R 118 tion may be required. Special Events as Tourism Generators T O U R 100 (1.5) (1.5,-5) (S) (3.0) (3.0,1) (F) This course w i l l cover all aspects o f event management and event marketing: choosing the right event, designing Tourism C o - o p Preparation a business (event) plan, event/cause marketing, sponsor This course w i l l include a general overview of the co-op proposals, managing the pre-event, event day(s) manage- work experience. The specific areas covered w i l l be goal ment, and post event activities. Students w i l l design a setting, skills analysis, researching sectors and employ- new special event and prepare a business plan for that ers, job search techniques and preparation of resume, event. The course w i l l also include case studies from cover letter and thank you letter. Assistance w i l l be existing events. given in j o b search by faculty. T O U R 120 T O U R 111 (3.0) (3.0,1) (S) (3.0) (3.0,1) (F) A d v e n t u r e a n d Eco-Tourism Tourism: A n Industry Perspective Adventure tourism products w i l l be examined; economic A n introduction to the key concepts, language, and issues impact o f the industry, selling adventure tourism, identi- facing the tourism industry. Trends, market profiles and fying markets, packaging, legal liability, organization and demographic factors, key industry sectors, tourism structure o f the industry, government's role in area and geography and key regional products in B . C . , tourism's activity management, resource management issues, role i n community development, social impacts o f protecting resource areas, eco-tourism issues, land use tourism, transportation, communication, and legal issues planning, and product opportunities. in tourism. Career/Vocational — 262 Tourism T O U R 123 Tourism A d v e r t i s i n g (3.0) (3.0,1) (F) This course is designed to give the student an understand- T O U R 139 (3.0) Computer Applications in T o u r i s m (3.0,1) (S) This course introduces participants to the creation o f ing o f the major aspects o f Canadian tourism advertising. word processed documents using PC-based W i n d o w s / The course w i l l cover advertising planning, creative Graphical software Microsoft W o r d 7.0, an introduction strategies and execution as well as developing "real life" to spreadsheet concepts using Microsoft E x c e l 7.0, an advertising campaigns. Introduction to PowerPoint—a graphic presentation package. The course also introduces the student to T O U R 125 (3.0) Financial Planning in Tourism II (3.0,1) (S) Designing a business plan, financial planning techniques, financial goal setting for tourism managers. T O U R 127 (3.0) Windows95 and the graphical user interface, to the basic computer hardware requirements and the use o f Internet (3.0,1) (F) Explorer to access the Internet and send m a i l . T O U R 231 (3.0) Tourism Research a n d Consultancy (3.0,1) (S) T o u r i s m Resource a n d C o m m u n i t y Planning The role and function o f consultants in tourism w i l l be A n overview o f tourism resource management issues and examined including the nature o f the consulting business, approaches, including heritage and cultural tourism business ethics, politics o f consulting, business planning, planning, tourism resource inventory and planning staffing, marketing your services, consultant resumes, methods including G I S (Geographical Information nature o f competition, types o f clients and client expecta- System) techniques, community tourism planning, and tions. A n a l y z i n g and responding to requests for propos- sustainability issues in tourism. als, researching R F P s and writing proposals. T O U R 130 Tourism Co-op Work Term (10.5) (10.5,0) (Su) T h e co-op work term is designed to apply classroom T O U R 232 (3.0) (3.0,1) (S) International Tourism Policy a n d Planning A geographical overview o f the Asia-Pacific region theory and skills through work experience. Students w i l l including demographics, physiography, environmental spend four and one-half months in an acceptable industry issues, tourism destinations and travel patterns. A review placement and w i l l be responsible to a specific industry of politics in tourism and A s i a - P a c i f i c region national supervisor. The goal is to develop high calibre graduates tourism policies. Methodology and approach to tourism who are better able to assume productive jobs. Summer policy analysis, comparative tourism development case work placements are sought by the students, with faculty studies, regional tourism policy and planning. R o l e o f co-op advisors assisting them to find placement. Stu- development agencies and tourism organizations. dents apply for positions and are selected by the employT O U R 233 ees and the College. Students' w o r k performance and potential w i l l be evaluated by the faculty and industry supervisor. Upon completion o f the co-op work term, each student w i l l make a major presentation to the class and faculty at a department retreat. T O U R 131 (3.0) (3.0) (3.0.1) (S) Cross Cultural Tourism A n overview o f cross-cultural issues in tourism. The nature o f prejudice and racism is examined as are effective communication skills and behaviours i n selected cultures: gender relationships, business and social customs, body language, negotiation skills and others. (3.0.1) (S) T o u r i s m Product D e v e l o p m e n t W i t h today's intense global competition for tourists T O U R 239 (3.0) (3.0,1) (F) A d v a n c e d C o m p u t e r Applications in T o u r i s m combined w i t h the subject and tangible nature o f the This course introduces participants to the production o f tourism experience, operations and destinations are now spreadsheet documents using PC-based W i n d o w s / compelled to analytically and methodically develop Graphical software, as w e l l as database concepts using appropriate tourism products. T h i s course w i l l examine database management software. how to effectively develop, package and position tourism products for success in the marketplace. Career/Vocational — Tourism 263 264 A s i a Pacific M a n a g e m e n t ASIA PACIFIC M A N A G E M E N T COOPERATIVE P R O G R A M C o n t a c t : Scott M a c l e o d , 984-4981, Fax 984-4992, e-mail: SMacLeod@claude.capcollege.bc.ca Co-op General Information This D i p l o m a Program has been developed to offer training to Canadians who are considering careers in A s i a . It is a joint-venture i n educational programming, bringing employers together w i t h students and the Instructional Faculty N i g e l A M O N , B . A . (Kent), M . A . ( S F U ) Robert B A G S H A W , B . C o m m . ( U B C ) , M . A . (Colorado), C o o p Coordinator A n d r e w B U T T , B . A . , L L . B . (South Africa), International Business James C A S W E L L , B . A . , M . A . P h . D . ( U . o f Michigan), A r t History G r a h a m F A N E , D i p . Tech. ( B C I T ) , B . S c . (City U . ) , M.B.A., C.M.A. (UBC) College to form a unique blend o f experiential and academic training. The emphasis is on Canada's relationships with P A C I F I C R I M C O U N T R I E S and our potential to extend our network through trade, business, applied technology and development projects. The Program Students who are interested in a career i n the A s i a Pacific region w i l l follow an integrated program o f study. Charles G R E E N B E R G , B . A . , M . A . (Manitoba), P h . D . (UBC) The Program offers an intensive curriculum designed to Barbara H A N K I N , B . A . ( U . B . C ) , M . A . ( W A S H . ) , student w i l l take the core courses i n A s i a n Studies and Directed Studies serve the student in future international work. E a c h International Business Trade and Finance. In addition, B i l l I N G L I S , B . A . ( U B C ) , D i p . M a r k e t i n g (Montreal) students w i l l choose an A s i a n language such as Japanese, Francis K I E M , B . B . A . , P h . D . E d . (Jakarta), Indonesian Chinese (Mandarin), Indonesian, Vietnamese or T h a i . Language H a i L E , B . A . ( S F U ) , Vietnamese Language Daniel L I M A W A N , B . A . , Pacific and Asian Studies, B . S c . Psychology ( U V I C ) , M . A . Political and E c o nomic Development (Washington) Scott M a c L E O D , B . A . , M . A . , P h . D . ( U B C ) , Economic Geography L o u i s e M A Y , B . A . (Brock), M . A . , P h . D . ( U B C ) , A s i a Pacific Perspectives Terry M I L L S , C I T T , B . G . S . , M . E d . ( S F U ) N o r i k o O M A E , B . A . , M . A . , Teaching Cert., (Osaka U . o f Foreign Studies), Japanese Language Jim P L A C Z E K , B.A.(Windsor), M . A . ( U B C ) , Ph.D ( U B C ) Thai Language Pontip P L A C Z E K , B . A . (Thammasat), Thai Language Charles P R I E S T E R , F C B A B . C o m m . , M . A . ( U B C ) , International Finance Yanfeng Q U , B . A . (Shandong Teachers' U . ) , M . A . (Beijing Foreign Studies IJ.), P h . D . ( U B C ) , Chinese Language Cameron S Y L V E S T E R , B . A . (Gonzaga), M . A . (NotreDame), Political Economy A n n e W A T S O N , B . A . ( U . o f Calgary), M . B . A . ( A P I U , N e w Zealand), Marketing K a r e n Y I P , B . A . ( U B C ) , L L . B . ( U B C ) , L e g a l Systems After nine months o f study, eligible students w i l l c o m plete a work placement. T h i s co-op w o r k term is 12 months in duration. Students w i l l be evaluated by the College and the employer, and this w i l l become part o f the student's permanent record. Every effort w i l l be made to secure co-op placements for students. Jobs w i l l be sought in A s i a n countries and i n international Canadian organizations. The work term w i l l finish with debriefing and re-entry sessions. Career targets o f the current class include areas such as Finance, International Marketing, Trade, T o u r i s m , Communications, H u m a n Resources, Development, Education, Planning, Journalism, U r b a n L a n d Development, Government and Non-Government organizations. Inquiries for application/information packages should be directed to the A s i a Pacific Management Cooperative Program office, telephone 984-4981, F A X 984-4992. Admission Requirements Applications for the Program are invited from: a) Those who have completed a degree/degrees in Arts, Sciences or a professional area such as Business Administration, L a w , Engineering, Biotechnology, Forestry, or Computer Applications. OR b) Those who are currently employed and who are eligible for company sponsorship into the Program. Post-graduate Programs — Asia Pacific Management 267 Sponsorship may come from a wide range o f business socio-economic analysis and w i l l emphasize the spatial and development organizations which have the aspects o f economic processes. Emphasis is on the c o m m o n factor of wanting their employees trained for dynamism of economic change and how this change international work. interacts with local social, political and environmental matrices. The course w i l l be issue oriented. There w i l l • A d m i s s i o n m a x i m u m is 32 students per year. be a m i x o f theoretical background, actual case studies, • Students are selected on the basis o f their academic and training in analytical skills. record, relevant work and A s i a n experience, a written submission and an interview. A P M C 524 • Successful applicants w i l l have strong written, math- Business D e v e l o p m e n t Projects • Applicants w h o demonstrate proficiency in language ematical and interpersonal communication skills. acquisition and w h o have solid business experience w i l l have preference. • Applications for A d m i s s i o n , together with offical transcripts for all post-secondary education, must be submitted to A d m i s s i o n s , Office o f the Registrar. Course Descriptions A P M C 503 (1.5) (2,0,2) (S) These are supervised team projects w o r k i n g with V a n couver-based companies. Business plans and projects are prepared for A s i a n opportunities chosen in conjunction with the companies. A P M C 525 (2.25) (3,0.0) (F) International M a n a g e m e n t I This course provides students with a broad understanding (3.0) (2,0,0) (F)(S) International Career M a n a g e m e n t of the Management Process and Functions as w e l l as with the interrelatedness of these topics with H u m a n Behaviour in Organizations. Students also study the application This course w i l l help students develop skills and an of this learning in an international context - particularly understanding for networking and working in an A s i a n with respect to the A s i a Pacific R e g i o n . environment. A P M C 531 A P M C 515 (.25) (0,0,2.5) (S) Directed Studies (2.25) (3,0,0) (S) International Finance II This course is a continuation o f A P M C 518. This two-fold course allows students, through directed research and a written paper, to explore an area o f special A P M C 532 interest o r need. It also includes preparation for the final Economic G e o g r a p h y II comprehensive exam. This course is a continuation o f A P M C 520. A P M C 518 (2.25) (3,0,0) (F) A P M C 533 (2.25) (1.5) International Finance I International Business a n d Trade This course w i l l a i m at providing students with an This course w i l l focus on case studies. (3,0,0) (S) (2,0,0) (S) understanding o f financial concepts and strategies that influence business i n the conduct o f international c o m - A P M C 534 merce. International M a n a g e m e n t II A P M C 519 (1.5) (2,0,0) (F) (1.5) (2.0,0) (S) This course is a continuation o f A P M C 525, but places a greater emphasis on guest presentations by senior Introduction t o Business a n d Trade executives whose companies actually are operating in the This course provides students with an understanding A s i a Pacific Region. of the basic concepts involved in marketing products and services, as w e l l as with a familiarity with marketing A P M C 540 terminology and the application o f the "marketing Asia Pacific Perspectives I concept". (5.25) (7,0.0) (F) This series of courses is designed to introduce students to A P M C 520 (2.25) (3.0,0) (F) the historical and current social, political and cultural patterns of the A s i a Pacific Region. Students w i l l review Economic G e o g r a p h y I and develop skills in cross-cultural communication. They This course w i l l introduce students to current concepts in Post-graduate 268 Programs — Asia Pacific Management w i l l also develop skills in regional analysis that w i l l help them understand relationships within A s i a and with the West. A P M C 541 A s i a Pacific Perspectives II (3.75) (4,0,0) (S) INDO102 Introduction t o Indonesian I (1.5) (4,2,0) (F) This course helps prepare students to function i n daily life in Indonesia by helping them to master basic language skills, sensitizing them to cultural differences, and T h i s course is a continuation of A P M C 540. A P M C 550 (1.5) Cross C u l t u r a l C o m m u n i c a t i o n teaching them to begin to read and write Indonesian. (2,0,0) (S) This course w i l l develop an understanding of the process of communication, including appreciation of the fact that communication is significantly affected by the culture, INDO103 Introduction t o Indonesian II (3.0) (4,2,0) (S) Prerequisite: I N D O 102 or permission o f the instructor. This course is a continuation o f I N D O 102. personality and experience o f the communicator. This course w i l l also develop an understanding of the students' o w n culture and its effects on behavior. A P M C 560 Workshops (0) (4,0,0) (F) (S) This series allows students to "customize" the Program by selecting from a range o f courses which offer an opportunity to develop special skills or to study special J A P N 202 Introduction t o Japanese I (1.5) (3,1,0) (F) Prerequisite: Equivalent o f " L e v e l Three" (Advanced Beginnner's L e v e l ) o f the Japanese Proficiency Test or higher, and instructor's permission. This course is designed to provide students w i t h intermediate practical Japanese communication skills for daily and job-related circumstances in Japan. issues concerning A s i a . CHIN 102 (1.5) (3,1,0) (F) Introduction t o Chinese I (3) (3,1,0) (S) This course is a continuation o f C H I N 102 . This course is a continuation o f J A P N 202. THAI 102 (1.5) (4.2,0) (F) Introduction t o Thai I This course is designed to provide students with basic (1.5) cultural differences i n concept and behaviour. THAI 103 Introduction t o Thai II (3,1,0) (F) Intermediate Chinese I Prerequisite: C o m p l e t i o n o f one year o f Chinese or instructor's permission. T h i s course is designed to provide students with functional Chinese communication skills for daily and jobrelated circumstances in C h i n a and other Mandarinspeaking countries and regions. CHIN 203 Intermediate Chinese II (3,1,0) (S) Thai language skills and sensitize them to important Prerequisite: C H I N 102 or permission o f the instructor. CHIN 202 (3) Prerequisite: J A P N 202 or instructor's permission. T h i s course introduces students to the basics o f Mandarin and develops basic communication skills through the study o f vocabulary, grammar, sentence structure and culture. CHIN 103 Introduction t o Chinese II J A P N 203 Introduction t o Japanese II Prerequisite: (3) (4,2.0) (S) T H A I 102 or instructor's permission. This course is a continuation o f T H A I 102. VIET 102 (1.5) (3.1,0) (F) Introduction t o V i e t n a m e s e I This course is designed to offer students a basic k n o w l edge o f Vietnamese and to enable them to gain an appreciation o f the Vietnamese culture and society. (3) (3,1,0) (S) Prerequisite: C H I N 202 or instructor's permission. This course is a continuation o f C H I N 202. VIET 103 (3) (3,1,0) (S) Introduction t o V i e t n a m e s e II Prerequisite: V I E T 102 or instructor's permission. This course is a continuation o f V I E T 102. Post-graduate Programs —Asia Pacific Management 269 Environmental Science ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE POST BACCALAUREATE DIPLOMA Instructional Faculty J . D . B O N S E R , B . A . S c , M . A . S c . ( U B C ) , P h . D . (Waterloo) A . D U F F Y , B . A . (Hons.) (Guelph), M . C . S . (Calgary) S. G R O V E S , A . B . (Radcliffe), P h . D . ( U B C ) , Coordinator of Environmental Science L . H . N I K L , B . S c , M.Sc. (SFU) J . H . N O R I E , B . A . S c ( U B C ) , M . E n v . D e s . (Calgary) R . K . P A I S L E Y , B . S c . ( U B C ) , M . S c . (Washington), J . D . (California), L L . M . ( L o n d o n School of Economics) C .T . R E A R D O N , B . A . , L . L . D . (Dalhousie), M . A . (Queen's), M . A . ( M . I . T . ) A . R O J A S , M . A . (York), Ph.D. (York) D . F. S H E R A T O N , B.A.Sc. Ph.D. ( U B C ) V . M . T R O U P , B . S c . (Hons.) ( M c M a s t e r ) , M . S c . ( U B C ) , Coordinator o f Environmental Science A . W H I T E H E A D , B.Sc. (U. V i c ) , M . S c (UBC) S. W I L K I N S , B . A . , M . S c . ( M c M a s t e r ) Laboratory Supervisors and Technicians J. R I C H A R D S O N , B . Sc. ( U V i c ) , M . S c ( U B C ) , Laboratory Supervisor J. T H O M P S O N , Laboratory Technician S. Y E E , B . S c . ( U B C ) , Laboratory Technician General Information The D i p l o m a Program in Environmental Science is intended for students w h o have already completed a degree in science and who wish to acquire the knowledge and practical skills necessary for dealing with environmental issues and projects in the work place. This is a full year program designed to prepare students to accept leadership roles in environmental problem solving through a combination of academic studies and field assignments. Areas o f emphasis include applied ecology, toxicology, project management, environmental assessment, law, and ethics. C o m p l e t i o n of an in-depth assignment i n v o l v i n g work placement or directed studies is also required. For complete details on this program, see Environmental Science in the A c a d e m i c section o f this calendar. Post-graduate 270 Programs — Environmental Science S u m m e r School Programs a n d Courses COST RECOVERY CREDIT COURSES T h e C o l l e g e offers credit courses on a cost recovery basis to supplement its regular fall/spring offering during the summer. These courses are offered both on an intensive basis (approximately 7.5 weeks) and a full semester basis (the traditional 15 weeks). E v e r y effort is made to offer a full range o f credit courses, especially those courses with the highest demand. A n y student who is unable to enrol in a course o f his/her choice in the regular term w i l l have a good chance o f doing so in the summer. Registration will not be on a G P A basis, but on a first come, first served basis. Students who have failed courses and cannot repeat them during the normal school year w i l l also be able to enrol i n these courses during the summer semester. Information on course offerings is available early i n January and registration w i l l begin in mid-semester. Courses begin in early M a y and run through August. The first intensive semester (with two four-hour meetings a week) w i l l run from the first week in M a y to mid-June and the second intensive semester w i l l run from mid-June to mid-August. Tuition fees are payable at Registration. Special Summer Programs In addition to normal course offerings, non-credit summer programs ranging from wilderness field schools to special college preparatory programs are offered i n August. C h e c k the summer school timetable in January for more information. Summer School Programs & Courses 273 274 Continuing Education a n d Contract Services Contact: 984-4901, fax: 983:7545 ( L o w e r Mainland) 892-5322, fax: 892-9274 (Howe Sound) 885-9310, fax: 885-9350 (Sunshine Coast) F o r C o n t i n u i n g Education tuition policy, please see Fees Section. modern languages. Educational study/travel tours are also available through Continuing Education. Continuing Education courses are not listed i n the College Calendar — they are advertised i n seasonal calendars distributed throughout the community, and by direct mail. Program Consultants L . Baker, B . A . ( U B C ) ; L L . B . ( U B C ) ; Prof. Teaching Cert. ( S F U ) ; Coordinator, general programs J. Bennett, B . A . ( S F U ) ; general programs and Contract Services, Sechelt campus J. Berezowsky, B . A . ( U A ) ; general programs and C o n tract Services, Squamish campus C . Dorin, B . A . (UVic); B S W ( U B C ) ; M S W (UBC); Special Education Teacher Assistant Program ( S E T A ) G . Hofmann, B . E d . ( U B C ) , Cert. T E S L / T F S L (Laval Community Music School The Capilano College C o m m u n i t y M u s i c S c h o o l offers group instruction for students of voice, theory, and a wide variety of instruments. G r o u p music instruction for children includes: Robert Pace G r o u p Piano; Strings for Children; and K o d a l y - O r f f classes. T h e C o m m u n i t y M u s i c School also offers a C o m m u n i t y C h o i r , a W o m en's C h o i r — " C e c i l i a Ensemble," and v o c a l instruction classes. A d u l t instruction on instruments includes piano, U n i v . ) , M . A . ( S O A S , U n i v . London), Prof. Teaching violin, guitar and others. Classes are held on campus and Cert. ( U B C ) ; International Programs in other community locations. L . Jest, M . E d . ( S F U ) ; Director o f Continuing Education and Contract Services K . L i n d , B . A . (Mus) ( U B C ) ; C o m m u n i t y M u s i c School Programs are advertised in the local media each M a y and listed in the Continuing Education calendar published three times yearly. R . M o r r i s , M . A . ( U B C ) ; general programs, F i l m and Television Studies N . N o w l a n , B . A . (Queen's U n i v . ) ; M . A . ( U B C ) ; M . E d . ( U B C ) ; Contract Services, L o w e r M a i n l a n d C . R u d y , B . A . ( U B C ) ; instructor, Career Development Programs R . Stec, B . A . ( U V i c ) ; M . A . ( U V i c ) ; Eldercollege, International Programs Educational Travel Educational travel offers a wide variety o f travel and study opportunities ranging from snorkelling along the coral reefs o f Rarotonga Island to planning a garden for wildlife. Out o f country tours include: A r t Tours to N e w Y o r k and Boston; Summer Workshops i n France; B i r d s and B i g Game o f N e p a l , and others. C l o s e r to home, Support Staff A . Herbert, G . M i t c h e l l , D . Rentz, B . Soeder, C . Tang; Program Assistants L . M u l h o l l a n d , Publicist Continuing Education The C o l l e g e offers a variety o f continuing education courses and programs. There are no prerequisites for admission to non-credit courses but occasionally a certain level of proficiency is recommended for admission. The majority o f continuing education offerings are an outgrowth o f the C o l l e g e ' s academic and career/vocational programs whose faculties contribute to the high level o f instructional competence of the programs. Courses and programs are drawn from the areas o f arts, music, film and television studies, social sciences, natural sciences, career development, business, computer science, personal development, fashion, media, and choose from a weekend on B o w e n Island w i t h I S L E (Island-Stay Learning Experiences), a G u l f Islands Day Cruise, or register for a field weekend i n Cathedral L a k e Provincial Park, one o f the Natural History programs. Eldercollege Eldercollege is a year-round educational community, open to men and women, 55 and older. Eldercollege provides learning opportunities for older adults who w i s h to enrich their lifestyle through selfdirected education and contribute to the social and cultural development of the community. Eldercollege participants design and offer quality educational activities to stimulate interest in learning and to provide a forum for sharing ideas and knowledge w i t h others. Members can lead study groups, serve on the A d v i s o r y Board and its committees, and be study group participants. Activities are both planned and operated by members to maintain a high quality offering at a m i n i m u m cost. Continuing Education and Contract Services 277 Film and Television Studies by knowledgeable instructors in a classroom, conference Continuing Education offers a variety o f evening and weekend courses in F i l m and Television Studies, some o f w h i c h may be applied to a Certificate in F i l m and Television. Developed specifically to meet the industry's training needs, the program focuses on three areas room or computer lab on campus, or i n the workplace. A training consultant w i l l assist with program development including: needs assessment, training design, materials, costing, and evaluation. Training is available in a wide variety o f subject areas identified through consultation with unions, professional such as: computers; business management and c o m m u n i - organizations and C o l l e g e faculty: cation; retail, tourism and customer service; media • introductory seminars that offer a source o f accessible technology; E S L ; plus WorkSafe, FoodSafe and W C B and reliable information for those considering a future Occupational First A i d ; and as requested. in the film and television industry; Career Development programs offer services i n areas a certificate program that provides the necessary skills such as vocational assessment and career transition. • and knowledge for entry-level employment in film and television, c o m b i n i n g a broad-based overview o f the industry with studies in production, directing, acting, cinematography, screenwriting and other areas o f interest; • a series o f upgrading workshops for industry professionals. International Programs provides training for Canadians and international students. Programs are available for Canadians to learn cross-cultural communication skills and prepare for overseas placement. International students may enrol i n programs that offer short-term E S L and Canadian culture homestay, or E S L combined with career skills training in professional areas such as busi- Courses at C a p i l a n o College emphasize a "hands-on" approach to the skills needed to succeed in the technical and creative areas o f film, television, video and commercial production. W o r k i n g professionals from the industry teach all courses and workshops. ness administration, computers, tourism, and others. Various employment training and other programs funded through the provincial and federal government may also be developed and administered through this office. Contract Services works i n partnership w i t h other faculties, colleges and community organizations to jointly Special Education Teacher Assistant (SETA) develop and deliver high-quality training and career The S E T A program prepares students for a variety o f development opportunities for the community. para-professional duties in schools by providing courses in theoretical studies and practical applications for working w i t h children and young adults who need extra support. The C o n t i n u i n g Education department offers individual courses for professional development, as well as a certificate program. Educational Partnerships Organizations and societies are encouraged to co-sponsor their educational activities w i t h Capilano C o l l e g e . The College can provide facilities, program design and administrative services and welcomes the opportunity to The program is designed for individuals who are cur- foster public understanding on social, business, artistic rently w o r k i n g i n special education, as a personal care and technological issues. attendant, or i n family day care who wish professional upgrading, and for those w h o are preparing themselves to work as a S E T A . A n admission interview with program faculty is required. Courses i n the S E T A program are offered through parttime study i n the evening and on weekends. Contract Services Contract Services provides career development and training opportunities for organizations, businesses and individuals using the wide range and high level o f educational resources available through Capilano C o l lege. This is flexible and cost-effective training provided Continuing 278 Education and Contract Services Index A ACADEMIC PERFORMANCE 32 ACADEMIC POLICIES 29 ACADEMIC SCHEDULE 13 ACADEMIC STUDIES/UNIVERSITY TRANSFER 69 ACCELERATED BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION DIPLOMA 206 ACCESS TO INFORMATION (Freedom of Information & Privacy Protection Act)... 30 ACCOUNTING ASSISTANT 185 ACCOUNTING SUPPORT 185 ACHIEVEMENT RESOURCE CENTRE (ARC) 36,54 ADMINISTRATION 10 ADMINISTRATIVE ASSISTANT 186 ADMISSION 14 ADULT BASIC EDUCATION 53,55 ADULT SPECIAL EDUCATION 60 ADVANCED BUSINESS DIPLOMA 203 ADVANCED PLACEMENT 16 ADVISING CENTRE & HOTLINE 36 ALTERNATIVE CAREER TRAINING .... 60 ANTHROPOLOGY 74 APPEAL OF GRADES 31 APPLIED BUSINESS TECHNOLOGY .. 184 APPLIED INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY 195 ART HISTORY 94 ART INSTITUTE 82,87 ARTS AND CRAFTS 92 ASIA PACIFIC MANAGEMENT CO-OP 49,267 ASSOCIATE DEGREES 25 ATHLETICS & RECREATION 37 ATTENDANCE 29 AUDIO-VISUAL SERVICES 42 AUDIT STATUS 29,31 AWARDS - See Financial Aid 23 B BOOKSTORE B.C. STUDENT ASSISTANCE BIOLOGY BURSARIES BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION ACCELERATED COMPUTER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT...... ACCELERATED DIPLOMA PROGRAMS ADVANCED DIPLOMA BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION DEGREE BUSINESS COMPUTING CO-OP CO-OP EDUCATION DIPLOMA DIPLOMA PROGRAMS EVENING CERTIFICATE INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS PROGRAM LOCAL GOVERNMENT ADMIN. PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATE NETWORK SPECIALIST CERTIFICATE 38 23 96 24 199 207 206 203 201 204 202 205 209 211 210 211 PROFESSIONAL ACCOUNTING TRANSFER PACKAGE RETAIL MARKETING CO-OP CERTIFICATE BUSINESS COMMUNICATIONS BUSINESS FUNDAMENTALS 208 208 225 187 c CAFETERIA 41 CAMPUS MAPS 5 CANADIAN STUDIES SPECIALTY 72 CANASEAN 49 "CAP CORNER" - See Student Store 44 CAPILANO COLLEGE FOUNDATION .. 24 CAPILANO COURIER 43 CAPILANO REVIEW 38 CAPILANO STUDENTS' UNION 44 CAR POOL 43 CAREER RESOURCE CENTRE 39 CAREER/VOCATIONAL PROGRAMS General Information 183 CERTIFICATES AND DIPLOMAS 25 CHANGING REGISTRATION STATUS 17 CHEATING & PLAGIARISM POLICY.... 34 CHEMISTRY 100 CHILD CARE 38 CHINESE 102 COLLEGE BOARD 8 COMMERCE 103 COMMERCIAL ANIMATION 222 COMMUNICATIONS 225 COMMUNITY MUSIC SCHOOL 277 COMPUTER SYSTEM, MISUSE POLICY 34 COMPUTING SCIENCE 105 CONTINUING EDUCATION 277 CONTRACT SERVICES 277 COOPERATIVE EDUCATION 39,183 COPYRIGHT POLICY 34 COUNSELLING 38 COURSE INFORMATION 29,69 CREDIT-FREE COURSES - See Continuing Education 277 CRIMINOLOGY 108 D DAYCARE - See Child Care DEAN'S LIST DIPLOMA AND CERTIFICATE REQUIREMENTS DISABILITY SUPPORT SERVICES DISTANCE EDUCATION DROPPING COURSES 38 23 25 39 40 17 E EARLY CHILDHOOD CARE & EDUCATION ECONOMICS EDUCATION COUNCIL ELDERCOLLEGE EMPLOYMENT CENTRE FOR STUDENTS 228 109 9 277 40 ENGINEERING Ill ENGLISH 114 ENGLISH AS A SECOND LANGUAGE 62 ENGLISH DIAGNOSTIC TEST (EDT) .... 70 ENGLISH LANGUAGE ASSESSMENT (ELA) TEST 15,47 ENGLISH LANGUAGE REQUIREMENTS 15,62,70 ENGLISH PLACEMENT TEST 15,17 ENROLMENT STATUS 29 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE 118,270 EQUIVALENCE, EXEMPTION, SUBSTITUTION, TRANSFER CREDIT 29 ETHNIC & CROSS CULTURAL RELATIONS PROGRAM 72 EXAMINATION PERIOD 30 F FACULTY - See specific programs/courses FEES 21 FILM AND TELEVISION STUDIES 278 FINANCIAL AID & AWARDS 23 FINANCIAL AID OFFICE 23 FIRST AID AND HEALTH 41 FIRST NATIONS STUDENT SERVICES 41 FISHERIES SCIENCE 234 FITNESS CENTRE 37 FOOD & BEVERAGE SERVICE 41 FREEDOM OF INFORMATION AND PRIVACY PROTECTION ACT 30 FRENCH 120 G GEOGRAPHY 122 GEOLOGY 124 GERMAN 125 GRADE POINT AVERAGE 31 GRADES 31 GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS 25 GRAPHIC DESIGN & ILLUSTRATION .. 76 H HANDICAPPED STUDENT SERVICES See Disability Support Services 39 HEALTH AND HUMAN SERVICES PROGRAMS 236 HEALTH SERVICES & FIRST AID 41 HIGH SCHOOL EQUIVALENCY - See Adult Basic Education 53,55 HISTORY 126 HOLIDAYS IN 1997/98 .'. 13 HOME SUPPORT ATTENDANT 241 HORTICULTURE 243 HUMAN KINETICS 128 HUMANITIES DIVISION 69 I IELTS 15,47 INFOTEC - See Applied Information Technology 195 INSTRUCTIONAL SKILLS IN ARTS AND CRAFTS 92 Index 281 INTERNATIONAL BACCALAUREATE 16 INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS PROGRAM 211 INTERNATIONAL EDUCATION 47 INTERNATIONAL PROGRAMS AND PROJECTS 49 INTERNATIONAL STUDENT ADVISOR 48 INTERNATIONAL STUDENT COUNSELLOR 48 INTERNATIONAL STUDENTS 47 J JAPANESE JAZZ STUDIES 129 130 K KINESIOLOGY KNOWLEDGE NETWORK 143 40 L LABOUR STUDIES 144 LANDSCAPE HORTICULTURE 243 LEGAL ASSISTANT 245 LEGAL SECRETARIAL 190 LIBRARY North Vancouver, Sechelt, Squamish 41 LINGUISTICS 149 LOANS - See Financial Aid 23 LOCAL GOVERNMENT ADMINISTRATION PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATE 210 LOST AND FOUND 43 M MATHEMATICS AND STATISTICS 150 MATH LEARNING CENTRE 36,71 MATH PLACEMENT TEST 17,71 MEDIA PRODUCTION SERVICES 42 MEDIA RESOURCES 250 MEDICAL OFFICE ASSISTANT 192 MERIT LIST 24 MISSION AND VALUES 7 MUSIC THERAPY, BACHELOR OF 254 MUSIC TRANSFER, BACHELOR OF ... 155 N NEWSPAPER, STUDENT NON-CREDIT PROGRAMS 43 277 0 OFFICE ASSISTANT E.S.L OFFICE OF THE REGISTRAR OPEN COLLEGE/UNIVERSITY OPEN LEARNING AGENCY 187 43 40 40 OUTDOOR RECREATION MANAGEMENT Index 282 258 P T PARKING 43 PEER SUPPORT CENTRE 39 PERSONAL CARE ATTENDANT Working for Persons with Disabilities 238 PHILOSOPHY 161 PHYSICS 164 PLAGIARISM AND CHEATING POLICY 34 POLICIES AND PROCEDURES 29 POLITICAL STUDIES 166 POST-GRADUATE PROGRAMS 267 PREPARATORY PROGRAMS 53 PROFESSIONAL ACCOUNTING TRANSFER PACKAGE 208 PSYCHOLOGY 168 PURE AND APPLIED SCIENCE DIVISION 69,73 TEXTILE ARTS THAI THEATRE TOEFL TOURISM MANAGEMENT CO-OP TOWING TRANSFER CREDIT TRANSER TO AND FROM OTHER INSTITUTIONS: Academic Career TUITION - See Fees 69 183 21 U UNIVERSITY TRANSFER/ACADEMIC PROGRAMS 69 v R READMISSION RECREATION REFUND OF FEES REGISTRAR'S OFFICE REGISTRATION REPEATING A COURSE RESIDENT CARE ATTENDANT RETAIL MARKETING CO-OP 88 173 174 15,47 261 43 15,29 15 37 17 43 17 32 236 208 s SCHOLASTIC AWARDS 23 SCIENCE: General Information 73 SECURITY (Tel: 984-1763) 43 SELF STUDY COURSES 71 SEXUAL HARASSMENT ADVISOR 43 SEXUAL HARASSMENT POLICY 34 SOCIAL SCIENCES DIVISION 69 SOCIOLOGY 170 SPANISH 172 SPECIAL EDUCATION TEACHER ASSISTANT (SETA) 278 SPEECH ASSISTED READING AND WRITING (SARAW) 66 SPORTS - See Athletics 37 SPORTSPLEX AND FITNESS CENTRE . 37 STREAMKEEPERS TRAINING 235 STUDENT CONDUCT POLICY 33 STUDENT EMPLOYMENT 40 STUDENT LOANS 23 STUDENT NEWSPAPER 43 STUDENT RECORDS 30 STUDENT RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES 35 STUDENT SERVICES 36 STUDENT STORE 44 STUDENT UNION 44 STUDIO ART 82 SUMMER SCHOOL 273 VISUAL AND PERFORMING ARTS DIVISION 69 w WEB SITE: www.capcollege.bc.ca WITHDRAWING FROM A COURSE 17 WOMEN'S STUDIES 179 WRITING ACROSS THE CURRICULUM 71 WRITING CENTRE 36,70,114 Notes 283 Notes 284 285 Notes 286 Continuing q £ Contract Education Services at Capilano College Providing Educational Opportunities for the Community and Beyond Continuing Education: Filnr & Television Studies / Community Music School Program Brochures Seasonal Educational Travel Eldercollege Are Available & Calendars Upon Request Special Education Teacher Assistant plus courses in Art, Computers, Business, Communications, Languages, as well as seasonal Sports and Kids Activity Camps. Contract Services We offer a variety of training options that include the following: • Commercial River Rafting Guide Exam • Forestry Crew Training • Career Assessments for Individuals and Employers • Training Programs such as Options: The Career Development and Exploration Program, The Entrepreneurial Community Employment Access Program, The Training Program and others. Qg CM Capilano College Program, Hospitality/ESL Please phone (604) 984-4901 or fax (604)983-7545 Capila Colle www.capcollege.be NORTH VANCOUVER CAMPUS AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICES 2055 Purcell Way North Vancouver, BC Canada V7J 3H5 SECHELT CAMPUS SQUAMISH CAMPUS 5627 Inlet Avenue PO Box 1609 Sechelt, British Columbia Canada VON 3A0 1150 Carson Place PO Box 1538 Squamish, British Columbia Canada VON 3G0